Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS VOLUME 50 1948 The New England Botanical Club, Jne. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. — 000га JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. January, 1948. No. 589 CONTENTS: Braya in boreal eastern America. Ernst C. Abbe. .............. 1 Another aggressive Hawkweed. М. L. Fernald. ................ 15 The new Washington-Baltimore Checklist (Review). M.L.F... 15 Red-fruited Form of Podophyllum peltatum. Marcel Raymond. 18 Notes on Minnesota Plant-life. Olga Lakela. .................. 19 Asplenium montanum in south-central Massachusetts. Ud К ваше ору. eee rrr ENS RIS a 20 The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. —4 monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray's Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St. Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical M Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. RHODORA INDEX; REQUEST FOR CORRECTIONS.—A cumulative in- dex to the first fifty volumes of Rhodora is being prepared. Any user of RHopora who has noted errors in the indices to the various volumes will greatly aid in the enterprise by sending the correc- tions to the EDITORS. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ill. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932 $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora Plate 1088 Races of Braya Humiuis, X 25 IRhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. January, 1948. No. 589. BRAYA IN BOREAL EASTERN AMERICA! Ernst C. ABBE (Plates 1088—1090) The genus Braya is based on a species of the Carinthian Alps, B. alpina Sternberg and Hoppe? A number of species have since been recognized in various parts of the world, the first summary treatment for North America being that by Hooker. No recent treatment of the genus in boreal eastern America has been at- tempted. Therefore the writer has undertaken this as best he could without the benefit of the European types. It is expected that a careful checking of the type of at least Braya glabella may lead to modifications of nomenclature. Individuals within the species of Braya are able to survive and reproduce under the most adverse circumstances. There follows upon this a familiar but nevertheless confusing intraspecific mor- phological variability, not only in the vegetative structures but 1 Contributions from the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota, No. VI. The materials presented jn this paper were largely gathered during the writer's tenure of a John Simon Guggenheim Foundation Fellowship, 1941—42, at the Gray Herbarium, Harvard University. In the completion of chis paper, support has been provided by the Graduate School, University of Minnesota, which has granted the writer a Faculty Summer Research Appointment, 1947. The writer is indebted to the Curators of the following herbaria for the loan of specimens in their care: Gray Herbarium, Harvard University (G); U. 8. National Herbarium (N); Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences (P); Herbarium of the Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh (D); National Herbarium of Canada (O); Herbarium of the College of Agriculture, Cornell University (C); Herbarium of the New York Botanical Garden (B); Herbarium of the University of Minnesota (M). The letter after each of the above will be used in identifying specimens cited from the collections of these institutions. ? Denkschr. Bot. Ges. Regensburg 1: 65-75. 1815. 3 W. J. Hooker, Flora Boreali-Americana, vol. 1, 65-66. 1840. 2 Rhodora [JANUARY eveninthesiliques. Within a single collection of a foliose species, such as B. linearis Rouy of Scandinavia and Greenland, one will find well-developed individuals with leafy stems, as well as indi- viduals which are so reduced as to be scapose; nevertheless all are flowering and fruiting. Depauperate individuals may be identi- fiable if in the fruiting stage, but if they are in flower they present the greatest difficulty. Leaf-characters in reduced individuals are also misleading since the leaves may be practically linear and entire, whereas under more favorable circumstances leaves in the same species will be characteristically oblanceolate and with sev- eral evident teeth on each margin. It is obvious then, that de- pauperate plants wholly in flower will be difficult or impossible to place satisfactorily unless they are associated with fruiting plants from the same clone. А detailed description of variability within a single limited population as observed at Richmond Gulf is given below under В. purpurascens. | Ккү то BRAYA IN BOREAL EASTERN AMERICA (Note: the statements below apply only to well-developed plants) 1. Stems foliose’, the stem-leaves sometimes with axillary tufts of leaves; basal leaves and bracts not infrequently with several teeth 2. Sepals caducous; fruiting branches arising from axis of the year; usually more than 10 seeds on one side of the dis- sepiment; mature siliques (from middle of the inflores- cence) usually 15 mm. or more long and 0.7—1.0 mm. wide; fruiting inflorescence loose; plants with several stems which may be arcuate-ascending................ 1. В. humilis 2. Sepals persistent; fruiting branches never arising from axis of the year; usually fewer than 10 seeds on one side of the dissepiment; mature siliques (from middle of the inflor- escence) usually less than 15 mm. long and 1-1.4 mm. wide; fruiting inflorescence tending to be congested above; stems егесф............................. .....2. B. linearis 1. Stems scapose, the scapes occasionally with foliose bracts but then with a flower or fruit in the axil of each; siliques usually more than 1.4 mm. wide, but if narrower then less than 6 mm. long; the basal leaves and bracts (if present) usually entire, rarely with one or two teeth 3. Siliques ovate-elliptie to elliptie-oblong, torulose when elongate, seeds in two гО%8...................... 3. B. purpurascens 3. Siliques lance-subulate, not torulose, the few seeds crowded into one row 4. Petals 4-5 mm. long and 1.5-2 mm. wide, the siliques glabrous; limb of the petal bright white, claw blue- violet... ... lee RR e 4. B. Готуй 4. Petals 3-4 mm. long and 1-1.4 mm. wide, the siliques hirtellous; petals uniformly lilac to pink, fading to НИНЕН 5. В. Fernaldit 4 Depauperate individuals may be scapose, but can sometimes be recognized as belonging to this group by their narrow siliques (1.4 mm. or less). 1948] Abbe,—Braya in boreal eastern America 3 1. Braya numis (С. A. Meyer) В. L. Robinson in Gray, Synopt. Flora N. A., 1, pt. 1, 141 (1895). Sisymbrium humile С. A. Meyer in Ledeb. Ic. pl. ross. 2: 16 (1830). Torularia humilis (C. A. Meyer) O. E. Schulz in Limpricht, Fedde Rep. Beih. 12: 390 (1922). A notable series of isolated occurrences characterize B. humilis, especially in eastern North America. There is an East Greenland population (Plate 1089, fig. 1) quite separate from a much-re- stricted West Greenland occurrence (Plate 1088,fig.3). No speci- mens from the mainland of the Labrador peninsula (which is, of course, known primarily from coastal exploration) have come to the writer's attention. In the Gulf of St. Lawrence it appears again on Anticosti Island (Plate 1088, fig. 4), and in one area (Table Mt.) in Newfoundland (Plate 1088, fig. 5). Тһе southern- most occurrence is on Willoughby Mountain in Vermont (Plate 1088, fig. 1). Moving westward, there are stations on the west and south of James Bay and on the near-by southern shore of Hudson Bay (Plate 1088, fig. 2). There is a major gap between these eastern occurrences and the stations in or near the Rocky Mountains. To the north there are scattered records from Fort Simpson and northward, and in Alaska. 'To what extent the major areas in the west are natural can be determined only after more thorough collecting has been done. However there has been sufficient collecting on the coasts of Greenland, and of the Labrador peninsula, about the Gulf of St. Lawrence and through- out New England to make it reasonably certain that the popula- tions there are notably restricted. In studying the variation within this species a number of char- acters were checked on some 130 sheets of specimens. These characters were habit, margins of basal leaves, pubescence of the silique, nature of the stigma, and the dimensions of the style, of the body of the silique, of the pedicel and of the petals and sepals. It is evident from the key which follows and from the descriptions for each of the geographic races that there is overlapping of all characters to such an extent that it would be unjustifiable to propose them as varieties or perhaps even as forms. "They are treated therefore as numbered races, even though their distribu- tion is disjunct. The following key summarizes the average set of characters about which each of these geographie races varies. 4 Rhodora [JANUARY THE GEOGRAPHICAL RACES OF B. HUMILIS IN EASTERN NORTH AMERICA 1. Styles of mature fruits short (0.2-0.7, aver. 0.3-0.4, mm. long); stigma in fruit not capitate; siliques glabrescent to moder- ately pubescent, the silique from 0.9-1.2 (aver. 1.0) mm. іде. eee eee ees Race 1 (East Greenland) 1. Styles of mature fruits long (0.3-1.2, aver. 0.7-1.0 mm.) 2. Pedicels of lowermost fruits 2.0-9.0 mm. long 3. Siliques moderately pubescent to glabrescent, stigmas moderately capitate or not capitate 4. Pedicels 3-6 (aver. 4.3) mm. long, siliques 0.6-0.7 mm. {меК......................... Race 6 (southern Hudson Bay) 4. Pedicels 2-4 (aver. 2.7) mm. long, siliques 0.7-1.0 mm. thick... liliis esses Race 3 (Anticosti Island) 3. Siliques glabrescent, stigmas markedly to moderately capitate 5. Siliques 0.7-0.8 (aver. 0.7) mm. thick; habit moderate- ly erect (rarely strict); petals (dry) 3.2-4.2 (aver. 3.6) mm. long; basal leaves mostly deeply toothed Race 5 (New England) 5. Siliques 0.8-1.0 (aver. 0.9) mm. thick; habit strict (rarely moderately erect); petals (dry) 2.6-3.6 (aver. 3.2) mm. long................. Race 2 (West Greenland) 2. Pedicels of lowermost fruits 1-2 (aver. 1.6) mm. long, stigmas not capitate, plants markedly dwarfed Race 4 (Newfoundland) Race 1. Plants moderately erect. Fruit relatively thick, 9-16.5 mm. long, 0.9-1.2 mm. wide, glabrescent to moderately pubescent; style short (0.2-0.5 mm.), not capitate; pedicel of lowermost fruit 2-5 mm. long. Petals (dry) 3-4.2 mm. long, 1.2-2.0 mm. wide. Sepals (dry) 2.0-3.4 mm. long, 1.0-1.4 mm. wide. East Greenland. PraTrE 1089, Еа. 1.—EAsT GREEN- LAND: dry '*Fjaeldmark", northwest coast of Clavering Island, 74° 25' N, 24/7, 1929, С. Seidenfaden 84 (B); south side of Jordan hill, 74° 07’ N, 27/7, 1930, Seidenfaden 799A (B); dry “Fjaeld- mark", Stronberg Penin., Geolog Fjord, 73? 48' N, 18/8, 1929, Seidenfaden 364 (B); head of Franz Joseph Fjord, 73? 10’ N, 27. VIII. 1929, Seidenfaden 523b (О); “Fjaeldmark”, Suess Land, Kempe Fjord, 72? 53’ N, 20/8, 1929, Seidenfaden 462 (B). Race 2. Plants strict, or sometimes moderately erect. Fruit moderately thick (12-17 mm. long, 0.8-1.0 mm. wide), glabrescent; style fairly long (0.6-1.0 mm.), markedly capitate; pedicel of lowermost fruit 3-5 mm. long. Petals (dry) 2.6-3.6 mm. long, 1.0-1.6 mm. wide. Sepals (dry) 2.0-2.6 mm. long, 0.9-1.4 mm. wide. West Greenland. PLATE 1088, Fic. 3.— West GREENLAND: Itivdleq-Fjord, Qingua, 66° 29’ N., Jul. 6, 1926, M. P. Porsild, s. n. (б, N, О); same locality, 4.8. 1914, M. P. & A. E. Porsild, s. n. (G, N, O, M). Rack 3. Plants moderately erect or sometimes strict, tall. Fruit long (13-23 mm. long, 0.7-1.0 mm. wide), moderately pubescent; style variable in length (0.4—1.2 mm.), stigma mod- erately capitate to not capitate; pedicel of lowermost fruit short 1948] Abbe,—Braya in boreal eastern America 5 (2-4 mm.). Petals (dry) 3.2-4.0 mm. long, 1.2-1.8 mm. wide. Sepals (dry) 2.0-2.9 mm. long, 1.0-1.4 mm. wide. Anticosti Island. PLATE 1088, Ес. 4—QueEBEc: gravelly bed of Jupiter River, Anticosti, Aug. 18, 1883, Macoun 12 (G); along rivers and on gravel, Jupiter River, Anticosti, Aug. 18, 1883, Macoun (335.113) 2086 (O); Anticosti, P. Q., Aug. 23, 1883, Macoun s. n. (N); platiéres de l'embouchure, Rivière Jupiter, Anticosti, Aug. 11, 1926, Marie-Victorin & Rolland-Germain 24,849 (G, N, P, О); sur les platiéres, Riviére du Brick, Anticosti, Jul. 23, 1927, Marie-Victorin & Rolland-Germain 27203 (б, N, P, О). Race 4. Plants moderately erect, or sometimes strict, very short. Fruit very short (12-14.5 mm. long, 0.8-0.9 mm. wide), moderately pubescent; style fairly long (0.6-1.0 mm.) and not capitate; pedicel of lowermost fruit very short (1.0-2.0 mm. long). Petals (dry) 3.0-4.0 mm. long, 0.8-1.5 mm. wide. Sepals (dry) 1.8-2.4 mm. long, 0.8-1.2 mm. wide. Newfound- land. Prate 1088, Fic. 5.—NEWFOUNDLAND: dry exposed ledges and shingle on the limestone tableland, altitude 200—300 m., Table Mountain, region of Port à Port Bay, July 16 & 17, 1914, M. L. Fernald & H. St. John 10837 (G, N, B, C). Race 5. Plants moderately erect or sometimes strict. Fruit long and narrow (14-20 mm. long, 0.7-0.8 mm. wide), glabres- cent; style long (0.7-1.2 mm.), stigma moderately capitate; pedicel of lowermost fruit long (3-7 mm.). Petals (dry) 3.2-4.2 mm. long, 1.0-1.6 mm. wide. Sepals (dry) 2-2.8 mm. long, 0.8— 1.4 mm. wide. Vermont. PLATE 1088, Fra. 1.—B. humilis var. leiocarpa (Trautv.) Fernald, Rhodora 39: 276 (1937).—VER- MONT: gravelly shelves of cliffs, Bald Mt., Westmore, Aug. 8, 1929, A. S. Pease 21055 (G); Willoughby Mt., 1866, H. Mann, s. n. (б); Willoughby Mt., no date, Н. Mann, s. n. (C); Willough- by Mt., Jul. 19, 1880, C. G. Pringle, s. n. (G, N, B); moist alpine cliffs, Willoughby Mt., Westmore, VII—2—1894, A. J. Grout & W. W. Eggleston, s. n. (G, N, B, P, C). ВАСЕ 6. Plants moderately erect to strict. Fruit long and narrow (15.5-18.0 mm. long, 0.6-0.7 mm. wide), moderately pubescent; style long (0.7-1.2 mm.), moderately capitate to not capitate; pedicel of lowermost fruit 3-6.0 mm. long. Petals (dry) 3.0-5.0 mm. long, 1.0-2.4 mm. wide. Sepals (dry) 2.2-3.4 mm. long, 0.8-1.4 mm. wide. Southern Hudson Bay and James Bay. PrarE 1088, Fra. 2.—ОзхтАвто: sandy river banks, Moose Factory, Jul. 3, 1929, A. E. Porsild 4636 (О); clearing, N. E. end of Moose Island, Moose River, Jul. 3, 1929, D. Potter 541 (G); Moose Island, 214 mi. E. of Moosonee, Moose River, 7/9/35, M. T. Doutt 2239 (D); river bank, opposite Allen Island, Abitibi River, June 30, 1929, D. Potter 542 (G); 60 miles up Kapiscow R., w. coast of James Bay, July 1902, W. J. Wilson 54009 (О); mouth of Equam R., James Bay, July 9, 1901, D. B. Dowling 6 Rhodora [JANUARY 34,555 (O); gravelly banks, Severn River, Keewatin, July 29, 1886, J. M. Macoun (С s. n., О no. 2087). 2. B. LINEARIS Rouy, Шизїт. Pl. Eur. Rar. 9, р. 84; Rev. Bot. Syst. Geog. Bot. 1, p. 76 (1903).—B. alpina of authors, not Sternberg and Hoppe. B. glabella of authors, probably not Richardson. B. purpurascens of authors, not (R. Brown) Bunge.—EasrT GREENLAND: dry soil, south side of Jordan hill, 74° 07' N., 27/7, 1930, G. Seidenfaden 799-B (B); “Fjaeldmark’’, on the south coast of Andree Land, 73? 18' N., 19. VIII. 1929, Seidenfaden 434b (О, B); sandy slopes, head of Fr. Joseph Fjord, 73° 11’ N, 27/8, 1929, Seidenfaden 523 (B); Ella Island, Cape Oswald, 72° 53’ N, Thorv. Sørensen, 3577a (О). WEST GREEN- LAND: Ingnerit Fjord, Magdláq, 12-13 Jul., 1929, 71? 7' N, M. P. & R.T. Porsild, s. n. (N, G); Ingnerit Fjord, Tasiussaq, 71° 3’ N, 13 Jul. 1929, M. P. & R. T. Porsild, s. n. (G). Nordhagen has drawn attention to Schulz's conclusion’ that the Greenland material which has often passed as B. glabella, is B. linearis. Nordhagen’s discussion’, being in Norwegian, is not readily accessible and is worthy of presentation in translation. “Another controversial species is Braya linearis Rouy. The Scandi- navian plant was originally called B. alpina Sternb. & Hoppe; but, as shown by several investigators, the middle European plant of this name is distinctly different from the Scandinavian. Rouy described the latter as В. linearis, nova species. In the meantime Gelert in 1898 had already asserted that the Scandinavian species was identical with an Arctic- American species, В. glabella Richards., of which there are specimens in British herbaria. In 1921 C. Alm introduced this name in Scandinavian literature. But in 1924 the German investigator Schulz, who has treated Braya for “Das Pflanzenreich", maintained that he could show that the name B. linearis must be retained because the Scandinavian species is clearly different from B. glabella Richards.; the latter, according to Schulz, is more robust and has much wider fruits. According to Schulz typical B. linearis occurs in addition to Norway only in Sweden and east Greenland. In east Greenland the problem is complicated by the fact that the plant occurs with B. humilis (C. A. Mey.) Robins. According to younger Danish botanists (ef. the works of Seidenfaden, Sørensen and Gelting), who operate with the name B. glabella Richards., it forms a mixed popula- 5 Oblast. Jakutsk: ad flumen Lena, Kumach-Sur, 31/7, 1898, Н. Nilsson-Ehle s. n. (G, B), from Siberia, determined in the N. Y. Bot. Gard. material as Braya alpina Sternb. et Hoppe and as B. linearis Rouy ın the Gray Herb. This material clearly is closely related to B. linearis, but occasionally has tufts of leaves in the axils of the lower leaves. This Siberian relative of B. linearis needs further study which may throw some light on Alaskan species. $ O, E. Schulz, Das Pflanzenreicb, IV. 105, Cruciferae-Sisymbrieae, p. 230 (1924). т К. Nordhagen, Om Arenaria humifusa Wg, og dens betydning for utforskningen av Skandinavias eldste floraelement, Bergens Mus. Årbok 1935, Naturvidsk. rekke Nr. 1, pp. 52, 53 (1935). Rhodora Plate 1089 tU LLL UU s з yr | 4 E d i : e + BRAYA HUMILIS, X 2%, FIG. 1 B. GLABELLA, X 2$, FIG. 2 В. purpurascens, X 25, FIGS. 3-5d 1948] Abbe,—Braya in boreal eastern America d tion together with B. humilis, certainly of hybrid origin (‘‘Braya glabella- humus) ex Another noteworthy report by Sørensen (p. 39) is that Braya purpur- ascens hybridizes with the complex “Вгауа glabella-humilis". Hybrids are reported in this case to be sterile or weakly fruitful. In Gelting (1934, р. 57) one finds the following remarkable passage: “ . . . judging from the Greenland material, B. glabella should be considered a variety of that species (Braya purpurascens)." In Norway in the meantime B. purpurascens and B. linearis are com- pletely different. I place myself sceptically against the assertion that B. purpurascens, B. glabella (= В. linearis with Schulz) and Torularia [Braya] humilis form a single series of forms in Greenland without distinct limits. It occurs to me that the chapter Braya-Torularia in Greenland is very obscure. All that can be said with certainty is the following: 1. In Norway two distinct species of Braya occur, namely B. purpurascens (Magerøya) and B. linearis Rouy, which also occurs in northern Sweden (see fig. 22). 2. Neither of these is identical with B. alpina of the east Alps. 3. The probabilities are that “B. glabella Richards." is not identical with the Scandinavian species B. linearis Rouy. 4. According to Schulz, B. linearis also occurs in East Greenland. In the meantime this question cannot be answered until the entire Greenland Braya-Torularia material is subjected to a critical and satisfying investigation. In the following I designate the Seandinavian bicentric Braya as B. linearis Rouy, and since this according to Schulz also occurs in East Greenland, we are obviously faced with a west-arctic amphi-Atlantic species: оние cp Nordhagen's viewpoint concerning B. linearis is not generally accepted? but is, in the opinion of the writer, the most tenable until the identity of B. glabella is clearly established through a careful study of the type. B. glabella Richardson, Bot. App., Franklin’s Narr. Jour. Arctic Sea, ed. 1, p. 743 (1823); ibid., ed. 2, p. 753 (1823); W. J. Hooker, Flor. Bor. Am. 1: 65 (1830). B. alpina of Scandinavian and other authors, not Sternberg and Hoppe. B. linearis of Scandinavian and other authors, not Rouy.—243 Braya ? gla- bella [in Richardson’s hand] Richardson's Arctic Plants [in an unidentified hand] (G). PrATE 1089, Fra. 2. The type locality is given by Richardson (loc. cit.) as “Оп the Copper Mountains". This is the only authentic specimen which the writer has seen. It is probably an isotype since the number corresponds to the numbering of the species in ed. 1 of Franklin's Narrative and the number and name are written in Richardson's hand. $ cf., for example, Т. W. Bócher, Biological distributional types in the flora of Greenland. Medd. Grgnl. 106; No. 2, p. 101 (1938). 8 Rhodora [JANUARY The specimen is a rather starved, flowering individual, having five flowers which terminate a rather slender bractless scape. The nearly glabrous, basal leaves are linear, one of them with a single tooth half-way to the apex. "The scape is puberulent with appressed, bifurcate hairs and occasional short, simple hairs. The sepals of the flowers are oblong-ovate, ca. 2.2 x 1.0 mm., glabrous or with an occasional simple hair, green with a trans- lucent margin. The petals (dried) are creamy-white and tinged with purple at the base, the narrow obtuse limb tapering gradu- ally into the claw, the dimensions ca. 1 х З mm. The plant is not in fruit. The ovary in the older flowers is elliptic-oblong, its surface very sparsely supplied with appressed bifurcate hairs. The style is distinct and from 0.5-0.7 mm. long, and barely capi- tate at this stage of development. Richardson had sufficient material before him to supply the following information concern- ing fruiting material * . . . racemo fructifero elongato", and "siliquae immaturae suberectae calyce persistente triplo longi- ores, toruiosae [sic], stylo coronatae". W. J. Hooker, with the opportunity to study Richardson's material from both the first and second Franklin Expeditions, characterizes (loc. cit.) В. glabella as follows "foliis glabris [al- though Richardson (loc. cit.) says “glabriuscula’’], scapo plerum- que folioso, racemis fructiferis laxis elongatis". Hooker goes on to comment ‘Excellent specimens of this, brought home by Dr. Richardson from the Second Arctic Land Expedition, quite con- firm the distinguishing characters given by that gentleman in his Botanieal Appendix. He adds, in the margin of his own copy, from notes taken on the spot, that the 'scape is sometimes hairy, with bifurcated pubescence, and that the flowers are white, with a slight and partial tinge of purple'." Furthermore Hooker with- out hesitation keeps B. glabella in the genus Braya which he de- scribes in part (loc. cit.) as having “Siliqua brevis, teres, torulosa stylo terminata, valvis subsemicylindraceis.”’ Undoubtedly this species, as the first described Braya from the North American continent, is greatly in need of clarification. Its description in the first edition of Franklin's Journal obviously antedates R. Brown's Chloris Melvilliana of the same year (1823) because Brown refers to Richardson's published record of the same year. In the opinion of the writer B. glabella falls in the 1948] Abbe,—Braya in boreal eastern America 9 B. purpurascens complex more nearly than it does in the B. linearis group. Furthermore no material seen by the writer from the western Arctic resembles B. linearis, so that it seems unlikely that B. glabella will fall into that category. Also Richardson char- acterizes it in his original description (loc. cit.) as having “Ка- cemis elongatis . . . ", a character which certainly does not by any stretch of the imagination fit the inflorescence of B. linearis which is condensed even in fruit. There is no evidence against Braya glabella of Richardson being conspecific with B. purpurascens (R. Brown) Bunge. The chief difficulty is the lack of positive evidence concerning the nature of the mature siliques and of their arrangement on the scape. Should these support the possibility that the two are conspecific, then the name B. glabella would have to be substituted for B. purpurascens. 3. B. PURPURASCENS (R. Brown) Bunge in Ledeb. Flor. Ross. 1: 195 (1841). Platypetalum purpurascens R. Br., Chloris Melvill. [192] & [254] (1823); App. XI in Parry’s Voy. p. cclxvil & eceviii (1824). B. glabella of authors, perhaps of Richardson. B. Thorild-Wulfii Ostenfeld in Medd. Grgnl. 54: 176 (1923). B. purpurascens var. dubia Schulz, Pflzrch. IV. 105: pp. 235, 364 (1924); perhaps not Platypetalum dubium К. Br.—EAsr GREEN- LAND: Lille Suends, са. 76? 45’ N., 24 Jun. 1908, A. Lundager 1062 (O, det. as Braya Thorild-Wulffii Ostf. by Ostenfeld in 1924); same locality, 22 June 1908, Lundager 1056 (N, det. as B. Thorild-W ulffii Ostf. by Ostenfeld, Sept. '24); dry **Fjaeldmark", south coast of Hochstetter Foreland, 75° 08’ N, 24/6, 1930, К. Bøgvad 1080 (B); sand, northwest coast of Clavering Island, 74? 25' N, 24/7, 1929, G. Seidenfaden 82 (B, №); dry "Fjaeldmark", Gistis Valley, Musk-ox Fjord, 73? 34’ N, 14/8, 1930, Seidenfaden 1009 (N, B); sandy soil, Cape Elizabeth, Ella Island, 72° 54’ N, 17/8, 1930, Seidenfaden 1030 (B, O).—WestT GREENLAND: clayey, gravelly soil in shallow depression in rock, back of the Station, region of North Star Bay, 76? 30' N, June 21, 1914, W. E. Ekblaw 407 (G, N); common, from patch just east, back of trading station, region of North Star Bay, 76? 30' N, July 18, 1914, Ekblaw 408 (G); Ingnerit Fjord, Magdláq, 71? 7' N, 12-13 Jul. 1929, M. P. & В. T. Porsild s. n. (ЇЧ, б, О); Qáersuarssuk, 70° 44' N, 26/7. 1927, M. P. Porsild s. n. (N, О); Nügssuaq Halvg, Kugssinerssuaq, 70° 18’ N, 4 Jul. 1929, M. P. & R. T. Porsild s. п. (N, С, О). ELLESMERE IsLAND: Grant Land, 82° 27' N, July 1906, L. J. Wolf s. n. (B); muddy flat, Bache Peninsula, 79° 4' N, 76? 18' W, July 31, 1927, M. O. Malte 118 896 (O); in locis 10 Rhodora [JANUARY argillaceis, ad Barren Vallies, sinus Harbour Fjord, 76° 37’ N, 84° 25’ W, 28. vii. 1900, Н. G. Simmons 2388 (G, B); muddy flat, Craig Harbor, 76° 12’ N, 81° 20’ W, М. O. Malte 118 933 (О). NonrH Devon IsrANp: muddy flat, Dundas Harbour, 74° 33’ N, 82° 12’ W, Aug. 3, 1927, M. O. Malte 118930 (O, G); same locality, July 27-28, 1927, М. О. Malte 118884 (О); Dundas Harbour, Sept. 7, 1936, N. Polunin 779 (O); same data, Polunin 2510 (G); same data, Polunin 2515 (O). BAFFIN 1згАхр: Lake Harbour, 62° 94’ N, 69° 55’ W, Aug. 2, 1928, M. O. Malte 120294 (O, G); same locality, Aug. 30-31, 1934, N. Polunin 1121 (O); same locality, Aug. 27, 1936, Polunin 2327 (С); same locality, July 23, 1939, M. E. Oldenburg 124 (M); Arctic Bay, Sept. 8-11, 1936, Polunin 2524 (О). SOUTHAMPTON ISLAND: Southampton, 64° 15’ N,8 2° 50’ W, Aug. 15, 1928, M. О. Malte 120677 (С, О); H. B. Co. Post, South Bay, Aug. 22, 1936, Polunin 2275 in part (G). Coats IsLANDp: wet clay amongst limestone gravel, 62? 49' N, 81° 50' W, Sept. 19, 1930, A. E. Porsild 5904 (O). Nor- TINGHAM IsLAND (Hudson Strait): crevices of rocks, Aug. 26, 1884, R. Bell s. n. (N, G, апа, О as 471.192.2176). LABRADOR PENINSULA: Rama, Jul. 15-Aug. 20, 1894, A. Stecker 60 (B, N, С); dunes of coarse sand above beach, Joksut Inlet, Clark Harbor, 62° 12’ N, 64° 23' W, July 20 & 21, 1937, V. C. Wynne-Edwards 7172 (О); Wakeham Bay, 61? 40' N, 72? 5' W, July 30, 1928, M. О. Malte 120191 (С, О); moist limestone ledges, south side of Gulf Hazard, Richmond Gulf, 56? 10' N, 76? 45” W, Aug. 12, 1939, E. C. & L. B. Abbe 3819 (M). In working over the material cited above, the writer at first attempted to segregate as “typical” those specimens which most closely aecorded with Robert Brown's descriptions and Hooker's figures. Robert Brown originally described Platypetalum pur- purascens on the basis of material brought back from the first Parry Expedition (loc. cit. p. 192) and extended his concept of this species when the Ross material collected on the second Parry Expedition became available while he was completing the “Chloris Melvilliana" (loc. cit., p. 254). "The original description refers to the siliques as “ovales” and "glabriusculae," while the extension of his concept describes them as “у. ovali-oblongae, glabrae v. pilis raris brevibus simplicibus bifidisque conspersae". W. J. Hooker's familiar figures (loc. cit., vol. 2, tab. xxiii) illus- trate both phases very well. Much of the material collected in the lower Arctic is readily referred to this typical state of the species (for instance Ekblaw's no. 408, North Star Bay, Green- land; cf. Plate 1089, fig. 3), as has been pointed out by Polunin?, ? N. Polunin, Botany of the Canadian Eastern Arctic Pt. l, Pteridophyta and Spermatophyta. Nat. Mus. Canada, Bull. no. 92. 1940. p. 249. 1948] Abbe,—Braya in boreal eastern America 11 but gradually gives way to a depauperate state to the north or in more exposed areas. In its extreme form this depauperate phase has been described by Osentfeld as B. Thorild-Wulffii and is con- sidered by Seidenfaden and Sørensen!?, who have studied it in the field, as “а particularly well-founded species." The writer, how- ever, sees no support for this view, considering the extreme plas- ticity of this species and of its relatives. Thus it was found unrealistic to segregate the most depauperate phase of this species from the “typical” material. At the other extreme is the very robust series of plants from Southampton Island (Plate 1090, fig. 1) with elongate, oblong siliques, to which Polunin has referred (loc. cit.). These are in- deed strikingly unlike the great majority of specimens, but even judging by the limited number of plants which are to be found on any one sheet, they are occasionally associated with less ex- treme individuals. That this is indeed the case is illustrated by a suite of some 58 plants collected at an isolated station of limited extent at Richmond Gulf, P. Q., by Mrs. Abbe and the: writer (no. 3819). There is complete intergradation of the characters studied" in this population from a lower limit which falls well within the “typical” material originally described by R. Brown and illustrated by Hooker (represented in our illustrations by fig. 3, Pl. 1089) into the robust type of specimen from South- ampton Island to which Polunin has already called attention. Some of the variations in the Richmond Gulf population are illus- 10 С, Seidenfaden and T. Sørensen. The Vascular Plants of Northeast Greenland from 74° 30’ to 79° 00’ N. Lat. Medd. Grgnl. 101; 36 (1937). u It may not be amiss to give a description of this population because of its rather peculiar interest. Scapes range from 2.5 to 15 cm. in length and from slender to coarse; they are pubescent with either curly simple hairs or with bifurcate appressed hairs, or a mixture of the two. The form of rosette leaves ranges from strictly linear to narrowly oblanceolate or narrowly long-spatulate. Rarely a leaf may have a single tooth on the margin. The leaves may or may not be furnished with widely spaced simple hairs on the margins, and may or may not have tufts of simple hairs at their apices. The siliques may be crowded closely together on the fruiting scapes, or the lowermost siliques may be separated from the rest, or the siliques may be scattered generally along the length of the scape. The lowermost flower or silique may be in the axil of a foliose bract or not. The long-persistent sepals are oblong-obovate, ca. 2.5 x 1.2 mm., green or purple-green, with or without simple pubescence near the apex. Petals (dry) are creamy-white to tinged with purple, the obtuse to subretuse limb tapering gradually into the claw. Petals vary in length from 3 to 4 mm. and in width from 1 to 1.5 mm. The siliques vary in shape from rather short-elliptic (ca. 1.5 x 5 mm.) to long oblong-elliptic (ca. 2 x 12 mm.), tending to be somewhat torulose. The valves of the siliques are rather densely pubescent, being covered with either crisp simple hairs, or appressed bifurcate hairs. The style is distinct (from 0.3 to 1.0 mm. long), usually with an evident depressed capitate stigma. 12 Rhodora [JANUARY 9 trated in Plate 1089: Fig. 5a represents the phase with narrow leaves and oval silique; fig. 5b, the plant with the broader rosette leaf but the oval silique; fig. 5c, the broader leaf and elongate, ob- long silique; and finally fig. 5d, the narrow-leaved plant with the long oblong silique. In view of the variation which occurs within the Richmond Gulf population with reference to often-used characteristics, such as pubescence, it has not been thought advisable to recognize any of the variants which Schulz” and others have accepted. These include var. dubia (R. Br.) Schulz which is based on length of the style, f. leiocarpa Schulz and a densely pilose form erroneously referred to f. pilosa (Hook.) Schulz™, based on pubescence. An inadvertent transfer, f. longisiliquosa (Trautv.) Schulz, in synon.", which Trautvetter characterized in part as “siliquis lati- tudine sua fere quadruplo longioribus . . . ", and which has been adopted by some writers, cannot be accepted in the light of the dimensions of the Richmond Gulf material. In cónclusion, then, the writer recognizes no valid dividing lines in the material of B. purpurascens which he has seen and therefore can only propose that the name be used in the broad sense with- out qualification. 4. B. Lonci Fernald, Кнорока 28: 202 (1926). NEWFOUND- LAND, STRAITS OF BELLE ISLE: turfy or peaty pockets in lime- stone ledges, Sandy (or Poverty) Cove, Aug. 1, 1924, M. L. Fernald, B. Long & B. Н. Dunbar 26,723 (С); among loose rocks, limestone barrens, Sandy (or Poverty) Cove, Jul. 12, 1925, Fernald & L. Griscom 28,423 (G, C); dry, gravelly limestone barrens, Savage Point, Jul. 13, 1925, Fernald, K. M. Wiegand, et al. 28,425 (G, B, O, C); gravelly and peaty limestone barrens, Sandy (or Poverty) Cove, Jul. 25, 1925, Fernald, Long & F. A. Gilbert, Jr. 28,424 (G, Typr, B, C); crevices of dry limestone barrens, Yankee Point, Aug. 16, 1925, Fernald, Wiegand & Long 28,427 (G, C); dry gravelly and turfy limestone barrens, Savage Point, Fernald & Long 28,426 (G, C, B, O). 5. B. Fernaldii, sp. nov. Foliis rosulatis lineari-oblanceolatis 10-25 mm. longis, 0.5-2 mm. latis; racemo fructifero subcapitato- 1? О. E. Schulz. Pflanzenreich IV. 105 (1924), pp. 234 & 235. 13 A reduction by Schulz of Hooker's Braya pilosa but, judging from authentic ma- terial in the Gray Herbarium, at the National Museum of Canada, and at the N. Y. Botanical Garden, B. pilosa Hooker 1s wholly distinct from B. purpurascens so that Schulz's transfer must be considered as a lamentable error. u This is simply given as ‘‘f. longisiliquosa Trautv." by Schulz, but it was described by Trautvetter as a variety. 1948] Abbe,—Braya in boreal eastern America 18 elongato; pedicellis 1.5-3.0 mm. longis; petalis 3—4.2 mm. longis, 1-1.6 mm. latis, spathulato-oblanceolatis, roseis; antheris 0.4— 0.5 mm. longis; siliquis lanceolato-subulatis 5-7 mm. longis, 1.4-1.6 mm. latis, stylo 0.4-0.6 mm. longis, seminibus sub- biseriatis vel uniseriatis; seminibus 1.2 mm. longis, 0.6 mm. latis —NEWFOUNDLAND. Tyre in Herb. Gray (Wiegand, Griscom & Hotchkiss 28,434). PrATE 1090, Fic. 2.—B. americana (Hook.) Fern., as applied by Fernald, Кнорока 28: 203 (1926), exclusive of the plant of Alberta, not В. alpina, 8. americana Hook., Flor. Bor.-Am. 1: 65 (1830).—N EwrouNpLAND: gravelly limestone barrens one mile back of Savage Cove, Straits of Belle Isle, Jul. 24, 1925, M. L. Fernald & B. Long 28428 (G, C, O, B); open spots in limestone barrens near Ice Point, St. Barbe Bay, Jul. 14, 1925, К. M. Wiegand, F. A. Gilbert, Jr. & М. Hotchkiss 28429 (G, C); moist gravel of limestone barrens on the Highlands northeast of Big Brook, Straits of Belle Isle, Jul. 15, 1925, A. S. Pease & L. Griscom 28430 (G); gravelly and peaty limestone barrens back of Big Brook, Straits of Belle Isle, Jul. 15, 1925, Fernald & Long 28431 (G, C); clayey spots in dry limestone barrens, northern half of Burnt Cape, Pistolet Bay, Jul. 17, 1925, Fernald, Wiegand, et al. 28432 (G, C); boggy depressions in limestone barrens, Cape Norman, Pistolet Bay, Jul. 18, 1925, Wiegand, Griscom & Hotchkiss 28434 (G, түрк, C); dry rocky and gravelly limestone barrens, Cape Norman, Pistolet Bay, Jul. 18, 1925, Wiegand, Griscom & Hotchkiss 28433 (G, C); sandy and clayey spots in limestone gravel barrens, Boat Harbor, Str. of Belle Isle, Jul. 19, 1925, Fernald, Wiegand & Long 28435 (G, C); swale near mouth of brook, Watts Bight, Straits of Belle Isle, Jul. 19, 1925, Pease, Griscom, et al. 28436 (G, C); gravelly limestone barrens, Four-Mile Cove, Straits of Belle Isle, Jul. 20, 1925, Fernald, Wiegand & Long 28437 (G); damp clay pockets in limestone rock-barrens one mile back of Savage Cove, Straits of Belle Isle, Jul. 23, 1925, Fernald, Pease & Long 28438 (G); dry gravel of limestone barrens, southern half of Burnt Cape, Pistolet Bay, Aug. 5, 1925, Fernald & Long 28439 (G); dry gravel of limestone barrens, Cape Norman, Pistolet Bay, Aug. 13, 1925, Wiegand & Long 28440 (G, C). In 1926 Professor Fernald described B. Long? (vid. sup.) naming it for his good friend and long-time field-companion, Bayard Long. He also reported a similar but distinct species which he considered to be identical with Hooker's B. alpina, 8. americana. This name he raised to specific rank so that it there- by became B. americana (Hook.) Fern. After & survey of a considerable array of North American Braya it is clear to the writer that these two Newfoundland species 14 Rhodora [JANUARY with their lance-subulate siliques are distinctly unlike those col- lected from elsewhere on the continent. Any close relationship to Hooker’s plants collected by Drummond “among the Rocky Mountains, between lat. 52° and 57°” seems unlikely. Even if, as Professor Fernald has suggested (loc. cit.), Stewardson Brown’s no. 1457 of the Rocky Mountains should turn out to be conspecific with Drummond’s material, it is certainly not conspecific with the plant of Newfoundland which has passed as B. americana (Hook.) Fern. Stewardson Brown’s no. 1457, as contrasted with B. Fernaldii, has half-mature fruits which are narrowly ovate- elliptic rather than lance-subulate, the petals are wider and have purplish claws rather than being uniformly “pinkish” (Fernald, loc. cit.), the anthers are shorter and relatively broader, and the arms of the bifurcate hairs are longer than in the Newfoundland material. B. Fernaldii and B. Longii share a combination of characters,— siliques lance-subulate, not torulose, 4-6 mm. long, the few seeds crowded usually into a single row—which sets them sharply off from all other North American species of Braya. However, the markedly larger petals (4-5 mm. long) with white limb and blue- violet claw, and the glabrous siliques of B. Longii distinguish it from B. Fernaldii with its smaller (3-4 mm. long) uniformly pinkish (to white) petals, and hirtellous siliques. Because the name B. americana (Hook.) Fern. appears to be inapplicable, and because there is no other name available for this Newfoundland endemic, the writer considers it a privilege to name it for Professor M. L. Fernald, who critically described it. It is fitting, too, that his name and that of Bayard Long, should be linked in the names of these twin-species from the Newfound- land flora to the knowledge of which they together have added so much. EXPLANATION OF PLATES 1088-1090 PLATE 1088. BrayA номилѕ (Mey.) Robins, habit-photographs of geographical races (see also Plate 1089, fig. 1), all X 25. Ес. 1, Race 5, Will- oughby Cliffs, Vt., June 22, 1884, C. E. Faxon (G); ric. 2, Race 6, Severn River, Hudson Bay, J. M. Macoun, no. 2087 (О); ric. 3, Race 2, Itivdleq- Fjord, Qingua, Groenl. Occid., July 6, 1926, M. P. Porsild (G); ria. 4, Race 3, Rivière Jupiter, Anticosti Island, Marie-Victorin & Rolland-Germain, no. 24,849 (О); ria. 5, Race 4, Table Mountain, region of Port à Port Bay, New- foundland, Fernald & St. John, no. 10,837 (G). Puate 1089. Braya номилѕ (Mey.) Robins., habit-photographs of geo- graphical races, ctd. (see also Plate 1088, figs. 1-5), X 25. Fic. 1, Race 1, Kempe Fjord, East Greenland, Seidenfaden 462 (B). Rhodora Plate 1090 BRAYA PURPURASCENS, X 25, FIG. 1 В, FERNALDI, TYPE, X 25, FIG. 2 1948] M. L. F.,—New Checklist (Review) 15 BRAYA GLABELLA Richards. Fic. 2, 243 "'Richardson's Arctic Plants" а), X %. ; BRAYA PURPURASCENS (R. Br.) Bunge, habit-photographs illustrating range of variation (see also Plate 1090, fig. 1), all X 24. Гс. 3, “typical” phase, region of North Star Bay, N. W. Greenland, W. E. Ekblaw, no. 408 (G); FIG. 4, depauperate phase, Lille Suends, c. 76° 45’ N., Greenland, Lundager, no. 1062 (О); FIGs. 5a-5d, “typical” to robust phase, Richmond Gulf, P. Q., Abbe & Abbe, 3819 (M): FIG. 5a, short, elliptical silique and narrow rosette leaves; FIG. 5b, short, elliptical silique and broader rosette leaves; FIG. 5c, long, oblong silique and broader rosette leaves; Fic. 5d, long, oblong silique, and narrow rosette leaves. PrATE 1090. BRAYA PURPURASCENS, habit-photographs illustrating range of variation (see also, Plate 1089, figs. 3-5b), X 25. Ета. 1, robust phase, Southampton, Southampton Island, M. O. Malte 120,677 (O). Braya FERNALDI Abbe. Fic. 2, TYPE, X 25, Cape Norman, northwestern Newfoundland, Wiegand, Griscom & Hotchkiss, no. 28,434 (G). UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, MINNEAPOLIS, MINN. JNOTHER AGGRESSIVE HAWKWEED.—Mr. Henry S. Dennison recently sent to the Gray Herbarium material of a weed which interested him, found in the confines of a 500-foot carry between Sysladobsis and Pocumpsus Lakes in the center of Washington County (nearest Springfield post-office), Maine. The plant proves to be a variety of the already too aggressive Hieracium stlosella L., this one being var. niveum Muell.-Arg., with the lower leaf-surface permanently white. It is likely to become another pest.—M. L. FERNALD. THE NEW WASHINGTON-BALTIMORE CHECKLIST.—The second edition, dated December, 1946, of the Washington-Baltimore Checklist by Frederick J. Hermann! has come to hand. The new list replaces that of 1941 and largely epitomizes changes in the identifications of the vascular plants of the region west of Chesapeake Bay, north to the Pennsylvania stateline, south to the Rappahannock and Rapidan Rivers and westward to the eastern bases of the Blue Ridge. At the west the Bull Run Mountains are included. Under each group waifs are separated from the native and truly naturalized species, a praiseworthy distinction in view of the mapping in a much used handbook of species for states where they are not established, simply because someone fifty or seventy-five years ago found casual waifs on ship's ballast or on waste from woolen-mills of New England, species foreign to the area but which got en- tangled in the wool which eventually landed at North Berwick, Chelmsford or other woolen-mill centers but which have not persisted in New England; unless one knows the facts he would infer from such maps that these mere waifs are really a part of the established flora. Congratulations to the authors of the Checklist for clearly differentiating them! 1 A CHECKLIST OF PLANTS IN THE WASHINGTON-BALTIMORE AREA by Frederick J. Hermann, member of Executive Committee, Conference on District Flora. Second Edition, December, 1946. lssued by the Conference on District Flora, E. H. Walker, Chairman. 16 Rhodora [JANUARY The treatments of some groups have been prepared by special contributors: the Pteridophyta by Mr. W. H. Wagner, Jr.; Gramineae by Mrs. Agnes Chase; Cyperus by Dr. Hugh O'Neill; Rubiaceae by Dr. F. R. Fosberg. The three latter treatments follow the well known philosophy of the three authors, interpretations with which some others may differ. The treatment of most groups, however, will be generally accepted, these being quite tolerant of recent changes which are necessary where types or differential characters have been restudied and demonstrated to have been misunderstood. In some cases, however, restudy may bring some important changes. In the Pteridophyta, for instance, although the treatment is largely a safe one to follow, it sometimes seems based on limited experience. Dryopteris intermedia is maintained as a species distinct from D. spinulosa but Polypodium virgini- anum is remerged with the European and western North American P. vulgare. There are of course those who argue for the specific separation of the two mem- bers of Dryopteris, which can be separated by a slight difference in the cuttmg of the frond and by the presence or absence of glands on frond and indusia, but in much of their American ranges they are coincident and those with large field-experience find them too often intergrading. Such sound students as Hooker, Gray (in his mature years), D. C. Eaton, Underwood, Davenport, Christensen, Weatherby, Tryon and many more have treated them as varia- tions of a single species. Polypodium virginianum, on the other hand, has a very different geographic range from P. vulgare and the two differ in many definite morphological characters which are summarized in RHODORA, xxiv. 136 (1922). Besides these another significant character has been pointed out by Dr. P. Martens in his detailed study, Les Organes glanduleux de Polypodium virginianum in Bull. Jard. Bot. de l'État Brux. xvii. 1-14 (1943). In P. vir- ginianum the sporangia are;mixed with long-stalked clavate simple or branched glands; in P. vulgare such structures do not occur. Since the revival in 1922 of P. virginianum it has been generally recognized as a distinct species; but, if this is not afspecies, what{possible defense can be made for the specific recogni- tion of Dryopteris intermedia? In the treatment of Gramineae, furthermore, it is a striking fact that many correction and studies made outside of Washington are ignored. In the pages of RuoponRA many former treatments have been clearly demonstrated to need alteration, but in the Checklist several of the corrected names are either com- letely ignored or too hastily reduced to synonymy of quite different species. f Washington botanists persist in writing Erianthus “giganteus (Walt.) Muhl.” (for discussion see RHopora, xlv. 249-252 (1943)), if they continue to confuse our slender and chiefly annual Paspalum fluitans (Ell.) Kunth with the coarse and stoutly perennial tropical P. repens Bergius (see RHODORA, xxxix. 382-388, plate 474 (1937)), if they believe that real Muhlenbergia mezi- cana (see RHODORA, xlv. 224-230, plates 749-752, (1943)) grows about Wash- ington, they will be perpetuating error. These are not merely matters of personal opinion or judgment but simple and demonstrated facts. In Кно- DORA, l. c. (1943) it was clearly shown that failure to check the original Latin descriptions and to study carefully the types had resulted in an unusual amount of error in the then current treatment of our eastern species of M uhlenbergia. But in the new Checklist the old error regarding M. mexicana is perpetuated. Other similar cases, such as Cenchrus pauciflorus of Mexico and adjacent Texas (see RHODORA, l. c. 387, 388 (1943)) need not here be piled up; they will be ap- parent to those who have kept abreast of recent careful revisions. It is not necessary to continue past errors in such cases. In perusing the pages of this mostly creditable Checklist one is gratified to find that the records have usually been carefully checked. Only in a few cases are omissions apparent to one whose limited time for field-work farther south and demands of the classroom farther north have always forced him to pass, without time for visits, as rapidly as possible through Washington and Balti- more. In 1904 Mrs. Chase wrote to the Gray Herbarium and sent many 1948] M.L.F.,—New Checklist (Review) 17 specimens, collected from April through October, of the well marked and in Europe generally recognized Capsella rubella Reuter, these collections all made in Washington. The species is a very definite one, distinguished from the ubiquitous C. Bursa-pastoris (which is a greenish plant with petals much ex- ceeding sepals, the silicles with straight or slightly convex margins, the summit subtruncate to barely emarginate) by its reddish or purplish tone, very small petals, the silicles small and with margins concave above, the summit definitely emarginate. It is too bad that Mrs. Chase’s discriminating observations got overlooked. The species is an abundant weed northward and it abounds in southeastern Virginia; it is not a mere waif. In the Gray Herbarium two other additions to the Checklist are represented. Carex texensis (Torr.) Bailey is there represented by material collected by C. F. Wheeler, June, 1907, and marked “Smithsonian grounds, in lawn. Adv.?". "This sheet was identified by Mackenzie but he did not enter the District of Columbia for it in the North American Flora. Evidently indige- nous material comes from farther east: sandy woods, Centerville, Maryland, May 22, 1930, Н. D. House, no. 7306. Linum intercursum Bickn. is repre- sented by S. F. Blake, no. 9564 from dry bank, Hyattsville, Maryland (identi- fied as L. floridanum). In a few cases, besides those already mentioned, the authors would do well to check or clarify some of the names used, as well as their cited authors. Thus we here find “Selaginella apoda (L.) Spring ex Mart. (S. apus (L.) Spring)". Turning to Martius, Flora Basiliensis, i?. 119 (1840) we find Spring making the new name S. apus and citing four early species of Lycopodium as belonging to it, these including L. apodum L. If the authors have a reference to Martius where the combination Selaginella apoda was published it would be helpful to have it cited. The latter combination is usually dated from its publication in Ruopora, xvii. 68 (1915). Arabis dentata (Torr.) Torr. & Gray (1838) is antedated by A. dentata Clairville (1811). The name of the plant of the Washington area is A. perstellata E. L. Braun, var. Shortiana Fern. in RHODORA, xlviii. 208 (1946). Lysimachia longifolia Pursh (1814) is taken up with Steironema quadriflorum (Sims) Hitche. as a synonym. Since, however, the latter combination rests on Lysimachia quadriflora Sims (1803), a well de- scribed and illustrated new species without competition as to name, the con- clusion is obvious. Veronica polita Fries should replace V. didyma Tenore —see Schinz und Thellung in Vierteljahrschr. nat. Ges. Zurich, li. 496 (1906) and liii. 561 (1909), also Mansfeld in Fedde, Repert. xlvii. 151 (1939). Although the "nomenclature conforms with the International Rules," the authors almost scrupulously avoid Recommendation XLIII, that "Specific (or other) epithets should be written with a small initial letter, except those which are derived from names of persons (substantives or adjectives) or are taken from generic or vernacular names (substantives or adjectives)." The latter part of this Recommendation is not generally subscribed to in Washing- ton. Furthermore, if an acute feeling for words, such as is required in the capitalizing of initials above referred to, had prevailed, we should not find such an impossible combination as Nuphar 'advenum", a blunder not caught in the enumeration of 120 or more emendations and corrections at the end of the Checklist. The present reviewer was asked to “publish some friendly comments on the Checklist". Не has done so, though, along with praise of some features, he has also taken time to point the way to some needed corrections. It is hoped that, when the detailed flora of the area sometime comes out, the friendly suggestions here made will be recognized as such.—M. L. К. 18 Rhodora [JANUARY А RED-FRUITED FORM OF PoDOPHYLLUM PELTATUM.— There is an unnamed form of Podophyllum peltatum L. growing wild in Indiana, on which Mr. Charles C. Deam (Flora of Indiana, р. 476, 1940) reports as follows: “In 1927, I found a specimen that had a maroon-colored fruit in a wood on the Arthur Miller farm near Mauckport, Harrison County. I did not preserve the fruit but I moved the plant to our garden where it multiplied and in 1937 I succeeded in maturing four large fruits. These I sent to Dr. Edgar Anderson, of the Missouri Botanical Garden, for study." In 1943, Mr. Deam sent some rhizomes of this peculiar form to the Montreal Botanical Garden. They were planted in the shade-garden, next to plants of the Himalayan pink-flowered Podophyllum Emodi Wall. Alongside, in the same bed, grows typical eastern American Podophyllum peltatum L., from the region of Montreal. The characteristic yellow fruit of the latter species has merited it the colloquial name *'Citronnier" which, according to Michel Sarrazin, the French settlers gave the plant about the year 1700. The patch of the red-fruited form increases every year. Last fall, a dozen fruits were collected and offered to botanical gardens through our Delectus Seminum et Sporarum. The fruit is maroon from the start, while those of typical Podophyllum peltatum are green and turn yellow only when fully ripened. This variation, which“may be found in the whole area of Podophyllum peltatum, is striking enough to deserve a name. Hence, I propose to call it: Podophyllum peltatum L., f. Deamii, n. f. A typo differt fructu fusco-rubro.—'Tvrr: In cultivation at the Montreal Botanical Garden under No. 755-43, from rhizomes collected near Mauck- port, Harrison County, Indiana, by C. C. DEAM. Dried specimens of the type material are deposited in the joint herbarium of the Université de Montréal and the Montreal Botanical Garden. The author wishes to thank his colleague James Kucyniak, for his assistance in the drafting of this note.—MAnRcEL RAYMOND, Montreal Botanical Garden. 1948] Lakela,—Notes on Minnesota Plant-life 19 NOTES ON MINNESOTA PLANT-LIFE OLGA LAKELA To the introduced flora of the state is herewith added Ніе- RACIUM AURANTIACUM L., coll. no. 6890 Lakela, from a cultivated hay-field on highway No. 9 eight miles northwest of Duluth. At the time of the collection, last June 29, the colorful adventive was at the climax of its flowering, aiding in locating the estab- lished colonies along the roadside fields. At a later date a single plant was observed and collected on a sandbar-island in Duluth harbor where it had invaded a thirteen-year-old vegetation com- munity. Evidence points to its cultivation in local flower gardens. White-flowered Epilobium angustifolium L. was detected among the typical form, covering acres of partly cleared terrace of Lake Superior at the Twin Points resort, near Split Rock river, Lake Co. The coll. по. 7272 Lakela and Ethel Sue Horton, con- sisting of plants with well developed inflorescences of flowers with pure white petals and greenish sepals, were determined as Е. angustifolium f. albiflorum (Dumort.) Haussk. The petals on drying turned pinkish. The form is previously unreported from the state. The finding of Ophioglossum vulgatum L. var. pseudopodum (Blake) Farw. is of interest, because the fern is so rarely encoun- tered within the state that it is previously known only from two localities, Washington and Pine counties on the east-central border of Minnesota, by collections dating back to 1905 and 1925, respectively. The Duluth colony was discovered during a survey of the flora on a sandbar-island in Superior, Bay, known to sup- port a thirteen-year-old plant community. The fern is estab- lished in moss-mats sometimes under shrubs where the soil of fine sand, darkened with humus from residual decay, remains moist. The numerous roots, spreading horizontally within the top inch of the soil, develop new plants from adventitious buds. The plants usually are in clusters of two or more. Sixteen plants were counted in a single square foot of the area, associated with young sporophytes of Onoclea sensibilis, Liparis Loeselii and other per- ennials. Coll. nos. 7101 and 7289 Lakela were made at the southeast corner of the island where the colony shows best de- velopment. 20 Rhodora [JANUARY The discovery of Eleocharis nitida Fern., coll. nos. 6887 and 7090 in a partly cleared border of an exsiccating swamp on high- way 53, about one and one-half miles north of Cotton, St. Louis Co., extends the range of the species about forty miles inland from the North Shore of Lake Superior. The statement on its general distribution! is herewith emended to include Alaska. Through the courtesy of Professor Eric Hultén, Stockholm, the writer has at hand a specimen from Kodiak Island with the refer- ence, Flora of Alaska and Yukon, 2. p. 293. 1942. UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA, DuLUTH BRANCH. ASPLENIUM MONTANUM IN SOUTH-CENTRAL MASSACHUSETTS.— Dr. Burton N. Gates recently brought to the Gray Herbarium for verification a small but unmistakable frond of Asplenium montanum collected in Sturbridge, Massachusetts, by Mrs. Edward I. Comins. Only one plant was observed, first in July, 1944, and again two years later. It grew, as individuals of this species should, in a crevice of a shaded granitic ledge. The Sturbridge station is the first known to me from any part of Massachusetts east of the Housatonic Valley and extends the northeastern limit of the species from Scotland, Connecticut— about 30 miles. Representative fronds are preserved in the herbarium of the Hadwen Botanical Club (sheets 19,719 and 19,720) at Clark University, Worcester.—C. A. WEATHERBY, Gray Herbarium. 1 Lakela, Olga. RHODORA 49: 81-82. 1947. Volume 49, no. 588, consisting of pages 289-318 aud including title-page, errata and Index of Volume, was issued 15 December, 1947. Hovora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. February, 1948. No. 590. CONTENTS: Lespedeza striata and L. stipulacea. Duane Isely. .............. 21 Notes on the Compositae of the Northeastern United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae, and Astereae. Arthur Cronquist. .... 28 A prostrate Rorippa. М. L. ЁеүтпаШ......‹.................... 35 Fruit Key to Northeastern Trees (Reply to a Review by М. L. Fernald). Wm. M. Нат\їом.....................:..... 36 Generic Status of Triodanis and Specularia. Rogers McVaugh. 38 A Nova Scotian Dwarf Shadbush. M. L. Fernald. ............. 49 Lampylium Halleri in New Brunswick. Herbert Habeeb. ...... 52 The New England Botanical Club, Inc. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. —4 monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray's Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St. Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. RHODORA INDEX; REQUEST FOR CORRECTIONS.—A cumulative in- dex to the first fifty volumes of Rhodora is being prepared. Any user of RHODORA who has noted errors in the indices to the various volumes will greatly aid in the enterprise by sending the correc- tions to the EDITORS. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. February, 1948. No. 590. LESPEDEZA STRIATA AND L. STIPULACEA! DvANE IsELY (Plates 1091 and 1092) Lespedeza is primarily a genus of perennials (herbaceous or shrubby). The lespedezas occurring in North America, however, include two annual species, Lespedeza striata (Thunb.) Hook. and Arn. and L. stipulacea Maxim. Both are introduced from eastern Asia and are widely cultivated in this country; both have escaped extensively and in the South are а conspicuous element of road- side, pasture, and wasteland flora. Of these two, L. striata only is treated in such manuals as have come to my attention, with the exception of Deam's Flora of Indiana where the two species are differentiated only on the basis of а pubescence character. It seems desirable to call attention to the widespread naturalized occurrence of L. stipulacea in certain areas of the country and to point out distinguishing characteristies between it and its better known congener. А brief review of important items in the botanical history of these two plants is also presented. The name Hedysarum striatum was originally applied by Thunberg in 1784? The plant concerned was doubtfully placed in the genus Desmodium by DeCandolle,? and was transferred to 1 In the course of preparation of even a short item such as this 1 have become in- debted to several individuals for aid in obtaining literature and for suggestions made. Sincere thanks are offered. Particular acknowledgment is due CHARLES L. GILLY, who, in addition to making numerous constructive comments, prepared the included drawings. ? Fl. Jap. 289. 1784. 3 Prodromus 2, 337. 1825. 22 Rhodora [FEBRUARY Lespedeza by Hooker and Arnott.4 I have not seen Thunberg’s material, which is presumably in Upsala, nor have I seen litera- ture references indicating that anyone else has checked the cur- rent application of this name. ‘The original description is some- what ambiguous. It is, in general, referable to, if not specific for, L. striata as we understand it today. The leaflets, however, are described in part as follows: **Foliola oblonga, obtusa, subretusa, setula acuminata . . . glabra linea dorsali pilosa." Oblong leaflets are distinctly characteristic of L. striata. The subretuse tip and dorsal pilose line are, however, scarcely to be noted for this species; they are, on the contrary, markedly characteristic of L. stipulacea (See Plate 1092). It is possible that Thunberg’s specimens consisted of a mixture. Further comment upon this problem cannot be made until type material is available. Maximowiez's L. stipulacea was described in 1859.5 The de- scription is quite lucid, clearly referring to the plant now known under that name. Maximowicz also enumerates certain distinc- tions between his plant and L. striata. In subsequent Asiatic and European literature, however, these two species are much confounded. In some treatments they are maintained sepa- rately and in others regarded as synonyms. Maximowicz, him- self, threw his plant into synonomy under L. striata in 1873.5 Kummerowia, described by Schindler in 1912,’ consists of a segregate genus based upon these species. Schindler distin- guishes this genus from Lespedeza on the basis of the annual habit, leaf phyllotaxy, and certain characteristics of the inflorescence and fruit. However, while recognizing a ‘‘micro-genus”’ he did not distinguish between the two species; L. stipulacea Maxim. is listed as a synonym under Kummerowia striata (Thunb.) Schindl. Relative to the application of the names in North America, Asa Gray® appears to be responsible for originally identifying the "Japanese Clover", introduced earlier in the 19th century, as L. striata (Thunb.) Hook. and Arn. Pieters and Van Eseltine? report as L. stipulacea Maxim. the “Korean lespedeza” intro- duced by the U. S. Department of Agriculture. They also point * Bot. Beech. 262. 1841. 5 Prim. Fl. Amur. 85. 1859. в Act. Hort. Petrop. 2, 382. 1873. ? Fedde, Rep. 10, 403. 1912. s Am. Nat. 1, 495. 1867. * U. 8. D. A. Dept. Circ. 317. 1924, 1948] Isely,—Lespedeza striata and L. stipulacea 23 out certain characters useful in differentiating this species from L. striata. Reference is frequently made to their paper by agron- omists, but it has been largely ignored by taxonomists. The present note treats these annual lespedezas as being two superficially similar but amply distinct entities in the genus Lespedeza. The confusion in the literature concerning the identi- ty of these plants and the frequent relegation of L. stipulacea to synonymy probably should be attributed to non-critical observa- tion; this viewpoint will be substantiated by data given in the latter portion of the present paper. Relative to the generic position of these plants, it is granted that they should doubtless be considered a distinct section of the genus, but Schindler’s generic segregation cannot be accepted. The time and place of the introduction of Lespedeza striata upon the North American continent are problematic. The earliest printed reference which I have seen pertains to a collec- tion of this plant near Monticello, Georgia, made in 1846." Early records indicate that the plant was well distributed over the southeastern portion of this country by the time of the Civil War. Attention was soon drawn to its value for pasturage; hence its subsequent employment as a cultivated plant. The story of L. stipulacea is the converse of the above. It was brought to this country in 1919 specifically for trial as a cultivated plant and has subsequently become established as an escape from cultivation. The original introduction was by seeds sent from Korea to the U. 8. Department of Agriculture in Washington." It is, of course, possible that, like L. striata, the plant was previously present in the United States, but there appears to be no definite evidence to this effect. The range of these two plants in this country today is essen- tially equivalent to the areas in which they find agricultural em- ployment. L. striata is a bit the more southern of the two. It reaches central Missouri, southern Illinois, and Indiana as a northern limit and extends west into eastern Kansas and Okla- homa, south and east to the Gulf and Atlantic coasts. —L.stipu- lacea is present from central Iowa eastward to Pennsylvania and south to central Alabama and Georgia. Its western limits 10 Porter T. C., Am. Nat. 2: 39. 1868. n Pieters and Van Eseltine, 1. c. 24 Rhodora [FEBRUARY are approximately the same as for L. striata. However, the re- cent introduction of varieties of L. stipulacea, which will set seed in Canada, suggests that it may in time become naturalized in more of our north central and northeastern states. These two plants, particularly L. striata, possess tendencies characteristic of polymorphic species, displaying considerable variation in habit, leaflet shape, and pubescence; considerable physiological divergence is likewise exhibited in the varied degrees of adaptation of different varieties or strains to agronomic appli- cation in different agricultural regions. To some extent this aspect of natural variability is, perhaps, spurious, being the result of intercrossing between escapes representing various strains which have been selected out of the original population by man. It is entirely possible that the plant populations are much more uniform in their native habitats. In this country, L. striata is represented by three principal cultivated forms or varieties (in addition to numerous other less widespread selections). These are known as Common lespedeza,? Kobe lespedeza, and Tennes- see 76. Kobe lespedeza possesses a certain degree of morpho- logical differentiation relative to the other two forms, being larger, coarser, and more pubescent. The calyx-lobes are sparsely grey- pubescent in contradistinction to the glabrous or merely ciliate calyces of the Common lespedeza, and the loment and seed are markedly larger. It is neither one of, nor derived from, the L. striata strain or strains originally introduced into this country but has been recently (1920) brought in from Kobe, Japan. As to the possible varietal significance of Kobe lespedeza, recognition of such would scarcely seem to be justified, at least on the basis of its morphological characters alone, these being concerned pri- marily with size and pubescence. If, however, in its native habi- tat Kobe lespedeza represents a more or less definitive plant population possessing certain geographical or ecological charac- terizations in contrast to the other forms of this species, nomen- clatural consideration as a variety might be in order. This, however, would not seem justified on the basis of its role in this country and cannot be considered in this present paper in the 12 This plant in the past has been widely known under the appellation of ‘‘Japanese Clover” and is so designated in many of our manuals. This name has, however, been replaced almost entirely in common usage and in agronomic nomenclature by the perhaps more appropriate “Соттоп lespedeza.” 1948] Isely,—Lespedeza striata and L. stipulacea 25 absence of data concerning its Asiatic distribution and variabil- ID Tennessee 76 is a strain selected from parent stock of L. striata in this country. The plants are characteristically more erect- growing and larger than those of Common lespedeza but appear to have no definitive morphological distinctions of taxonomic significance. L. stipulacea is known in this country under the names of Korean lespedeza and Harbin lespedeza. Korean lespedeza is represented by several selections such as Improved Early Korean and Late Korean. These forms have been synthesized from stock derived from the original introduction; none of them appear to have any distinctions of taxonomic significance. Harbin lespe- deza, however, represents a separate introduction of this plant from Harbin, Manchuria. This plant is adapted to much shorter periods of vegetative growth. It is a smaller, more sparse plant than typical Korean lespedeza and may possess other characters indicative of varietal distinctness. The most easily observed, but not invariably reliable, differ- ences between the two species under discussion have to do with habit, petiole-length, and leaflet-shape, the most eritieal diag- nostic distinctions are concerned with configuration of the calyx, loment, and seed. These and other helpful characterizatiors are presented in tabular form below. No attempt is made to give complete descriptions of these plants; only those characters wherein the species have been observed to differ are discussed. 13 Relative to the much-discussed problem concerning the advisability of giving recognition in the language of scientific nomenclature to various morphologically distinct, cultivated agronomic and ornamental plants, it might be commented that the element of time as well as that of structural discontinuity should be considered. I have heard it maintained that “varieties” and "strains" of many of our cultivated plants (particularly ornamentals) possess a much greater morphological divergence than do many “natural” varieties and subspecies. This is undoubtedly true—it is likewise true that many so-called varieties and subspecies should scarcely be recognized as such. Cultivated varieties, however, are apt to be ephemeral things; they are fancied for a few years and then dropped, as something better comes along, disappear- ing forever in oblivion. Being almost entirely dependent upon the hands of man for the maintenance of their genetic distinctness, they are in no way comparable as a definite biological entity to a self-perpetuating varietal or subspecific population with an established (albeit probably changing) ecological or geographical range. This generalization would seem to be applicable even if the morphological characters of the “natural unit" are rather weaker than those of the man-made ‘‘toy.”’ 26 Rhodora [FEBRUARY PLANT-CHARACTER L.sTRIATA (Thunb.) Н. & А. L. sriPULACEA Maxim. HABIT STEM-PUBESCENCE Prostrate or spreading, or, in close stands, ascending to erect, scarcely exceeding 20 cm, in height, diffusely branched. Downwardly appressed, in several lines, or covering nearly entire surface of stem. Similar to striata but com- monly taller and in dense stands, frequently scarcely branched. Upwardly appressed or somewhat spreading, fre- quently only in one or two lines on stem angles. LEAVES Petiole-length 1-2 mm., uncommonly 3-5 4-10 mm. on main stems mm. ; leaves usually appear- but frequently shorter on ing subsessile. ultimate branchlets; leaves mostly appearing distinctly etioled. Leaflet-shape Obovate to narrowly ellip- Spatulate to obovate, aver- tic or oblong, averaging aging about 1.4 times longer about 2 times longer than than wide, usually strongly wide, usually not apically cuneate basally, and apical- emarginate. ly emarginate. Leaflet- Hairs absent or inconspicu- Hairs very conspicuous on pubescence ously present onleaflet mar- margins and lower midrib gin and midrib, short (con- of young leaflets, trichomes siderably less than 1 mm. 1 mm. or more in length, long), subappressed and rel- divergent or subappressed, atively non-evident. stiff. STIPULES 3-5 (-6) mm. long, and 1- Variable in size, mostly 5-8 1.8 mm. wide mm. long and 3-4 mm. wide on main stems, much smaller in inflores- cences, sometimes particu- larly conspicuous at stem tips (previous to flowering) where they sometimes de- velop before the leaves and overlap in imbricate fashion. INFLORESCENCE Flowers arising from leaf Flowers arising from leaf axils of nearly entire plant, axils of apical shoots; lower from main stems as well as nodes frequently give rise branch apices. to short flower-bearing shoots but not to axillary flowers. FLOWER" Calyx (2-) 2.5-3.3 mm. long; teeth 1.5-1.9 mm. long, teeth ap- appearing 5 in number, sub- equal, the dorsal two some- what united and thus ap- pearing 4 in number; 3 (anterior and laterals) sim- ilar, narrow, pointed, the 4 P. L. Ricker (personal correspondence) comments on habit distinctions between these plants as follows: ‘‘While the stems of striata are often procumbent or decum- bent, the tips of the branches almost always turn up and do not lie absolutely flat on the ground as do some stems of stipulacea.” 15 Floral distinctions, other than those mentioned here, are abundantly present. These have to do with small but none the less definitive divergences in shape of the petals and the calyx-lobes, as well as the venation of these structures. It is believed that these are more clearly represented in Mr. Gillv's illustrations than would be possible by additional discussion. Rhodora Plate 1091 Charles Gilly del. LESPEDEZA STIPULACEA, FIG. 1. Io STRIATA ЕС 2 Rhodora Plate 1092 Photo John Staby LESPEDEZA STIPULACEA, FIG. 1. L. STRIATA, FIG. 2, 1948] PLANT-CHARACTER L. STRIATA Petals (non- cleistogamous flowers) Fruit (mature)!® Apex Surface Adherent calyx SEED (mature) pearing slightly shorter than others. Standard approximating 4 mm. in length, appearing subequal to keel in flower; wings slightly shorter. Apically acuminate to a distinct point or beak. Weakly brownish-black- reticulate, not glandular. 14-44 covering fruit. Black, mottled with lighter areas; distinctly notched or lobed in vicinity of hilum. PLATE 1091 Isely,—Lespedeza striata and L. stipulacea 27 L. STIPULACEA other two united almost to the apex, appearing as а single, broad, emarginate tooth. Standard about 5 mm. in length, but considerably bowed in flower and appear- ing conspicuously shorter than keel; keel approximat- ing 6 mm. in length; wings exceeded by both standard and keel. Apically rounded with a very short, straight or re- curved point. Strongly reticulate with black, cord-like ridges; us- ually conspicuously glan- dular. 14-14 covering fruit. Solid purple-black, not mot- tled; margin nearly entire, scarcely lobed. 1. LESPEDEZA STIPULACEA. 2. LESPEDEZA STRIATA: a. calyx, lateral view, bracts removed; b. calyx, upper portion, split and spread open to show shape of lobes and venation (pubescence omitted); c. standard,; d. wing; e. one half of keel. All X 10. Drawings by CHARLES GILLY. PLATE 1092 1. LESPEDEZA STIPULACEA (material from [sely, 3848, Colbert Co., Ala.). 2. LESPEDEZA STRIATA (material from Jsely, 4420, Henry Co., Tenn., and Justice and Isely, 32, Montgomery Co., Ala.): a. habit X 14; b. stem-enlarge- ment to show pubescence X 9; c. leaf and stipule X 114; d. stem-apex, showing pubescence of young leaves X 144; e. mature fruit, calyx present at left, calyx removed at right, both X 414; f. mature seeds X 414. Photographs by Jonn STABY. BorANY DEPARTMENT Iowa STATE COLLEGE, AMES, Iowa 1 Excellent descriptions and illustrations of fruit and seed of Common, Kobe, Korean, and Sericea lespedeza are given by F. H. Hillman in a leaflet (no identification or serial number indicated) issued by the Division of Seed Investigations, U. S. Department of Agriculture, December, 1934. 28 Rhodora [FEBRUARY NOTES ON THE COMPOSITAE OF THE NORTHEASTERN UNITED STATES VI. CICHORIEAE, EUPATORIEAE, AND ASTEREAE AnTHUR CRONQUIST Aster Priceae Britton has been considered to differ from Aster pilosus Willd. in its pink-purple rather than white rays, slightly larger heads, and more restricted, southern distribution. The difference in head-size is not great enough to be depended upon, however, and there is some overlapping even outside the area where the two grow together. Furthermore, occasional other- wise apparently typical forms of A. pilosus, growing far outside the range of A. Priceae, have pink rays. In Athens, Georgia, I have seen both "species" growing together and apparently hy- bridizing freely, with many intermediate specimens forming a gradual transition from one extreme to the other. Since the general aspect of A. Priceae is similar to that of A. pilosus, since the technical differences are inconstant, and since there is field evidence of free hybridization, it seems necessary to reduce A. Priceae to intraspecific status. ASTER PILOSUS Willd. var. Priceae (Britton) Cronquist, comb. nov. A. Priceae Britton, Man. 960. 1901. А. kentucktensis Britton, loc. cit. Several years ago Professor Fernald and Mr. Griscom presented a review of the Eupatorium rotundifolium group (RHopoRA 37: 179-181. 1935), in which the plants which had generally been treated as E. rotundifolium L., E. pubescens Muhl., E. scabridum Ell., and Е. verbenaefolium Michx. were considered to represent four varieties of the single species E. rotundifolium. Ten years later (RHoponA 47: 192-193. 1945) Fernald restored these to specific rank, adding a fifth species, E. cordigerum Fern. I feel that the earlier treatment is the more nearly correct. In pro- posing the name E. rotundifolium var. lanceolatum (Muhl.) Fern. & Griscom, its authors must have overlooked the earlier name Е. verbenaefolium var. Saundersii Porter ex Britton, which applies to the same entity and thus has priority under Article 58 of the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature. Porter's name was published as a trinomial without designation of rank, 1948] Cronquist,—Notes on Compositae, VI 29 but since it is well known that in 1901 Britton (the publishing author) recognized neither subspecies nor formae it is obvious that the name is of varietal status. A similar condition obtains with regard to trinomials proposed by many of the earlier botan- ists, who designated their varieties by Greek letters, without definitely stating their rank. EuPATORIUM ROTUNDIFOLIUM L. var. Saundersii (Porter) Cron- quist, comb. nov. E. verbenaefolium Saundersii Porter ex Britt. Man. Fl. N. States and Can. 923. 1901. €E. lanceolatum Muhl. ex Willd. Sp. Pl. 3: 1752. 1804. E. rotundifolium var. lanceo- latum Fern. & Grisc. HRHHoponA 37: 181. 1935. Е, verbenae- folium Am. auth., perhaps not Michx. It is also clear that Porter intended his name to be of varietal status, since the original label, in his own hand, bears the notation "Eupatorium verbenaefolium Saundersii, var. nov." Prenanthes racemosa was described by Michaux as having 8-9 involucral bracts and 9—12 flowers in a head. Plants from New Jersey to Quebec, west to Minnesota and Iowa, agree with Michaux's character, although a more ample series of specimens shows that the range of normal variation in number of involucral һгасїз and flowers is 7-10 (most commonly 8) and 9-16 (most commonly 13), respectively. It will be noted that the numbers most commonly found are both in the Fabinacci series. More northern and western plants, ranging from Alberta to Colorado, east to Iowa, Minnesota, and thence less commonly to Quebec and northern Maine, have more numerous flowers and involucral bracts. Here again the Fabinacci series is evident, for the principal involucral bracts are 10-14 (most commonly 13), and the flowers are 17-26 in a head (the number centering about 21). No other correlated morphological differences between these two groups are readily evident, and in the area where both occur they are likely to be collected and distributed under a single number. Plantae Exsiccatae Grayanae 153, for example, from Aroostook River, Maine, includes plants of both types. Al- though the number of flowers and involucral bracts in a head has long been known to be important in Prenanthes (as, indeed, it is quite generally through the family), the differences here seem clearly to be intraspecific. In view of the fundamental morpho- 30 Rhodora [FEBRUARY logical nature of the differences, combined with the well marked segregation in range, I think it proper to consider the two units as subspecies. PRENANTHES RACEMOSA Michx. subsp. racemosa Cronquist, nom. nov. Prenanthes racemosa Michx. Fl. Вог. Am. 2: 83. 1803, sens. strict. PRENANTHES RACEMOSA Michx. subsp. multiflora Cronquist, subsp. nov. А subsp. racemosa differt involucri bracteis 10-14 (saepius 13), floribus 17-20. Tyre: Macoun & Herriot 43020, Beaver Hill Lake, Alberta, August 23, 1906. Representative specimens: WvoMiNa: Nelson 8928. СотгокАро: Clements 868. Montana: Chickering s. n. in 1874. SASKATCHEWAN: Bourgeau s. n. in 1857-8. MANITOBA: Macoun 22799. SoutH Daxora: Rydberg 842. MINNESOTA: Holzinger s. n. at Winona in 1905. Iowa: Hayden, Strunk & Tolstead s. n. in 1933. ILLINOIS: Mead s. n. in 1846. MICHIGAN: Williamson 2267, from Isle Royale. QukBEc: Victorin 15811. The great intraspecific variation in the form and degree of cutting of the leaves of the Cichorieae in general and Lactuca in particular is well known. Lactuca Serriola L., L. canadensis L., L. pulchella (Pursh) DC., and L. spicata (Lam.) Hitche., for example, are among the species now generally conceded to include forms with pinnatifid leaves and forms with the leaves entire or merely toothed. The varying forms of L. canadensis appear in the current manuals as distinct species, but were subsequently reduced to varietal status by Wiegand (Кнорова 22: 9-11. 1920), whose taxonomic conclusions have been adopted by Fernald (Ruopora 40: 480, 481. 1938) and others. Contrariwise, it has become customary to distinguish as sepa- rate species L. floridana (L.) Gaertn., with pinnatifid leaves, and L. villosa Jacq., with merely toothed leaves. To bolster this distinction, it has been alleged that the achene of L. floridana has a short stout beak, while that of L. villosa is beakless. The fact is, however, that the achenes vary from merely tapering and beakless to distinctly short-beaked, with all intermediate condi- tions and without any evident correlation with leaf-outline. Torrey and Gray were well aware of this variation in the achene. They described L. floridana (under the name Mul- gedium floridanum) as having the ‘‘achaenia with a short beak”, while its un-named var. y differed only in having its “‘achaenia very obscurely rostrate". L. villosa (under the name M ulgedium 1948] Cronquist,—Notes on Compositae, VI 3l acuminatum) was said by them to have the “асһаепіа slightly rostrate". Their further note under Mulgedium acuminatum, "Heads small, nearly as the following species; from which the undivided leaves chiefly distinguish it", is quite in aecord with my own observations. More recently, Deam has made the following comment under L. floridana in his Flora of Indiana; “Our manuals describe it as having a short, narrow beak. All of my specimens are beakless, at least none with а beak longer than 0.3 mm." I conclude that the variation from beakless to shortly stout- beaked achenes is without taxonomic significance in this instance. The use of the epithet villosa for the plant with merely toothed leaves might suggest that it is more hairy than L. floridana, but the suggestion is not borne out by the specimens. It is worthy of note that when Asa Gray transferred Sonchus acuminatus Willd. (1803) to Lactuca (Syn. Fl. 12: 443. 1884), he listed the earlier L. villosa Jacq. as a synonym, with the note, “but the plant mostly glabrous or nearly во.” The remaining distinction between Lactuca floridana and L. villosa, that of the leaves, has been conceded to be not entirely constant, as will be noted by reading the descriptions in the cur- rent edition of either Gray’s Manual or Britton and Brown’s Illustrated Flora. My observations of the leaves are in general agreement with those descriptions. It is possible to refer most of the specimens to one entity or the other by the nature of the leaves, but intermediate specimens exist, and the plants look very much alike in other respects. The range of L. villosa is included within that of L. floridana, but is apparently less extensive. The foregoing considerations necessitate the reduction of Lactuca villosa to varietal status under L. floridana, thus bringing the treatment of these two entities into conformity with that generally used elsewhere in the genus. LACTUCA FLORIDANA(L.) Gaertn. var. floridana, nom. nov. L. floridana (L.) Gaertn. Fruct. 2: 362. 1791, sens strict. Sonchus floridanus L. Sp. Pl. 794. 1753. LACTUCA FLORIDANA (L.) Gaertn. var. villosa (Jacq.) Cronquist, comb. nov. L. villosa Jacq. Hort. Schoen. 3: 62, pl. 367. 1798. Agoseris gracilens (Gray) Kuntze was originally described by Asa Gray (under the name Troximon gracilens) as differing from 32 Rhodora [FEBRUARY A. aurantiaca (Hook.) Greene in its narrower leaves and involu- cral bracts, longer and more slender beak of the achene, and slightly softer pappus. He further noted that A. gracilens “‘re- sembles slender forms” of A. aurantiaca. With the exception of the intangible feature of the pappus, these differences have been largely copied into the current manuals. Unfortunately, there is very little if any correlation between these characters, and the segregation of specimens based on any one of them does not ap- proximate that based on any of the others. Furthermore, the variation in each of them is continuous, with no clear indication of a bimodal curve. Nor have I been able to detect any correla- tion in range. The variation in size and shape of the leaves is unusual (5-35 em. long, 1-30 mm. wide, 6-100 or more times as long as wide, rounded to acuminate at the apex), but there are many parallel cases in the tribe, as a survey of some of the species of Lactuca, Sonchus, Prenanthes, or Taraxacum will show. I am therefore constrained to reduce A. gracilens to A. aurantiaca. Falling, of necessity, with A. gracilens, is A. gaspensis Fernald. Fernald indicated in his discussion with the original description that the minute technical differences on which he segregated A. gaspensis were based on a comparison of the Gaspé plants with the type material of A. gracilens. Unfortunately, however, the range of variation of the cordilleran population (as distinguished from the type material) encompasses that of the plants from Quebec. Agoseris aurantiaca, proper, as here defined, ranges from Alta. and B. C. to Calif., northern New Mexico, and probably northern Arizona, and the species is conceded a similar range in the current manuals. Toward the southwestern part of tlfis range, chiefly in Arizona, New Mexico, Utah, and Colorado, but trailing off into Wyoming and southern Montana, occurs a usually recog- nizable variant which was named Troximon aurantiacum var. purpureum by Gray. As in Agoseris aurantiaca proper, the beak of the achene in this entity varies from barely more than half as long as the body to distinctly longer than the body, and there is a parallel variation in leaf-shape from very narrow and sharply pointed to relatively broad with rounded tip. The proper nomenclatural combination for this southern plant remains to be made. 1948] Cronquist,—Notes on Compositae, VI 33 AGOSERIS AURANTIACA var. aurantiaca, var. nov. Troximon aurantiacum Hook. Fl. Bor. Am. 1: 300. pl. 104. 1834. Agoseris aurantiaca Greene, Pitt. 2: 177. 1891. Involucral bracts from not at all purplish to purplish along the midrib and sometimes also finely dotted, rarely conspicuously mottled or blotched, the inner sharply pointed, the outer similar or a little broader and blunter, equaling or a little shorter than the inner. Alberta and British Columbia to California, Utah, northern New Mexico, and prob- ably northern Arizona. AGOSERIS AURANTIACA Var. purpurea (Gray) Cronquist, comb. nov. Troximon aurantiacum var. purpureum Gray, Syn. Fl. 12: 438. 1884. Agoseris purpurea Greene, Pitt. 2: 177. 1891. In- volucral bracts mottled or blotched with purple, conspicuously imbricate, broad, the outer and often also the inner blunt. Arizona, New Mexico, Colorado, Utah, Wyoming, and southern Montana. When Asa Gray described Microseris troximoides in 1874 he named it for its resemblance to Agoseris (Troximon) cuspidata (Pursh) Steud., and noted that “This and Trorimon cuspidatum indicate a clear transition between the two widely separated genera." The resemblance between the two species, extending to the general appearance, heavy root, crisped, villous-ciliolate leaf-margins, and thin, long-acuminate involucral bracts, 1s in- deed so great that I cannot escape feeling that they are closely related. The only reliable feature to separate them is the pappus, which consists of 10-25 slender, gradually attenuate paleae in M. troximoides, and about 40-80 mixed capillary bristles and even more slenderly attenuate paleae in Agoseris cuspidata. With the keen sense of relationships that his extreme splitting of genera and species has led many of us to forget, Edward Lee Greene united the two species concerned, with another which he described (probably a synonym of M. troximoides), into a new genus Nothocalais (Bull. Cal. Acad. 2: 54, 55. 1886). | Nothocalais was merely one of the several groups which Greene’s liberal generic views led him to segregate from Muicroseris. Later, Henderson described another valid species, Microseris nigrescens, as being "Certainly closely related to M. troximoides," but differ- ing among other things ‘п the very fine pappus, not half so wide as in that species," and being therefore “А nearer approach still to Troximon” (Bull. Torrey Club 27: 348, 349. 1900). The affinity between these three species, Microseris troxi- 34 Rhodora [FEBRUARY moides, M. nigrescens, and Agoseris cuspidata, is so plain and so great that any treatment which leaves them in separate genera is unnatural. Microseris troximoides and М. cuspidata fit well into that genus, if it is defined in the broad sense of Asa Gray rather than in the narrower sense of Greene and Rydberg. Agoseris cuspidata, on the other hand, is intermediate between Agoseris and Microseris in its pappus, and is further anomalous in Agoseris because of its beakless achenes. Its nearest relative in Agoseris would appear to be the short-beaked A. glauca (Nutt.) D. Dietr., but the affinity does not seem particularly great. The achenes of Microseris are regularly beakless. It may also be noted at this point that Microseris Forsteri Hook., the only species of the genus found in Australia and New Zealand, has the pappus-bristles only slightly dilated at the base, scarcely more so than in Agoseris cuspidata. It seems plain that on both morphologic and phyletic grounds Agoseris cuspidata should be transferred to Microseris. The proper combination was made many years ago by Schultz Bi- pontinus (Pollichia 22-24: 309. 1866). The plant Schultz had in mind was actually Microseris troximoides, which was not * discovered" and formally named until 1874, but, nomenclatur- ally, M. cuspidata was strictly a transfer of Troximon cuspidatum. There remains only one species of Agoseris with beakless achenes. This is А. alpestris (Gray) Greene, which Greene trans- ferred without comment, along with a number of others, when he displaced Troximon with Agoseris. Its pappus is of capillary bristles, although these are seen to be compressed near the base. Its affinity with Microseris $ Nothocalais is not so plain as that of “Agoseris” cuspidata, but some specimens show the peculiarly villous-ciliolate leaf-margins, and many of the specimens have one or two reduced cauline leaves well separated from the basal cluster. This latter character is wholly consonant with Micro- seris, but quite foreign to Agoseris. The involucre would not be out of place in Agoseris, but is distinctly suggestive of Nothocalais. I would be inclined to transfer Agoseris alpestris to Microseris, thus leaving the development of a beak on the achene of Agoseris as a handy technical character to distinguish that genus from Microseris, were it not that Dr. Stebbins informs me that in California A. alpestris enters into a polyploid-apomictic complex 1948] Fernald,—A prostrate Rorippa 35 with Agoseris glauca. Here, as elsewhere in the Compositae, the genera are not sharply distinct, and species which on their mor- phology alone are not clearly referable to one or another of a pair of allied genera, must be placed according to their apparent rela- tionship. Microseris and Agoseris may now be redefined as follows: AGOSERIS: Scapose, or sometimes very shortly caulescent in the annual species, the scape strictly naked above the cluster of leaves at the base (or with one or two reduced upper leaves in A. alpestris); involucral bracts subequal or imbricate; achenes evi- dently beaked at maturity, the beak short and stout or long and slender (beakless in A. alpestris); pappus of numerous capillary bristles. MIcROSERIS: Scapose or more or less leafy-stemmed; involucral bracts subequal, imbricate, or calyculate; achenes columnar to fusiform, but scarcely beaked; pappus of 5- many members, these with paleaceous base and slender, bristle-like, naked or plumose tip (intermingled with capillary bristles in M. cuspidata). THE University oF GEORGIA, Athens, Georgia A. PROSTRATE RORIPPA.— RoniPPA ISLANDICA (Oeder) Borbas, var. MicRocAnPA (Regel) Fernald, forma reptabunda, forma nov., caulibus elongatis repentibus 2-12 dm. longis; foliis plerumque simplicibus. Coös County, New HAMPSHIRE: muddy shore of Nash Stream Bog, Odell, 27 August, 1947, A. S. Pease, no. 33,162 (түре in Herb. Gray.; IsoTYPE in Herb. New Engl. Bot. Cl.); exsiccated shore of First Lake, Pittsburg, 3 September, 1947, Pease, no. 33,186. "This striking form, with very long, prostrate 1-sided stems rooting at the nodes and up to 1.2 m. long, its very numerous axillary fascicles with mostly simple leaves, abounds, Dr. Pease tells me, on the exsiccated margins of the two ponds. It is, perhaps, an ecological form, the stems starting growth in shallow water and on drying-out of the ponds, unable to maintain the usual upright habit. Оп the other hand, plenty of colonies of the species keep the ascending habit under similar conditions.— M. L. FERNALD. 36 Rhodora [FEBRUARY FRUIT KEY TO NORTHEASTERN TREES (A Reply to a Review by M. L. Fernald) Wo. M. HARLOW The editor of "Rhodora" kindly reviewed the above publica- tion in the March 1947 number of that periodical. It is the intention of this reply to discuss facts and not to descend to the plane of half-truths and innuendoes. Perhaps it should be stated that the key was written for beginning students in biology, and not for taxonomists. This is apparent to anyone who reads it, and was so indicated in the preface. Evidently the reviewer does not like fruit keys as such. For many years foresters, seedsmen, horticulturists, and others have struggled with keys which use, indiscriminately, leaf, flower, and fruit characters. Suppose someone sends you a fruit sample with no branches or leaves, to say nothing of flowers. Just how do you key it in such manuals as “Gray’s New Manual of Botany,” 7th Ed.? The author, therefore, offers no apology for having attempted to produce a workable key using only fruit characters, Should a key slavishly follow some system of natural classifica- tion and thereby indicate the relationships of the plants included, or should it be a device for quickly and easily determining the identity of an unknown specimen? The reviewer seems to favor the first alternative, the author the second. However, when the reviewer says that Liriodendron is keyed out with Abies, he is stating only half of the truth, since anyone happening to run out Liriodendron at this point is referered to No. 37 in the key where this genus is included and illustrated in its "proper" place among the Angiosperms bearing samaras. The inclusion of Liriodendron with Abies is only for the neophyte who might pick up a green or newly ripe "cone" of the tuliptree and not sense that it is composed of samaras which soon become detached. When it comes to the reviewer's suggested separation of Tsuga and Picea, the force of the saying “that only the dead are consistent" really becomes apparent: N. B. at this juncture the reviewer would have used an exclamation point (!). He states that Tsuga has “scattered” leaves, but that in Picea they are 1948] Harlow,—Fruit Key (Reply to a Review) 37 “spirally arranged” (the temptation to use an exclamation point is almost irresistible). To check this separation of these genera, the author consulted three authorities; (1) ‘Gray’s New Manual of Botany," 7th Ed., (2) "Manual of Cultivated Trees and Shrubs” by A. Rehder, and (3) Nature, but not necessarily in the order given. Almost unavoidably, some rather astonishing discrepancies between (1) and (2 and 3) were dis- covered. Gray’s Manual states that the leaves of not only Tsuga but also Picea and Abies are "scattered," which may be presumed to mean that they have no arrangement but are borne helter-skelter on the twig. No. 2 agrees with No. 3 that they are all spirally arranged. The generic key under Pinaceae in Gray’s Manual has an error in the leaf arrangement of Larix as follows: *Leaves in bundles of two or more 1. Pinus. Leaves 2-5 in each bundle, evergreen. 2. Larrx. Leaves many in each cluster, deciduous. Furthermore, under the generic description of Larix the state- ment is made, "leaves . . . very many in a fascicle, developed in early spring from lateral scaly and globular buds." By contrast, Rehder's statement is wholly descriptive of what one actually finds in nature viz: “leaves spirally arranged and remote on the long shoots, densely clustered on the lateral short spurs." Since the leaves on new growth are single and spirally arranged, it may be presumed that this is also their arrangement on the spurs. Тһе appearance of “whorls” or "clusters" is due to the extremely slow growth in length of these dwarfed branches. То refer to larch leaves as “‘fascicled”’ or in “bundles” as are those of the pines, promotes error and confusion. About the only actual errors the reviewer could find (there were some he failed to see) were those of indiscriminate use of upper and lower case in common names. The author is glad to have these called to his attention and has already corrected them in the new printing of the key. Even here, however, the re- viewer was careless in quoting ''Chinese-sumac." The hyphen came at the end of a line and ' was indicated, was necessary because ''Chinese-" "sumac" began the next line. ‘Chinesesumac’ not ‘‘Chinese-sumac.”’ 38 Rhodora [FEBRUARY If they like, the authors of ‘Standardized Plant Names" may reply to the comments оп “that presumptuous model." Its saving grace is that when a student sees the names osageorange, tanoak, and pineapple, he knows that the first is not an orange, the second is not an oak, and the third is not an apple. By the way, does the reviewer spell pineapple “рше” "apple" and if not, why not? Evidently the author’s primary error was in sending a copy of the key to “Rhodora” for review. It was his misconception that the magazine was actually “devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related." In his opinion, a key based upon fruit characters fell within these limits. Tur New York STATE COLLEGE OF FORESTRY, Syracuse, New York. GENERIC STATUS OF TRIODANIS AND SPECULARIA Rocers МсУлоан In Ruopora for September, 1946, Professor M. L. Fernald discussed in detail the case of “Triodanis versus Specularia”!, concluding that as a genus Triodanis "seems . . . very weak." He advocated the reunion of Triodanis with the European genus Specularia, in accordance with the policy established by Alphonse DeCandolle in 1830 and subsequently followed by practically all European workers and most Americans. Professor Fernald’s conclusions were reached after examination of my earlier paper on T'riodanis?, and his objections to the maintenance of the group as an independent genus were based chiefly upon what he called the “reputed generic differences" which he understood to be summarized in two paragraphs of this earlier paper. He felt that these ''differences" did not include constant strong mor- phological characters, and he considered that some of them had been over-stressed or were, indeed, meaningless as set forth. Не showed to his own satisfaction that T'riodanis was not to be con- sidered “а clearly distinct genus" (that is, distinct from Specu- 1 RHODORA 48: 209-214, 215, 216. pl. 1049, 1050. 2 Wrightia 1: 13—52. 1945. 1948] McVaugh,—Triodanis and Specularia 39 laria), but apparently he did not consider what I believe to be the main issue, the existence of either Specularia or Triodanis as a real entity apart from Campanula. The case for Triodanis has already been set forth at length, in the paper referred to above, but I think it worthwhile to reopen the discussion here in the pages of Ruopora, because of my own conviction that Triodanis constitutes a biologically coherent group of species which is as well founded as most genera of the Cam- panulaceae and which should be recognized as an independent genus. Опе infers from Professor Fernald’s article that Specu- laria will be used in the traditional, inclusive sense, in the forth- coming 8th edition of ‘‘Gray’s Manual," and it would seem un- fortunate to have this generic name perpetuated indefinitely, through the undoubtedly enormous influence of the “Manual,” without some further examination of the qualifications of the genus. In the first place it may be reiterated that there is no justifica- tion whatever for maintaining Specularia, in its traditional circumscription, as a genus apart from Campanula. It is neither sharply delimited nor homogeneous, and its components are evidently less closely akin to one another than to Campanula itself. If the inclusive Specularia be dismembered, however, as suggested previously!, and restricted to the type-species and one other, it may be maintained as a weak segregate from Campanula. To quote my own words (Wrightia, 1. c.): “The desirability of recognizing Specularia as a genus is still [after dismemberment] open to question, but the combination of divided corolla, elon- gated capsule and glabrous filaments is unique among the annual species of the Campanula complex, and these similarities may indicate some generic affinity between the two entities involved [i. e. the two original species of Specularia, S. Speculum-Veneris and S. hybrida], although these [species] are superficially dissimi- lar in aspect, degree of branching, and size and shape of flowers". The weakness of Specularia as а genus was recognized by Alphonse DeCandolle, whose Monographie des Campanulées (1830) has been the foundation for all subsequent work on the Campanulaceae. Of the species of Specularia DeCandolle wrote (Monographie, p. 46, here translated from the original French): ! Wrightia 1: 17. 1945. 40 Rhodora [FEBRUARY “They form a group very near the Campanulas, and distinct more by the habit than by any positive characters”. He went on to explain that in spite of analogies between species of Specularia and similar species in Campanula, he had experienced no diffi- culty in distinguishing the two genera “ехсері for the one species C. fastigiata Duf., which is so intermediate, in habit and other characters, that one can at will place it in the one genus or the other". One certainly cannot quote DeCandolle in support of insistence upon strong morphological characters as generic criteria in the Campanulaceae! It is worthwhile here to examine in some detail the philo- sophical concepts employed by DeCandolle in delimiting the genera of Campanulaceae, since his Monographie remains the latest significant or original work on the family as a whole. The compilations of Endlicher, Bentham & Hooker, and Schónland, as far as these relate to the Campanulaceae, are taken over from DeCandolle's work without any important changes. Endlicher’s Genera (1838) followed the Monographie even as to the sequence of genera, and without any change in generic concept. Bentham & Hooker (Genera, vol. 2, part 2, 1876) accepted DeCandolle's genera as delimited by him, except that they submerged the monotypic Petromarula in Phyteuma, explaining its earlier sepa- ration on the basis of mistaken observation on the part of DeCandolle. Schónland likewise (in Engler & Prantl, Natürl. Pflanzenf. 4: part 5, 1894), used DeCandolle's genera essentially unchanged; like Bentham & Hooker he added certain genera dis- covered since 1830, and like them he submerged Petromarula. In writing on the delimitation of genera DeCandolle was em- phatic that he did not set up these groups merely because they could be separated from related groups by arbitrary characters; to him a genus was a natural unit, recognizable by its own com- bination [‘‘ensemble’’] of features. The coherent anthers of Symphyandra were not enough in themselves to establish the group as a genus; he pointed out (Monographie, p. 47) that it was “besides natural enough as to habit and other characters". He summed up his practice in the following words (p. 64): “I have not kept or established any genus which was not founded at the same time on positive characters and on the habit [le port], or, in other words, on the reproductive organs and those of vegetation". 1948] McVaugh,—Triodanis and Specularia 41 In the case of Specularia, as he said himself, the genus depended more upon the habit than upon the positive characters! Nor is this the only case in point: of Platycodon and Microcodon he wrote that these were not separated by any strong characters (p. 63), but ‘unhappily, their habit is so different that one is forced thereby to make two distinct genera". Yet Specularia, Platycodon and Microcodon, founded as they were without any strong morphological basis, but recognizable chiefly by their ensembles of characters, were accepted without question by Endlicher, Bentham & Hooker, and Schónland. DeCandolle was fully aware that the genera of Campanulaceae are interrelated in a reticulate pattern (Monographie, p. 64). He pointed out that the ill-defined genus Campanula constitutes a sort of center in the group to which it belongs: "[It] has around it the genera Specularia, Adenophora, Symphyandra and Michauzia, which are very close to it [qui en sont trés rapprochés], and which touch at each of its subdivisions . . . All are closer [plus voisins] to the genus Campanula than to one another. Thus whatever linear series be adopted, it will necessarily be imperfect on this point." I am in full agreement with the thought expressed in this quotation, and to the genera enumerated by DeCandolle I should add Triodanis; whether it be considered an independent genus or not, it seems no more closely related to Specularia (in the restricted sense) than to other annual species of Campanula. This was discussed in Wrightia (1. c.), and some of the following discussion bears on the same question. The above remarks should be enough to make clear my first point, which has to do with the manner of delimitation of genera in the Campanulaceae. The genera in this family stand inde- pendently only when their coherence makes them biological units, recognizable to us by some combinations of characters which do not appear elsewhere in the family. "There are a few genera like Adenophora and Downingia which are possessed, in addition, of distinctive morphological characters, sufficient without any addi- tional evidence to set these genera apart. "There are also some 30 monotypic genera which are unique or not according to the opinions of individual systematists, and which are founded for the most part upon single characters of doubtful or minor import. In the great majority of cases, however, the most important thing 42 Rhodora [FEBRUARY about each genus, from the standpoint of classification, is its own existence as an entity, not some arbitrary and possibly quite meaningless difference between it and some other group. The genera of Campanulaceae, much as we should like them to consti- tute natural biological groups, are still more or less artificial, de- limited partly for the sake of convenience (we do not know, for example, that the coherent anthers of Symphyandra have any particular phylogenetic significance, but it is convenient and ap- parently natural to assemble under this name all the species having this character), and nothing can improve our system of classification more than full realization of this. If we are to de- pend upon what may be called the method of delimitation of genera by separation, by splitting blocks off the corners of some larger mass, by arbitrary quantitative differences which are easily measured and applied to limited numbers of specimens, then we shall lose sight of the biological implications of classification. In contrast it is possible usually to delimit genera most satisfactorily as it were by accretion, by building around natural centers of population as determined by studies of morphology or by the use of whatever techniques may be available. With emphasis placed upon similarities and affinities, rather than upon differ- ences, it should be possible for systematists to arrive at schemes of classification more generally acceptable to their colleagues and to the general public. The above applies specifically to the Campanulaceae (including the Lobelioideae), but I judge that it is equally applicable to most other plant-families, or perhaps to all of them. Fragaria, for example, is none too solidly founded on morphological grounds; it is, in fact, about as distinct from Potentilla as Triodanis from Campanula. But what could constitute a better genus than Fragaria, homogeneous as it is, and comprising several species all exhibiting the same combinations of traits? Examples of similar cases in other plant-families could be multiplied, but note merely how it applies to Triodanis; again the following quotation is from Wrightia: “Тһе combination of annual habit, deeply divided corolla, capsule longer than wide and opening near the apex, spicate inflorescence, and regular production of cleistogamous flowers at the lower nodes is a unique one, and when found in a relatively large number of species surely points to a genetic dis- 1948] McVaugh,—Triodanis and Specularia 48 continuity that may be called a generic distinction”. The char- acters of Triodanis individually are not particularly strong; each of them (with the possible exception of the pattern and rhythm of the cleistogamy) has its counterpart or near-counterpart in Campanula. There is thus no sharp break between Triodanis and Campanula, but neither is there a sharp break between Aster and Erigeron!; there IS such a hiatus between Triodanis and Specularia, but none between the latter and Campanula. Neither Specularia nor Triodanis can be maintained as genera distinct from Campanula except through primary emphasis on the stature given them by their collective features, but if one wishes he can distinguish technically between the two as follows, understanding that the differentiating characters are quite possibly minor ones which CONFIRM rather than ArrIRM the generic distinction empha- sized by the ensemble: TRIODANIS: Filaments ciliate at base; central flowering axis and those of the main branches spicate; flowers at the lower fertile nodes prevailingly cleistogamous. SPECULARIA: Filaments glabrous; plants normally diffusely branched, the flowers clustered near the tips of the branches or corymbosely aggre- gated at the summit of the plant; flowers all corolliferous. With the above in mind, we may consider some of the morpho- logical characters which together define Triodanis and Specularia, in the light of Professor Fernald’s remarks. Before any detailed consideration I must make public apology for careless presenta- tion in my earlier paper. On pages 13 to 20 of the first volume of Wrightia were set forth what I took to be sufficient technical data and philosophical considerations to justify the acceptance of Triodanis as a genus. To these were added, on pages 20 and 21, synopses to facilitate comparison of the features of Cam- panula, Heterocodon, Specularia, and Triodanis. These synopses emphasized not only differences between the genera but also qualifying and parallel conditions. They were not intended, as Professor Fernald seems to have assumed, to stress individual diagnostic characters; nor were they for use as a key to genera, as their perhaps unfortunate position at the beginning of the section entitled “Systematic Treatment" may have indicated. My own position in the matter was clearly stated, although evi- 1 See Cronquist’s remarks on this, in Brittonia 6: 122-123. 1947. 44 Rhodora [FEBRUARY dently not sufficiently emphasized, on page 20: “16 will be noted [i. e. in the following synopses] that the generic characters of the groups segregated from Campanula are all weak ones, in no case involving strong morphological features which absolutely separate them from the more inclusive genus, but always depending upon combinations of weaker characters which reappear individually in unrelated species of Campanula’. I must make further apology for not describing more precisely what Professor Fernald implies is a sort of neo-Rafinesquian distinction. This is the matter of the quite different types of branching exhibited by species of T'riodanis and Specularia, re- spectively. In contrasting these two groups, I carelessly omitted mention of the rather obvious fact that both branch freely from the very base or near it, when the plants are growing under favor- able conditions. As Professor Fernald infers, this type of branch- ing is to be expected in annual weedy plants, and is of no im- portance as a taxonomic character in this case. Quite different, however, is the branching of the central flowering axis, which is spicate іп Triodanis and corymbosely branched in Specularia. It is true that the growth of lateral branches in Triodanis colora- doensis may obscure the “racemose” condition of the axis, but this last may still be discerned on most of the branches in speci- mens except vigorous old fruiting plants; even in these, as in Professor Fernald's plate designed to show the opposite condition (plate 1050), the *racemose" tendency is evident on the lower branches. It is of course to be remembered that truly racemose branching does not occur in the Campanulaceae proper, the spike of Triodanis being apparently a derived inflorescence-type which is fundamentally determinate, and in which the single-flowered nodes are so because of abortion of potentially active branch- buds below the terminal ones, each solitary axillary flower repre- senting an axillary branch reduced to this extent. Under con- ditions favorable for growth these branches may elongate and produce several flowers, or branch again, excessive stimulation occasionally causing the development of plants suggesting some really different species! The branching of Triodanis, as discussed in Wrightia (1. c. 23-24), follows a definite pattern but evidently 1 As in Campanula americana, a species with a spicate inflorescence very similar to that of Triodanis; see Bartonia 23; 37—39. 1945. 1948] McVaugh,—Triodanis and Specularia 45 is not fundamentally different from that of other campanulaceous genera. It serves none the less as an important diagnostic character if it be remembered that it may be influenced by envi- ronment, although primarily under genetic control. The branching in Specularia (as the genus was restricted in Wrightia, is essentially like that in many other annual campanu- laceous plants. Branches from the upper axils are the rule rather than the exception, so that the flowers are usually in small groups or solitary at the tips of slender branches, the whole form- ing a diffuse or clustered but definitely branched inflorescence, and the terminal flower often being exceeded by the growth of the lateral branches and more or less immersed in the inflores- cence. The “racemose” condition is approached, as it may be in most annual and many perennial species of Campanula, in imperfectly developed plants. Through the kindness of Dr. Charles Baehni, I have seen the Gittard specimen cited by Boissier (Fl. Orient. 3: 959. 1875) as the type of Specularia Speculum, var. racemosa, to which Professor Fernald refers. 'The plant is not a stunted or starved specimen, as I had specu- lated, but one in which the usual lateral branches from the upper part of the main axis are all equally very short (3-5 mm. long) and tipped each with a cluster of 3 or 4 flowers. The resulting inflorescence is “racemose” about to the same extent as that of Solidago Virga-aurea; it is long and slender, with numerous short flowering branches. It is by no means “ut in Sp. falcatá racemosa” as Boissier said, unless one wishes to stress (it seems to me unduly) the homology between the normally reduced, one-flowered branches of the “raceme” of Sp. falcata, and the abnormally reduced, several-flowered branches of this one specinem of Sp. Speculum-Veneris. I take it that the strength or weakness of any genus lies in what its species usually or regularly have in common, not in abnormal plants which may vary markedly in one character or another from their closest relatives. Such aberrant individuals may offer valuable clues in regard to past evolutionary connections between species or genera, or in regard to evolutionary tendencies, but hardly suffice in themselves to determine generic limits in present-day populations. Professor Fernald argues that the mere existence of cleistogamy 46 Rhodora [FEBRUARY in Triodanis is not enough in itself to justify the separation of Triodanis and Specularia. He cites several genera in different plant-families, suggesting that in Utricularia, Panicum, Viola, and Danthonia the mere occurrence of this trait in certain species does not justify the generic segregation of these species from the more inclusive groups. He is of course amply justified in this view, but strict analogy and adherence to his expressed views would then suggest the union of Triodanis not with Specularia but with Campanula, where cleistogamy does occur in some species (as far as I am aware, no one has suggested that these should be separated off as a distinct genus because of this one trait!). It is of course not the mere occurrence of cleistogamy but the unique pattern of its development in Triodanis, when correlated with other characters, that is noteworthy. Many individual plants of T'riodanis coloradoensis, for example, produce all corolliferous flowers, but the many others that show cleistog- amy follow the development-pattern of the other species of the genus, indicating their biological affinity to these rather than to Specularia, in which the approach to the cleistogamous condition appears to be analogous, rather than homologous, to that in Triodanis. In the past the principal supposed distinction between Specu- laria and Campanula has been in the capsule, that of the former genus often having been referred to as cylindric, or oblong, or perhaps most often as linear (the latter by Boissier, l. c. 958, by Bentham & Hooker, 1. c. 562, and by MeVaugh,l. с. 21). Profes- sor Fernald truly points out that there is great variation in the capsules of these species; actually one can find in almost any species of Specularia or Triodanis individual plants which have the supposed (relatively) broader capsules of Campanula, or the narrower ones of the segregate genera. Опе can not with reason remove either genus from Campanula (or separate them from each other) on the basis of capsule-shape. The character is of little use except in descriptive matter, and I regret that my earlier paper did not make this clear even to the superficial reader. It is worth noting, since the recognition or non-recognition of a given genus depends so largely upon tradition and the weight of authority, that in maintaining Triodanis one does not necessarily label himself a disciple of the eccentric Rafinesque. The recog- 1948] McVaugh,—Triodanis and Specularia 47 › nition of the American "Specularias," as a group distinct from the European ones, seems to have begun with DeCandolle (Monographie, p. 47, 351), who felt that the one American species recognized by him constituted a “distinct section" (to which he gave no name). It may be argued, if one cares to resort to a syllogism, that this section occupied a place in DeCandolle’s scheme of classification approximately equivalent to those occu- pied by sections in other genera (e. g. Sect. Edraiantha of Wahlen- bergia, and Sect. III of Phytewma)—sections that were soon recognized as independent genera. The astute Boissier, for example, maintained Edraianthus as a genus in the Flora Orien- talis, and took up George Don’s name Podanthum for what DeCandolle had regarded as a section of Phyteuma. Both Edraianthus and Podanthum (i. e. Asyneuma according to current rules of nomenclature) are now widely accepted as good genera. Whether or not this strengthens the case for the recognition of Triodanis, the fact remains that the group received a formal designation in Endlicher's Genera in 1838 (Specularia, sect. Dysmicodon). Thomas Nuttall, who knew the American flora well and was by no means without judgment, soon elevated this section to generic rank as his genus Dysmicodon!. In support of this view he said: "Nearly allied to Specularia, but with a dif- ferent habit, calyx and seed; and with the lower flowers apetalous and reduced in the number of their parts". In the same paper Nuttall went so far as to propose a second segregate (as he thought from Specularia), comprising one species, Campylocera leptocarpa. This genus he supposed to be founded chiefly upon the unilocular, laterally dehiscent capsules of most of the imperfect flowers. As has previously been explained in Wrightia (pp. 50-51), Rafinesque seems to have *''stolen" the idea for his species Triodanis scabra from Nuttall's annotated specimen, and it is entirely possible that the idea of the genus itself was not original with Rafinesque. Nuttall's genera Dysmicodon and Campylocera were taken up by John Torrey, who was anything but eccentric and who appar- ently espoused Nuttall's proposals with full realization of what he was doing, for he had used the name Specularia in his earlier publications and formally designated the American species as a 1! Trans. Am. Phil. Soc. n.s. 8: 255. 1843. 48 Rhodora [FEBRUARY distinct group, sect. T'riodallus. Torrey seems to have been using Campylocera as late as 1870, if one may judge by his annota- tion on Palmer’s no. 168, Triodanis Holzingeri, now in the U.S. National Herbarium. More widespread recognition and use of the names Dysmicodon and Campylocera was doubtless prevented by the influence of Asa Gray, who published a footnote-monograph on “Specularia”’ in 1876; Campylocera was used by С. C. Parry in a paper pub- lished in 18725, but so far as І am aware no one publicly ques- tioned the integrity of the inclusive Specularia from that time until the days of E. L. Greene. I should like to close this paper with an illustration from another group of the Campanulaceae, the subfamily Lobelioideae, in order to emphasize once more the fact that campanulaceous genera (and most other genera, as far as my observations go) in the great majority are founded not solidly upon strong morpho- logical separations, but solidly upon what appear to be natural combinations of characters, in the tradition of Alphonse DeCan- dolle. Recent opinions estimate the number of genera of Lobelioideae in North and South America together at about 12 to 15 (excluding Cyphioideae)*. From all the others Lysipomia and Downingia stand clearly apart as independent genera differentiated by strong morphological characters. Howellia is a monotypic, aquatic genus of restricted distribution, distinct because of its seeds which are several times larger than in any other known genus of the family. All the remaining lobeliaceous genera (12 according to one estimate) can be referred to Lobelia (those with capsular fruits) or to Centropogon (those with baccate fruits) without significant additions to the morphological features of these genera as currently understood! These minor genera may be founded upon a single character (е. g. Heterotoma) or upon an assemblage of weak characters (e. g. Diastatea); some are doubtless real entities deserving of recognition, others are so weak that hardly more than tradition keeps them alive, but even these border-line 1 Fl. N. Y. 1: 428. 1843. For use of Dysmicodon and Campylocera see Rep. Pac. R. R. Surv. 4: 116. 1857, and Rep. Mex. Bound. Surv. 108. 1859. 2 Proc. Am. Acad. 11: 81—83. 3 Rep. Hayden Surv. 1870 [4th Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. биг. Terr.]: 486. 4 North Am. Flora 32A!: 1-134. 5Ja 1943; Das Pflanzenreich IV. 276b (heft 106): 37—40. 25M y 1943. 1948] Fernald,—Dwarf Shadbush 49 genera can hardly be merged with their supposed relatives until we know more about what a genus really is, and how it is consti- tuted. Triodanis, in my opinion, is as well founded as the aver- age genus in its family, and should be maintained unless we are to have a very severe general reduction in the number of genera recognized in the Campanulaceae. University HERBARIUM, UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN, Ann Arbor, Michigan. A NOVA SCOTIAN DWARF SHADBUSH M. L. FERNALD AMELANCHIER lucida (Fernald), stat. nov. А. stolonifera Wiegand, var. lucida Fernald in Кнорока, xxiii. 267 (1921). When this shrub of sandy or peaty barrens and gravels of Nova Scotia was described I placed it with A. stolonifera Wiegand, not then fully understanding how constant (except in hybrids) is the presence of dense tomentum on the summit of the ovary, this character practically invariable in the following stoloniferous or surculose species in eastern North America: A. alnifolia Nutt., А. humilis Wiegand, А. mucronata Nielsen, А. gaspensis (Wie- gand) Fernald & Weatherby, A. stolonifera Wiegand and A. Fernaldii Wiegand. When the lustrous-leaved shrub of Nova Scotia was discovered by Long and me I wrote: one of the neatest little shad bushes we ever saw, a beautiful shrub with stoloniferous habit, low stature (3-6 dm.) and nearly orbicular dark- green, highly lustrous leaves. Afterward, at Grand Lake, Halifax County, at Springhill Junction in Colchester County, at Middleton in Annapolis County and at various places westward we found it a thor- oughly distinct and dominant shrub of barrens, either dry or wet. In habit it resembles A. stolonifera Wiegand,! a characteristic shrub from Maine to Virginia and in eastern Newfoundland, with dull and pale-green or glaucous foliage and with the summit of the ovary densely tomentose; but this characteristic Nova Scotian shrub with dark, glossy leaves has the summit of the ovary wholly glabrous, though it is sometimes arachnoid or sparsely pubescent. Typical A. stolonifera we found in Nova Scotia, though only once; but the common shrub is so well marked that it should be separated as a variety.—Fernald, l. c. 130 (1921). The dark green and lustrous coriaceous leaves are so unlike those of Amelanchier stolonifera that the shrub can not properly 1 Wiegand in RHopona, xiv. 144 (1912). 50 Rhodora [FEBRUARY be treated as belonging to that species, and the glabrous summit of the ovary is all wrong. Furthermore, the terminal over- wintering buds of A. stolonifera are reddish-brown and only 6 or 7 mm. long. We have no fully developed terminal buds of A. lucida, but à vigorous shoot, collected on September 8, shows a slenderly lance-acuminate yellowish bud essentially 1 ст. long. Autumnal material, most kindly secured for me at the type- locality by Professor Horace G. Perry, has the new leaves already pushing out after a very warm September. So far as the bud- scales show they are like those just noted. Neither do we know the flowers of A. lucida, but the fruit, of which we have an abun- dance, is scarcely that of A. stolonifera. In the latter the mature pedicels are pubescent, the mature hypanthium 3-4 mm. in diameter, the mature sepals recurved. In A. lucida the pedicels are glabrous, the mature hypanthium 5-7 mm. in diameter, the sepals erect. Only two low and strongly stoloniferous species of the genus are recognized in eastern North America, in which the summit of the ovary is glabrous. Опе is the characteristic little A melan- chier obovalis (Michx.) Ashe, which was discussed and illustrated in Кнорока, xliii. 566, pl. 672, fig. З (1941), a colonial species of pinelands from Georgia and Alabama north to eastern Mary- land, southeastern Pennsylvania and southern New Jersey (and at the eastern edge of the Alleghenies in Virginia). Here is the real relationship of A. lucida. From A. obovalis the latter differs in the pale (instead of reddish-brown) terminal overwintering buds; its coriaceous, dark green and lustrous (instead of mem- branaceous, pale green and opaque) leaves; its fruiting raceme with glabrous (instead of pubescent) rachis and pedicels; the longer pedicels 1-2.5 cm. (instead of 3-12 mm.) long; hypanthium 5-7 (instead of 2-3) mm. in diameter; the fruit obviously longer. The other species, found on a remnant of the Atlantic Coastal Plain midway between the northern limit of Amelanchier obovalis and the Nova Scotian area of A. lucida, is the endemic A. nantucketensis Bicknell in Bull. Torr. Bot. Cl. xxxviii. 453 (1911), a species which in its morphological characters is midway between A. obovalis and A. lucida. In outline and texture of mature leaves and diameter of hypanthium it is similar to A. obovalis but the expanding leaves are glabrous or promptly 1948] Feruald,—Dwarf Shadbush Jl glabrate (instead of heavily white-tomentose) beneath; the mature leaves sublustrous above (instead of dull); racemes lax and 2-4.5 cm. long, with glabrous or promptly glabrate rachis and pedicels, the longer pedicels 1-2 cm. long (in A. obovalis the rather dense racemes 1-3 cm. long, the flowering pedicels white-tomentose, the fruiting ones pilose, the longer ones 3-12 mm. long); sepals 2-4 mm. long, soon recurving (in A. obovalis 1-2 mm. long, erect or tardily spreading); petals linear-oblanceo- late, frequently involute (in A. obovalis narrowly elliptical and flat). From Amelanchier nantucketensis the Nova Scotian A. lucida differs in its coriaceous and highly lustrous oblong, broadly elliptie or subrotund (instead of membranaceous and less lus- trous elliptic-oblong to oblong-obovate) leaves 1.5-6.5 сш. long and 1-4 em. broad (instead of only 2-3 em. long and 1.5-2 cm. broad); sepals remaining erect (instead of recurving); hypan- thium 5-7 mm. (instead of 4-5 mm.) in diameter. Although in his monograph of Amelanchier Dr. G. N. Jones treated A. nantucketensis as the nonstoloniferous fastigiate tall shrub or tree, A. canadensis, and A. lucida as one of the many shrubs under the inclusive A. spicata sensu G. №. Jones, not K. Koch, the glabrous summit of the ovary clearly shows that A. lucida does not belong in that miscellaneous complex with the summit of the ovary tomentose. The permanently attached identification-labels on the Gray Herbarium sheets of the dwarf and stoloniferous A. obovalis, with the identifications marked as A. canadensis, indicate that in case of A. obovalis, maintained in his publication by Dr. Jones, there must have been an error in so misidentifying a large number of sheets. As here interpreted, the three dwarf and stoloniferous colonial species with glabrous summits of ovaries make up a series of chiefly Coastal Plain dispersal: A. obovalis following the Coastal Plain (but rarely found inland) from Alabama and Georgia to eastern. Maryland, southeastern Pennsylvania and southern New Jersey; A. nantucketensis isolated on Nantucket, more than 250 miles to the northeast; A. lucida endemic in Nova Scotia. another 250 miles farther to the northeast. This disruption of range suggests derivation in the North off the now submerged continental shelf, a derivation evident in many scores of other cases. 52 Rhodora [FEBRUARY Campytium HaLLERI IN New Brunswicx.—The canyon at Grand Falls, N. B. still proves to be a good collecting ground especially in the hardly accessible places. Here, while working over a group of relatively dry ledges covered with Hygrohypnum palustre (Hedw.) Loeske, the writer again encountered Hypnum fastigiatum Brid. But of still greater interest was a near-by associate, a little golden-green Campylium with recurved leaves. Microscopical examination showed this to be Campylium Halleri (Hedw.) Lindb.: Habeeb 740, on relatively dry ledges in shade, Grand Falls, N. B., July 3, 1947. The writer wishes to make the following correction. In the Acadian Naturalist, Vol. I, No. 4 of Nov. 1944 page 189, the writer listed Leptodictyum trichopodium (Schultz) Warnst. var. Kochii (B. S. & G.) Broth. This should have been Campylium radicale (Beauv.) Grout. 'The species of Campylium collected so far by me in the vicinity of Grand Falls are C. chrysophyllum (Brid.) Bryhn, C. Halleri (Hedw.) Lindb., C. hispidulum (Brid.) Mitt., C. hispidulum var. Sommerfeltii (Myrin) Lindb., C. polygamum (B. S. & G.) Bryhn, C. radicale (Beauv.) Grout, and C. stellatum (Hedw.) Lange & C. Jens.—HrnnaEsRT HABEEB, Grand Falls, New Brunswick. Volume 50, no. 589, consisting of pages 1—20 and plates 1088-1090, was issued 13 January, 1948. Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. March, 1948. No. 591. CONTENTS: Blephilia ciliata (L.) Benth. H. A. Gleason. .................. 53 A Virginian Peltandra. М. E. Fernald. ...... .............. ss. 56 A Hybrid between Shagbark and Bitternut Hickory in southeastern Vermont. Wayne E. Manning. ............... 60 A new Species of Euphorbia from Oklahoma. U. Т. Waterfall. .. 63 A dangerous weedy Polygonum in Pennsylvania. Edwin T. Moul. 64 A List of Freshwater Algae from New Brunswick. Herbert Habeeb and Francis Drouet. ...................... 67 Another New Hampshire Station for Subularia aquatica. ZoanneeBhlnittand Ac Re Hododon d TEE ccu 72 The New England Botanical Club, Jne. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—a monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. RHODORA INDEX; REQUEST FOR CORRECTIONS.—A cumulative in- dex to the first fifty volumes of Rhodora is being prepared. Any user of RHODORA who has noted errors in the indices to the various volumes will greatly aid in the enterprise by sending the correc- tions to the EDITORS. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. ПІ. Тһе Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton, Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. {Кроёфога JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. March, 1948. No. 591. BLEPHILIA CILIATA (L.) BENTH. H. A. GLEASON In the process of altering generic limits, which necessarily entails a relocation of species, botanical writers have often ne- elected to make the new binomials. Well known instances are to be found in Bentham and Hooker’s Genera Plantarum, where the necessary binomials are almost entirely omitted. Neverthe- less, they appear in the Index Kewensis as if they had been made and are credited to Bentham and Hooker. According to a com- mon custom, we still credit them to these men but cite the Kew Index as the place of publication. It is only an assumption on our part when we write В. &. Н. as the authority. How do we know whether they would have used these specific epithets or not? Our assumption, based on other experience with Bentham or Hooker, is probably correct, but the fact remains that they did not make the transfer and that Jackson did it for them. Blephilia ciliata illustrates another instance of a citation based on an assumption. It is and has been regularly cited to (L.) Raf. in all recent standard works. Before double citations came into vogue it was referred directly to Rafinesque. Its history is simple. The genus Blephilia was established by Rafinesque in 1819 in a long critique of Nuttal's Genera. He wrote: “7. Monarda ciliata must form a new genus, which we call Blephilia, distin- guished by an unequal calyx." This sentence may be accepted 54 Rhodora [Marcu as a foundation for the genus and for the designation of M. ciliata as its type species, but the binomial B. ciliata does not appear. During the next fourteen years Eaton and Torrey refused to recognize the genus and maintained one or the other of its two species under Monarda. | In 1833 Bentham took up Elephilia in his monograph of the Labiatae and admitted as one species В. ciliata, which he credited to Rafinesque in the Jour. de Physique, ete. Here is the full text of Rafinesque's statement in that place: *Le type de ce genre est la Monarda ciliata, Linn." Again the binomial does not appear. Bentham's reasoning is easily understood by us, since we fre- quently adopt it ourselves. He merely concluded that Rafinesque would have used the epithet ciliata, but simply did not, possibly not considering it necessary. Rafinesque has always been con- sidered an eccentric or erratic botanist; could Bentham read his mind correctly? Let us see. I do not know that Rafinesque mentioned the genus again during the thirteen years following its sketchy publication. But in 1832 he published in the Atlantic Journal (p. 146) a criticism of some of Torrey’s work, in which appears this brief statement: “Blephilia becki Raf. monarda ciliata 'T." Here he definitely showed that he had no intention of using ciliata as the specific epithet for the plant. In 1838 appeared the last part of Rafinesque’s New Flora, with two new species of Blephilia actually described. Under the first one, B. brevipes, he says: “Опе of the sp. blended in Monarda hirsuta, the real sp. is my Bl. nepetoides, a 3d is the next." The next was his second new species, B. lanceolata. Note that the "real" species in the original M. hirsuta is “тпу Bl. nepetoides;" he changed its specific name. By “blended” he clearly meant the mixture of three species under one name; in sorting them out he made new names for all of them. Then he goes ahead to say, in almost identical words: “There are also 3 sp. blended in Monarda ciliata, my Bl. pratensis, brevifolia and heterophylla.” Clearly and obviously, Rafinesque intended to give new names to all three, again discarding ciliata as completely as he had dis- carded hirsuta in the preceding sentence. 1948] Gleason,—Blephilia ciliata бә Bentham’s assumption of Rafinesque’s intention was therefore erroneous. So are our assumptions when we credit this binomial to him. Не never made it and disclaimed intention of making it. The correct citation for our familiar plant is (L.) Benth. Incidentally, it may be mentioned that B. hirsuta is credited to Torrey by Britton & Brown, Small, and Rydberg. As a matter of fact, Torrey used the name Monarda hirsuta for the species; the combination B. hirsuta does not appear, and the genus Blephilia is cited only as a synonym. The citation in Gray’s Manual as (Pursh) Benth. is correct. All of this serves to bring up the general question as to how far we may go in using the name of another botanist in making or transferring names. May I describe a species and credit it to Linnaeus, on the assumption that he would have considered it a species and would have selected this epithet for it if he had ever known the plant? It would certainly gratify my vanity to read the citation Miconia ficta L. ex Gl. and it would open a way for scores of our modern precisionists to show their intimate spiritual communion with the past masters of botany. Now I have taken one of the old masters into partnership and have described a few species of melastomes which I have accred- ited to Cogn. and G1., although Cogniaux had been dead a quarter of a century. But the circumstances were different. Here was a sheet of preserved specimens, on which Cogniaux had noted the plant as a “sp. nov.," often with a specific name also added. When I examined the same plant I agreed that it was undescribed; ] proceeded to draw up and publish a description, using Cogni- aux's name for it, but adding my own name to his in the citation, since I was alone responsible for the wording of the description and for remarks on the probable relationship of the plant to other species. It seems to me that we have no right to attribute a new name or anew combination to another author unless we have clear and indisputable evidence of his intentions. I regret saying this, because it might easily induce some of our professional nomen- claturists to search the literature for combinations made on as- sumptions similar to those of Bentham, and to make new names accordingly. THE New York BOTANICAL GARDEN 56 Rhodora [Marcu A VIRGINIAN PELTANDRA M. L. FERNALD In Ruopora, xlii. 360 and 430—432, plate 627 (1940), I pointed out the many striking characters which distinguish a species of Peltandra of bottomlands and wooded swamps of southeastern Virginia, thence locally southward (characteristic material before me from upland Georgia and from Florida). Whereas the com- mon and wideranging P. virginica (L.) Schott & Endl. has the green or barely pale-bordered undulate-margined spathe tightly inroled around the white or whitish spadix with staminate flowers usually extending to the tip, the plant of Prince George and Sussex Counties (presumably in adjacent counties) of south- eastern Virginia has the limb of the spathe green only near the middle of the back, the open to spreading white border 1-1.7 em. wide each side of the middle band, the orange-yellow spadix ex- posed and with the terminal 1-3 centimeters naked. The spathe of P. virginica at anthesis is (1.1-)1.3-2.5 dm. long, in the plant of southeastern Virginia 0.9-2 dm. long. In P. virginica the lower fourth of the flowering spathe is continuous with the limb, the latter in fruit rotting away and persisting as а beak-like rem- nant at the summit of the fruiting spathe which is 3-6 cm. long!. In the problematic plant of southeastern Virginia there is a strong constriction or stoutish neck at the base of the flaring limb, this constricted portion soon deliquescing and by circumscission leaving a truncated fruiting spathe 5.5-8 cm. long. In P. vir- ginica the thoroughly dried green to amber berries are 6-12 mm. long; in the southeastern Virginian plant 1-1.5 cm. long. In short, the two species are in almost every character distinct but, whereas the leaf-blade of P. virginica is excessively variable, that of the new species is relatively constant in outline. At one sta- tion of the latter, along a woodland creek, where Long and I were collecting the plant, a game-warden stopped his car to investigate 1 Peltandra Tharpii Barkley in Madroño, vii. 131, t. 21 (fig. at left) (1944) was separated as a new Texan species because of its ''scapes . . . recurving; spathe green, 3.5—4 cm. long, 1.5-2.5 cm. broad, completely enveloping the spadix". As shown by his illustration, the description was based on a fruiting plant with the regularly re- curving scape, and the lower fourth of the original spathe, the small insert showing the characteristic short beak of the fruiting spathe of P. virginica. The leaves, as shown in the plate and in an isotype before me, are those of P. virginica, forma hasti- folia Blake in Ruovora, xiv. 105, v. 94, fig. 3 (1912). 1948] Fernald,—A Virginian Peltandra 57 the obvious poaching going on within sight of the road. When we showed him the collection of white spathes with the orange- yellow spadices, suggesting miniature calla-lilies, his prompt and rather contemptuous reply was simply: “Oh! gathering water- lilies”? Nobody would think of so denominating the tight green and far from ornamental spathes of P. virginica. When I described and illustrated this novel plant of south- eastern Virginia, being then completely overwhelmed by the mass of detailed study in all directions before I could satisfactorily answer the thousands of insistent queries, “How soon will the Manual be done?" (each accompanied by some such note as “1 am inclosing à stamped envelope; please send me a list of all the changes you are making. I need them by the end of next week”), I tried to pass this problem over to others, writing: “If someone will volunteer to collate the material and reach a decision I shall be greatly relieved". But the boomerang returns. After eight years, having had no relief, not even a post-card on the subject, it is necessary to spend four days clearing the problem myself. Fortunately, Rafinesque’s nine reputed species seem to contain nothing which can definitely be associated with the plant with white limb and golden spadix. The only one of them which might have to be considered is P. Walteri (Ell.) Raf. New Fl. N. Am. 1. 88 (1836): 7. PEUTANDRA WALTERI Raf. Arum sagittifolium Walter, Arum Walteri Elliot. Leaves triangular sagittate, angles divaricate acute. In Carolina, not well described, but very near P. latifolia, said to be larger than P. hastata with similar flowers. Rafinesque’s diagnosis was surely copied directly from Elliott’s (“not well described") very brief one of his Arum '*WarrERI?", based on A. sagittifolium sensu Walt., not L. Furthermore, Elliott was separating it from A. virginicum, which had “Spathe . Slightly repand or undulate along the margin, closely em- bracing the spadix”, only by the shape of the leaf, for “In the spathe and spadix I have noticed no difference". In other words, Peltandra Walteri was nothing but one of the many leaf-forms of P. virginica. As to the identity of the basic Arum virginicum L. Sp. Pl. 966 (1753), the diagnosis was the briefest and most inconclusive possible: 58 Rhodora [Marcu virginicum. 13. ARUM acaule, foliis hastato-cordatis acutis: angulis obtusis. Hort. cliff. 434 [i.e. 435]. *Gron. virg. 112. Habitat in Virginia. 2 Hortus Cliffortianus gives nothing more clarifying. The leaf of the Clayton plant, no. 228, described by Gronovius and pre- served at the British Museum of Natural History, is of the typical form of Peltandra virginica as interpreted by Blake in RHODORA, xiv. 104 (1912), but the “репе viridi" of Clayton's account, following the Gronovian diagnosis, can have been based only on the green spathe tightly rolled around the spadix. The identity of P. virginica seems to be clear. I do not now hesitate to describe PELTANDRA luteospadix, sp. nov., P. virginicae similis; spathae margine lacteo expanso 1-1.7 cm. lato; spadice luteo apice sterili; limbo deinde circumscissile, spatho fructifero truncato 5.5-8 cm. longo; fructibus siccatis 1-1.5 cm. longis.— P. virginica, southern representative, Fernald in КнорокА, xlii. 360, 430, tab. 627 (1940), where essential characters are noted. TYPE from bottom- land-swamp, Nottoway River, southwest of Homeville, Sussex County, VIRGINIA, June 18, 1939, Fernald & Long, no. 10,179 in Herb. Gray; isorvprE in Herb. Phil. Acad. Other numbers from Virginia, of which duplicates were sent to various herbaria, are: Sussex Co.: Three Creek, southwest of Grizzard, no. 10,176; Jones Hole Swamp, west of Coddyshore, nos. 10,177 and 11,279; Assamoosick Swamp, northeast of Homeville, no. 10,178. PRINCE GEORGE Co.: Powell's Creek, Garysville, no. 8178. From farther south are the following: Booth's Bottoms, near Sandy Creek, near Athens, GEORGIA, Perry, Strahan & Sublett, no. 797. FLonipa, without further data, Chapman. Although more clearly related to Peltandra virginica in its large green leaves, large and somewhat coriaceous spathe, coarse and long spadix and large green or greenish berries, P. luteospadix shares some characters with the southern P. sagittifolia (Michx.) Morong.! The latter, however, is a relatively small plant, with ! Unfortunately, through the bibliographic method of the original Index Kewersis and those who have followed it, this little southern species appears in Small's and other works as Peltandra glauca (Ell) Feay, with the synonyms “Р. alba Raf. P. sagittifolia (Mich.) Morong not Raf." To be sure, Index Kewensis gives under Peltandra the entry: ''sagittaefolia Rafin. in Journ. Phys. Ixxxix. (1819) 102 = Xan- thosoma sagittaefolium’’; but, had Small taken the trouble to look up the reference to Rafinesque, he would have found no such combination there made. Michaux, Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 187 (1803) clearly described the small southern species as Calla sagitti- folia, with no reference whatever to the wholly different Arum sagittifolium Walt. 1948] Fernald,—4A Virginian Peltandra 59 small glaucous leaves and much smaller spathe, spadix and red berries. The very thin white blade of the spathe is white through- out and not nearly as long as in P. luteospadir, but the base of the blade is constricted or forming a neck, and the small spadix is yellow. Although it is conceivable that P. luteospadix arose in the far-distant past through crossing of P. virginica and P. sagit- tifolia, the northern limit of the latter seems to be in Onslow County, North Carolina, fully 140 miles south of the concen- trated area of the constant and freely fruiting P. luteospadix in southeastern Virginia. In the latter region the new species flowers later than does P. virginica in other parts of eastern Virginia and North Carolina. The freshly flowering material of P. luteospadiz was collected after the middle of June. The freshly flowering material of P. virginica from Virginia and eastern North Carolina before me shows a flowering period there begin- ning in late April or early May. (see above) nor to the tropical American Arum sagittaefolium L. Sp. Pl. 966 (1753) which is generally considered to belong to Xanthosoma (1 decline to sidetrack myself into untanghng the nomenclature there; Index Wewensis gives citations for three species called by the editors X. sagittifolium). Ventenat in Roemer, Arch. 112: 347 (1801—the title-page date, although J. W. says 1800), took up the genus Caladium, which, shortly before, he had defined in his Descr. Pl. Jard. Cels. t. 30 (1801), and on p. 351 he had a species, C. sagittaefolium, based on Jacquin, Hort, Bot. Vindob. (73) t. 157 (1770), Jacquin correctly calling the plant, beautifully illustrated, Arum sagittae- folium L. and stating that it came from tropical America. It isa Xanthosoma. The first reference in Index Kewensis under this Caladium sagittaefolium is “Vent. Jard. Cels. sub t. 30”, followed by the correct reference for the binomial, “et in Roem. Arch.", etc. The latter reference leads directly to a discussion by Ventenat of the genus and to the binomial; but the former reference leads to the mere citation of a list of 8 species of Arum which, in addition to the properly combined C. bicolor (Ait.) Vent., constitute the genus. The binomial was not there made. Now, returning to the reputed Peltandra sagittaefolia or sagittifolia "Rafin". of Index Kewensis and of Small, it is clear that Rafinesque made no such combination in the place cited; it was wrongly ascribed to him by the editors of J. K. Rafinesque, discussing his genus Peltandra in Journ. Phys. Ixxxix. 103 (not 102 as given by I. K.), simply said: “Гез Calladium sagittaefolium et C. virginicum se rapportent à ce genre; mais je le base sur une nouvelle espéce P. undulata”, which was described in some detail from "État de New-York' and is inseparable from P. virginica (L.) Schott & Endl. Caladium sagittaefolium, cited by Rafinesque, was, of course, the tropical American Xanthosoma and had nothing to do with Сайа sagittifolia Michx. Аз I understand the nomen- clature of the latter it is as follows: PELTANDRA SAGITTIFOLIA (Michx.) Morong in Mem. Torr. Bot. Cl. v. 102 (1894), as sagittaefolia. Calla sagittifolia Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 187 (1803). Arum sagitti- folium (Michx.) Pursh. Fl. Am. Sept. 299 (1814), not A. sagittaefolium L. Caladium sagittifolium? Nutt. Gen. ii. 222 (1818), not C. sagittaefolium (L.) Vent. Caladium glaucum ? ЕП. Sk. ii. 631 (1824). P. alba Raf. New Fl. N. Am. i. 88 (1836). Xan- thosoma sagittifolium sensu Chapm. Fl. So. U. S. 441 (1860), not Schott. P. glauca (Ell) Feay ex Wood, Class-bk. 669 (1861). 60 Rhodora [Marcu A HYBRID BETWEEN SHAGBARK AND BITTERNUT HICKORY IN SOUTHEASTERN VERMONT Wayne E. MANNING In the fall of 1944, while searching for sweet pignut south of Brattleboro, Vermont, I found a large tree whose 4-valved fruit looked like Carya ovalis. 'The bud-scales of one of four small trees at the base of the large one were, however, valvate as in C. cordiformis, but brown as in C. ovalis. This group of trees ap- pears to be the hybrid X C. Laney Sarg. var. CHATEAUGAYENSIS Sarg. between C. cordiformis and C. ovata, though it is very close to X C. Demareei Palmer (Journ. Arn. Arb. 18: 135-136, 1937), & hybrid between C. ovalis and C. cordiformis. Collections have been made of fall condition, fruit, winter buds, opening buds, and early summer condition of the trees; a speci- men has been deposited at the Arnold Arboretum. The trees are growing on а rocky wooded hillside 60 feet above state road number 30 on its western side, 7 miles north of the Mass.-Vermont line, and 2 miles north of the dam at Vernon, Vermont. A large tree of characteristic C. cordiformis is growing 90 feet north of the hybrid, and a fallen one is close to the hybrid. A small tree of C. ovata is located about 300 ft. further north. No tree of C. ovalis was observed near by, but a thorough search has not been made; furthermore, many of the original trees have been removed by hurricane, fire, and cutting. Pignuts, probably C. ovalis, have been reported growing along the Connecticut River in Vermont as far north as Bellows Falls. The central tree of the cluster is large, about 60 feet high, with rather flattened lower trunk, 12 inches diameter one way, 16 the other, this trunk forking 10 feet above the ground into two large trunks. The first horizontal branches are 20 feet above the ground. The bark of most of the upper part of the trunk is light gray and smooth; on the lower part it is slightly roughened with shallow diamond-shaped areas as in young trees of Frazinus americana or in C. cordiformis. The four small trees around the larger one are probably root suckers from the main tree; the root of one of the former is clearly connected with a strong root of the larger tree. The leaflets are usually 7 in number, occasionally 5, narrow, without tufts of hairs on the serrations such as those that occur 1948] Manning,—Hybrid Hickory in Vermont 61 in C. ovata, essentially glabrous; small clusters of hairs occur frequently in the axils of the side veins on the lower surface, and scattered solitary hairs occur on some strong side veins. The terminal buds are much larger than the lateral ones, being about 9-12 mm. long, ovate-lanceolate, with a long drawn out point much as in C. cordiformis; this tip is frequently curved. The consistency and general shape of the outermost bud-scales still remaining by late August are much the same as in the bitternut hickory, but greenish brown in color, ovate-lanceolate, rather thick, barely acute, longer than the inner scales; one or both outer scales may fall off by November, exposing the finely grayish hairy inner scales. The outermost brown hardened bud-scales with narrow hairy tips found in С. ovata and С. ovalis are absent. There is a total of about six bud-scales; both inner and outer ones have few to several scattered yellow glands. The lateral buds are small, tight, greenish to yellowish brown, becoming shining chestnut brown, quite different in appearance from either C. cordiformis or C. ovalis. The bud-scales are valvate, coriaceous, the two exposed ones meeting along a line in front and back, fre- quently with a raised ridge at the junction of the bud-scales along the back of the bud. The bud-scales have several to many yellow glands on the surface, but the general color is not yellow. On some twigs in certain years when the terminal bud is absent because of development of flowers, the buds all seem small and chestnut brown, and the buds resemble those of X C. Demareev. Opening lateral buds (in a pseudoterminal position) show usually two pairs of bud-scales, the outer ones persistent, remaining small and brown, the inner ones somewhat accrescent, becoming comparatively short, broad, rather thin, obtuse, green (up to 17-20 mm. X 4-7 mm.). The bud-seale scars, on branches de- veloped from lateral buds, show two sets of opposite, compara- tively high, essentially glabrous scars much as in C. cordiformis. Opening terminal buds were not observed; few terminal buds seemed to mature during the season of 1944, at least on the branches seen by the writer. Bud-scale scars on branches de- veloped from terminal buds show about six scars, rather close, but each scar is distinct, comparatively high, much as in C. cordiformis, and not forming a ring of much crowded narrow indefinite lines as in C. ovata. The fruit is medium, 4-valved almost to the base, the valves rather thin, 1-144 mm. thick, 62 Rhodora [Marcu rough, warty, somewhat wing-margined. The nut is rather ovate, flattened, not ridged or slightly ridged to near the base, rather truncate at base with a central depression, drawn out at the apex as in C. cordiformis, the shell somewhat thicker than that of this species (1 mm.) with a small cavity in each of the four dorsal internal ridges. The meat is corrugated as in that of C. cordiformis, and presumably bitter. This is to be expected, with a tree of С. cordiformis near by. In the sweet pignut the outer bud-scale of the lateral buds is sac-like, probably formed by the fusion of two lateral scales, usually shorter than the bud, open in front or often at the top exposing the inner grayish tomentose scales; there are 3 or more “pairs” of scales, the outer persistent, the inner accrescent, be- coming long, broad, thin, green. In the shagbark the lateral buds may be similar to those described for the pignut, or the inner bud-scales may be exposed, the outer bud-scales being much shorter than the bud; the bud-scales are strongly accrescent, be- coming large, prominent and petaloid. In both the sweet pignut and the shagbark the nut lacks cavities in the shell or the outer parts of the partitions. In C. cordiformis there is usually only one pair of exposed yellow bud-scales, the bud-scales becoming in the spring rather elongate, narrow, recurved; the cross section of the nut shows a large dark brown cavity in each of the four dorsal internal ridges. Thus the general aspect of the hybrid in spring and summer is that of C. cordiformis, with its smooth bark and 7 narrow leaflets, but the buds are not yellow. In the fall and winter the color of the buds and the roughness and dehiscence of the fruit resemble these features in C. ovalis, but the bud-scales are valvate, and the terminal buds are slender and long-pointed. In size the buds resemble those of C. ovata. "The opening lateral buds are inter- mediate between the conditions in C. ovata or C. ovalis and C. cordiformis, but are nearer to those of the last species. Previous collections of X C. Laneyi and its variety chateau- gayensis, as represented at the Arnold Arboretum, are from Summertown, Ontario; Chateauguay, Quebec; Rochester, N. Y; Lancaster, Pa.; Millerstown, Pa. BUCKNELL UNIVERSITY, Lewisburg, Pennsylvania 1948] Waterfall,— New Species of Euphorbia 63 A NEW SPECIES OF EUPHORBIA FROM OKLAHOMA U. T. WATERFALL While botanizing the Waynoka sand dunes in northwestern Oklahoma the author recently collected a prostrate Euphorbia unlike any species with which he was familiar. It is evidently in the subgenus Chamaesyce as defined by Wheeler, but is like none of the species included in his monograph!. It seems to be a quite distinct species characterized by its large glabrous angular fruits, long smooth roundish seeds with large caruncles, and its di- morphic involucres. EUPHORBIA CARUNCULATA sp. nov. Planta annua, glabra, decumbens, ramosa; folis oppositis, laminis integris, elliptico- ovatis (ca. 1.3 сш. longis et 0.6-0.8 mm. latis) vel oblongo- spatulatis et minoribus, petiolis 3-6 mm. longis; stipulis lanceo- latis vel lineari-lanceolatis, integris vel 2-3-partitis, segmentis linearibus vel lineari-subulatis; involucris dimorphis: (1) involu- cris cylindro-obconicis (са. З mm. longis, 0.8 mm. latis ad basin et 1.0-1.2 mm. ad apices), lobis fimbriato-ciliatis, glandulis 4, ca. 3 mm. latis, exappendiculatis, antheris abortivis; (2) involucris hemisphaericis vel hemisphaerico-campanulatis; lobis fimbriato- ciliatis; glandulis 4, stipitatis, appendiculatis; glandulis cum ap- pendiculis 1.3-1.5 mm. longis, 0.8-1.5 mm. latis; appendiculis albis, ca. 1 mm. longis; staminibus fertilibus; capsulis glabris angularibus, 5-6 mm. longis, 4-5 mm. latis; stylis 0.5-0.6 mm. longis, bilobis, lobis ca. 0.2 mm. longis; seminibus non-angulari- bus, laevibus, 3.8-4.5 mm. longis, ca. 2 mm. latis, carunculis at- tenuatis, 0.5 mm. vel 0.8 mm. longis. EUPHORBIA CARUNCULATA n. sp. Plant annual, decumbent; stems branched, glabrous, somewhat succulent, enlarged at the nodes; leaves opposite, blades entire, slightly inequilateral, the larger ones 1.1-1.4 em. long and 0.6-0.8 ст. broad on petioles 3 to 6 mm. long; upper leaves reduced and relatively elongated becoming spatulate or rhombie-spatulate; stipules lanceolate to linear-lanceolate, usually 2- to 3-parted, divisions sometimes linear-subulate, tardily deciduous; involucres dimorphic: (1) in- volucres cylindric-campanulate, about 3 mm. long, 0.8 mm. wide at the base to 1.0 or 1.2 mm. wide at the top, glabrous outside and pubescent inside, margins of the lobes ciliate-pubescent; glands small, 0.2-0.3 mm. in diameter, without petaloid append- ages; stamens few, abortive; stamineal bracts distinct, branching, involucre mostly filled with the fleshy gynophore; (2) involucres 1 Wheeler, L. C. Euphorbia Subgenus Chamaesyce in Canada and the United States. Ruopora 43: 97-154, 168-205, 223-286. 1941. 64 Rhodora [Marcu hemispherical to hemispherical-campanulate, lobes fimbriate- ciliate on the margins; glands 4, stipitate, appendaged; glands and petaloid appendages 1.3-1.5 mm. long and 0.8-1.5 mm. wide, appendages usually constituting from 24 to 34 of the total dimen- sions, appendages yellowish-white; stamens fertile; stamineal bractlets divided near the summit, pubescent; fruit glabrous, angular, large (5-6 mm. long and 4-5 mm. broad), widest a little above the base and tapering to the blunt apex which may ap- proach 2 mm. in width, reflexed when mature, gynophore gla- brous; seeds 3.8-4.5 mm. long, ca. 2 mm. broad near the distal end, gradually tapering through about three-fourths of their length, then more abruptly tapering and attenuate into a caruncle 0.5-0.8 mm. long; seed flattened, but non-angular and with a smooth seed-coat.—Typr: Waterfall and Goodman’s 4519 from drifting sand, north of the Cimarron River, near Highway no. 281 on the Waynoka sand dunes, Woods County, Oklahoma, Oct. 11, 1947. Түре deposited in the Bebb Herbarium of the University of Oklahoma. Isoryres are in the Gray Herbarium, and in the herbaria of the New York Botanical Garden and the Missouri Botanical Garden. Associates of Euphorbia carunculata include: Reverchonia arenaria, Oenothera latifolia and Heliotropium convolvulaceum. Where the sand dunes are more stabilized Calamovilfa gigantea is common, it being the principal stabilizer. Associated with this stage, or its transition to higher stages, we found Lygodesmia rostrata abundant, at least locally. Calamovilfa gives way to such climax species as Andropogon scoparius, A. Hallii and Artemisia filifolia on the more stabilized dunes. DEPARTMENT OF PLANT SCIENCES UNIVERSITY OF OKLAHOMA, NorMAN, OKLAHOMA A DANGEROUS WEEDY POLYGONUM IN PENNSYLVANIA Epwin Т. Мото, In the late summer of 1946 a specimen of a strange Polygonum for Pennsylvania was sent for identification to Dr. John M. Fogg, Jr. at the University of Pennsylvania Herbarium. It was found growing in a neglected nursery belonging to Mr. Joseph B. Gable at Stewartstown, York County, Pennsylvania, where it had be- come a most troublesome weed. 1948] Moul,—A dangerous weedy Polygonum 65 It has been identified as Polygonum perfoliatum L., a native of India, China, Manchuria, Korea, Formosa, Japan and the Philippines. The identity has been checked with specimens at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and specimens at the Gray Herbarium at Harvard University. The plant made its first appearance in the nursery about ten years ago, when some holly seeds sent from Japan were planted and it came up with the holly. The owner of the nursery became interested in the plant and allowed it to grow. Later in the season, when it produced brilliant china-blue berry-like “fruit,” he became more interested in it for its beauty and allowed it to reproduce itself the next year. Since then it has vigorously spread from its original place until it now covers much of the area between the trees in the orchard, the edges of the lanes and the spaces between the nursery rows. Where it has become established it maintains an almost pure stand, choking all other herbaceous plants. This Polygonum belongs to the Echinocaulon group. It is a long trailing vine growing to a maximum length of 10 to 12 feet. It forms a dense tangled mat over the ground or climbs into the lower branches of any available tree. Тһе cover thus formed kills all herbaceous plants over which it trails. Thick mats of Lonicera japonica Thunb. were completely dead under the tangle of Polygonum. Sambucus canadensis L. and species of Rubus were overgrown and killed by the competition. The tangle in the lower branches of apple trees was thick enough to cover the leaves and cause some defoliation. It seems obvious that the leaves of the Polygonum are the chief factor in this struggle for existence as the roots are few in number, fibrous, weak and do not penetrate the soil very deeply. The stem of the plant is weak, but wiry and covered with re- curved spines about З mm. long. 16 is difficult to collect a proper specimen due to the manner in which the stems intertwine and hook themselves together. The leaves are deltoid, placed al- ternately on the stem and becoming smaller toward the apex of the plant. At each node is a perfoliate cordate stipule varying from 1 cm. to 2 cm. in diameter. The flowers are in small capitate heads. The flower-color is usually pink, although there is a wide variation in the intensity 66 Rhodora [Marcu of the color. When the achenes are mature, the calyces turn a bright china-blue in color and make a very attractive cluster against the yellowing foliage of the plant in autumn. The achenes are large, measuring 4 mm., globose and shiny black in color. They are shed quite readily when the plant is touched and many of them had germinated and new plants had started to grow in October of 1946 when I visited the nursery. Mr. Jack Swartley, who showed me around, stated that these new plants would be killed by the frost, but some seeds would winter over in the litter and germinate next spring. Realizing that this plant had become a serious pest, Mr. Gable tried to eradicate it by using a commerical weed killer, 2-4D, but it proved ineffective. The concentration used is not known. The Japanese beetle (Popillia japonica) does more damage to the weed during the time of its active above-ground feeding than the weed killer, but after the peak of beetle infestation has passed the plants recover rapidly and continue to grow and reproduce through the mild weather of autumn until late October or early November. To date, the Polygonum has spread to only two neighboring farms. Vigorous and prompt action should be taken to eradicate it while it is confined to this small area, lest it become a worse pest than Japanese honeysuckle, with no hope of ever completely wiping it out. Inquiries addressed to most of the larger herbaria have yielded only one reference to a former collection of this plant in the United States. Dr. Joseph Ewan of the U. S. D. A. Plant In- dustry Station in Beltsville, Maryland, writes that “Polygonum perfoliatum did appear at the Glenn Dale Introduction Garden, Maryland, at a site where Meliosa seed from Nanking, China, had been planted. The Meliosa failed to grow but the Polygonum appeared; this now comprises W. Cowgill, Feb. 15, 1937, and March 5, 1937, but was evidently eradicated by the usual weeding activities and did not persist at this location." Specimens of the plant are deposited at the University of Pennsylvania Herbarium. BOTANY DEPARTMENT, UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA 1948] Habeeb and Drouet,—List of Freshwater Algae 67 A LIST OF FRESHWATER ALGAE FROM NEW BRUNSWICK HERBERT HABEEB AND FRANCIS DROUET That very little has been done with the freshwater algae of New Brunswick is common knowledge. Accordingly, while home on vacation, one of the authors managed to make a fairly representative collection of freshwater algae from the vicinity of Grand Falls, New Brunswick. The collections were made during the period extending from the latter part of June to mid-August, 1947—all within an easy walking distance of Grand Falls. The collection numbers listed below are those of Herbert Habeeb. On several occasions Herbert Habeeb was accompanied in the field by the Grand Falls High School Principal, Mr. John Cald- well, an ardent student of the microscope. The determinations were all made by Francis Drouet. The absence of such genera as Mougeotia and Oedogonium from the list does not indicate that they are absent from the local flora, but that they were not found in fruit or ripe fruit—and hence were indeterminable. The diatom, desmid, and Chara specimens re- main to be determined, and it is hoped that they will be included in a future list of additional species. Complete sets of the specimens are in the possession of the Cryptogamie Herbarium, Chicago Natural History Museum, and in the herbarium of Herbert Habeeb at Grand Falls. ANACYSTIS RUPESTRIS (Lyngb.) Dr. & Daily. COLLECTION Numsers: 10063. 10206 in part. Hasrrats: Wet ground, brook- side. Amidst moss on canyon wall. ANABAENA INAEQUALIS B. & F. 10081. Dried-up water course in a pasture with sterile Oedogontum. AMPHITHRIX JANTHINA B. & F. 10159 іп part. 10310 in part. Seraped off boulder in stream, and off wet ledge. Apiocystis BRAUNIANA Nag. 10305. With sterile Oedo- gonium sp. in a rock-ledge pool. BATRACHOSPERMUM MONILIFORME Roth. 10028. 10036. An- chored in cool moving water. BOTRYDIUM GRANULATUM (L.) Grev. 10161 in part. 10182. 10186 in part. Baseball diàmond. Damp mud of road rut. CALOTHRIX JULIANA B. & F. 10034. Crust covering clinkers in brook. 68 Rhodora [Marcu CALOTHRIX PARIETINA B. & F. 10033 in part. 10143 in part. 10145 in part. 10152. 10302. On rocks in brook. Covering usually xerophytic ground. On bottom of dry rock-ledge pool. CHAMAESIPHON POLONICUS (Rostaf.) Hansg. 10159 in part. Scraped off boulder in stream. CHAETOPHORA ELEGANS (Roth) Ag. 10024. Gelatinous spots on rocks in brooklet. CHLOROCOCCUM HUMICOLA (Kütz.) Rabenh. 10127. On dead wood in shade. CHLOROTYLIUM CATARACTARUM Kütz. 10033 in part. 10153 in part. 10222. Crust on rocks in brooklets. CLADOPHORA CRISPATA (Roth) Kütz. 10050. 10061. 10151. 10183 in part. 10209. 10213. 10308. 10313 in part. Amidst stones and rocks in shallow parts of brooklets. Attached to sides of rock-ledge pools. CLADOPHORA GLOMERATA (L.) Kütz. 10270. Attached to ledge in à rapid-flowing streamlet. CYLINDROSPERMUM LICHENIFORME B. & F. 10118. 10124. On ground. Shaded lawn. CYLINDROSPERMUM MAJUS В. & Е. 10170. On damp mud in a swamp. CYLINDROSPERMUM MUSCICOLA B. & К. 10298. On damp lawn. е DicHorHRIX BAvERIANA B. & Е. 10261. Wet ledge at edge of rock pool. DicHorHRIX GYPSOPHILA B. & F. 10148 in part. 10149. 10265 in part. 10267 in part. In trickling water on wet ledges. DRAPARNALDIA PLUMOSA (Vauch.) Ag. 10037. 10134. 10225 in part. On rocks in moving water. In a water barrel at a spring. FISCHERELLA AMBIGUA (B. & F.) Gom. 10162. Exposed soil of ball diamond. GLOEOCAPSA ALPICOLA (Lyngb.) Born. 10057. 10283. 10314 in part. On blackish-colored wet to damp ledges, in shade. Gloeocapsa membranina (Menegh.) Drouet & W. A. Daily, comb. nov. Pleurococcus membraninus Menegh.,! Mem. R. Accad. Torino, ser. 2, 5 (Sci. Fis. e Math.): 34. 1843. Protococcus membraninus Menegh. in Kütz., Tab. Phyc. 1: 5. 1846. Р. rufescens Kütz., ibid. p. 9. 1846. Pleurococcus rufescens Bréb. in Kütz., loc. cit. 1846. Chroococcus membraninus Nag., Gatt. ! Duplicate specimens of the original material of this species collected by Meneghini in the Euganean springs at Abano near Padova were studied in the collections of the Rijksherbarium at Leiden, the Naturhistoriska Riksmuseet at Stockholm, and the Herbarium of the University of California at Berkeley. They contain the same species as treated by Daily in Amer. Midl. Nat. 27: 642 (1942) and by Drouet & Dally in Field Mus. Bot. Ser. 20: 148, footnote 2 (1943) under the name Chroococcus rufescens (Kütz.) Nüg.—F. Drouet and W. A. Daily. 1948] Habeeb and Drouet,—List of Freshwater Algae 69 einz. Alg., p. 46. 1849. C. rufescens Nag., loc. cit. 1849. COLLECTION NuMBER: 10264 in part. In trickling water on ledge. GLOEOCAPSA TURGIDA (Kütz.) Hollerb. 10208 in part. In scum on surface of shallow water, brookside. GLOEOCYSTIS CONFLUENS (Kiitz.) Richt. 10188. 10192. 10194. 10303. 10304. Surface of ledge in the shade. On usually xerophytie ground. In rock-ledge pool. HypROCOLEUM HOMOEOTRICHUM Gom. 10136 in part. 10256 (the phormidioid state). 10267 in part. Riverside ledge at waterline. On rocks in streams. In trickling water on ledge. LYNGBYA OCHRACEA Gom. 10287. 10220. 10174. 10169. 10001. In cool slow water. In a swamp seepage. MicRocoLEUS ACUTISSIMUS Gardn. 10106 in part. Sandy shore of the St. John River. MicnRocoLEUs PALUDOSUS Gom. 10104. 10105. 10106 in part. 10107. In ledge cracks and on sandy shore of the St. John River. MiücRocoLEUS VvAGINATUS Gom. 10109. 10122. 10123 in part. 10132 (the phormidioid state). 10145 in part. 10164 (juvenile plants). 10167 (young plants and moss protonema). 10175. 10176. 10178 (young plants). 10185. 10190. 10228. 10275. 10297. 10299. 10321. On soil between buildings. On ground in shade. In mud puddles. In a ditch. On old roadways and in pathways. On usually xerophytic ground. MicROSPORA STAGNORUM (Kütz.) Lagerh. 10243. With sterile Bulbochaete sp. and other Algae near the shore of a river. Microspora WrirTROCKII (Wille) Lagerh. 10086. 10306. In rock-ledge pools. Nostoc соммоме В. & F. 10054. 10065 (parasitized plants). 10316 in part? Amidst moss on canyon wall. Off damp ledge. Nostoc MicRoscoPicUM В. & F. 10049. 10314 in part. 10317. 10319. 10322. 10324 in part. Damp canyon walls. Nosroc Muscorum B. & F.? 10325. On moss covering rela- tively dry ledge. OocysTIS SOLITARIA Wittr. 10264 in part. 10273 in part. In trickling water on ledge. In rock-ledge pool. OSCILLATORIA FORMOSA Gom. 10171. In water of a swamp. OSCILLATORIA TENUIS Gom. 10113 in part. 10142 (trichomes of various diameters). 10290. 10291. 10289 in part. Cover- ing wet mud. On bottom in cool slow water. OSCILLATORIA TENUIS Gom. var. NATANS Gom. 10183 in part. In a rock ledge pool with other Algae. PHORMIDIUM AUTUMNALE Gom. 10098. 10156. 10263. In а springlet on a rock ledge. Film on a rock in a stresmlet. Ona wet ledge at the edge of a rock-ledge pool. PHORMIDIUM FAvOosUM Gom. 10232. 10249. 10253. 10255. Covering other Algae in slow-moving water. 70 Rhodora [Marcu PHORMIDIUM INCRUSTATUM Gom. 10153 in part. 10309. Off rocks in stream. In trickling water on a ledge. PHORMIDIUM PAPYRACEUM Gom. 10094. Scraped off ledges at brookside. PHORMIDIUM SETCHELLIANUM Gom. 10012. 10245. In a brown gelatinous layer on а rock in moving water. With sterile Spirogyra sp. in shallow water. PHORMIDIUM TENUE Gom. 10237. On Chara sp. in slow- moving water. PHORMIDIUM UNCINATUM Gom. 10296. From shallow muddy part of a brooklet. PLecTONEMA Nostocorum Gom. 10051. 10064. 10206 in part. In а rock-ledge pool. In a moist limy deposit on mosses of canyon wall. Wet ground, brookside. PLECTONEMA PURPUREUM Gom. 10241. On Batrachosperm- um sp. in fast moving water. Prorococcus VIRIDIS Ag. 10120. 10189. On tree trunks in the shade. PROTOSIPHON BOTRYOIDES (Kiitz.) Klebs. 10160. 10161 in part. On the exposed soil of the ball diamond. ScENEDESMUS ARMATUS (Chod.) G. M. Smith. 10273 in part. In a rock-ledge pool. ScENEDESMUS DIMORPHUS (Turp.) Kütz. 10205. On rocks in a ledge pool. SCHIZOTHRIX FRIESII Gom. 10276 in part. 10277. 10281. In ledge cracks and on mosses of damp ledges. ScuizoTHRIX HEUFLERI Gom. 10230. Purple coloring on a vertical sand bank. ScHIZOTHRIX LACUSTRIS Gom. 10148 in part. 10218. Ona rock in a brooklet. Оп a ledge with trickling water. ScuizorHRIX STRICKLANDII Dr. 10131 in part. 10143 in part. 10223. Between rocks and stones in a path. Оп usually xerophytic ground. ScvroNEMA FIGURATUM B. & F. 10196. 10272. 10323. 10314 in part? Оп moss of canyon wall. On damp ledge and shaded canyon wall. ScyTONEMA GUYANENSE B. & Е. 10320. On ground beneath an overhanging ledge. ScvrovEMA Hormanni B. & F. 10067. 10324 in part. On mosses and damp canyon wall. ScyronemA Mxocunous B. & Е. 10066. 10150. 10265 in part. 10276 in part. In cracks and on moss of damp ledge. Scraped off damp ledge. ScvTONEMA OCELLATUM B. & F. 10328. 10131 in part. On canyon wall. Between rocks and stones in a pathway. 1948] Habeeb and Drouet,—List of Freshwater Algae 71 SPHAERELLA LACUSTRIS (Girod) Wittr. 10056. 10279. Color- ing red the bottom and sides of a rock-ledge pool. Pink color scraped off a rock ledge. SPIROGYRA PORTICALIS (Miill.) Cleve? 10133. In shallow part of a spring. SPIROGYRA VARIANS (Hass.) Kütz. 10029. In a brooklet. STICHOCOCCUS SUBTILIS (Kütz.) Klerek. 10021. 10110. 10111 (various growth forms). 10112. 10128. 10157. 10163. 10180 in part. 10282. 10316 in part. On brick, concrete and bone in shade. On rock ledge in wet to dry water courses in the canyon. On damp ground, old roadway and ball diamond. STIGEOCLONIUM LUBRICUM (Dillw.) Kütz. 10040 in part. 10042. 10043. 10295. Amidst rocks in shallow water. In a brooklet. SvMPLOCA MuscoruM Gom. 10055. 10117. Covering moss on damp canyon wall. On moss and grass roots at river's edge. 'TETRASPORA GELATINOSA (Vauch.) Desv. 10087. Gelatinous masses in à spring. TREBOUXIA CLADONIAE (Chod.) G. M. Smith. 10181. In damp shade on ledges and base of tree trunks. TRENTEPOHLIA AUREA (L.) Martius. 10053. 10280. A rusty fuzz on shaded canyon walls. TRIBONEMA BOMBYCINUM (Ag.) Derb. & Sol. 10005. 10017. In slow shallow water. ULOTHRIX ZONATA (Web. & Mohr) Kütz. 10000. 10004. 10011. 10019. 10020. 10027. 10041 in part. 10045. 10069. 10083. 10085. 10091. 10092. 10096. 10097. 10098. 10099. 10103. 10226. 10247 in part. On rocks etc. in brooks and rivers. Unococcus insignis Berk. & Hass. 10059. Green spots on the sides of a rock-ledge pool. Unococcus Hookertanus Berk. & Hass. 10259. Surface of a ledge below waterline. VAUCHERIA GEMINATA (Vauch.) DC. 10023. 10078. 10082. 10200. 10201 in part. 10235. 10252. In a brooklet. In the water hole of a pasture. Matted on grass in a spring. In slow shallow river water. VAUCHERIA SESSILIS (Vauch.) DC. 10115. 10135. 10155. 10300. In slow shallow river water. On wet gravel in hillside seepage. On wet sandy ground in the shade. VAUCHERIA TERRESTRIS (Vauch.) DC. 10125. 10129. On shady damp ground. GRAND FALLs, New Brunswick, and the CnuicAGOo NATURAL History MUSEUM 72 Rhodora [Marcu ANOTHER New HAMPSHIRE STATION FOR SUBULARIA.—Inas- much as there are few stations reported for Subularia aquatica L. in southern New Hampshire, and, as it seems to be near its southern limit in eastern North America in this part of the state, it appears advisable to report one more locality for the species. Subularia aquatica L. has its southernmost known station in New Hampshire at Massabesic Lake in Auburn, Rockingham County. It occurs in southern New Hampshire also at Bradford Pond in the western part of Merrimack County and at the station herein reported 20 miles northeast of Lake Massabesic at Pleasant Pond in Deerfield, Rockingham County. In October and No- vember 1947 when the water was very low, it was found in abundance along the sandy shore to a limited extent above the water line but more often submerged in not more than a foot of water. Presumably, the most northerly station in the state from which Subularia aquatica has been reported is Franconia, though there is a “Base of White Mountains” station reported by William Oakes which is too vague to be located exactly. The known sta- tions in the state are predominantly clustered around Lake Win- nepesaukee. In addition to the aforementioned localities, col- lections or valid reports indicate the presence of this aquatic in the following places in New Hampshire. Grarron Co.: Holder- ness, Ashland; CarroLL Co.: Tuftonboro, Wolfeboro, Effingham, Wakefield; BELKkNAP Co.: Laconia, Gilmanton; MERRIMACK Co.: Andover. The data on the distribution of Subularia aquatica were ob- obtained from the journal Ruopora and from the collections of the Gray Herbarium, the New England Botanical Club, and the University of New Hampshire. Specimens of the Pleasant Pond Collection, Joanne Flint, no. 90, are deposited in the herbarium of the University of New Hampshire.—JoANNE Ётлхт and А. К. Hopapow, University of New Hampshire Volume 50, no. 590, including pages 21-52 and plates 1091 and 1092, was issued 11 February, 1948. Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. April, 1948. No. 592. CONTENTS: A small Gathering of Blackberries. M. L. Fernald............. 73 A Study of Elymus in Minnesota. L. E. Booher and R. M. Tryon 80 Distributional Notes and some minor Forms from Oklahoma. Uu MC ае ажык Е XE REI AGE, yt орао 91 Sidan Oklahoma Zu D Clement. Т 99 Кошрра ка бопеспол. d p J^ loa Tg е 100 Ehodoradndex) BequestMonGorrectopnse И 100 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. А monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10—34 at $3.00, and volumes 35-46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., "under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. I. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp., 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by М. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora «Plate 1093 = УУ ead д Cr. менди kast Mae y u Photo. B. G. Schubert bo RUBUS LONGIPES: one of TYPE-SHEETS, X Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. April, 1948. No. 592. A SMALL GATHERING OF BLACKBERRIES M. L. FERNALD (Plates 1093-1096) In attempting to make a possibly usable treatment of Rubus, subg. Hubatus Focke, the Blackberries, I have succeeded in pre- paring a treatment of the trailing and root-tipping sections, a most difficult task in view of the very contradictory statements or illustrations in the original accounts or in discussions of the species. Nevertheless, in this rather thankless апа baffling study a few plants have come to light which seem to need description or realignment. These are proposed below. It has, of course, been imperative constantly to lean on the voluminous writings on the group of the always prolific Bailey in his Gentes Herbarum. With full respect for four-score-and-ten and with the affection one feels for a student of unequaled energy, it is regrettable to find that his recent publications show too many evidences of haste and lack of careful checking. A few puzzling cases noted below show the utter perplexity into which the interpreter is led. In their Blackberries of New England, Vt. Agr. Expt. Sta. Bull. 217: 78 (1920), Brainerd & Peitersen gave, as Plate XXXVI, an illustration (X 8/11) of a supposed hybrid Rubus with canes shown as bearing hooked prickles 2.7-3.6 mm. long; the terminal primocane-leaflet narrowly ovate and tapering gradually to a long acumination, the leaflet two thirds as broad as long; the flowering shoot prickly; the lowest pedicel (about 4.5 em. long) subtended by a dilated and long-petioled leafy bract 3-3.4 em. 74 Rhodora [APRIL broad; pedicels glabrous; calyx reflexed, its lobes very short- tipped and much shorter than the large (1 cm. or more thick) fruit with 20 or more plump drupelets. In Gent. Herb. vii. 306 and 307, fig. 119 (1947) the Brainerd & Peitersen plate is cited as that of the newly proposed R. jactus Bailey: “This plant is figured by Brainerd and Peitersen . . . in Plate xxxvi". But how completely different are the new illustration (Bailey's fig. 119) and his description: A. jactus with ‘‘Primocanes . . nearly nude but bearing a very few minute prickles 1—2 [instead of stoutish and 2.7-3.6] mm. long that readily rub off ", the canes, as drawn, suggesting pencils or macaroni; terminal primocane- leaflet subrotund-ovate (four-fifths as broad as long) and abruptly tipped; the flowering shoot prickleless except at summit; the glandular pedicels (up to only 3 em. long) all illustrated as sub- tended by small stipule-like bracts at most 8 mm. broad (although the English text says "axillary pedicels each . . . subtended by a conspicuous broad bract, nearly or quite equalling the foliage") ; calyx-lobes erect and much overtopping the tiny fruit, with conspicuous slender appendages, illustrated as nearly as long as the lanceolate blade (although the Latin description says “calycis lobi lati . . . non valde extenti”). What does one do; take into account the plate of Brainerd & Peitersen (technically it should be disregarded), follow the description, which as to several characters contradicts the seemingly accurate new figure, or follow the new illustration? Technically the type-specimen must settle the matter but when one is working against time to cover the whole vascular flora (perhaps 7000-8000 nos.) of a large area he can not take out the months necessary for careful study of types not at hand—especially with the constant dread of hundreds of other hastily published clonic species. As the type of Rubus flagellaris Willd. there is shown in Gent. Herb. v. fig. 99 on p. 245 (1943) a drawing of a plant so named in the Willdenow Herbarium. This has the larger simple bracteal leaves of the inflorescence very broadly ovate to oblate or sub- reniform, the terminal leaflet of the primocane-leaf short-tipped and with nearly cuneate base, the pedicels forking. But as nearest matching it we are shown (fig. 100 on p. 248) a simple bracteal leaf much longer than broad and terminal primocane- leaflets long-acuminate and with rounded-cordate bases. Far- Rhodora Plate 1094 Photo. D. G. Schubert Ковоѕ Lonarpes (all eras. from TYPE): FIG. 1, portion of primocane and leaf, X 1; FIG. 2, short fruiting branchlet, X 1; ric. 3, pedicel and fruiting calyx, X 10. 1948] Fernald,—Gathering of Blackberries 75 ther on (fig. 111) “а very distinct species in. Massachusetts", R. felix Bailey, is shown with bracts highly suggestive of the Willdenow specimen; and surely R. maniseesensis Bailey, l. e. vii. 268, 269 (fig. 95) from Rhode Island is pretty close to the Willde- now specimen, as well as to the illustration of А. felix. Since dewberries with just such broad bracts occur from Massachu- setts, Rhode Island and Connecticut to southeastern Virginia, to one who can not now settle the question the designation of two “new species” to cover them does not seem wholly felicitous. Another reputed ally of the problematic Rubus flagellaris is Р. cflagellaris Bailey, 1. c. 262, 263, fig. 91 (1947), "probably to be keyed with the flagellaris group rather than with the glandif- erous section (page 242, Gent. Herb. v) but to be mentioned in the latter". R. eflagellaris is shown in a very clear drawing as having + or 5 short and spreading-ascending **glandiferous pedieels" (descr p. 262) 1.5-3 em. long and diverging from a prolonged axis; while A. flagellaris sensu Bailey is described, l. с. v. 244 (1943) as ""glandless throughout" and with *inflores- cence ascendate", the almost erect glandless pedicels shown in fig. 100 as 4-6.3 em. long. If, therefore, Bailey’s groupings in his key to the Flagellares mean anything (and they certainly do), the newly proposed KR. eflagellaris does not belong in his *'$ I. Plant without gland-tipped hairs or long pinhead glands on . pedicels or calyx” nor under ‘‘+Florescence.—Inflorescence of the simple ascendate order or reduced to a single upright pedicel. . . . cluster lacking a continuing central rachis”, this leading to his A. flagellaris. In other words, the ‘continuing central rachis” (illustrated as 5 or 6 em. long) and the other characters shown would seem to place R. eflagellaris in Bailey's SII. (p. 242), ““+-+Florescence.—Flowers and fruits in more or less definite cymiform or racemiform clusters, many or most of the pedicels short and flaring or divaricate . . . from the central rachis; glands only on pedicels and calyx" (p. 243) and not too far from R. Grimesii Bailey (discussed under the new R. imperi- orum below) and R. particeps Bailey. The student who tries to visualize A. eflagellaris as “probably to be keyed with the flagellaris group rather than with the glandiferous section” is bound to go astray. Many other such seeming contradictions form perpetual 76 Rhodora [APRIL stumbling-blocks to ready interpretation, but only three others need here be noted. Rubus obvius Bailey, 1. с. v. 359 (fig. 159) and 360 (1943) is described with primocane-leaflets ‘‘more than one-half as broad ” as long; yet the illustration shows the terminal leaflet of the uppermost expanded leaf 4 cm. long and only about. 1.5 em. broad. Does one follow the description or the illustra- tion? In vol. v. 71 (1941) the first species keyed under “ЕЕ. Axis of primocanes conspicuously glandular-hairy” is “22. R. vigil”. Nevertheless, turning to the description of R. vigil (p. 86) one reads: “Canes hard and woody, glandless" and the beautiful illustration (fig. 29) so shows them! Lastly, if foliage-characters mean so much that every slight divergence in outline, number of trichomes, toothing, etc. always means a ‘‘new species", look at the original plate (not cited in Gent. Herb. v. 254) of R. canadensis, var. roribaccus Bailey in Am. Gard. xi. 642, with plate as frontispiece (1890), then look at fig. 102 in Gent. Herb. 1. c. (nearly like the original plate, with the bracteal leaves or leaflets narrow and much longer than broad). Then turn over to fig. 103, also called R. roribaccus, with broadly cordate-ovate bracts. If these are all one species, simply modified by transplanting, are not 90% of recent proposi- tions open to serious doubt as to their fundamental or stable characters? Perhaps not; it is more probable that the cordate- bracted plant is not R. roribaccus. RUBUS TrRIFRONS Blanchard, var. pudens (Bailey), stat. nov. R. pudens Bailey, Gent. Herb. v?. 78, fig. 26 (1941). The large series of Rubus trifrons which has been assembled in the Gray Herbarium and the herbarium of the New England Botanical Club shows typical R. trifrons, with the primocanes copiously bristly, to pass into R. pudens, in which the primocanes are essentially smooth or with only few scattered bristles. In the most typical R. trifrons the petioles of the primocane-leaves are rather copiously bristly, in the illustration of A. pudens shown as nearly bristleless. Both series show too much integra- dation over their broad range, but the more typical and more bristly-caned R. trifrons is usually coarser than var. pudens, the former ranging from middle Nova Scotia and southern New Brunswick to eastern Ontario, eastern New York and Connecti- cut, while the smoother-caned and usually more slender var. 1948] Fernald,—Gathering of Blackberries 77 pudens extends eastward to Cape Breton Island but, so far as the material shows, does not extend west of the Connecticut Valley in Vermont, with its southwestern limit on Cape Cod. R. trifrons (frequently 5-foliolate) varies, as do most species, in the size and outline of leaflets. The terminal primocane-leaflet may be obovate, elliptic or ovate, without any apparent constant difference in the smoothish calyx-lobes, which range from 3.5-5 mm. long, and the small petals, mostly 5-9 mm. long and 2.5—4 mm. broad. I find myself unable, therefore, to maintain R. alter Bailey, |. c. 82, fig. 28 and k. harmonicus Bailey, 1. c. 86, fig. 30. All of these plants differ from fè. hispidus Michx. in their less coriacceous and scarcely lustrous deciduous leaves, with the leaflets not so blunt and having sharper toothing. Brainerd's contention that K. trifrons arose through crossing of R. hispidus with a member of ог was wholly reasonable. The coarser and more bristly extreme parallels typical R. hispidus L., the more slender and nearly smooth-caned plant simulating R. hispidus, var. obovalis (Michx.) Fernald. Rusus (§ FLAGELLARES) longipes, sp. nov. (TAB. 1093 et 1094), a R. particulare differt primocannae aculeis unguiculatis; primocannae folis subtus glabrescentibus quinatis; petiolo valde armato aculeis unguiculatis recurvatis; foliolis ellipticis vel elliptico-obovatis dentato-serratis acuminatis foliolo ter- minali 6-7 em. longo 4 em. lato basi sensim rotundato petiolulo glabrato 1.7-2.5 cm. longo, foliolis mediis petiolulatis petiolulo 1-1.5 em. longo; stipulis lanceolato-linearibus 1.5-2 cm. longis; floricannis subsimplicibus remote unguiculato-aculeatis; flori- cannae folis ternatis, foliolis plerumque angusto-obovatis obtusis; flore 1 bractea ternata vel simplici; pedicello recto 1.5- 3.5 em. longo divergenter villoso deinde glabrato.—Southeastern VIRGINIA: open sandy bank near Meherrin River, south of Hugo, June 13, 1989, Fernald & Long, no. 10,289, distrib. as В. Enslenit Tratt. (түре in Herb. Gray.; rsorvrE in Herb. Phil. Acad.). Rubus longipes belongs in the usually I-flowered series typified by R. Ensleni? Tratt. In the latter species and the commoner and coarser R. Daileyanus Britton, both frequent in eastern Virginia, the pedicels and petioles, at least of flowering material, are merely appressed-pilose or glabrescent, usually without glands. The other eastern Virginian species of the series, R. scambens Bailey and R. leviculus Bailey, have the young (usually 78 Rhodora [APRIL the mature) pedicels and petioles spreading-villous and usually with stipitate glands and their mostly 3-foliolate primocane- leaves have the paired lower leaflets subsessile, R. scambens common, R. leviculus found chiefly on bottoms or slopes of the Meherrin River system. The other two species with divergent villi on pedicels and petioles which I am able to recognize in the manual-range are №. particularis Bailey, Gent. Herb. vii. 291, fig. 110 (1947) and the newly proposed R. longipes, in both of which the primocane-leaves are mostly 5-foliolate, with the upper pair of leaflets on definite petiolules. R. particularis of upland West Virginia has the petioles, axes of flowering shoots and pedicels densely spreading-villous but glandless, the leaves velvety beneath, and the single flowers on pedicels only 1-1.5 em. long. R. longipes (for the elongate petiolules) is promptly glabrate throughout, although the fruiting pedicels rarely retain traces of long villosity and stipitate glands; its stipules are broader and longer than indicated in the illustration of R. particularis and the fruiting pedicels are up to 3.5 cm. long. On the lower Meherrin it is not far from the northern extension from eastern South Carolina of the extremely slender, almost herbaceous and merely short-bristly R. leviculus, with which it can hardly be confused. Ковов ($ FLAGELLARES) imperiorum, sp. nov. (TAB. 1095 et 1096), primocannis adscendentibus deinde prostratis angulatis glabris remote aculeatis, aculeis deltoideo-subulatis 3.5-4.5 mm. longis; primocannae foliis plerumque quinatis subtus molliter pilosis supra adpresso-pilosis; petiolo remote unguiculato- armato; foliolis caudato-acuminatis argute duplicato-dentatis, dentibus plerumque 3-5 mm. longis basin versus 3-5 mm. latis; foliolo terminali rotundato-ovato subcordato 10-11 cm. longo 7-8.5 cm. lato, petiolulo 3-3.5 cm. longo sparse piloso, foliolis mediis vix minoribus oblique ellipticis; ramulis floriferis sparse villosis subremote armatis; floricannae foliolis plerumque lobu- lato-dentatis dentibus obtusis 3-7 mm. longis 4-6 mm. latis, foliolo terminali et bracteis simplicibus late rhomboideis; corym- bo folioso (2-) 3-8-floris; pedicellis villosis adscendentibus vel patentibus plerumque 1-3.5 cm. longis remote armatis; calycis tomentulosis inarmatis segmentis ovalibus; petalis 1.2 ст. longis 0.8 ст. latis; fructibus 1.2 ст. diametro.— VrRGINIA: in grass at edge of pine-woods 114 miles east of Williamsburg, April 17 (fl.) and June 11 (fr.), 1921, E. J. Grimes, no. 3442 (TYPE, 4 sheets, in Herb. Gray.). Rhodora Plate 1095 Photo. B. G. Schubert RUBUS IMPERIORUM: portion of floricane, X 1, from түрк. Rhodora Plate 1096 Photo. D. G. Schubert RUBUS IMPERIORUM (both Frias, from ТҮРЕ): FIG. 1 portion of primocane-leaf, X 1; FIG. 2, fruiting summit, X 1. , 1948] Fernald,—Cathering of Blackberries 79 The fine series constituting the type of Rubus imperitorum (of the Dominions) was identified by Bailey as R. Baileyanus Britton, as was the material of some other now clearly recog- nized species. It has little relation to R. Baileyanus, which belongs to the Enslenii-series with predominantly l-flowered fertile branchlets, cord-like rather flexible canes, primocane- leaves glabrescent beneath, the margins sharply serrate, the terminal petiolule 0.5-2 cm. long; flower usually solitary (rarely 2 or 3) on an erect minutely puberulent to glabrous pedicel up to 7 em. long. R. imperiorum is wholly different: a coarser plant with strong ligneous canes; leaves velvety beneath, with broad and coarse dentation or even rounded-lobulate; the term- inal primocane-leaflet on a spreading-villous petiolule 3-3.5 em. long; the definite corymb with mostly 3-8 flowers on arched- ascending to divergent villous pedicels at most 3.5 em. long. In the broad and low lobulate dentation R. imperiorum seems unique among the species of $ Flagellares with arcuate-ascending to divergent short pedicels and leaves subvelutinous beneath. R. Grimesii Bailey, which it somewhat approaches, has much narrower and sharply serrate primocane-leaflets and the pedicels bear numerous fine prickles and glands, while AH. cordifrons Bailey, common in southeastern Virginia, although with some- what similar primocane-foliage, has the teeth sharper and nar- rower, while the toothing of the floricane-leaves is small and sharp. The relationship of R. imperiorum is, perhaps, with R. cordifrons. As R. Grimesti I am taking Grimes no. 3489, collected at the edge of pine-woods 14 mile west of Williamsburg, flowering material April 30, 1921, fruiting material and primocane collected June 18, 1921, this material being in the Gray Herbarium and clearly marked by Professor Bailey “R. Grimesii Bailey, n. sp., type. L. H. D.". It was from these sheets that the illustration was prepared for the original publieation of the species in Gent. Herb. n. 331, fig. 158 (1932). The later abandonment of this specified tvpe, Grimes's own material, in Gent. НегЬ. v. 406 (1943), and the citation there of a specimen which Grimes never saw, “Batley 36 (type)’’, collected by Bailey 9 years after the death of Grimes, does not seem at all justified. It is com- parable with other shifts and contradietions which сап only 80 Rhodora {APRIL perplex those who try to interpret the most active student of a group already sufficiently involved: R. depavitus Gent. Herb. v. 382, fig. 172 (1943) published with a beautiful plate showing a 5-foliolate primocane-leaf and glandular pedicels (‘‘pedicelli longi, erecti, glandulosi’’), but in vol. vii. 303, fig. 117 (1947) this species, R. depavitus, shown with 3 leaflets and glabrous pedicels, while the original plate, published as typical of R. depavitus, now appears as representing а new species with a highly suggestive name, Ё. redundans, 1. с. 300, 302, fig. 116 (1947). Again, as “contrasted with R. particeps of Nova Scotia" there is presented ‘а picture of R. alius, Fig. 121” in Gent. Herb. vii. 308, 310, fig. 121 (1947), “а clear-cut species of Connecticut and Rhode Island", but the caption under the illustration calls it a 'trailer in Nova Scotia". Checking back to the original account of R. alius in Gent. Herb. v. 400 (1943) one reads that it grows in Massachusetts, Connecticut". It may be found in Rhode Island, but what about Nova Scotia, which in one item is indicated as its exclusive area? All of which suggests that, if one is to propose a "new species" for every clone, it would be safer not to cite two collections and to be sure that the illustra- tions are made from the actual types. RUBUS сокріғкомѕ Bailey, forma pleniflorus, f. nov., petalis numerosis, flore pleno—Nkrw Jersey: border of dry sandy thicket, 1 mile northeast of Fairview, Gloucester County, June 14, 1924, Bayard Long, по. 30,768 (түре in Herb. Phil. Acad.). A beautiful and profusely floriferous double-flowered form, many of the stamens altered to petals, the flowers thus suggesting double-flowered small roses. A STUDY OF ELYMUS IN MINNESOTA! L. E. Воонек AND R. M. Tryon, JR. A preliminary study of Elymus in Minnesota revealed that the present treatments were not entirely satisfactory for our material and therefore a more extended study was undertaken. The pres- ent study has, of course, its limitations and problems are raised 1 Contribution from the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota IX. Field work was supported, in part, by a grant-in-aid from the Graduate School of the University of Minnesota. 1948] Booher and Tryon,—Elymus in Minnesota 81 that only а monographic study can answer. In general, previous work has been accepted whenever possible to do so. In measurements of the lengths of the spikes, glumes and lem- mas awns, if present, were included unless otherwise stated. De- tailed descriptions and measurements of floral parts apply to those taken from near the middle of the spike. The widths of glumes are given at their widest portion and flattened out. Measure- ments for lemmas, paleas, anthers and grains refer in all cases to those of the first florets. Measurements of all floral parts are based upon boiled material. All specimens cited are in the Her- barium of the University of Minnesota. We are indebted to Mrs. Agnes Chase, Dr. J. R. Swallen and Dr. B. G. Schubert for information concerning certain specimens and to Dr. J. B. Moyle for information concerning the alkali areas in Minnesota. a. Lemma-awns, if present, ascending, sometimes somewhat spreading, straight or irregularly flexuous, not curved or re- curved, mostly less than 2 em. long... .b. b. Rachis continuous at maturity, not disartieulating, each spikelet disarticulating either above or just below the plumes кис. c. Spikelets disarticulating below the glumes?, glumes long- lanceolate, distinctly widened above the base, more or JCSHRUWISUCUER EE ee ieee dene UTE d. (1. E. virginicus). d. Awns of the glumes 3-6 mm. long; awns of the lemmas 8-16 mm. long; spikes included or exserted. . . .e. e. Spikes included or barely exserted, green; upper sur- face of the leaves glabrate to scabrous. . la. Æ. virginicus (typical). e. Spikes well exserted, glaucous; upper surface of the leaves villous-hirsute...... ld. E. virginicus var. halophilus. d. Awns of the glumes absent or up to 2 mm. long; awns of the lemmas 1-2.5 mm. long; spikes mostly ex- вете Е Ib. Е. virginicus var. submuticus. c. Spikelets disarticulating above the glumes; glumes seta- ceous to subsetaceous, scarcely widened above the base, straight... .. fe f. Lemma-awns more than 15 mm. long..... g. (2. E. villosus). g. Lemmas glabrate to hispid on the lower part of the body, hispid to villous on the upper part. 2a. Е. villosus (typical). g. Lemmas glabrate to puberulent on the lower part of the body, glabrate to short-hispid on themppenpuni. шш. з 2b. E. villosus f. arkansanus. f. Lemma-awns less than 2 mm. long 6. E. cinereus (excluded species). b. Rachis disarticulating at maturity, at least in part; a spike- з The place of articulation is easily determined in dried specimens, often even those collected in flower. When the spike or spikelet is broken apart by a teasing needle, it breaks at the same place it would normally disarticulate. 82 Rhodora [APRIL let or spikelet-pair at a node falling with a rachis joint 5. "E. Macounii" (Agropyron trachycaulum var. typicum X Hordeum jubatum). а. Lemma-awns ascending-spreading, many in a single spike curved-divergent or recurved, especially in fruit (straight mr tere flowering) 1.5-4 cm. long, mostly over 2.5 cm. ong.... h. Glumes equal, narrowly to long-lanceolate, distinctly widened above the base, distinctly 3-6 nerved, 14-35 mm., usually 25-30 mm., long................... 3. E. canadensis. h. Glumes unequal, setaceous, not widened above the base, or subsetaceous or rarely narrowly lanceolate; not evi- dently nerved to scarcely 3-nerved 4. E. canadensis X Hystrix patula. 1. ELYMUS VIRGINICUS la. E. vrrainicus L. (TYPICAL). Ё. striatus Willd., not of most recent authors.—Culms erect; sheaths glabrous, commonly overlapping; blades flat, slightly scabrous on both surfaces and more so on the under surface and on the margins; spikes erect, stiff, with bristly ascending awns, often with 1 to 3 rudimentary spikelets below the inflorescence proper; rachis-internodes flat- tened, scabrous or strigose-haired along margins of upper third and with a few longer coarse hairs at the top; spikelets in pairs, 3- to 5-flowered (mostly 4-flowered), rigid and closely appressed against the floral axis; glwmes stout, more or less twisted, stiff, terete and about one-half as broad at the nonstriate base as near the middle, bowed out, indurated and at maturity markedly yellowed at the base for about 2 mm., glabrous or scabrous to scabrous-hirsute on margins and nerves, with 3-5 strong nerves; awns straight and ascending, scabrous; lemmas rounded on the back, margins of upper half often narrowly hyaline, glabrate or scabrous to sparsely hispidulous toward the apex, glabrate below, 5-nerved near the apex, awns straight, ascending, stiff, scabrous; paleas blunt and ciliate at the apex and along the upper half of the strong keels at either side. Dimensions of various organs (all measurements based on 16 specimens): Culm-length....... 40-80 cm. Glume-width ............ 1.0-1.6 mm. Culm-width....... 0.1-0.3 cm. Lemma-length........... 1.5-2.4 cm. Blade-length....... 13-25 cm. Length of lemma-body... .7.0-8.6 mm. Blade-width.......0.3-1.0 cm. Palea-length. ............ 6.6-8.5 mm. Spike-length.......4.5-15.5 em. Grain-length............. 4.5-5.6 mm. Giume-Jength CDS 12-20 mm. Grain-width............. 1.4-1.8 mm. In addition to the sixteen specimens included in the above description, the Minnesota collection includes three unusually robust specimens. These three specimens are distinctive only in the size of the various parts which are from 5 to 25% larger than the corresponding organs of the other specimens. 1948] Booher and Tryon,—Elymus in Minnesota 83 Generally distributed in open woods, river bottoms and on river banks and lake shores. Ib. E. viRGINICUS var. suBMUTICUS Hooker.— Differs from the specles proper in having subulate-tipped or very short-awned glumes (awns up to 2 mm. long) and lemmas (awns 1-2.5 mm. long) and in having exserted (up to 10 em.) and/or included or barely exserted spikes. Among eight specimens collected within the state, only one specimen had included spikes exclusively; five had exserted spikes of which two had short-exerted and included spikes represented in the same specimens. Distribution and habitat similar to that of the typical element of the species. le. Specimens intermediate between E. VIRGINICUS (TYPICAL) and Е. VIRGINICUS var. SUBMUTICUS. FE. virginicus f. jejunus Ramaley. After careful examination of available specimens, including the type of E. virginicus f. jejunus, it is our belief that it and speci- mens corresponding to it are intermediates between typical E. virginicus and var. submuticus. The following table shows the range of the critical characters: Proposed E. virginicus E. virginicus intermediate var. submuticus (16 specimens) group (8 specimens) (5 specimens) Length of lemma-awns 8-16 mm. 4-12 mm. 1-2.5 mm. Length of Up to 5 mm. or merely Up to 2 mm. or merely glume-awns 3-6 mm. subulate-tipped. subulate-tipped. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: MINNESOTA: Lake Benton, August 1891, Sheldon 1375 (TYPE of E. virginicus f. jejunus) ; St. Louis River, July 23, 1886, L. H. Bailey 265; Gooseberry Falls, Lake Co., August 31, 1930, Rosendahl 6890; St. Vincent, August, 1900, Ballard 2629; Winona Co., July to October, 1897, Holzinger 29 (UM Herb. 264292). Id. E. vrRGINICUS var. HALOPHILUS (Bickn.) Wiegand.—E. halophilus Bickn. Since this variety of Ё. virginicus apparently is not common and has seldom been described in detail, the description of the four specimens collected in Minnesota is given here. This vari- ety differs from the typical species in having usually more flaccid and glaucous spikes, in general shorter paleas, usually less twisted glumes with pale yellow glume-bases, and glaucous leaf-blades which are pubescent on their upper surfaces. 84 Rhodora [APRIL Culms erect and slender; sheaths slightly shorter than the internodes, glabrous; blades glaucous, scabrous, villous-hirsute above; spikes glaucous, sometimes slightly nodding, usually sev- eral rudimentary spikelets at the base, peduncles slender, exserted 4—15 em.; rachis-internodes 4—5 mm. long, hispid-ciliate; spikelets in pairs 3- to 5-flowered, spreading; glumes lanceolate, somewhat twisted, broadened above the base, scabrous on veins and margins above the terete, indurated, slightly bowed-out, pale yellow base, with 2-5 strong nerves, awns 4-10 mm. long; lemmas minutely scabrous along veins near the apex, 5 veins distinct only near the apex, awns straight and scabrous; paleas blunt at apex, ciliate- hirsute near the apex; found in both flowering and fruiting stages in July. Dimensions of various organs (all measurements based on 4 specimens): Culm-length.......... 70-90 ст. Lemma-length.......... 14-25 mm. Culm-width (approx.).. 0.2 cm. Length of lemma-body... 7-8.5 mm. Blade-length.......... 13-20 em. Palea-length............ 6-7 mm. Blade-width.......... 0.7-1.0 em. Anther-length........... 2.8 mm. Spike-length.......... 7.5-15 em. Grain-length............ 5.0-5.4 mm. Glume-length......... 14-23 mm. Grain-width............ 1.7-1.8 mm. Glume-width.......... 0.8-1.4 mm. . This variety has not been previously reported from Minnesota. It is apparently rare and has been collected in only three localities in the southern part of the state. It probably occurs only in alkali soil. Lake Shetek is definitely an alkali lake and French Lake is probably one, being in the alkali lake and pond area. The soil around Jordan is а gray glacial till derived from the western (alkali) part of the state. We suspect that the Minnesota plant is not genetically related to the var. halophilus of the East but rather represents a parallel response to similar ecological conditions. Further study may well show that it'is not worthy of varietal rank. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: MINNESOTA: near Jordan, July, 1891, Ballard 389 (2 sheets, somewhat intermediate with typical E. virginicus); Bull’s Bluff, Lake Shetek, Murray Co., July 5, 1902, Skinner 3031/2; shore of French Lake, Windom, Cotton- wood Co., July 12, 1938, Moyle 3142. 2. ELYMUS VILLOSUS : 2a. E. уплоѕоѕ Muhl. ex Willd. (rypicau). Е. striatus of many American authors, not Willd.—Culms densely tufted, erect or ascending; sheaths glabrous except for villous hairs on the in- rolled margins, lower sheaths often glaucous and densely villous; 1948] Booher and Tryon,—EFElymus in Minnesota 85 blades flat, often glaucous, thin, scabrous on the margins and on the lower surface, villous on the upper surface; spikes long- or short-exserted or partially included, several rudimentary spike- lets at the base represented by coarse hairs, rudimentary or empty glumes; rachis-internodes flattened, concave above the middle next to the spikelets, slightly winged above the middle, often a blunt ridge down the length of back, hirsute on the mar- gins; spikelets in pairs, usually 2-flowered (upper one sterile); glumes stiff, subsetaceous and tapering into their awns, usually with 3 strong nerves, terete and very slightly bowed out at the base, entirely villous or villous at the base and hirsute above, awns straight, rigid, scabrous; lemmas rounded on the back, vil- lous to hispid on upper part of the body and hispid to glabrate on lower part, 5 very weak nerves visible only near the apex, awns straight, scabrous; paleas obtuse and ciliate near the apex, ciliate on the margins of the upper half, a few appressed soft hairs on the face. Dimensions of various organs (measurements of floral organs based on 8 specimens): Culm-length.......... 40-60 ст. Lemma-length.......... 23-34 mm. Culm-width (approx.). . 0.15 em. Length of lemma-body... 6-7.5 mm. Blade-lenathe gees а: 10-20 cm. Palea-length............5.5-6.5 mm. Blade-width...... .. 0.6-0.8 em. Anther-length....... . . 1.6-4.0 mm. Spike-length.......... 6-13 em. Grain-length. . EUM. 5-6 mm. Glume-length..... 15228 та нган суу esee с 1.5-1.6 mm. Glume-width.......... 0.3-0.7 mm. This species has been collected along lake-shores and rivers and also in dry woods, meadows and on hillsides. It is generally distributed in the central and southern parts of the state. 2b. E. VILLOSUS f. ARKANSANUS (Scribn. & Ball) Fernald.— E. arkansanus Seribn. & Ball. This form is distinguished from the typical element of the species by the less pronounced pubes- сепсе of glumes and lemmas. It has scabrous glumes (nerves and margins) and sometimes in addition has a few short stiff hairs near the base; the lemmas are short-hispid to glabrate on upper part of the body and puberulent to glabrate on lower part. In no other morphologie feature could further distinction of the form be established. Observations are based on three specimens collected in Minnesota (Sheldon 842, 9761/2 and Moyle 2770) and other specimens from bordering states, Iowa and North and South Dakota. A study of a suite of out-of-state material indicates that the length and the amount of pubescence on the glumes vary inde- pendently of each other. The nature of the pubescence is con- sistent only in that the longest hairs are always at the apex. 86 Rhodora [APRIL 3. ELYMUS CANADENSIS 3. E. CANADENSIS L. E. philadelphicus L.; E. glaucifolius Muhl. ex Willd., fragment of Tyre in Gray Herb.; E. canadensis var. pendulus Eaton & Wright; E. canadensis f. crescendus Ramaley, TYPE in Herb. UM, seen; Е. robustus Scribn. & Smith, TYPE in U. S. National Herb., tsorypr in Gray Herb., fragment of TYPE seen; E. brachystachys Scribn. & Ball, IsOPARATYPE, Rydberg 1174, in Herb. UM, seen; E. canadensis villosus Bates, ISOTYPE in Herb. UM, seen; E. robustus var. vestitus Wiegand. The numerous combinations based on the above basonyms have been purposely omitted. Culms erect, tufted; sheaths glabrous or rarely villous; blades flat, long-tapering, narrowed toward the base, usually scabrous on both surfaces but less markedly so on the upper surface; spikes long- or short-exserted or sometimes partially included, definitely arching to rather erect, occasionally glaucous in varying degrees, often with one to several rudimentary spikelets below the in- florescence proper, the several lowest internodes of the rachis elongated with spikelets few-flowered, variable in denseness of inflorescence; rachis internodes slightly winged and sparsely hispid on margins above the middle; spikelets commonly 2 or З abreast, 3- to 5-flowered with uppermost floret often sterile; glumes occa- sionally glaucous in varying degrees, 3-, 5-, or 6-nerved almost to the narrowed base, nerves scabrous to hirsute, margins narrowly hyaline and microscopically serrulate; lemmas practically glab- rate to scabrous, hispid, or villous, varying in degree from dense to very sparse, 5 nerves prominent above the middle of the body, awns scabrous and spreading, many curved or recurved especially in fruit (straight only before flowering); paleas blunt at the apex, ciliate-hispid at the apex and along upper margins of the keels, scattered and appressed hairs on the face. Dimensions of various organs (measurements for floral organs based on 12 specimens): Culm-length.......... 70-120 em. Glume-length........... 14-35 mm. Culm-width (approx.). .0.35-0.5 em. Blade-length. ......... 17-40 cm. Blade-width........... 0.5-1.5 em. Spike-length.......... 11—80 cm. Length of rachis-inter- node (middle of spike) 6-7 mm. Length of rachis-inter- node (base of spike).. 10-15 mm. Glume-width............ 0.8-1.2 mm. Lemma-length.......... 32-53 mm. Length of lemma-body... 11-17 mm. Palea-length............ 9.8-13 mm. Anther-length........... 3mm Grain-length............ 5-7 mm. Grain-width............. 1.4-1.6 mm. Material identifiable with each of the described entities cited in synonymy occurs in Minnesota. In the material we have seen, 1948] Booher and Tryon,—Elymus in Minnesota 87 however, the characters used to separate the entities vary con- siderably so that it is very difficult to draw lines of separation, In addition, no two characters correlate to any reasonable degree. About half of the Minnesota material is glaucous and the other half is green or very slightly glaucous. The spikes vary from rather erect to mostly definitely arching. Most spikes are ex- serted but some are included at the base. The spikes also vary from stout to slender and from long to short, without correlation between the two sets of characters. Any type of spike may be loosely or densely flowered. The sheaths and upper leaf-surfaces are rarely villous, commonly glabrous. The lemmas vary from glabrous to villous with all intermediate conditions represented ; the abundance of hairs also varies greatly and without reference to their individual lengths. The variation with the villous sheaths and upper leaf-surfaces (E. canadensis villosus Bates) 15 more strongly marked than any of the others. Taking seven pairs of the characters listed above (e. g., plant green vs. glaucous, spike erect vs. arching, ete.), there would be one hundred and twenty-eight possible combinations of charac- ters. Of these, forty combinations occur in the fifty-eight sheets of E. canadensis examined. Because of this independent behavior of the characters, we are unable to recognize any varieties within the species, and, al- though some variations may be worthy of the rank of form, we feel that the recognition of subspecifie categories should await a broad study of all North American material. Material very similar to isoryPes of E. Wiegandii Fernald and E. Wiegandii f. calvescens Fernald (Fernald 197 and Fernald & Strong in 1896, respectively) has been collected in Minnesota: Butters & Abbe 1024, E. & Н. Alsapa in 1940, and Nielsen 1790. We are unable to separate this material from E. canadensis. In their relatively narrow glumes, these specimens approach some specimens of the KE. canadensis X Hystrix patula complex from which they may be separated by the equal and narrowly lanceo- late glumes, rather than unequal or subsetaceous glumes. E. canadensis is widely distributed throughout the state on lake-shores, river-banks, borders of woodlands along roadsides and railroads and elsewhere in light soils. 88 Rhodora [APRIL 4. ELYMUS CANADENSIS X HYSTRIX PATULA 4. E. CANADENSIS L. X H. PATULA Moench. Е. diversiglumis Scribn. & Ball, in part. К. interruptus of recent authors, in part, not Buckley.—Culms erect, rather stout; sheaths glabrous; blades flat, more or less scabrous on both surfaces, usually with scattered soft hairs on the upper surface; spikes loose, flexuous, mostly well exserted, usually with several rudimentary spikelets at the base, one specimen branched near the base; rachis-internodes slender, about 7 mm. long near the middle of the spike, much elongated near the base of the spike, narrowly winged and hirsute on mar- gins above the middle, glabrous on the back; spikelets in pairs, somewhat spreading, deciduous, 3- to 5-flowered with uppermost floret usually empty ; glumes one or more at a node, usually much reduced, spreading, scabrous to hispidulous on veins and margin, slightly bowed out and indurated at the base, setaceous to nar- rowly lanceolate; lemmas rounded on the back, hirsute to villous, 5 nerves distinct toward the apex, awns scabrous, curved; paleas prominently keeled at the sides, apex blunt, ciliate-hirsute along the rigid keels and at the apex, scattered and appressed hairs on the face near the apex. Dimensions of various organs (measurements of floral organs based on 5 specimens): Culm-length.......... 85-125 cm. Lemma-length........... 39-50 mm. Culm-width (approx.).. 0.3 em. Length of lemma-body... 9.8-11 mm. Blade-length.......... 15-30 cm. Palea-length............8.4-9.8 mm. Blade-width.......... 0.7-1.1 em. Anther-length........... 3.64.0 mm. Spike-length.......... 13-24 em. Grain-length............ 2.8-8.0 mm. кише з BE 0 yi mm.) often much reduced in occasional glumes. The following table shows the intermediate nature of the proposed hybrid: Elymus canadensis x Hystrix patula Lemma-awns Curved-divergent, Curved-divergent, Usually straight, usually recurved often recurved not recurved Glumes, Narrowly to long- Setaceous to nar- Setaceous if shape lanceolate rowly lanceolate, present mostly subseta- ceous Glumes, 14-35 mm., usu- 6-20 mm., mostly 0-18 mm., mostly length ally 25-30 mm. 10-15 mm. less than 5 mm. Glumes, Equal or essen- Unequal Very unequal equality tially so Grains Present Often lacking Present The specimens collected in Minnesota and previously referred to E. diversiglumis and more recently to E. interruptus are unique 1948] Booher and Tryon,—Elymus in Minnesota 89 in the variable lengths of their glumes. An unusual amount of variation is often exhibited within a single spike. An intensive study has convinced us that this material represents hybrids of the proposed parent species. Unlike recent hybrids in the Hordeae studied by Stebbins and eo-workers?, this one is appar- ently sometimes fertile, as indicated by the fact that rarely grains are developed. Such a complete series of intergrades exists between the two parents that it is likely also that there occurs considerable backerossing of the presumed F, hybrids to the putative parents. The true nature of the proposed hybrid will, of course, await cytological and genetical studies. The following selected series illustrates the transition between Hystrix patula and Elymus canadensis in the characters of the glumes: Lakela 4183, IT. patula, has the glumes obsolete or rudi- mentary, only one of a pair developed to any size; Sheldon 459, Н. patula, has the glumes obsolete to 8 mm. long with only one of a pair well developed; Sandberg (UM Herb. 67146), H. patula, has the glumes obsolete to 18 mm. long, those of a spikelet very unequal; Bergman 2066 (N. Dakota), Skinner & MacMillan 107, Ballard 578 and Campbell 130, E. canadensis X H. patula, have the glumes varying from obsolete to 8 mm. long and very unequal to mostly 4-15 mm. long and unequal. In all of the above speci- mens the glumes are setaceous. Skinner & MacMillan 267 and Grant 5091, E. canadensis X H. patula, and Rosendahl 4916 (Wis.), very close to E. canadensis, have the glumes subsetaceous to narrowly lanceolate, 6-20 mm. long and not very unequal; Atton in 1889 (UM Herb. 64790), E. canadensis, has the glumes equal, long-lanceolate and about 30 mm. long. Specimens that are close to E. canadensis can usually be sepa- rated by their subsetaceous, relatively short glumes that are un- equal in at least some of the spikelets. Those close to Hystrix patula can be separated by their relatively well developed glumes and the frequently recurved lemma awns. The type specimens of E. divers/glumis (Wyoming) and Ё. interruptus (Texas) are from areas outside of the range of Hystrix patula. The status and identity of those two species is left for consideration in a broader study. SPECIMENS EXAMINED: NORTH DAKOTA: Walhalla, Berg- man 2066. SOUTH DAKOTA: Big Stone City, J. W. Moore 3 STEBBINS, G. L., Jr., J. I. Vatencia and R. M. VALENCIA. Artificial and Natural Hybrids in the Gramineae, Tribe Hordeae. 1. Elymus, Sitanion and Agropyron. Amer. Journ. Bot. 33: 338-351; II. Agropyron, Elymus and Hordeum. 579-586. 1946. 90 Rhodora [APRIL 528. MINNESOTA: Crookston, Skinner & MacMillan 107, 267; Crystal Lake, Ballard 578; Rockville, Campbell 130; Vining, Moore & Jacobs 14777; Black Hoof, Moore & butters 13472; Itasca Park, Grant 2914, 3091, 3188; Lanesboro, Moyle 3959; St. Anthony Park (St. Paul), Wheeler 1224; Itasca Park, Rosendahl 5917, 5922; Gull Lake, A. P. Anderson in 1893; Nerstrand Woods, Linnaean Club 210; Fort Snelling, Nielsen 1785. WISCONSIN: St. Croix Co. (north of Stillwater, Minn.), Rosendahl 4916. This hybrid is rather widely distributed from the southeastern corner of the state to nearly the northwest corner, but has not been collected in either the southwestern or northeastern parts of Minnesota. It occurs entirely within the range of Hystrix patula in the state. 5. “ELYMUS Macovunir” 5. AGROPYRON TRACHYCAULUM (Link) Malte var. TYPICUM Fernald X Horpreum JUBATUM L. Elymus Macounii Vasey. The “species” long passing as Elymus Macoun?i has recently been shown! to represent hybrids of various species of Agropyron and Hordeum. The material from Minnesota is all sterile, lack- ing grains, and it fits into such a hybrid interpretation. The parents of the Minnesota material (Wheeler 1254, Skinner 228, Ballard 2570 and Moyle 2609) are proposed as A. trachycaulum var. typicum and H. jubatum. The critical characters of the two parents and the hybrid are presented in the following table: Hordeum jubatum X Agropyron trachycaulum var. typicum Rachis readily disartie- Rachis tardily and in- Rachis tardily and weakly, ulating completely disarticu- if at all, disarticulating lating Spikelets in 3's Spikelets solitary or in Spikelets solitary pairs Spikelets 1-flowered Spikelets 2-4-flowered Spikelets 3—4-flowered Spikelets spreading Spikelets appressed Spikelets appressed Glume-awns 4-8 cm. Glume-awns 0.5-1 em. Glumes awnless or nearly long long SO Grains present Grains absent Grains present 6. EXCLUDED SPECIES: ELYMUS CINEREUS 6. E. crNEREUS Scribn. & Merr. E. condensatus of recent authors, in part, not Presl. 4 STEBBINS, G. L., Jr., J. I. VanENCIA and R. M. VALENCIA. Artificial and Natural Hybrids in the Gramineae, tribe Hordeae II. Agropyron, Elymus and Hordeum. Amer. Journ. Bot. 33: 580. 1946. 1948] Waterfall,—Distributional Notes from Oklahoma 91 The awnless or scarcely awned lemmas separate this species from Ё. canadensis and E. villosus and the setaceous or subseta- ceous glumes separate it from E. virginicus. This species is known to Minnesota only by a single specimen in the United States National Herbarium (Fort Snelling, Minne- sota, August 3, 1890, E. A. Mearns 4). The identification has been confirmed by Dr. J. R. Swallen who has also kindly sent us a copy of the label. A mixture of labels may have been involved (Vasey’s identification was E. canadensis 1), but assuming not, then it seems almost certain that this species no longer grows at Fort Snelling. Local botanists have never collected the species there in spite of frequent trips to the area, even in the 1890's. Intensive development of the area during two wars has eradicated much of the original flora. Inasmuch as the Minnesota “station” is an 1solated eastern occurrence, there 1s the possibility that 1t was an ephemeral adventive from the West. Under the circumstances, we feel that it is best to exclude this species from the state flora until such a time as its occurrence may be more satisfactorily established. DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA DISTRIBUTIONAL NOTES AND SOME MINOR FORMS FROM OKLAHOMA U. T. WATERFALL The following notes are concerned primarily with plants col- lected by the author in 1944 and 1945, mostly in south-central Oklahoma in the Arbuckle Mountains and vicinity. This area has often been botanically investigated by classes, and other parties, but has seldom been reported on as a phytogeographic area. Ernest J. Palmer spent parts of two days collecting there in 1934 while on a more extensive botanizing trip which included other parts of the state. In the Arbuckles he found and re- | ported several species which he considered to be characteristic of the limestone areas of the Edwards Plateau in Texas. He sug- gested that the Arbucklean flora might constitute a northeastern 92 Rhodora [APRIL outpost of the flora of the Edwards Plateau'. Milton Hopkins also mentions similarities in the flora of the two regions in his discussion of the range of Juniperus Ashei (J. mexicana). Additional evidence concerning the southwestern affinities of the flora of the xeric slopes of the Arbuckles will be presented here. The vegetation of the Arbuckle region varies from the heavily forested areas along the Washita River and some of the larger creeks (where such mesic species as Sanicula gregaria, Taenidia integerrima, Zizia aurea and Dasistoma macrophylla may be found), through mesic grassland dominated principally by Andropogon scoparius, to xeric slopes dominated by species listed later. A contrast in vegetation is often found in the grassland on the north and south sides of the low limestone hills which run in a general east-west direction in the central and southern parts of the Arbuckles. The creek-bottoms and valleys between the hills are often wooded, as sometimes are the arroyos running up the hillsides. The limestone plateau which comprises the top of the Arbuckles is grass-covered, as usually are the hillsides, especially in the Arbuckle limestone. On the north sides of the hills, as on the plateau, the grassland is usually mesic in character, being composed primarily of Andropogon scoparius with varying amounts of Andropogon Gerardi, Sorghastrum nutans and Pani- cum virgatum growing where extra water is available, and smaller amounts of Bouteloua curtipendula, and other species with a lower water requirement, growing on the less favored sites. The southern slopes of the hills are often characterized by a more xeric grassland vegetation. The principal species are: Bouteloua hirsuta, Bouteloua curtipendula, B. rigidiseta, Triodia elongata, Triodia pilosa and Panicum Нат. The latter may be fairly abundant locally. However, even on the south slopes, where faults in the rock strata, or separation of up-ended layers, have permitted the accumulation of a deep soil and the concentration of run-off water, Andropogon scoparius again becomes dominant. Even in the fall and winter the difference between the kinds of vegetation on the two slopes can be recognized from a distance 1 Palmer, E. J., Notes on some plants of Oklahoma. Journ. Arn. Arb. 15: 132-134. 1934. ? Hopkins, Milton, Notes from the Herbarium of the University of Oklahoma—1, RHODORA 40: 425—429. 1938. 1948] Waterfall,—Distributional Notes from Oklahoma 93 by the contrasting coloration. The grasses on the northern sides, predominantly Andropogon scoparius, cure to a brownish or red-brown color. The southern slopes are a lighter color as many of the species growing there dry to a light, yellowish or grayish color. In extreme cases it is almost as if the two sides of the hill were separated several hundred miles geographically and climatically. This seems to be due to the probability that the available water supply on these sites is critically near the mini- mum amount needed for the growth of Andropogon scoparius. Consequently, the increased evaporation on the south-facing slopes reduces the amount of available water below the minimum required for the perpetuation of Andropogon scoparius. More xeric species, having lower water requirements, are consequently found on these sites. This is not to be taken as precluding the probability that the distribution of certain species may be cor- related primarily with the presence of limestone, or other differ- ent substrates of immature soils. Thus the xeric vegetation on limestone hills may differ from that on granite, climatice condi- tions being similar. An example of several species southwestern in affinities was found growing on an igneous canyon-wall along a creek 8 miles west and 3 miles south of Davis, Murray County. Here were collected: Cheilanthes Eatonii, Pellaea Wrightiana, Leptochloa dubia, Abutilon incanum and Galium lexense. Some of the xeric species found on limestone include: T'riodia pilosa, Triodia elongata, Bouteloua rigidiseta, Panicum Нат, Sida procumbens and Galium texense. SPHENOPHOLIS OBTUSATA (Michx.) Seribn., var. LOBATA (Trin. ) Scribn. forma purpurascens (Vasey ex Rydb. and Shear) comb. et stat. nov. Eatonia obtusata, var. purpurascens Vasey ex Rydb. and Shear, U. 5. Dept. of Agri., Div. of Agrostology, Bull. 5: 30. 1897. Plants similar to S. obtusata, var. lobata, but differing primarily in having the glumes and upper parts of the lemmas colored dark purple, were found in a creek-bottom prairie, 3 miles east and 3 north of Sulphur, Murray County, on May 24, 1946. They were collected as Waterfall No. 6486. Dr. Edward Palmer collected the type of var. purpurascens! “in the Indian Territory, chiefly on the False Washita, between 1'lThe author is grateful to Dr. E. P. Killip, Head Curator of the Department of Botany, Smithsonian Institution, United States National Museum, Washington, D. C., for the loan of the type. 94 Rhodora [APRIL Fort Cobb and Fort Arbuckle, 1868". It is numbered 404, and designated by Vasey as /аѓопта obtusata, var. purpurascens. Rydberg and Shear validated this herbarium name as “а form with purplish panicles”. They -also cited their numbers 252, 2521% and 2002 from Nebraska, and Kearney 271 from the same state, as representing var. purpurascens. Since the principal differentiating characteristic seems to be the minor one of glume and lemma coloration, the author believes these plants should receive only formal designation, whether or not their occurrence proves to be sporadic throughout the entire range of the variety. It might also be noted that some of our specimens referable to var. lobata on the basis of having short panicles with appressed, rounded branches do not have puberu- lent sheaths. If the panicle characteristics, variable though they are, be accorded more taxonomic significance than the sheath characteristic, then it would appear that var. lobata should be considered as having sheaths varying from glabrous to pubescent. A second possibility is that plants with glabrous sheaths merely represent a merging with the typical variety. SPHENOPHOLIS OBTUSATA, Var. PUBESCENS (Scribn. and Merr.) Scribn. In checking the material of Sphenopholis obtusata from our state, there were found two sheets that agree with the characteristics of var. pubescens as set forth by Еегпаја!, and also by Lamson-Seribner?. These sheets are: Milton Hopkins 1696, dry rocky woods . . . 9 miles northwest of Wilburton, Latimer County, May 7, 1937; Elbert Little 1083, Muskogee County, May 15, 1927. This variety appears to be an addition to our state flora. SPOROBOLUS PYRAMIDATUS (Lam.) Hitche. This species is a rarity in the’ Arbuckles where it grows on saline soil, as did Waterfall 6074, taken from saline sand in the Secondary Wilcox Formation, about 3 miles north of Springer, Carter County. An abundant associate was Distichlis stricta, another indicator of salinity. The latter species is common farther west and north- west in the state. STIPA LEUCOTRICHA Trin. and Rupr. is locally abundant in the Arbuckle Mountain area and southward through the tight, limestone-derived ‘‘blacklands’’. It is often associated with Buchloe dactyloides, and, when abundant in this region, should 1 Fernald, M. L., Another Century of Additions to the Flora of Virginia, RHODORA 43: 533. 1941. ? Lamson-Scribner, F., The Genus Sphenopholis. RHoponaA 8: 143. 1906. 1948] Waterfall,—Distributional Notes from Oklahoma 95 probably be considered as an indicator of overgrazing of about the same significance as the latter species. LESQUERELLA OVALIFOLIA Rydb., var. ALBA Goodman. This white-flowered Lesquerella is locally abundant in the Arbuckles, sometimes coloring hills white in the early spring. It is usually found on thin, shallow soil on limestone hills. In near-climax condition it grows with such grasses as Bouteloua curtipendula, Bouteloua hirsuta and Triodia elongata; under overgrazing the Lesquerella increases in abundance, as do such species as Triodia pilosa. In the spring of 1947, the var. alba was first collected from the Wichita Mountains (Goodman and Waterfall 5604). Previously it had been known only from the Arbuckles where it was dis- covered. Peculiarly enough, in the Arbuckles it has been found only on limestone, not on granite, while in the Wichitas it grows on granitie soils. STILLINGIA TEXANA Johnston, var. latifolia, var. nov., a varietate typica differt foliis latioribus et crenatis. In July 1946, the author collected from limestone soil in the Arbuckle Mountains a Stillingia apparently referable to Stillingia Іетапа by virtue of the small fruits (са. 7 mm. in diameter). However, the leaf-width was broader by two or three times than the leaf-width usually associated with S. fevana, and the margins were crenate. Furthermore, the collection is considerably north of known records for the species, and thus in an area where variation might be expected. Material of S. terana (including S. sylvatica, var. linearifolia Тогг., 5. пеат оба (Torr.) Small, not Wats., and S. anqusti- Jolia Engelm. as applied to the early Texas collections, not the Florida material) was borrowed from the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, the herbaria of the Missouri Botanical Garden, University of Texas and Southern Methodist Univer- sity.! А study of this material shows that <. texana commonly ranges from north-central Texas, as shown by numerous collec- tions from near Dallas and Fort Worth, westward to Shakelford County (Waterfall 4345), then southwest to Taylor and Coke Counties. From the Fort Worth-Dallas area south and south- west to the Austin-Fredericksburg-San Antonio region the species often has been collected. Following the description of ! The author is indebted to the curators of the herbaria mentioned for the loan of material needed in this study. 96 Rhodora [APRIL the type Torrey! cites the following distribution: ‘‘Ravines on the San Pedro River and on limestone rocks higher up on the Rio Grande", It has been collected in Coahuila, Mexico: Marsh 80, Musquiz, Coahuila, 1935; Wynd and Mueller 225, Hacienda Mariposa, ravine near Santa Anna, June 22, 1936; Wynd, Hacienda San Rafael, about 10 miles southwest of Hacien- da Mariposa along Sabinas Creek, Aug. 18, 1937. The labels on several collections state that the species was found on limestone soil, or limestone outcrops. The author's collections in north- central Texas, as well as the present one, are from such sites. The relative narrowness of the leaves seems to be a fairly constant vegetative characteristic of the typical variety, STIL- LINGIA TEXANA Johnston, var. typica nom. nov. (S. sylvatica, var. linearifolia Torr., Botany of the Mexican Boundary, 201. 1859). A number of measurements indicate that the majority of the leaves are from 10 to 15 times longer than wide. Con- trastingly, the leaves of var. latzfolia are 5 to 7 times longer than wide. This leaf-width approaches that of S. sylvatica, var. salicifolia. From the latter variety 5. texana, var. latifolia may be distinguished by the size of the fruits which average about 7-8 mm. in diameter and about 6-7 mm. in height in both var. typica and var. latifolia, as contrasted with a diameter of about 14-15 mm. and a height of 12-14 mm. in S. sylvatica, var. salici- folia. The expanded upper part of the gynophore averages са. 6 mm. in width in S. texana, and са. 10 mm. in width in А. sylvatica. The leaf-margins of S. lerana, var. typica are often serrulate, the apices of the teeth being tipped with prominent conieal glands. This characteristic is somewhat variable. The teeth may become more and more rounded, and the apical glands nearer and nearer the sinuses until the margins are erenate with glands in, or approaching, the bases of the sinuses. The serru- late-glandular leaves are much more numerous on the examined specimens than the crenate-margined leaves. The түРЕ of та texana, var. latifolia is in the Bebb Herbarium of the University of Oklahoma. It is: Waterfall 6523, limestone hillside in the Arbuckle Mountains, 5 miles west and 214% south of Davis, Murray County, July 15, 1946. An ISOTYPE 18 in the Gray Herbarium. 1 Torrey, John. Botany of the Mexican Boundary, 201. 1859. 1948] Waterfall,—Distributional Notes from Oklahoma 97 SIDA PROCUMBENS Sw. This perennial, procumbent Sida of the southwest is found fairly frequently, but not in abundance, on xeric limestone sites in the Arbuckles. It is represented in our herbarium by the following, all from Murray County: Waterfall 6060, limestone hill, 116 miles southeast of Big Canyon, June 20, 1945; Waterfall 6396, limestone near White Mound, Arbuckle Mountains. The following sheets, variously misiden- tified, belong here: £d. Dale 647, limestone hillside near Prices Falls, Aug. 15, 1942; Becker, Kennedy and Waterfall 5294, Viola limestone, Arbuckle Mountains; Hopkins 4765, Viola limestone, Arbuckle Mountains. I find no record of the species in our flora, but it is possible that G. W. Stevens collected it, or had knowledge of an Oklahoma sheet. On p. 286 of his Manuscript Flora! he has this key: Plant erect, annual, with fine pubescence.......... 1. Sida spinosa Plant decumbent or prostrate, perennial, pubescence with spreading hairs............. Bie Ss His species No. 2 is unnamed, but the plants at hand will readily key there. OENOTHERA SPACHIANA T. & G. Plants referable to this species were collected as Waterfall 6461 from sand at the edge of post-oak—black-jack woods 4 miles west and 3 north of Sulphur, Murray County. The petals were yellow, drying to a pink color. In our herbarium are sheets from Latimer and Hughes Counties. Munz? lists collections from “Weoka” (Wewoka ?), Atoka and Mannsville. The present collection is from somewhat farther west than the above, and from an additional county. LupwiGIA NATANS Ell., var. ROTUNDATA (Griseb.) Fern. and Grise. On Aug. 9, 1945, the author found this variety growing along a creek running through limestone hills, 1 mile east and 4 south of Hennepin, Murray County. It was collected as No. 6109. In our herbarium there are two sheets that may be referred to this variety. They are: А. Н. Vanfleet, sin. num., muddy ditch near Rodgers, Aug. 6, 1905; and Fred Barkley 1447, Canadian River southwest of Norman, Cleveland County, July 13, 1937. Fernald and Ciriseom? state that the range of var. rotundata ! Stevens, G. W. The Flora of Oktahoma. Unpublished MSS. Original deposited in the Widener Library of Harvard University. 1916. з Munz, Philip A. Studies in the Onagraceae X. The subgenus Кпейла . . . Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 64: 289—290. 1937. з Fernald, M. L. and Ludlow Griscom, Three Days of Botanizing in Southeastern Virginia. Ruopvora 37: 175. 1935. 98 Rhodora [APRIL includes ". . . Georgia and Florida to Texas". Munz! says "5... Atlantie coast to Rocky Mountains". The first state- ment of range does not include our state; the latter is inclusive enough to do so. At any rate the above citation of specimens definitely includes the plant in our flora. CrNTAURIUM Вкүнїснїп (T. & G.) Robins., forma albiflorum forma nov., corollis albidis. Type: Waterfall 6529, limestone hillside, 2 miles east and 2 north of Sulphur, Murray County, July 21, 1946. The type is in the Bebb Herbarium of the University of Oklahoma. Isorvrrs are in the herbaria of Mis- souri Botanical Garden and the New York Botanical Garden. The typical, pink-flowered form of the species is found locally abundant on limestone slopes in the Arbuckles, but is not widely distributed. The white-flowered form is fairly abundant in the area from which it was collected. SABATIA ANGULARIS (L.) Pursh, is occasionally found in wet soil along creeks running through prairies in the Arbuckles. The common species of our area, abundant on prairies, is 5. campestris. SABATIA CAMPESTRIS Nutt., forma ALBIFLORA D. M. Moore. The white-flowered form has previously been reported from Arkansas, the state from which it was described in 1941. It is fairly common on prairies in the Arbuckle region where it is found sporadically with the pink-flowered form. SCUTELLARIA WricHtTi Gray, forma alba, forma nov., corollis albidis. Түрк: Waterfall 6455, limestone hillside in the Arbuckle Mountains, 8 miles west and 2 south of Davis, Murray County; type placed in the Bebb Herbarium of the University of Okla- homa. The white-flowered form is quite rare. GALIUM TEXENSE Gray has been previously reported? from the Wichita Mountains in Oklahoma. Waterfall 6457, from igneous canyon-walls, 8 miles west and 3 south of Davis, extends the range known to us about 80 miles eastward within the state. It is another xerie species found here near its probable north- eastern limit of range. ARTEMISIA ANNUA L. Plants referable to this species were collected as Waterfall 6530 along the Washita River southwest of Daugherty, Murray County, August 5, 1946. I find no previous record of this weedy Artemisia within the state. UNIVERSITY OF OKLAHOMA ! Munz, Philip A. Studies in the Onagraceae XIII. The American Species of Ludwigia. Bull. Torr. Bot. Club 71: 156. 1944. ? Hopkins, Milton. Notes from the Bebb Herbarium of the University of Oklahoma— II. RHoponA 45: 276-277. 1943. 1948] Clement,—Sida in Oklahoma . 99 SIDA IN OKLAHOMA.—U. T. Waterfall, in this issue of RHODORA, page 97, has identified the unnamed 2d species of Sida in G. W. Stevens’ manuscript Flora of Oklahoma as S. procumbens Swartz, the first species being S. spinosa L. Two other species are known to occur in Oklahoma, S. hederacea (Dougl.) Torr. and S. physocalyr Gray (S. hastata St. Hil., 1827, non Willan 1803). Stemen and Myers’ Oklahoma Flora! includes two species of the genus, 5. spinosa and 5. hederacea. Their illustration, fig. 280, p. 318, is taken from one first published in Gates’ Wild Flowers in Kansas; fig. 74, p. 169, and is entitled in both works "Round-leaved Sida", although the illustration shows a plant with obliquely ovate leaves with shallow broad irregular notches in the margins. The Kansas plant, known to me only from a collection by Hitchcock from Meade County, is very similar to the illustration, while the only Oklahoma specimen I have seen, А. I. Ortenburger, 10 July 1926, near Gate, Beaver County, has the more typical reniform leaves with crenate or serrate margins. Thus, the Kansas plant matches the illustration, although the name is inaccurate, while the Oklahoma plant fits the name but not the illustration. The fourth species in the Oklahoma flora, 5. physocalyx, is also known to me from a single collection, G. W. Stevens 403, 21 June 1913, roadside near Hollis, Harmon County, of which there are specimens in the Gray Herbarium and the United States National Herbarium. These bear the label name of “<, hederacea Torr." and are sterile. They are definitely referable to 5. physocalyx by the presence of large fusiform woody roots and an indument on the stem, petioles and lower surfaces of the leaves composed of 4-rayed stellate hairs, the rays aligned with the axis of the particular organ, two pointed apically, the other two basally.—laAN D. CLEMENT, Gray Herbarium. ! STEMEN, Т. R. & Myers, W.S. Oklahoma Flora. Harlow Publ. Corp., Oklahoma City, 1937. ? GATES, Frank C. Wild Flowers in Kansas, Report of the Kansas State Board of Agriculture for the quarter ending December 1932. State Printer, Topeka, 1933. 100 Rhodora [APRIL RoniPPA: A ConRECTION.—In Кнорока, xlii. 271 (1940) I took up for one of the common North American and Asiatic varieties of Rorippa islandica (Oeder) Borbas the name var. microcarpa (Regel) Fernald, based upon Nasturtium palustre DC., var. microcarpum Regel (1861). At that time I noted that there already existed a form of true R. islandica: R. islandica, forma microcarpa, erroneously ascribed to G. Beck by Thellung (1919) and based upon R. palustris B. microcarpa G. Beck (1892). I failed to note that by the International Rules my combination is invalid for, although Beck's varietal combination was later than Regel's, the transfer of it to formal rank under R. islandica by Thellung precludes the use of the same trivial for any other form or variety of the species. I am indebted to Dr. Stanley Jay Smith for directing my attention to this error. R. islandica, var. microcarpa (Regel) Fernald now, unfortunately, has to be called var. Fernaldiana Butters & Abbe in Кнорова, 1. c. 28 (1910). The long, prostrate and repent plant, R. islandica, var. microcarpa, forma reptabunda Fernald in Rhodora, 1.35 (1948) stands as a form under var. Fernaldiana, since forms of a species retain their original epithets without regard to the varietal name with which they were first associated.—M. L. FERNALD. RHODORA INDEX; REQUEST FOR CORRECTIONS.—A cumulative in- dex to the first fifty volumes of Rhodora is being prepared. Any user of RHODORA who has noted errors in the indices to the various volumes will greatly aid in the enterprise by sending the correc- tions to the EDITORS. Volume 50, no. 591, including pages 53—72, was issued 18 March, 1948. AKL Hovora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. May, 1948. No. 593. CONTENTS: Unlisted new Names in Alphonso Wood’s Botanical Publications. EDEME злс ула es a E IPM 101 John Crawford Parlin. Ralph C. Bean. .... 130 New Names for two Brazilian Species. Lyman B. Smith... . 132 A prostrate Rorippa in the Interior. Olga Lakela.............. 132 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—a monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10—34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St. Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp., 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. TRbooora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. May, 1948. No. 593. UNLISTED NEW NAMES IN ALPHONSO WOOD'S BOTANICAL PUBLICATIONS Il. D. MEnRILL My attention was called to the desirability of checking the new names first published by Alphonso Wood in his various descriptive floras, commencing with his Class-Book of 1845, by noting that in 1933 the late John K. Small adopted Anantherix connivens Feay and Peltandra glauca Feay as the valid names for two accepted species. Neither name was listed in standard indices, and it was only after much search, and finally only through the assistance of Mr. E. J. Alexander, that the place of publication of these two fugitive names was located. Dr. Small, in accepting them, gave no references to the place of publication and they do not appear in any of the few papers that Feay! issued. A somewhat casual examination of certain of Wood's works showed that they contained a considerable number of new bi- nomials, for the most part not indicated as new. Accordingly, an examination of all of his works was made, all names under suspicion listed, and these were checked in Index Kewensis. By names under suspicion is meant all those followed һу the name Wood as an authority; those followed by the names of minor authors such as Feay, Lapham, Coleman, Robbins, and others; and many of those where no authority was cited. In the ! Doctor William T. Feay was born in South Carolina in about 1803 and died at Savannah, Georgia, May 22, 1879. He is the author of a Catalogue of the Phaeno- gamous Plants growing within Thirty Miles of Savannah . . . Atl. Med. Jour. 3: 169—217. 1860. 102 Rhodora [May course of checking these names it was noted that a considerable number of them had been listed without complete citations or with references to later places of publication. The results are in no way startling and scarcely affect the accepted nomenclature of the species characteristic of eastern North America; naturally there are certain additions to synonymy, for in general, but not always, the unlisted new names published by Wood have been overlooked by all subsequent authors. Very few of Wood’s nomenclatural proposals have withstood the test of time. A rather extraordinary situation developed because of the publishers’ claims to numerous “revised and enlarged” editions of one text, the first Class-Book, and to their not indicating the somewhat revised editions of another, the second Class-Book, as new editions, the two very different works being issued concur- rently following 1861. This I have attempted to clarify. Following this general discussion I have listed the new Wood binomials that have been overlooked, and corrected the entries for others. The unlisted names marked with an asterisk (*) total 73 and the corrected entries marked with a dagger (1) total 22. The surprising thing perhaps is that so many of the new Wood names were detected and listed by earlier bibliogra- phers, because in most cases there is no indication that they were new. -No attention has been given to Wood's binomials which are correctly listed in Index Kewensis; nor have I listed certain transfers of specific names which Wood credited to him- self, where the record shows that the same transfers were made earlier by other authors. Wood actually published a consider- able number of new varietal names, but these are beyond the scope of this paper. Very few of them have ever been con- sidered by Wood's successors. THE FIRST CLAss-Book This was copyrighted in 1844, and the preface is dated June 22, 1844. Eggleston,’ in his paper on Wood’s botanical publica- tions, says copyrighted in 1845 and published in 1845, that is, among the copies he examined. Asa Gray’s copy, now in the library of the Gray Herbarium, bears the publication date on the 2 Eggleston, W. W. The Botanical Publications of Alphonso Wood. Agr. Libr. Notes 2: 95-100. 1927. 1948 Merrill,—Unlisted Names in Wood’s Publications 103 title page 1845, its copyright date being 1844; the Arnold Ar- boretum copy is the same, except that it was copyrighted in 1845. Ihave found no data that would indicate actual publica- tion in 1844, and accordingly 1845 is the date used in the refer- ences in this paper. It is only the second part of the work with which taxonomists are concerned.’ The descriptive flora was a more or less conventional compila- tion, with concise descriptions of the families, genera, and species selected; about 690 genera and 1875 species are described. For a high percentage of the accepted binomials authorities are not indicated and only occasional synonyms are given. Wood explains their omission (p. 12) thus: “It is aside from the design of a work purely elementary like the present, to burden its pages with long lists of synonyms and authorities . . . In regard to authorities for specific and generic names, we quote none except where synonyms are introduced, or where we are indebted to contemporary authors of our own country." Unfortunately Wood did not consistently follow this plan, thus introducing a certain amount of confusion. The work was entirely that of the author except for the treatment of the genus Carex (125 species) which was contributed by Chester Dewey. The text includes the native and naturalized species that the author was willing to accept and the more commonly cultivated ones, even five species of Citrus, seventeen species of Pelargonium, and some other subtropical or subtemperate species that do not grow in the region covered except under glass. It is by no means a complete flora, the species selected for inclusion being apparently those known to the author, supplemented by others taken from various works such as the then standard Flora of North America published by Torrey and Gray (1838-43) which was completed only through the Compositae. In general the nomenclature accepted is the standard of the time. I have, however, noted two innovations in the new binomials Rhododendron procumbens Wood, p. 286, and Desmodium glutinosum Wood, p. 120; and several of Dewey’s species of Carex were here actually published 3 Wood, A., A Class-Book of Botany, Designed for Colleges, Academies, and Other Seminaries Where the Science is Taught. In Two Parts: Part I. The Ele- ments of Botanical Science. Part II. The Natural Orders Illustrated by a Flora of the Northern United States, Particularly of New England and New York. 1-124, jig. 1—38. 1—11. 1-474. 1845. Boston. Crocker & Brewster 104 Rhodora [May for the first time although published elsewhere later. None of the names is indicated as new and hence they have generally been overlooked. There are certain typographical errors, but no really serious ones, such as Dentaria lasciniata for D. laciniata (p. 40), Chrysanthemum siense for C. sinense (p. 209) and others of this nature. Artificial keys to the genera are included but not keys to the species. Eggleston states: “Prof. Wood organized a class of botany at Kimball Union Academy but soon found himself handicapped by lack of a suitable botany. This he tried to rectify by appeals to Dr. Asa Gray and other botanists for a better botanical textbook. His appeals were in vain and Prof. Wood gradually prepared a manuscript for use in his own classroom. In 1845 he published the first ‘Class-Book of Botany’. This edition of about 1500 copies was not stereotyped. It covered the New England States and New York. Much to his surprise, the edition was soon sold." Two years later a second revised and enlarged edition was published by Messrs. Crocker & Brewster‘. The title is prac- tically the same as that of the first edition except that the last part of the subtitle reads ''particularly of the United States North of the Capitol Lat. 3834°.” This edition was copy- righted in 1846, but published in 1847, the preface being dated April, 1847. This slightly modified title was used in all of the subsequent reprintings, the very numerous so-called “revised and enlarged editions", which by 1855 had attained the grand total of 41 (actual printings, not new editions). The range was extended to cover “that section of the United States which lies north of the Capitol, that is, of the 39th parallel, including essentially the States lying north of the Ohio river and Mary- land". A footnote from this statement reads: “With some exceptions, therefore, this Flora will answer for the adjacent states of Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, Kentucky, Missouri, and the Canadas.’’ In preparation for this enlarged edition Wood had, in 1846, made a trip to western Indiana, returning via Harper's Ferry, Virginia; see Sullivant's pointed comment on this trip, p. 114. It includes the description of about 822 genera and 2325 species, the latter figure being perhaps two thirds of the number of species now currently recognized for the 1 Wood, A. А Class-book of Botany, Designed for Colleges, Academies. and other Seminaries . . . Illustrated by a Flora of the Northern, Middle, and Western States; particularly of the United States North of the Capitol, Lat. 38%4°. Second Edition, Revised and Enlarged 1—645. fig. 1-38. 1847. Boston, Crocker & Brewster. 1948 Merrill,—Unlisted Names in Wood’s Publications 105 area covered. The pagination (1-645) is continuous, covering both the lessons and the descriptive flora. This edition includes a certain number of nomenclatural innovations, the authorities for the binomials being more gen- erally cited than in the first edition; synonyms are also more frequently listed. It is a distinct improvement over the first edition and was, up to 1847, the best simple treatment of its kind to appear in the United States. Still, like its predecessors and immediate successors, it was far from complete for the area covered, although the claim was made that: “It comprehends all the Phaenogamia, or flowering plants, with the Ferns, &с. which have hitherto been discovered and described as indigenous in these States, together with the naturalized exotics, and those which are more generally cultivated either as useful or orna- mental." Wood states that with few exceptions he had adopted the nomenclature of Torrey and Gray’s North American Flora and for the cultivated exotics that of De Candolle's Prodromus "regarding these, as they truly are, standard works." For the benefit of the more serious students he states: “It affords us pleasure to be able to recommend to all such as would venture beyond the first principles the full and elaborate ‘Text-Book’ of Dr. Asa Gray,—an American work of the highest merit." This second edition was stereotyped, and from the original plates many thousands of copies were printed up to at least as late as 1869. and apparently (undated) even later. The state- ment ‘Second Edition Revised and Enlarged” appearing on the title page of the 1847 issue is true, but the publishers apparently adopted the policy of repeating the phrase, with modifications as to the number of the edition, in some, but not all, later issues. Thus between the years 1850 and 1855 we note the entries “Tenth Edition, Revised and Enlarged” up to the ‘‘Forty-first Edition, Revised and Enlarged "—thirty one ‘‘new editions" in five years! After 1855 the phrase ‘‘Forty-first Edition Revised and Enlarged " appeared on later printings, the latest dated issue І have seen being 1869. These were not new editions; all were printed from the original plates of the second (1847) edition without changes except that the addenda (p. 638) of 1847 with four entries was increased by 1869 to six entries. Thus it is that any сору of this work will provide the original data of 1847, 106 Rhodora [May regardless of the dates given on the title pages and regardless of the number of the so-called edition. There are many more nomenclatural innovations in the second (1847) edition than in the first one of 1845. In general new species are not indicated as such but some of the new names are followed by Wood’s name, and in a very few cases the abbre- viation nov. sp. appears. Examples are Dicliptera americana Wood, Gerardia Skinneriana Wood, Sabbatia concinna Wood "*(Nov. sp.)", Cuscuta lepidachne Wood, Stylisma tenellus Wood (published earlier by Rafinesque), Scutellaria rugosa Wood "(Nov. sp.)" Veratrum Woodii Robbins ''(Nov. sp.) Agrostis heterolepis Wood, Potamogeton obrutus Wood, Rumex altissimus Wood, Oplismenus hispidus Wood, and Diarrhena diandra Wood. In addition to a certain number of new species proposed, there are some new combinations, these usually not indicated as such, an example being Abies ‘‘(Larix) Americana, Michx.” Because of the, in general, obscure publication of new names it is not strange that some have been overlooked through the century that has elapsed since they were first proposed. THE SECOND CLAss-Book After changing publishers, some time after 1856, Messrs. Barnes & Burr, who handled Wood’s later publications, paid him a bonus to enable him to make exploring trips in the South in connection with the preparation of the text of his greatly en- larged Class-Book of 18615. According to Eggleston’s records parts one to three, pages 1-174, comprising all but the descriptive flora, i. e., the text-book part of the volume, was copyrighted in 1860 and published in the same year. I have not seen this issue, nor did Eggleston record seeing any copy of other than the above pages. The complete text, copyrighted in 1860, was published in 1861, and the date 1861 is the one I have used in the references included in this paper. This was an entirely new work, not a new edition of the first Class-Book, although occasionally individuals have charac- terized it as “led. 3|" and at least one as edition two. The area 5 Wood, A. Class-Book of Botany, being Outlines of the Structure, Physiology, and Classiflcation of Plants; with a Flora of the United States and Canada. i-viii. 1-832. fig. 1-745. 1861. New York, Barnes & Burr. 1948] Merrill, —Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 107 covered by the descriptive text was greatly extended, as ex- pressed by Wood in the preface. “Тһе limit of our Flora in this new series has been greatly extended. It now embraces the territory lying East of the Mississippi River, with the exception of the Southern Peninsula of Florida, and South of the Great Lakes and the River St. Lawrence . . . This Class-Book is, therefore, now professedly adapted to the student's use from Quebec to New Orleans and from St. Pauls to St. Augustine." Although the subtitle is “A Flora of the United States and Canada", this is too broad a claim, as vast areas in the north and south and all of the country from the great plains to the Pacific coast were not covered. Like its predecessor this work was an eminently successful one and in great demand as a text book. It was reissued each year between 1862 and 1868 in large printings. The only change made in all of these issues was in the date appearing on the title page; all issues were printed from the original stereotype plates of 1861. Thus every issue between the above dates, as to the text, is identical with the original edition. "These various printings were not called new editions as was the case in the numerous reprintings of the second edition of the first Class-Book. In 1868 the work was somewhat revised, although, when it was copyrighted and printed in 1869, it still contained but 832 pages. For the most part it was printed from the stereotype plates of the 1861 issue. However, a very few species were added in the text with brief descriptive data, where this could be done without al- tering the limits of a given page, such as Aster anomalus Engelm., A. mutabilis Willd., A. subasper Lindl., Boltonia decurrens Wood, and Lobelia Erynus Linn. A very few species were dropped and their places taken by others, such as Artemisia frigida Willd. replacing A. pontica Linn., while Clintonia Douglas was elim- inated and С. elegans Dougl. became Lobelia Douglassii Wood. However figures 746-784 were added to fill the blank at the end of the consideration of the Cyperaceae on page 730, and following p. 800 there were inserted five plates with three unnumbered pages of explanation of the 60 excellent figures showing details of the spikelets and inflorescences of 60 of the 71 genera of Gramineae considered. Apparently the publishers did not con- sider that these changes were sufficient to warrant them in 108 Rhodora [May characterizing this issue as a new edition. It was copyrighted in 1869 and published in the same year. Like the issue of 1861 this was reprinted year after year from 1870 on up to at least 1877, and probably later. But in these issues no changes were made in the text, the only differences being the dates on the title pages. In 1881 the work was again slightly revised, the size being increased from 832 to 843 pages, the increase in the number of pages being due entirely to the inclusion of the addenda. The preface to this issue includes this statement: “The present edition of the Class-Book of Botany (1880), again carefully revised, will be found to contain many changes in the text, especially in that of the Flora, together with an Addenda." However, most of the pages were printed from the original stereotype plates of the 1861 issue, with no changes; here and there the same mutilated characters of the 1861 issue are noted in the issue of 1881. A rather careful examination of the text shows not more than about 20 changes in the names of species, none of the names being new ones, so that again the claim that there were ‘‘many changes in the text” is misleading. The total number of changes is but slightly in excess of those made in the 1869 issue as compared with the original of 1861. The pagina- tion up to p. 824 is identical with that of the 1861 and 1869 issues. Apparently when a minor change was made in the text, here and there, again great care was taken to see that such changes did not effect the original format, thus to reduce to a minimum the number of new stereotype plates that had to be made. The insertion of the addenda brought the total pagination up to 843 pages as contrasted with 832 pages in the 1861 and 1869 issues, and the addenda contain a few new names. Like the 1869 issue this one of 1881 was not indicated as a new edition. It also was reprinted from time to time, perhaps up to the first decade of the present century, although the latest date that I have seen on its title page is 1891. There are no changes in the text of these later issues other than in the date on the title page. Mr. Eggles- ton found no record as to when this text was withdrawn by the publishers, but it was still widely used as a textbook in the last decade of the nineteenth century. Dr. Wood died January 4, 1881, and this is probably the 1948] Merrill,——Unlisted Names in Wood’s Publications 109 reason why, in the course of the succeeding two or three decades, the textbook became obsolete; probably the publishers, to whom it must have been a very profitable venture, were unable to secure the services of a competent botanist to revise and modern- ize the text; then, too, at the time the text was withdrawn, styles in textbooks of botany had changed, and the newer texts stressed the laboratory aspects and minimized the taxonomie phases of the subject, a condition that still persists. In most secondary schools botany was dropped, the place of botany and zoology being taken very largely by a diluted substitute known as biology. CONFUSION AS TO VARIOUS ISSUES OF THE CLAss-Book Because of the procedure adopted by the publishers in not indicating new editions as such, for the second Class-Book from 1861 on, as contrasted with the extravagant elaims of the pub- lishers of the first Class-Book (1845, 1847) as to its numerous "Revised and Enlarged” editions (as many as 41!), as discussed above, a certain amount of confusion has resulted. One sus- pects that most botanists who have, on occasion, consulted the Class-Book, a work that is now obsolete, did not realize that two entirely different works were involved, one commencing in 1845 and continued until after 1869; the other originally pub- lished in 1861 and re-issued year after year until about the end of the century or the early part of the present one. In the references included in this paper I have found it impossible to clarify the matter by citing hypothetical editions, as some have attempted to do, and have contented myself with listing the original work of 1845 as Class-Book, and the very considerably revised and enlarged edition of 1847, clearly indicated as ‘Edi- tion T wo, revised and enlarged", as ed. 2. The new Class-Book of 1861 I indicate as “ed. 1861", its slightly revised issue of 1869 as “ed. 1869", and the further revised issue of 1881 as “ed. 1881." This is somewhat cumbersome, but it is at least clear. One should keep in mind that all issues of the first Class-Book from edition two (1847) to the so-called ‘“Forty-first Edition, Revised and Enlarged”, which continued to be issued with the title-page dates given, as well as issues after 1869, not dated, were all printed from the same plates; that the various dated 110 Rhodora {May issues of the entirely different Class-Book of 1861 to 1868, were also printed from the original 1861 plates without changes, as were the subsequent dated issues of the 1869 text, up to 1880, and of the 1881 text up to the time the book was withdrawn from circulation in the early part of the present century. The only changes in the interims involved were in the dates printed on the title pages. For a period of at least ten years two different texts under the same title ‘“‘Class-Book of Botany" were being con- currently issued and sold by the thousands each year. THE AMERICAN BOTANIST AND FLORIST Wood’s third work* with which taxonomists are concerned was first published in 1870. This issue contains a certain num- ber of nomenclatural innovations, the second part of the book, the descriptive flora, being the only part with which we are concerned. The new binomials are all obscurely published and some of them have been overlooked. In 1871 it was further am- plified and republished, the pagination of the second part of the 1871 issue being increased to 444 pages. For the body of the text any dated issue will suffice, for all printings after 1871 are alike except for minor additions in the addenda, even the so-called “New American Botanist and Florist" of 1889. In the original 1870 edition the treatment of the Gramineae and the Cyperaceae consists only of keys to the genera, with brief notes on four exotic species of grasses cultivated for orna- mental purposes; there are no descriptions of the genera and species. In the 1871 issue its amplification to 444 pages is due to the inclusion of the genera and species of the above two fam- ilies together with numerous small unnumbered text figures illustrating the essential parts of various genera in the two groups. No further changes were made, and then only in the addenda, until 1874, when Ximenia americana Linn. was added. This 1871 issue is not indicated as a new edition in spite of its very considerable amplification. All issues following 1870 bear the copyright date of that year. The descriptions are remark- ably short and concise. As Wood states the case: * Wood, A. The American Botanist and Florist; Including Lessons in the Structure, Life, and Growth of Plants; together with a Simple Analytical Flora, Descriptive of the Native and Cultivated Plants Growing in the Atlantic Division of the American Union. 1-172, fig. 1—528, 1-392, fig. 550-560. 1870. New York and Chicago. A. 8. Barnes and Company. 1948] Merrill,—Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 111 “Our new Flora will be found a phenomenon of brevity. Within the space of 426 duodecimo pages [the text up to but not including the index] in fair leaded type, we have recorded and defined nearly 4,500 species— all the known Flowering and Fern-like plants, both native and cultivated (not excepting the Sedges and Grasses), growing in the Atlantic half of the country. This conciseness has been attained, not by the omission of anything necessary to the complete definition and prompt recognition of every species, but simply by avoiding repetitions.” This work was also apparently a successful one from the standpoint of both the publishers and the author. It was reprinted from the 1871 plates each year up to 1879, the only changes being in the dates on the title-pages, with a few addi- tions to the addenda; printings after 1879 were not dated. In the 1875 issue, the total pagination was increased to 448, the new entries in the addenda extending from Pachystima Raf. to Solanum verbascifolium Linn. In 1877 the entries Apium angustifolium Wood to Cyperus Wolfii Wood were made; and finally in 1879 (possibly in 1878, no copy of this issue having been seen) the pagination was increased to 449, the last two additions being Nymphaea flava Leitner and Shortia galacifolia Torr. & Gray. In the addenda only two new binomials appear, Echinacea Porteri (A. Gray) Wood, p. 445, and Apium angusti- folium Wood, p. 448, the first in the 1870 issue, the second in that of 1877. The work was again copyrighted in 1889 under the title The New American Botanist and Florist . . . i-vi. 1-172, fig. 1-582, 1-449. fig. 551—663. 1889. This issue, like all of those appearing between 1871 and 1888, includes the same unnumbered text- figures in the treatment of the Cyperaceae and the Gramineae. This “new” work is indicated as a ‘Revised Edition", the revision and the editing being the work of Oliver A. Willis. The claim is made, p. vi. that “The work now, with its revision, new matter, additional illustrations, and fresh type, is substan- tially a new book." ‘There are no apparent changes in the descriptive flora, the old stereotype plates being used for this part of the book. The pagination and content is the same as that of the 1879 issue, no changes made even in the addenda. How many issues of this work appeared after 1889 is not known. It was dropped from circulation by the publishers in 1915. In any case the second part of this “new” work of 1889 is exactly the same as the issues immediately preceding 1888. 112 Rhodora [May It contains no important changes, no additions or subtractions, and no nomenclatural innovations. The changes alluded to in the editor’s preface refer to the first part of the book, the lessons, which were radically changed. THe FLORA ATLANTICA In 1879 the descriptive part of the American Botanist and Florist was reprinted from the same plates as the later issues of that work, there being no changes whatever except in the title page.” How many issues of this work appeared is not known. It was withdrawn from circulation in 1915. With this work, manifestly issued ''to.sell", the taxonomists are not concerned as it is only a reprint of an earlier work under a new title. THE Овјест Lessons IN BOTANY In 1863 Wood issued a greatly abbreviated text which was manifestly based on the 1861 edition of his Class-Book. In this new work* he provided abbreviated descriptions of selected families and genera, supplied simple keys to families, genera, and species, and reduced all the species descriptions to a single line or at most two lines. It was not anticipated that this strictly popular work would contain new binomials; these would have been overlooked by me had not Prof. M. L. Fernald called my attention to a few which caused me to check all the entries. The number of new names is small, mostly due to errors in transcription. Examples of typographical errors are Lysimachia hibrida (hybrida), Physostegia virginianii (virginiana), Hypericum galeoides (galioides), and Polygonum dumitorum (dumetorum). Perhaps it might have been just as well had I considered certain cases listed below as new binomials to represent merely typo- graphical errors, examples being Papaver Rheas (Rhoeas), and Aesculus Hippocastaneum (Hippocastanum). Examples of un- documented new binomials are Narcissus Daffodil Wood, Phlox Laphamii Wood, Sarracenia alata Wood, and Syringa alba Wood. 1 Wood, A. Flora Atlantica. Descriptive Botany; being а Succinct Analytical Flora, Including all the Plants Growing in the United States from the Atlantic Coast to the Mississippi River. From the American Botanist and Florist. i-iv. 1-449. illus. 1879. New York, Chicago, New Orleans. A. S. Barnes and Company. 8 Wood, A. Leaves and Flowers; or Object Lessons in Botany with a Flora Pre- pared for Beginners in Academies and Public Schools. 1-322. fig. 1-665. 1863. New York. Barnes and Burr; later issues by A. S. Barnes and Company. 1948] Merrill,——Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 113 This strictly popular work was reissued from time to time. Mr. Eggleston records having seen the issues for 1863, 1888, and 1891 and noted that the work was withdrawn from circulation November 13, 1916. The earliest issue that is available in our libraries is that of 1867 which does not differ from that of 1872, these having been printed from the stereotype plates of the original edition of 1863. In 1877 it was somewhat amplified by the inclusion of certain additional families, genera, and species, this issue containing a total of 364 pages. In this issue there are no nomenclatural innovations. I have not seen any of the issues later than that of 1877. Woop's OTHER BOTANICAL WORKS The several other botanical texts published by Wood deal very largely with matters appertaining to elementary instruction in botany. Mr. Eggleston has listed these, providing pertinent data as to titles and dates of publication. As far as I have examined these works I have noted no nomenclatural innovations. ALPHONSO Woop AND ASA GRAY Wood himself would probably be the last to claim that he was a professional botanist. He was self-trained, and until toward the very end of his life was not associated with institutions in- volved in other than secondary education. No matter what the shortcomings of his various texts were, he did have the facility of preparing accurate, concise, and at the same time simple descriptions. In the American field he originated what he called analytical tables (really artificial keys), making the identifica- tion of both genera and species much simpler and easier than was the case with contemporaneous and earlier texts. It was in the field of simplification that Wood excelled. Eggleston states that between 800,000 and 1,000,000 copies of Wood's various botanical works were printed and sold. Actually in the last half of the preceding century Wood was the great rival of Asa Gray in the botanical textbook field. It was Wood's initial success in 1845 and 1847 that stimulated Gray to prepare and publish his first Manual, and this after Gray had refused to listen to Wood’s plea in 1843 that he (Gray) should prepare a much needed text-book for secondary schools. When Gray 114 Rhodora [May refused to do this, Wood proceeded to prepare one on his own account. There was, not unnaturally, a considerable amount of resent- ment among the few professional and semi-professions! botanists of the time, that a mere teacher in a secondary school, without institutional support, without access to comprehensive library facilities, and without other than his personal herbarium’ should venture into the field of preparing a taxonomic treatment. Wood had certain advantages in that he was teaching in a second-, ary school, and he realized the type of text that was needed for his students; he was unquestionably an excellent teacher. He had no inhibitions regarding his ability to prepare a reasonably good, simple text, and had the courage of his convictions to undertake what he thought was needed. The success of his 1845 text was immediate, thus proving his contention that such a text was needed. Apparently there was a more or less continuous controversy, if controversy it may be called, between the backers of Wood and those of Gray. In any сазе Gray's Manual, as well as other publications issued from time to time as text-books, was also an immediate success. I quote from an article prepared by Prof. Charles J. уоп! of Dartmouth College: “The following quotations indicate how he [Wood] was treated as a usurper without rights, with the writers making no allowance for or having no knowledge of Gray's original failure to help the schools below the college level. ‘Well what I have predicted to you again and again is coming to pass— viz—that some seissors bookmaker would out of the T. and G. [Torrey and Gray] Flora make a fine dollar and cent operation, unless soon attended to by you. Mr. Alphonso Wood made me a long call the other day, just on his return from Indiana where he had spent 5 weeks (4 of them on his back with a fever) doing up all the Botany of the Western States with the view of adapting the 2nd edition of his book to Western schools. Now PI give you my advice without charging you anything for it—announce and э Оп Wood's death in 1881 his herbarium was acquired by the New York College of Pharmacy, where he had occupied the chair of Professorship of Botany during the last two years of his life. This is now the College of Pharmacy of Columbia Uni- versity. The herbarium, estimated to contain about 40,000 sheets, has been little consulted since Wood's death. As this manuscript was being prepared, preliminary arrangements were being made to transfer the bulk of it to the New York Botanical Garden. 0 Lyon, C. J. A 50 Edition Best Seller. Alphonso Wood, Class of 1834, Wrote Botanical Class Books That Reached a Circulation of 800,000 Copies. Dartmouth Alumni Mag. 31: 18, 81-83. 1939. See also Lyon, C. J. Centennial of Wood's * Class-Book of Botany." Science II. 101: 484—486. 1945. 1948] Merrill,—Unlisted Names in Wood’s Publications 115 have it appear in the course of the winter a Manual or School Flora . suppose you can't get the Ist ed. in as good shape as might be, that makes no odds, fix it right in the 2nd Ed. The main thing is to get possession of the track and give it out that vou intend to keep it.’ (letter from Sullivant to Gray, Sept. 20, 1846). | ‘I have been working evenings at a sketch of a Northern Manual, to run opposition to Wood, who is engaged on his second edition. I have a good plan sketched out. It seems now quite necessary to do this at once. It will yield no dividends to speak of, for it must be put so low as to drive Wood off the field, while at the same time it will cost considerable labor. But it will hold the field till in due time we are ready with а United States Manual.’ (Gray to John Torrey, Dec. 1846). ‘Wood will miss it if he stereotypes. Your book will drive him off the track, but I lament that vou work so hard. It is bad for body and soul. Better take your chance when the Flora is done than make such a slave of yourself.’ (Torrey to Gray, Feb. 17, 1847)." . . . .. *In the words of the botanist M. A. Curtis, from his 1857 letter to Gray, ‘Wood is taking the Southern field too. He spent a couple of days with me a fortnight since & has milked me to some extent; tho fortunately my Herbarium is not yet unpacked & I could not show him but a small part of my collection. I have been sorry, since he left, that I showed him as much as I did”. He will prepare а U. S. Botany, & is to get $1500 a year .. . for—I forget how many years after publication. How is it that the most profitable Text Books are prepared by sciolists? . . . I have never seen his Class Book (he promised to send me a сору when he gets home) but I suspect he has some facility in the art of making a book." No attempt is here made to compare the works of the two rival authors. It was, of course, essentially the work of Torrey and Gray which made Wood’s compilation possible, and Wood definitely did have the faculty of simplifying technical descrip- tions. His texts were eminently successful in the secondary school field in spite of Curtis’s characterization of him as a sciolist—‘‘one whose knowledge or learning is superficial; a pretender to scholarship." Were I to render an opinion it would be largely to the effect that the faults of Wood's pub- lished works are those due to an uninhibited amateur venturing into a professional field. It is, however, fortunate that Wood did enter the publication field, for his suecess stimulated Asa Gray to prepare his descrip- tive texts in spite of his original refusal to listen to Wood's plea that he (Gray) should prepare a simplified text for secondary schools and a descriptive flora for the beginner’s use. The first edition of Gray’s Manual of Botany of the Northern United п See the discussion of Adiantum Curtisii Wood, p. 117 and also that of Arceutho- bium abigenium Wood, p. 120, the publication of both of which indicate a certain lack of professional courtesy on the part of the author. 116 Rhodorat [May States appeared in 1848, and during his lifetime it passed through five editions with various reprintings, with a sixth edition, by Watson and Coulter in 1890, two years after Gray’s death, the entirely rewritten and rearranged seventh edition by Robin- son and Fernald in 1908, and the highly critical eighth edition by Fernald now nearly ready for publication. Wood’s various works, issued in large editions over a long period of time (1845 to 1915) must have been highly profitable to the publishers, and doubtless also to the author, although I have no information as to what arrangements existed between the author and the publishers. It is known, however, that at least for a term of years Wood received a bonus of $1500.00 a year, for a time, to enable him to prepare the text of the second Class-Book and to extend the area covered south to northern Florida and west to the Mississippi River. This was first published in 1861. Although Gray stated in 1846 that his text, when published “would yield no dividends to speak of,” yet here clearly his judgement was in fault. If it had not been for the royalties paid by the publishers of Gray’s series of class room texts, his Manual and other descriptive works, it might well have been that the Gray Herbarium, as we now know it, would have developed very differently if at all. Gray bequeathed his copy- rights to the President and Fellows of Harvard College for the benefit of the herbarium. Following his death in 1888 most of the financial support of the institution was derived from the publishers’ royalties. Actually in 1888 the total endowment of the herbarium was slightly less than $24,000.00; its present restricted endowment is about $675,000.00 which has been built up by gifts and by bequests since about 1890. Torrey's prophecy to Gray in 1847 that “Wood will miss it if he stereotypes" also proved to be erroneous. All of the Wood volumes from 1847 were stereotyped, and from the plates of the 1847; 1861, and 1870 works, printing after printing was made year after year with a minimum of changes. There was in no case a thorough-going revision of the descriptive texts, the surmise being that the author was not permitted by the pub- lishers to make other than minor changes here and there so as to avoid the necessity of making new plates. Thus the Wood 1948] Merrill, —Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 117, publications actually did becomes stereotyped in the secondary meaning of the word, for it may truthfully be said of all later printings of all the volumes involved that they were “lacking originality or individuality.” Yet the merits of the original works were such that, to meet the constant demands, all of the Wood volumes were re-issued year after year over a period of at least half a century. My thanks are due to Miss Hazel Joslyn, Archivist, Dart- mouth College Library, for checking entries in certain issues of some of Wood’s works which are not available in the Boston libraries. The late W. W. Eggleston presented his large personal collection of Wood’s botanical treatises to Dartmouth College. I am also under obligations to the National Academy of Sciences for a research grant from the Bache Fund which enabled me to complete this task. OVERLOOKED NAMES AND CORRECTED ENTRIES PTERIDOPHYTA Adiantum *Curtisii Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 820. 1861 = А. Capillus-veneris Linn. “We saw specimens of a new Adiantum in the herbarium of Rev. M. A. Curtis from the Mts. of N. Саг. But our notes are insufficient at present for its proper diagnosis." The same statement appears on the same page of all issues up to 1880. In the 1881 issue of the Class-Book the place of Adiantum Curtisii Wood was taken by A. Capillus-veneris Linn., but no mention is there made of the former binomial. No description of A. Curtisii Wood was ever published. See the quotation. from Curtis's letter of 1857 to Asa Gray, p. 115. Antigramma *pinnatifida Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 822. 1861 = Asplenium pinnatifidum Nutt. (1818). At the end of the description Wood cites “Asplenium, Nutt", the name-bringing synonym thus being Asplenium pinnatifidum Nutt. Scolopendrium pinnatifidum Diels (1898) is another synonym, Antigramma *rhyzophylla Wood, |. e.. sphalm. = A. rhizophylla J. Sm. = Camptosorus rhizophyllus (Linn.) Link. Botrychium jneglectum Wood, Class- 300k, ed. 2, 635. 1847; Class-Book, ed. 1861, 816. 1861 = В. matricariaefolium А. Br. (1843, 1845). 118 Rhodora [May The current entry is to the 1861 issue of Wood's work, by Underwood, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, 30: 47. 1903, indicated as “led. 3], the date 1860 being erroneous, and by С. Christensen Ind. Fil. 163, 1905, as “ed. П. 816. 1860." Both of these authors recognised Wood's species as а valid one. However, Wood described it in 1847, his type being from Meriden, New Hamp- shire. Robinson and Fernald in 1908 reduced it to B. ramosum (Roth) Aschers. Camptosorus *ebenoides Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 425. 1870 = Asplenium ebenoides R. R. Scott (1866). Wood's entry is merely “C. ebenoides (R. R. Scott)”, the understood name-bringing synonym being Asplenium ebenoides R. R. Scott. Camptosorus *pinnatifidus Wood, |. c. = Asplenium pinnatifidum Nutt. (1818). Wood’s entry is “C. pinnatifidus (Nutt.)”, this indicating the name-bringing synonym as Asplenium pinnatifidum Nutt. Gen. 2: 251. 1818. *Cistopteris Wood, Class-Book 460. 1845, nom. in syn.; Class- Book, ed. 1861, 822. 1861, sphalm. — Cystopteris Bernh. SPERMATOPHYTA Abies *americana Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 516. 1847, non Mill. (1768) = Larix americana Michx. (1803), i. e. L. laricina (Du Roi) Koch. The entry ‘‘A[bies] (Larix) Americana. Michx. (Pinus pendula and microcarpa of authors.) American Larch,” clearly indicates what was intended by Wood. Acerates *monocephala Lapham ex A. Gray, Man., ed. 2, 704. 1856, Revised ed. (School and College edition) iv. 1857; Lapham ex Hale, Trans. Wisconsin State Agr. Soc. 5: 420. 1860 (reprint p. 4), nom., nota, et ex Wood Class-Book, ed. 1861. 594. 1861 = Asclepias Nuttalliana Torr. (1828). In both issues of Gray's Manual cited full descriptions appear in the additions and corrections. The ‘Revised Edition" of 1857 differs from ed. 2, 1856, chiefly in the elimination of the treatments of the mosses and hepatics. Incidentally, in Gray’s work is another unlisted binomial, published as a synonym, Asclepias *Vaseyi Carey ex A. Gray, 1. c. 1948] Merrill, —Unlisted Names in Wood’s Publications 119 Aesculus *Hippocastaneum Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 185. 1803, sphalm. = A. Hippocastanum Linn. Alsine glabra A. Gray ex Chapm. Fl. South. U. S. 49. 1860. This is included here because Wood, Class-Book 260. 1861, also used the same binomial, his entry being “A. glabra," but at the end of the description he added “Arenaria Mx., nee Ell." Chapman credited the name to A. Gray, the name-bringing synonym being Arenaria glabra Michx. А. Gray, Man. ed. 2, 58. 1856, merely states at the end of his consideration of Alsine "A. glabra, of the mountain-tops of Carolina may occur on those of Virginia." He did not cite Michaux’s binomial and provided no description. Alsine *stricta Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 260. 1861, non Mert. & Koch (1831) = Arenaria stricta Michx. (1803). The basis of Wood’s binomial is “Arenaria Mx. Alsine Mi- chauxi Fenzl.” Anantherix *connivens Feay ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 594. 1861 (Asclepias connivens Baldw.); A. Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. 12: 66. 1877 = Asclepias connivens Baldw. (1817). А. Gray's transfer of this name is sixteen. years later than Wood's publication of it. Small, Man. Southeast. Fl. 1073. 1933. recognized this as Anantherix connivens (Baldw.) Feay, but failed to indicate the place of publication of the Feay binomial. Andromeda *polyfolia Wood, Class-Book 231. 1845, sphalm. = A. polifolia Linn. Andropogon *clandestinus Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 809. 1861; Hale ex Vasey, Grasses U. S. 19. 1883, non Nees (1854) = A. Elliottii Chapm. (1860). Hitchcock, Man. Grasses U. S. 790. 1935, listed Wood’s binomial in the synonymy of Andropogon Elliottii, Chapm. but did not note that it was unlisted, Anethum *faniculum Wood, Class-Book 160. 1845, sphalm. = A. Foeniculum Linn. = Foeniculum vulgare Mill. (1768). Apium "angustifolium Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. ed. 1877, 448. 1877 = Berula erecta (Huds.) Coville. This was first inserted in the addenda to the 1877 issue of Wood's work, the entry following the description being “Sium, L. Berula, Kotch [Koch]." The name-bringing synonym would be Stum angustifolium Linn. (1763). 120 Rhodora [May Arceuthobium *abigenium Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1881, 832. 1881 — A. pusillum Peck (1873) (Razoumofskya pusilla O. Kuntze). Peck's species was based on specimens from Sandlake, New York, and Wood's species was based on specimens from the same locality, received from Peck. Earlier Wood had described it as a variety, Arceuthobium oxycedri Bieb. var. abigenium Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 446. 1871, but, as а varietal name, abi- genium of Wood (1871) cannot replace Peck's validly published binomial of 1873. Aster *augustus Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1881, 829. 1881, sphalm. — A.angustus (Lindl.) Torr. & Gray. Betula *excelsior Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 281. 1863, sphalm. = B. excelsa Pursh = B. lutea Michx. Boltonia *decurrens Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1869, 430. 1869 = Boltonia latisquama Gray, var. decurrens (Torr. & Gray) Fernald & Griscom in RHODORA, 42: 492. 1940. This was not indicated as new, nor is any synonym cited. The description is very short “lvs. oblong, margins decurrent on the winged stout stem; hds. corymbous, globular in fruit; ach. as in No. 1; rays purple. Bottoms W." It is suspected that Wood had a specimen from Engelmann or from Eggert. What he described is clearly the same as B. asteroides L'Hérit. var. decurrens Engelm. ex A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1 (2): 166. 1884; Gray says ‘‘Missouri, Eggert.” This name goes back to B. glastifolia B ? decurrens Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 2: 188. 1842. Cardamine *spatulata Wood, Class-book, ed. 1861, 231. 1861, sphalm. — C. spathulata Michx. — Arabis lyrata L. Carex fargyrantha Tuckerm. ex Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 29: 346. 1860, et in Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 753. 1861; Tuckerm. ex Boott, Ill. Carex 3: 119. 1862. "The correct name for the species erroneously called C. foenea Willd. in recent manuals (see Svenson, RHODORA, 40: 325. 1938). Carex 1cephaloidea Dewey, Rep. Pl. Mass. 262. 1840 et ex Wood, Class-Book, 415. 1845; Dewey ex Boott, Ill. Carex 3: 123. 1862. A valid species of wide distribution in eastern North America. Carex {dubitata Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 755. 1861; Dewey ex Boott, Ill. Carex 4: 167. 1867 — C. Bige- lowii Torr. (C. concolor sensu Mackenzie, not R. Br. Polunin, Bot. Can. East. Arct. 1: 130, 1940, shows that the 1948 Merrill,——Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 121 type of C. concolor R. Br. (1823) is C. aquatilis Wahlenb., var. stans (Drej.) Boott. See also Fernald, RHODORA, 44: 208. 1942. Carex *leneoglochin Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, 419. 1845, sphalm. = C. leucoglochin Linn. f. (1781) = C. pauciflora Lightf. (1777). Carex *michigansis Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 765. 1861 = Carex lucorum Willd. (1813). Carex jmirata Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book 428. 1845; Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. IJ. 39: 71. 1865 = C. atherodes Spreng. (1826). Carex {prairea Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 2, 578. 1847; Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 750. 1861. A valid species very widely distributed in eastern North America. Carex *prarisa Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book 414. 1845, sphalm. = praec. Carex jfretrocurva Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book. 423. 1845; Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 42: 243. 1866 = C. laxiculmis Schwein. (1824). Carex 1Sartwellii Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. 43: 90. 1842 et ex Wood, Class-Book 413. 1845; Dewey ex Carey in. А. Gray, Man. 539. 1848. A valid species of wide North American distribution. Carex *Stendelii Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 583. 1847, sphalm. = C. Steudeli? Kunth (1837) = C. Jamesii Schwein. (1824). Carex іѕігісііог Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, 418. 1845; Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 755. 1861. A valid species of wide geographic distribution in eastern North America. Carex *zanthosperma Dewey ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 762. 1861; Dewey, Am. Jour. Sci. II. 42: 334. 1866 — C. flaccosperma Dewey (1846). In 1866 Carex zanthosperma Dewey was published as a new name for C. flaccosperma Dewey, but in the meantime it had been described five years earlier without association with the earlier name. Chloris *floridana (Chapm.) Wood, Am. Bot. Flor., ed. 1871, 407. 1871; Vasey, Grasses U. S. 32. 1883, Descr. Cat. Grasses U. S. 61. 1885. Chloris *glauca (Chapm.) Wood, l. с.; Vasey, |. c. 122 Rhodora {May Both of these are valid species occurring in Georgia and Florida, the latter also in North Carolina. Wood’s entries are merely “С. floridana (Chapm.)” and “С. glauca (Chapm.)". The name- bringing synonyms, inferred, are Eustachys floridana Chapm. and Е. glauca Chapm. Fl. South. U. S. 557. 1860. Hitchcock noted the publication of Wood's two names in 1871 (they do not appear in the original 1870 edition which did not include a con- sideration of the genera and species of Gramineae and Cypera- ceae), but he failed to note that neither binomial was listed. *Cladastris Wood, Class-Book 301. 1861, sphalm. = Cladrastis Raf. Cyrtanthera *carnea Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 536. 1861 (Justicia carnea Hook. [Lindl.], Cyrtanthera magnifica Nees) = Jacobinia carnea (Lindl.) Nichols. (J. magnifica Lindl.). *Dasysistoma Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1881, 830. 1881, sphalm. — Dasystoma Raf. ex Endl. (1839) — Dasistoma Raf. (1819). Dasysistoma *grandiflora Wood, 1. c. (Gerardia grandiflora Benth.) = Aureolaria grandiflora (Benth.) Pennell. Dasystoma *integrifolia Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 529. 1861 (Dasistoma quercifolia, var. ? B [integrifolia] Benth.) (Gerar- dia integrifolia A. Gray) = Aureolaria laevigata (Raf.) Raf. Dasystoma *flava Wood, |. c. (Gerardia flava Linn.) = Aureo- laria flava (Linn.) Farwell. Dasystoma *grandiflora Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 231. 1870 (Gerar- dia grandiflora Benth.) = Aureolaria grandiflora (Benth.) Pennell. Dasystoma *pectinata Benth. in DC. Prodr. 10: 521. 1846; Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 530. 1861 (Gerardia pectinata Torr.) = Aureolaria pectinata (Nutt.) Pennell. Dasystoma *pedicularia Benth. 1. c.; Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 409. 1847 (Gerardia pedicularia Linn.) = Aureolaria pedicularia (Linn.) Raf. Dasystoma *pubescens Benth. op. cit. 520; Wood, 1. с. (Gerardia flava sensu Pursh) = Aureolaria virginica (Linn.) Pennell. Dasystoma *quercifolia Benth, 1. ¢.; Wood, 1. e. (Gerardia quercifolia Pursh) = Aureolaria flava (Linn.) Farwell. These Dasystoma binomials are entered in Index Kewensis under Dasistoma Raf. Desmodium *glutinosum | Маһ.) Wood, Class-Book 120. 1845; Schindl. Repert. Sp. Nov. 22: 258. 1926 (D. acuminatum (Michx.) DC.). Wood considered eleven species of Desmodium, and except for this one indicated the name-bringing synonym in each case. 1948] Merrill,—Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 123 Doubtless the basis of D. glutinosum Wood was Hedysarum glutinosum Muhl. ex Willd. Sp. Pl. 3 (2): 1198. 1802. Schindler independently made the same transfer in Desmodium glutinosum (Muhl.) Schindl., with extensive synonymy, in 1926. See Schubert, Кнорока 44: 279. 1942, who has definitely shown that Hedysarum glutinosum Muhl. (1802) has priority over H. acum- inatum Michx. (1803). The name D. grandiflorum (Walt.) DC. has been erroneously assigned to the same species, but Walter’s type proves to be the same as D. cuspidatum (Muhl.) DC. Dicliptera *americana Wood, Class-Book, ed. 2, 395, 1847 (Dianthera americana Linn., Justicia pedunculosa Michx.) = Dianthera americana Linn. (Justicia americana Vahl). Euxolus *spinosus Feay ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 618, 1861 = Amaranthus spinosus Linn. This was described de novo, no synonym cited, the range given as from Pennsylvania to Illinois and southward. The deserip- tion clearly applies to Amaranthus spinosus Linn., and it is probable that Feay's specific name was taken from the Linnaean binomial, although the latter was not mentioned. Gerardia iSkinneriana Wood, Class-Book, ed. 2, 408. 1847 (Agalinis Skinneriana Britton). A valid species; type from Green County, Indiana. It extends from southwestern Ontario to southeastern Kansas. The Index Kewensis entry is incomplete, merely indicated, after Wood, as ‘‘Class-Book (1847), the page not given. Gymnadenia *integra Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1881, 683. 1881 ("*Olrehis] flava and nigra Nutt.") = Habenaria integra (Nutt.) Spreng. (Platanthera integra A. Gray, Gymnadeniop- sis integra Rydb.). This is a rather curious case. The entry is С. integra (N.)”’ but the only synonyms cited are **O[rchis| flava and nigra Nutt." An examination of Nuttall's Gen. 2: 188. 1818; shows that his fourth, fifth, and sixth species are Orchis integra, nivea, and flava. He described no Orchis nigra, an error in transcription being involved on the part of Wood; clearly Orchis nivea Nutt. was intended. Wood's description seems to apply to Habenaria integra (Nutt.) Spreng. rather than to the two other species described by Nuttall, which Wood listed as synonyms of his Gymnadenia integra. 124 Rhodora [May Hydranthelium *crenatum Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 228. 1870 = H. egense Poeppig (1845) = Bacopa egensis (Poeppig) Pennell, Proc. Acad. Sci. Phila. 98: 96. 1946. The description is short, Wood’s material being indicated as from ‘Pools, Miss., La. (Dr. Hale)." Up to the present time this seems to have been collected in North America only by J. Hale; see Pennell, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. Monog. 1: 62. 1935. It is suspected that the species was introduced into Louisiana through the agency of migratory birds such as the snipe. The occurrence of certain definitely Australian types in the Philippines, such as Stylidium and Calogyne (the latter also occurs near Amoy, China), may similarly be accounted for. Hypericum *muticum Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 170. 1863, sphalm. — H. mutilum Linn. Lespedeza *Steuvei Wood, Class-book, ed. 1861, 310. 1861, sphalm. = L. Stuevet Nutt. Lithospermum 1lutescens Coleman, Kent Sci. Inst. Misc. Publ. 2: 29. 1874 (Cat. Fl. Pl. 8. Penins. Michigan 29), et ex Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. ed. 1874, 448. 1874 — Lithospermum latifolium Michx. (1803). The Index Kewensis entry is “Coleman, Cat. Pl. Gr. Rapids Michig. 29. 1874" manifestly entered from Gray's Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2 (1): 203. 1878 who there placed Coleman's species as а synonym of Lithospermum latifolium Michx. as a form with yellowish white or sometimes light yellow flowers. The full title of Coleman's work is “Catalogue of Flowering Plants of the Southern Peninsula of Michigan, With a Few of the Crypto- gamia". It was published in Grand Rapids, Michigan, as the Kent Scientific Institute Miscellaneous Publication 2: 1-49. 1874. Coleman's original description is “L. lutescens, (n. sp.) Leaves large, ovate, lanceolate, nearly sessile, rough on the upper side; fls. yellow, larger than in L. arvense; seeds white, sometimes two—generally, but one; st. from 14% to 3% ft. high." See Fernald, Кнорока 46: 496. 1944, for a critical note on the validity of Michaux’s binomial. Lobelia *Douglassii Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1881, 478. 1881 (Clintonia [elegans] Douglas, Downingia elegans Torr.) = Downingia elegans (Dougl.) Torr. (Bolelia elegans Greene). In the earlier issues of the Class-Book from 1861 on the species appears as Clintonia elegans Dougl., which is its name-bringing synonym. 1948] Merrill,—Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 125 Lophiola jamericana Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 540. 1847, Class- Book, ed. 1861, 697. 1861 (Conostylis americana Dursh) — Lophiola aurea Ker-Gawl. (1813). Although Wood published this first in 1847 and again in 1861, Coville in 1894, and Baillon in 1895, independently made the same transfer of Pursh's specifie name; all are properly listed except Wood's first publication. Ker-Gawler’s name has about one year’s priority over that of Pursh. Lysimachia *asperifolia Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 243. 1863, sphalm. = L. asperulacfolia Poir. Myrica *floridana Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 309. 1870 = Leitneria floridana Chapm. (1860). The entry is “М. Floridana (Chapm.)", no synonym cited. The basis of Wood's name was unquestionably Leztneria floridana Chapm., for Chapman in describing the new genus Leilneria placed it in the Myricaceae. It typifies the family Leitneriaceae. Narcissus *Daffodil Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 292. 1863 = N. Pseudo- Narcissus Linn. Orchis tHookeri Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 288. 1863 = Habenaria Hookeri Torr. The current entry is to Wood, Am. Bot. Fl. 327. 1870. Orchis ; Michauxii Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 288, 1867 = Habenaria quinqueseta (Michx.) Sw. The current entry is also to Wood, Am. Bot. Fl. 327. 1870. Orchis *nigra Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1881, 683. 1881, nom. in syn., sphalm. = Orchis nivea Nutt. (1818) = Habenaria nivea (Nutt.) Spreng. Orchis *physcodes Wood, Class-Book, ed. 2, 534. 1847, sphalm. = О. psycodes Linn. = Habenaria psycodes (Linn.) Spreng. ( Blephariglottis psychodes Rydb.). Papaver *Rheas Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 159. 1863, sphalm. — P. Rhoeas Linn. Peltandra *glauca (Ell) Feay ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 669. 1861 (Caladium *glaucum ЕП. Sketch 2: 631. 1824) = Peltandra sagittifolia (Michx.) Morong; see Fernald, Ruopora 50: 58-59. 1948. Recognized by Small, Man. Southeast. Fl. 246. 1933, as a valid species. He cited as synonyms Peltandra alba ISERNIA sagittifolia Morong, and Xanthosoma sagittifolium € ‘hapm., but rather curiously not Elliott’s name-bringing synonym, Caladium 126 Rhodora [May *glaucum Ell. Sketch 2: 631. 1824, which like Peltandra glauca Feay (1861) also proves to be unlisted; neither did he indicate the place of publication of the Feay binomial. This is the second case where in my investigations of early American botani- cal literature I find neither the original binomial, or that of some other author based on it, to be listed, the second one being Ophrys *pubera Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. 2: 158. 1803 = Epipactis *pubera Muhl. Cat. 81. 1813 = Ponthieva glandulosa (Walt.) Mohr. Peucedanum ‘rigidum Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 136. 1870, non Bunge (1832) — Ozypolis rigidior (Linn.) Raf. No synonym was cited, but clearly the basis of the name was Sium rigidius Linn. the specific name accepted by various authors under Oenanthe, Pastinaca, Archemora, etc. as rigida. See Mathias and Constance, N. Am. Fl. 28B: 220. 1945, who, among the 23 synonyms cited, list Wood's binomial. Phlox *Laphamii Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 265. 1863 — P. divaricata Linn. Although Wood indicated no authority and cited no synonym, the basis of this binomial was undoubtedly Phlox divaricata Linn. var. Laphamii Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 569. 1861, there characterized as: “Lvs. ovate, pet. obtuse, entire.— Wis. (Lapham) Western Reserve (Cowles) and southward, not uncommon." Potamogeton jobrutus Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 525. 1847, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 675. 1861 = P. alpinus Balbis, var. tenuifolius (Raf.) Ogden in Кнорока, 45: 90, 1943 (P. tenuifolius Raf. Med. Repos. hex. 3, 2: 409, 1811; Fernald in Ruopora, 33: 210. 1931). The Index Kewensis entry is Wood, Class-Book 178. 1845." Potamogeton obrutus Wood does not appear in the first edition of Wood's work. Type from the Passumpsie River, Lyndon, Vermont. Rhododendron *procumbens Wood, Class-Book 236. 1845 (Azalea procumbens Linn.); Krause in Sturm, Fl. Deutschl. ed. 2, 9: 214. 1901 = Loiseleuria procumbens (Linn.) Desv. (Chamaecistus procumbens O. Kuntze). This is one of two new names other than a certain number of species of Carez, that genus elaborated by Dewey, published by Wood in the first edition of his Class-Book. 1948 Меггі, —Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 127 Rumex altissimus Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 477. 1847; Proc. Am. Assoc. 177. 1853. Wood's type was from Indiana. А valid species extending from Connecticut to Iowa and Nebraska southward to Mexico. Sabbatia jconcinna Wood, Class-Book, ed. 2, 451. 1847, Class- Book, ed. 1861, 584. 1861 = S. campestris Nutt. (1837). The Index Kewensis entry is to the 1861 edition of Wood's Class-Book where 5. concinna Wood appears only as a synonym of S. brachiata Ell., “S. concinna, 2nd. Ed." I think, however, that it is the same as S. campestris Nutt., not S. brachiata Ell., as the latter species does not occur in Iowa; Wood's type was from Iowa. Salvia *sclary Wood, Class-Book 274. 1845, sphalm. = Salvia Sclarea Linn. Sarracenia *alata Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 157. 1863 = S. едет Macfarlane in Engler, Pflanzenr. 4"°. 29. 1908. Wood’s brief statement is: 'narrow-winged P. Fls. yellow. Lvs. all more slender than No. 1 [S. purpurea Linn.]. S.-W.” The basis of the binomial was doubtless Sarracenia Gronovii Wood, var. alata Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861. 222. 1861, there characterized as: “Fls. yellow? large; lvs. 1-2f high, with the tube somewhat ventricous above, throat contracted, wing con- spicuous (44’ broad). La. (Hale).—A remarkable variety." S. Gronovii of Wood was a substitute-name for S. flava Linn. and its allies with “Lvs. tall, straight, erect"; and he included under it, not only true S. flava (5. Gronovii, var. flava (Linn.) Wood, l. c.), but S. rubra Walt. (S. Gronovii, var. rubra (Walt.) Wood, l. c.), S. Drummondii Croom (5. Gronovii, var. Drummondii (Croom) Wood, |. e.) and the new var. alata from Louisiana. Macfarlane, l. c., in describing his new S. Sledgei, cites as the first synonym “OS. Gronovii var. alata Wood.", his new species cited from a number of stations in Louisiana, with “Folia . . . vernalia 30-70 em. X 2-4 cm, erecta . . . petiolus basi alatus . . . ala yt ventralis a basi ad 14 alt. gradatim expansa”. Since, as Professor Fernald indicates to me, S. Sledge? is well represented in the Gray Herbarium from Louisiana, while none of the three remain- ing species included by Wood under his S. Gronovii is cited by Macfarlane from so far west, it is apparent that S. alata Wood (1863) must replace S. Sledge? Macfarlane (1908). 128 Rhodora [May *Schaenocaulon Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 719. 1861, sphalm. = Schoenocaulon A. Gray (1837). Schoenolirion *croceum (Michx.) Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 345. 1870; A. Gray, Am. Nat. 10: 427. 1876. Wood's entry is merely “S. croceum (Мх)” the name-bringing synonym, Phalangium croceum Michx., inferred. Oxytria crocea Raf. is a synonym. Scutellaria trugosa Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 424. 1847; Wood, Proc. Am. Assoc. 176. 1853 = S. versicolor Nutt. (1818). Wood’s type was from Harper’s Ferry, Virginia (now West Virginia), on rocky banks of the Shenandoah River. Senecio tanonymus Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 464. 1861, Am. Bot. Flor. 187. 1870 = S. tomentosus Michx. fide Greenman in lit. (ex descr.). The type was from Montgomery, Alabama. Wood did not indicate this as new in 1861, but in 1870 he added his own name as authority for the binomial. *Sentera Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 595. 1861, sphalm. = Seutera Reichb. = Cynanchum Linn. (Lyonia Ell, 1817, non Raf. 1808, nec Nutt. 1818). *Simplocarpus Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861. 669. 1861, sphalm. = Simplocarpus Schmidt (1868), sphalm. = Symplocarpus Salisb. (1818). Smilacina *trifoliata Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 715. 1861, sphalm. = S. trifolia (Linn.) Desf. Smilax *maritima Feay ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 702. 1861 (“S. Beyrichii Kunth ? S. ovata Ph.") = Smilax auriculata Walt. (1788). In accepting Feay’s new binomial Wood states: ‘The latter name [S. ovata Pursh], although the earliest, is utterly inappro- priate.” Pursh’s type was from near Savannah, Georgia; Wood states: “Sandy bluffs of the salt-water rivers near the coast, Savannah and southward.” Solanum *pycnanthum Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 577. 1861, sphalm. Wood credited the binomial to Dunal, stating “Ga. about Savannah (Dunal, apud DC. Sed dubito).” It is entirely unlikely that what Wood described is the same as the tropical South American S. pycnanthemum Dunal. 1948] Merrill,——Unlisted Names in Wood's Publications 129 Solidago *squarrulosa Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 431. 1861 (S. squarrosa Nutt., S. petiolaris Ait. ?) = Solidago petio- laris Ait. Wood's entry is S. squarrulosa (T. & G.)," i. e, Solidago petiolaris Ait. var. squarrulosa Torr. & Gray, N. Am. Fl. 2: 203. 1842, which was based on S. squarrosa Nutt. Jour. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 7: 102. 1834, non Nutt. Gen. (1818), and which Gray later, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1 (2): 144. 1884, placed in the synonymy of S. petiolaris Ait. This is one of the few cases where Wood made minor changes in the later issues of his work for in the 1881 issue, p. 431, he eliminated S. petiolaris Ait. from the synonymy, substituting the statement “S. petiolaris Ait. is the prior name, but inappropriate." Syringa *alba Wood, Obj. Les. Bot. 274. 1863 = S. vulgaris Linn. rar. alba Weston. Wood's brief. statement is merely: “White Lilac. Flowers pure white. Shrub taller (Variety of no. 1 [S. vulgaris Linn.])”. Two years earlier (Class-Book, ed. 1861) he included it as ^yringa vulgaris var. alba. Tephrosia *gracilis Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 95. 1870. The entry is “T. gracilis Wood", the indicated range Florida to Louisiana. It is clearly not the same as the earlier T. gracilis Nutt. (1818) which is apparently a synonym of T. hispidula Michx. (1803). Trichelostylis tcapillais Wood, Class-Book ed. 2, 573. 1847. Class-Book, ed. 1861, 782. 1861 (Scirpus, Linn., Isolepis, R. & S.) = Bulbostylis capillaris (Linn.) С. B. Clarke (Stenophyllus capillaris Britton). Trichelostylis *leptalea Wood, Am. Bot. Flor., ed. 1871, 364. 1871 = Scirpus cernuus Vahl (1806). The entry is “T. leptalea (Schultes).” The name-bringing synonym is thus Isolepis leptalea Schultes, Mant. 2: 62. 1822. If Wood’s interpretation be correct, this should be the same as Vahl’s species. He included it as an exotic species, cultivated in conservatories, from southern Europe. Utricularia *Robbinsii Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 216. 1870 = U. vulgaris Linn. (U. macrorhiza Le Conte) Wood’s description is short and he cites no synonyms. ( ‘learly what he here described, as a species, is the form that he charac- 130 Rhodora [May terized earlier as U. intermedia Hayne 8? Robbinsii Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 510. 1861: “Swamps, Uxbridge, North- bridge, Mass. (Robbins)". As a varietal name this antedates U. vulgaris Linn. var. americana A. Gray, Man. ed. 5, 318, 1867. I accept Fernald’s conclusions that, in view of the more or less parallel variability of both the European and the American forms, there is no justification in recognizing a distinct species (U. macrorhiza LeConte) or a variety here; see Fernald, RHODORA 43: 642—645. pl. 694. 1941. Vigna thirsuta Feay ex Wood, Class-Book, ed. 1861, 320. 1861 (V. glabra Savi? Dolichos luteolus (Ell.) Feay ex Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 96. 1870, non 8. F. Gray, (1821), nec К. Koch (1837) — Vigna repens (Linn.) O. Kuntze (V. luteola Jacq.) Vincetoxicum *scoparium Wood, Am. Bot. Flor. 274. 1870; A. Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 2 (1): 102. 1878 = Cynanchum scoparium Nutt. (Amphistelma scoparium Small). The entry is “V. scoparium (N.)," no synonym cited; this would be Cynanchum scoparium Nutt. ARNOLD ARBORETUM. JOHN CRAWFORD PARLIN RarPH C. BEAN JoHN CRAWFORD PARLIN died on February 24, 1948, at the home of his daughter, Mrs. Herbert Stevens at Canton Point, Maine. He will be missed not only for his botanical work but also for his kindly friendliness. Mr. Parlin was born near Trap Corner, Paris, Maine, March 20, 1863, the son of William and Lois Haley Parlin, and was in his eighty-fifth year at the time of his death. As a boy he lived in Paris and the surrounding towns, receiving most of his formal education from the town schools. He began teaching in the town of Woodstock and subsequently taught in North Berwick, Albion, Norridgewock, Freedom, Hartford, Rumford and Canton, with five summer terms at the Washington State Normal School at Machias, Maine, where one of his subjects was botany. In his long teaching career his subjects in the classroom were Latin 1948] Bean,—John Crawford Parlin 131 and mathematics. He has been President of the Teachers’ Association in Somerset and Waldo Counties and has served on the Executive Board of the Maine Teachers’ Association. In 1926 Mr. Parlin retired after 48 years as a teacher and went to live at Canton Point, Maine, looking forward to having more time to devote to his botanical work. In March, 1936 the spring floods swept through his home and destroyed his collections of many years. Since that time he lived at Buckfield and has not ceased in his botanical explorations. All his life Mr. Parlin was a student of the plants of his native state. In the towns where he lived he literally combed every sort of locality again and again. For many years his interest was in the study of the flowering plants and ferns. His discovery of a previously unrecognized Antennaria led to the more intensive study of that genus. Prof. Fernald named his find Antennaria Parlinii in his honor in 1897. He was always а keen observer and found many unusual plants. During the later years of his life he devoted most of his time to mosses and lichens. Again and again he would find species and forms which had not previously been found in Maine or the northeast. He had extensive correspondence with specialists both in the United States and in Europe. He was a member of the Maine Historical Society, the Portland Society of Natural History, the Stanton Bird Club of Lewiston- Auburn, the Sullivant Moss Society, the New England Botanical Club and was a charter member of the Josselyn Botanical Society of Maine. In July, 1947 the University of Maine conferred on him an honorary degree of Master of Science in recognition of his outstainding work. In every community where he lived he left people who owed their interest and love of the out-of-doors to him. In recent years his attendance at the summer meetings of the Josselyn Botanical Society gave the present members an opportunity to profit by his knowledge of the Maine plants. He always gave of his best to all, no matter how amateur they might be. His interest and enthusiasm was stimulating and those about him quickly responded. His kindliness and botanical enthusiasm will be long remembered. Wakefield, Mass. 182 Rhodora [May New Names ror Two BnaziLiAN Species.—Rhynchospora Hunnewellii L. B. Smith, nom. nov. Pleurostachys gracilis Boeckl. in Allg. Bot. Zeit. 2: 111. 1896, non Rynchospora gracilis (Sw.) Vahl, Enum. 2: 234. 1806. The specific name is made in honor of Mr. Francis Welles Hunnewell, who collected the plant on a recent foray in the vi- cinity of Rio. Ficus officinalis L. B. Smith, nom. nov. Pharmacosycea perforata Miq. in Hook. London Journ. Bot. 7: 68. 1848, non Ficus perforata L. Amoen. Acad. 8: 265. 1775. The name "officinalis" will serve to retain some of the medicinal flavor of 'Pharmacosycea".—LvMaAN B. SMrrH, Smithsonian Institution. A PROSTRATE RORIPPA IN THE INTERIOR.—Herewith is re- corded a Minnesota locality of Professor Fernald's prostrate Rorippa. 'The plants were discovered on shores of two exsic- cating ponds at Island Lake, 20 miles north of Duluth, where Highway No. 4 intervenes between the ponds and the lake. The prostrate plants, in association with the typical form, rooted at the nodes and, growing toward the receding water-line, were still anchored to the drying mud by their primary roots. The striking creeping habit, runner-fashion, was further accented by the de- velopment of short, leafy axillary inflorescences some in mature fruit. The collection, Lakela no. 6738, August 31, 1946, is readily identified as Rorippa islandica (Oeder) Borbas, var. microcarpa (Regel) Fernald, f. reptabunda Fernald, Ruopora, Feb. 1948, described from New Hampshire, the name corrected in the April number, p. 100, to Var. Fernaldiana Butters & Abbe, forma reptabunda Fernald.—OraGA LAKELA, University of Minnesota, Duluth Branch, Duluth, Minnesota. Volume 50, no. 592, including pages 73-100 and plates 1093-1096, was issued 9 April, 1948. [000га JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. June, 1948. No. 594. CONTENTS: Frederic King Butters, 1878-1945 (with Portrait). Ernst C. Abbe 133 Vicia sepium L. in Canada. Herbert СтоҺ..................... 144 Some minor Forms of Rosa. M. Б Fernald................... 145 Juglans nigra oblonga in Missouri. William A. Dayton... ...... 147 Two Rormsun Euphorbia: М E Лепа оо. 148 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. —a monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35-46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets сап be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. А. F. Hill, 8 W. King St. Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, РА. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp., 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. IIl. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by М. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 рр. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. June, 1948. No. 594. FREDERIC KING BUTTERS, 1878-1945! Ernst C. ABBE (with portrait) Felix qui potuit rerum cognoscere Causas Atque metus omnes, et inexorabile fatum мајеси pedibus — Vergil Fred Butters deeply appreciated the truth of Vergil's aphorism, translating it “Happy the man who is able to know the causes of things, and to put under his feet all fear and inexorable fate.’” It is a sentiment which expresses succinctly and aptly the guiding principles of his rich and friendly life. Butters was born and raised in Minneapolis. Nevertheless, his family environment was New England in character, an influence which was strengthened by visits as a boy to relatives in Massachusetts. This influence colored even his speech, sometimes to the consternation of his classes at examination time, as in the case of the unfortunate student who was surprised 1 Contribution from the Herbarium of the University of Minnesota, VIIT. This biographical sketch has been made possible through the generous cooperation of Dr. Butters’ friends and colleagues. Professor L. I. Smith of the Department of Chemistry, University of Minnesota, has given free access to the original materials concerning Dr. Butters in his possession. To my colleagues, W. S. Cooper, C. S. French, A. О. Dahl, D. B. Lawrence, К. M. Tryon, Jr., and especially to Professor Emeritus C. O. Rosendahl, a life-long friend of Dr. Butters, I am deeply indebted for contributions of fact and anecdote. The photograph of Dr. Butters was taken August 11, 1938 on Prospect Mountain, Estes Park, Colorado, by J. W. Opie. Dr. L. I. Smith has provided funds for the portrait. ? From his Presidential Address, University of Minnesota Chapter, Sigma Xi, June, 1938. 134 Rhodora [JUNE to find that there is no such plant as the “Sawed” Fern. His home life as a boy provided a rich background of books and music, intellectual activity, and moderate wealth, all of which entered into the making of Butters, the man. Не carried through life a love of reading of the most systematic and catholic sort. This was so thoroughly appreciated by his students and col- leagues that the apocryphal story was often told newcomers that “Dr, Butters is now re-reading the Encyclopedia Britannica for the third time, and is at the letter ‘G’.” Certainly his broad scientifie knowledge justified the assumption. Music was very important to him. Beethoven was his especial favorite and was played by him on the family piano with the greatest precision, almost as though the notes represented a problem in mathematics. His love of musie also found expression in his perennial support of the Minneapolis Symphony Orchestra as one of its patrons. His means permitted Butters to make a series of trips and excursions which always resulted in additions to his store of knowledge and anecdote as well as to maintain the gracious family home to which he was deeply attached, and to indulge quietly in а wide variety of philanthropies. While he did not advertise “family”, he was aware of the responsibilities attendant upon a distinguished New England ancestry. This reached back on his father's side to William Butter who came from Scotland to settle near Woburn, Massa- chusetts, before 1666, and on his mother's side to Captain John King who also settled in eastern Massachusetts. Fred Butters began school in Minneapolis where he prepared himself for attendance at the University of Minnesota by com- pleting the “Latin” course in Central High School, in June, 1895. He entered the College of Science, Literature and the Arts of the University of Minnesota, enrolling in the ‘Scientific Course”. His grades from the start were high, predominantly in the 90’s, earning for him election to Phi Beta Kappa and Sigma Xi during his senior year. In later life he was elected to the presi- dency of the local chapters of both of these honor societies. Mathematics, which he followed in college through integral calculus, he practiced constantly thereafter. Sometimes this practice took the form of mathematical “doodling” which whiled away the time during many a boring Ph.D. examination. Even 1948] Abbe,—Frederie King Butters 135 vet we find about the Department an occasional box in which came his favorite Benson and Hedges cigarettes, the white paper covered with the details of the expansion of a binomial. As- tronomy, which he also studied assiduously in college, provided the basis for a life-long hobby. The other natural sciences were well represented in his undergraduate studies, particularly botany. Here he fell under the spell of that inspiring teacher, Conway Macmillan, whose newly-formed Department of Botany provided Butters with the opportunity to explore the fields of algology, physiology, cytology and morphology by the time he had completed his senior year in June 1899. At this time he had a strong interest in algae which is evidenced by his first paper, “Observations on Rhodymenia”, published in the second volume of Minnesota Botanical Studies (1899). An active interest in algae extended to 1911 when he published a paper on Liagora and Galaxaura. The academic year following the completion of his bachelor's degree at Minnesota saw Butters hard at work at Harvard where he obtained an A.B. in the spring of 1900. His interest in thallophytes brought him into close contact with Thaxter, and ultimately led to the publication of a paper on the X ylari- aceae of Minnesota (1901) and a note in 1903 on à Minnesota species of T'uber. In 1901 Butters joined the staff of the University of Minnesota as Instructor and served continuously on the faculty until his death, with the exception of a leave of absence taken in 1916- 1917 to complete his work for the Ph.D. at Harvard. In 1901 the Minnesota Seaside Station was established on Vancouver Island largely because of the enthusiasm and interest of Professors Maemillan and Tilden, who felt that students at a mid-continental University badly needed the opportunity to study salt-water plants in their native habitats. That summer was the first of several spent by Butters at the Station. He first applied himself to the study of marine algae; later his interests turned to Ferns and Gymnosperms. He also vastly enjoyed the extra-curricular activities at the Station. In one of these, the cult of the mythical Hodag, he became the mock High Priest; another was his post as skipper of the large dug-out canoe in which supplies for the Station were ferried ashore from the 136 Rhodora [JUNE small coastal steamer. This canoe he had to guide between the numerous off-shore rocks and through the high surf. Out of such experiences came a great fund of stories, one of his favorites concerning the time when the stopper came out of the hole in the bottom of the canoe. He would graphically describe how the salt water spurted up and threatened a precious load of micro- scopes by promising to swamp the canoe, passengers, micro- scopes and all. Butters spent the summer of 1902 in Europe with his friend Н. L. Lyon. His association with Lyon on this trip and in the Department of Botany led to a life-long interest in embryology. An immediate evidence of this was the publication in 1909 of a paper on the seeds and seedlings of Caulophyllum thalictroides. He was deeply intrigued by the relation between the mono- cotyledonous and dicotyledonous state. Ultimately this interest led to the development of courses in plant anatomy, a subject which he taught throughout his academic career. In 1904 Butters met E. W. D. Holway, an Iowan banker. Holway was an expert on rusts, and also a mountain climber of great ability, and his enthusiasm for this sport was readily transmitted to Butters. From that time on, hardly a summer passed that Butters did not find at least some time to visit Glacier House and his beloved Selkirk Mountains. He used to say that he had but one criticism to make of Minnesota—that it had no mountains, and he once suggested the provision of such as a worthy project for the WPA! Butters and Holway were later joined by Howard Palmer, a Connecticut manufacturer, and for parts of many summers this trio was very active in exploring the Selkirk Mountains. This region was very close to Butters' heart and it is fitting indeed that the Geographie Board of Canada has recently named the highest peak in the Battle Range of the Selkirks Mt. Butters, in his honor. Along with his strenuous pioneer mountaineering in the Selkirks he collected plants, summarizing his observations in “The Vegetation of the Selkirk Mountains" as an appendix to Howard Palmer's book ‘Mountaineering and Exploration in the Selkirks". Another article dealing with some peculiar cases of plant distribution in the Selkirks was also published in 1914 in Minnesota Botanical Studies. Butters’ achievements in mountaineering were widely 1948] Abbe, Frederic King Butters 137 recognized among the mountaineering fraternity and he cherished greatly his memberships in the American Alpine Club, the Alpine Club of Canada, and the Royal Geographical Society. After he became interested in mountaineering, Butters still found time to go to the Minnesota Seaside Station. In the summer of 1906, he, С. О. Rosendahl, N. L. Huff and Arthur M. Johnson made an epic trip across Vancouver Island by way of a purported wagon road. Butters’ comment on this was that in order to get а wagon across parts of that road they must have taken the wagon apart! This trip was the beginning of a long and close association between Rosendahl and Butters. “Fred” and “Otto” were to take many field trips together and publish much scientific work jointly. Their last visit to the Seaside Station was in the summer of 1910, when they were accompanied by Mrs. Rosendahl. At about this time Butters and Rosendahl began collaborative publication of the Minnesota ‘Guides’’—Guide to Spring Flowers, to ‘Trees and Shrubs, to Ferns and Fern Allies, to Autumn Flowers—the first being published in 1908. Some went into many editions and one ultimately grew into a widely used book, “Trees and Shrubs of Minnesota", last published in 1928. The book on trees and shrubs so indissolubly linked the authors in the minds of their students that its authorship was attributed among some of them to a mythical “Rosenbutters’’. Butters had an initial interest in the flora of Minnesota which was intensified from 1915 on. During that summer, he and Rosendahl acquired a Ford and began active exploration of many out-of-the-way localities in the state. This work led to the publication in 1916 of ‘Reputed Minnesota Plants Which Probably Do Not Occur In The State". Trips into that part of the Driftless Area which lies in the southeastern corner of the state raised basic questions of plant geography. The “Coastal Plain" element in the flora of the state fascinated him. There arose also the opportunity to check the map of forest distribution published many years before by Upham.’ Butters had noted that Upham showed limited areas of woodland on the north- astern side of many lakes in the ecotone between prairie and 3 Upham, W. Catalogue of the Flora of Minnesota. Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv., Twelfth Annual Report (1883), Pt. VI, pp. 1-193. 1884. 188 Rhodora [JUNE forest. He found that these had been mapped accurately by Upham and he liked to theorize concerning their origin, bringing in as factors the age-long burning of the prairies by the Indians, the direction of the prevailing winds, and the role of the lakes as natural barriers. Then came a most important interlude—his sabbatical year, 1916-17. At this time Butters went to the Gray Herbarium at Harvard to carry out the work for his Ph.D., which was conferred in June, 1917. Although the title of his thesis is “Studies in the Geographical Relations of the Plants of the Selkirk Mountains", the published results of his work at the Gray dealt with Lathyrus, Pellaea, Athyrium and Botrychium. | His work on Lathyrus was published jointly with his good friend Harold St. John. While the deep interest which Butters had in ferns may be traced in the memory of his friends to the early days at the Minnesota Seaside Station, it did not crystallize until ten years later at the Gray. The ferns from that time on became the center of his scholarly activity, as evidenced by his advanced course on “Pteridophytes” which he gave regularly thereafter, by the meticulous care with which he managed the Fern Her- barium at the University of Minnesota, and by his publications.‘ It is impossible to pass over the Gray Herbarium year without mentioning his friendship with Weatherby and Fernald. Scarcely a day in the University of Minnesota Herbarium would pass, as his close associates will testify, without the name of one or the other coming up in conversations concerning taxonomic and phytogeographical problems. He held their judgment and achievements in the highest regard and often referred to his association with them at the Gray. Undoubtedly they deeply influenced his taxonomie thinking and stimulated his natural interest in problems of plant distribution and plant geography in the world at large. Weatherby still tells of Butters’ year at the Gray. Apparently Butters would apply himself closely to business all through the week. But when Saturday afternoon came, Butters, the born raconteur, would regale his appreciative listeners with story after story of his experiences in the Selkirks. These adventures were, * Butters’ friends, when they refer to his papers, may well remember with amusement one of his favorite definitions—''A scholarly paper consists of a trickle of words in a sea of footnotes”. 1948] Abbe,—Frederic King Butters 139 of course, still very fresh in his mind. And as the stories pro- gressed his listeners felt themselves to be almost literally with him as he faced the mother grizzly and her cubs in a narrow canyon, or as he clung precariously in a difficult traverse on Mt. Sir Sanford. During his year at the Gray, Butters was elected to the New England Botanical Club. This, together with membership in the American Fern Society, he valued in a very personal way. After his return to Minnesota, Butters devoted the greater share of his research time to ferns and other plants of Minnesota. His teaching activities expanded to include the direction of graduate students. These he put to work on problems in his old favorite field of embryology. Thus, Buell worked on Acorus and Earle on Magnolia. At the undergraduate level of teaching his ability was recognized by his appointment to the Committee of the Botanical Society of America on the Teaching of Botany in American Colleges and Universities. The work of this Com- mittee extended over several years and culminated in the publica- tion of the widely consulted Bulletins 119 апа 120.° Another evidence of Butters’ breadth of interest in teaching was his successful participation in one of the early survey courses in the natural sciences at the University of Minnesota, ““Мап in Nature and Society’’,—a precursor of courses so familiar to students of the General Education movement today. Butters was most generous in helping colleagues with research problems. Two concrete cases come to mind, the one related to his knowledge of classical languages and the other to his mathe- matical bent. With reference to the first, Mrs. Sorokin ac- knowledged® his initiation of the terms monobrachial, dibrachial, ete. to describe certain chromosome-types. The second is to be found in his careful checking of the formulas for sectional area and volume of the paraboloid of revolution as applied to the shoot apex of maize.? ^ An Exploratory Study of the Teaching of Botany in the Colleges and Universities of the United States. Bot. Soc. Amer. Bull 119, pp. 1—16. 1938. Achievement Tests in Relation to Teaching Objectives in General College Botany. Bot. Soc. Amer. Bull. 120, pp. 1-71. 1939. s H. Sorokin. Idiograms, nucleoli, and satellites of certain Ка nunculaceae. Amer. Jour. Bot. 16: 408, 1929. 7 Randolph, L. F., E. C. Abbe, J. Einset. Comparison of shoot apex and leaf development. and structure in diploid and tetraploid maize. Jour. Agric. Res. 69: 47-76. 1944 140 | Rhodora [JUNE During World War I, Butters taught mathematics and other non-botanical courses so effectively that Burton, then President of the University of Minnesota, is said to have commented that if Dr. Butters were completely ignorant of Botany the University would still be able to appoint him as Professor of Mathematics, or of Astronomy, or of Geology, or of Pharmacy. President Burton’s comment about Butters’ ability to teach pharmacy is significant and perhaps requires explanation. Pharmacy was an early love and one with which Butters retained contact always. He taught Botany to generation after genera- tion of young pharmacists (over 2000 of them) from 1901 on. He appreciated the privilege of membership on the staff of the College of Pharmacy and enjoyed his associations there. He served for many years as botanical consultant to the staff of the National Formulary. As a geologist, Butters became deeply engrossed in the study of glacial phenomena which are so evident but which were so poorly understood in the state of Minnesota. He and Rosendahl together developed a deep knowledge of these phenomena which contributed richly to their botanical teaching. Professor W. H. Emmons, formerly head of the Department of Geology, once remarked that Butters was the best geologist on the campus outside of the Department of Geology. This was indeed a com- pliment in view of the distinguished character of the Geology Department and of its head. At first it was the Driftless Area that drew Butters’ attention. But, in the course of an automo- bile trip to northeastern Minnesota and near-by Canada with some of his non-botanical friends, he discovered evidence sug- gesting the existence of another area which possibly had not been glaciated during the Wisconsin. The Minnesota portion of this area (in Cook County) he studied with the greatest care during the last dozen or so years of his life. It was the good fortune of the writer to be his companion on many trips to Cook County. These were indeed a revelation since there is no better way to become acquainted with a man than to camp with him, and these experiences have left nothing but admiration and affection. They also provided an opportunity to become acquainted with an old mountaineer’s field cuisine. And it was nol the old mountaineer who developed acidosis from the monotonous diet 1948] Abbe,—Frederie King Butters 141 of pancakes and bacon, bannock and bacon, cheese and raisins, and rice and raisins! During his last dozen years Butters was increasingly afflicted with illnesses—jaundice, diabetes, severe neuritis, and the arteriosclerosis which was the ultimate cause of his death. But his indomitable spirit brought him to the Herbarium in spite of these afflictions. Never a day passed until near the very end that he did not deliver his lectures on time and work on the specimens collected during preceding field seasons. lurther- more, he did not permit his physical condition to interfere with his field work except when the attacks were most severe. This strength of will was with him throughout his life and is well illustrated by a story from the early days which he and Rosen- dahl liked to tell on each other. They were out on Cowichan Lake on Vancouver Island while collecting in the early 1900's. The wind had risen and the waves were breaking on the rocks on shore—they were in a fragile dugout canoe—and caution dictated a prompt retreat. But Butters had sighted a specimen of Cornus Nuttall? which he felt they should have. Rosendahl objected. But Butters would say in telling the story, “That specimen is in the Herbarium today! You see J was steering!" It is difficult to refrain from quoting a very graphic description of Dr. Butters which is incorporated in the following bit of doggerel composed about him by one of his students. It was presented as part of the program at the dinner given for Pro- fessor and Mrs. Rosendahl on the occasion of Professor Rosen- dahl becoming Professor Emeritus. Butters, of course, was Master of Ceremonies. "Professor Butters Beside a cluttered desk I sit Mid books and paper piled high Му jaws clamped on a cigarette Which sprinkles ash on coat and tie. Leisurely I turn the pages Of a book I know by heart For the wisdom of the sages It's my duty to impart.” Much could be said of Butters’ interest in his Faculty Dining Club and the breadth of subject matter covered in his talks 142 Rhodora [JUNE before the members; of his interest in the origin and development of the Campus Club (the faculty club at the University of Minnesota); of his broad circle of acquaintances on the faculty; and of his loyalty to old and new friends and students. To elaborate on these subjects would but provide further examples of his wisdom and urbanity, of bis virtues and perhaps of some of his foibles, of his uncompromising support of what he knew to be right and good, and of his philosophical cast of mind. His friends, who are many, know these things, and know, too, that his loss has been a deep one for them and for Botany. A BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF FREDERIC KiNa BUTTERS Joun W. Moore! 1899. Observations on Rhodymenia. Minn. Bot. Stud., 2: 205-213. (Dec. 29). 1901. A preliminary list of the Minnesota Xylariaceae. Minn. Bot. Stud., : 563-567. (Jul. 20). 1903. Observations on Trichogloea lubrica. Minn. Bot. Stud., 3: 11-21. (Mar. 21). ——. А Minnesota species of Tuber. Bot. Gaz., 35: 427-431. (Jun. 22). 1906. The conifers of Vancouver Island. Postelsia, 2: 135-212. 1908. (with F. E. Clements and C. O. Rosendahl.) Guide to the Spring Flowers of Minnesota. Minn. Pl. Stud. I, Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. pp. i-v, 1-40. (ed. 1).—Second, third and fourth editions, slightly amplified, were issued in 1910, 1913, and 1916, respectively. ——. (with F. E. Clements and C. O. Rosendahl.) Guide to the Trees and Shrubs of Minnesota. Minn. Pl. Stud. II, Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. pp. 1-28. (ed. 1).—A second edition, slightly amplified, was issued in 1910. 1909. The seeds and seedlings of Caulophyllum thalictroides. Minn. Bot. Stud., 4: 11-32. ——. (with С, О. Rosendahl.) Guide to the Ferns and Fern Allies of Minnesota. Minn. Pl. Stud. III, Geol. & Nat. Hist. Surv. Minn. pp. 1-1, 1-23. 1911. (with C. O. Rosendahl.) Some effects of severe frost upon vegetation in a condition of active growth. Minn. Bot. Stud., 4: 153-159. ———, Notes on the species of Liagora and Galaraura of the Central Pacific. Minn. Bot. Stud., 4: 161-184. (Sep. 15). 1912. (with К. E. Clements and С, О. Rosendahl.) Minnesota Trees and Shrubs. Report [Minn.]| Bot. Surv., IX. pp. i-xxi, 11-314. 1913. (with F. E. Clements and C. О. Rosendahl.) Guide to the Autumn Flowers of Minnesota Field and Garden. Minn. Pl. Stud. V. pp. i-xviii, 1—77. 1914. Some peculiar cases of plant distribution in the Selkirk Mountains, British Columbia. Minn. Bot. Stud., 4: 313-331. ——. The vegetation of the Selkirk Mountains. Appendix A, pp. 352-362, in “Mountaineering and Exploration in the Selkirks", by Howard Palmer. The Knickerbocker Press, New York. 1 Assistance in the preparation of this bibliography has been given by C. O. Rosen- dahl, Mrs. G. Forsberg, E. C. Abbe, E. B. Fischer, N. L. Huff, P. O. Johnson, L. Т. Smith, and С, E. Smyithe, all of the University of Minnesota, C. W. Horton of Dartmouth College, and J. Afflerbach of the Cooperative Test Service of the American Council on Education. 1924. 1932. 1933. 1934. 1985; 1936. 1938. 1939. Frederic King Butters 143 Abbe, (with С. O. Rosendahl.) Reputed Minnesota plants which probably do not occur in the state. Minn. Bot. Stud., 4: 461—473. (Sep. 20). Pellaea atropurpurea (L.) Link and Pellaea glabella Mett. ex Kuhn. Amer. Fern Jour., 7: 77-87. (Aug. 9). (with Harold St. John.) Studies in certain North American species of Lathyrus. Rhodora, 19: 156-163. (Sep. 10). ‘Taxonomic and geographic studies in North American ferns. I. The genus Athyrium and the North American ferns allied to Athyrium Filiz-femina. II. Botrychium virginianum and its American vari- eties. Rhodora, 19: 169-216. (Oct. 11).—repr. as Contrib. Gray Herb. n. s. no. li. (with С. О. Rosendahl.) On the occurrence of Pinus Banksiana in southeastern Minnesota. Plant World, 21: 107—118. А new western species of Pellaea. Amer. Fern Jour., 11: 39-40. (Оё. ЛУД, Salvinia in Minnesota. Amer. Fern Jour., 11: 48-50. Taxonomic and geographic studies in North American ferns. THI. Pellaea glabella and its western segregates. Amer. Fern Jour., 11: 57-82. (Feb. 3). In memoriam Edward Willet Dorland Holway. Canadian Alpine VOU US 253-2590. (with C. О. Rosendahl.) Guide to the Spring Flowers of Minnesota Field and Garden, Minn. Pl. Stud. I. (ed. 5) pp. i-xi, 1-62. Edward W. D. Holway. Bot. Gaz., 77: 115-116. (with C. O. Rosendahl) The distribution of the white oak in Minne- sota. Minn. Stud. Pl. Sci., Vol. I: 199-209. (with С. О. Rosendahl) Trees and plants along Highway No. 1, Chapter EX, pp. 104-118, /( Minn. Geol. Surv. Bull. 20, “А Cde: book to Minnesota Trunk Highway No. 17, by О. M. Sehiwartz. Notes on the range of Maianthemum canadense and its variety interius. Rhodora, 28: 9-11. (Feb. 17). Taxonomic studies in the genus J/aianthemum, Minn, Stud. in PI. Sei, Vol. I: 429-444. (with C. О. Rosendahl.) Trees and Shrubs of Minnesota. Univ. Minn. Press, Minneapolis, pp. i-viii, 1-385. (with C. O. Rosendahl.) A Guide to the Spring Flowers of Minnesota. Univ. Minn. Press, Minneapolis. (ed. 6) pp. i-xviij, 1-89.—4A seventh edition was Issued in 1937. The flora of the Glacier District. Canadian Alpine Jour., 21: 139 147. (with C. O. Rosendahl and Olga Lakela.) Identity of Heuchera hispida Pursh. Rhodora, 35: 111-118. (Mar. 5). (with P. O. Johnson et al.) Cooperative Botany Test. Cooperative Test Service, New York.— Phe issue of Parts I, IH, HIT, IV and of Part € extended into 1935, when certain of the parts were re-issued with slight changes. (with ©. O. Rosendahl.) The genus Najas in Minnesota. Rhodora, 37: 345-348. (Sep. 7). Vegetation of the Minneapolis-St. Paul area, Chapter П, pp. 16-20, тн Minn. Geol. Surv. Bull. 27, “The Geology of the Minneapolis-St. Paul Metropolitan Arca,” by G. M. Schwartz. (with С, О. Rosendahl and Olga Lakela.) A monograph on the genus Heuchera. Minn. Stud. in Pl. Sci., Vol. II: 1-180. "Useless" Research (address of the retiring president of the Minnesota Chapter of Sigma Xi, June б, 1988.) Minn. Chats, 21, No. 2: 1-2. (with E. L. Stover et al.) An exploratory study of the teaching of botany in the colleges and universities of the United States. Bot. Soc. Amer., Bull. 119: pp. 1-46. (with E. L. Stover et al.) Achievement tests in relation to teaching objectives in general college botany. Bot. Soc. Amer., Bull. 120: Ak 144 Rhodora [JUNE 1940. (with E. C. Abbe.) The American varieties of Rorippa islandica. " Rhodora, 42: 25-32. (Feb. 6). 1941. Hybrid Woodsias in Minnesota. Amer. Fern Jour. 31: 15-21. (Apr. 4). ——. Populus balsamifera L. Bulletins of National Formulary Subcom- mittee, No. 1, pp. 157-158. 1942. (with E. B. Fischer et al.) Medicinal plant resources of Minnesota. Minn. Resources Commission, St. Paul, Minn., pp. 1-23. 1943. (with E. C. Abbe.) A new oxytrope of the Minnesota-Ontario border. Rhodora, 45: 1-4. (Jan. 6). 1944. be American variety of Saxifraga Aizoon. Rhodora, 46: 61-69. (Mar. 8). 1947. (with E. C. Abbe.) The genus Poa in Cook County, Minnesota. Rhodora, 49: 1-21. (Jan. 22). 1948. (with В. M. Tryon, Jr.) А fertile mutant of a Woodsia hybrid. Amer. Jour. Bot., 35: 132-133. (Mar 11). ——. (with E. C. Abbe). А flora of Cook County, Minnesota. (in prepa- ration). DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA Viera sEPIUM. L. IN Canana.'—In Ruopora 49: 288. 1947, Herbert Habeeb reports Vicia sepium L. present in the province of New Brunswick, Canada. The present would seem an oppor- tune time to bring together all the Canadian citations available. An earlier review not widely distributed (Скон, HERBERT. Canadian Weed Survey, Second Report, 1943. Mimeographed 1944) was not so complete as the present one. Nova Scotia: Annapolis Royal, 1921, Fernald et al, border of field (Can). Prince Epwarp IsLAnp: Charlottetown, 1929, Groh, fencerow (DAO). New Brunswick: St. Stephen, 1926, Groh (DAO); St. John, 1926, Groh (DAO, Can); St. John, 1930, Groh (DAO); East St. John, 1937, Groh (DAO); Grand Falls, 1947, Habeeb (Gray, as reported above). QurBec: Montreal, 1895, L. R. Jones (Gray, as reported, Ruopora 2: 225. 1900). ONTARIO: west of Hamilton, 1895, J. M. Dickson, ravine (Can); Lambton Co., Ont., (as reported, Dodge, €. K., in Ann. Rep. Mich. Acad. Sci. 1915). The herbaria above, besides the Gray, are the National Her- barium of Canada, Ottawa (Can), and the Division of Botany and Plant Pathologv, Department of Agriculture, Ottawa (DAO).—HersBert Grou, Division of Botany and Plant Pa- thology, Central Experimental Farm, Ottawa, Canada. ! Contribution No. 933 from the Division of Botany and Plant Pathology, Science Service, Dominion Department of Agriculture, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada. 1948| Fernald,—8ome Minor Forms of Rosa 145 SOME MINOR Forms ок Rosa.—In working over the species of Rosa in eastern North America I find myself looking upon some plants, which have been published as true species or varieties, as minor forms. Those which demand new combinations are the following: Rosa SETIGERA Michx., var. TOMENTOSA Torr. & Gray, forma serena (Palmer & Steyermark), stat.nov. Var. serena Palmer & Steyermark in Ann. Mo. Bot. Gard. xxii. 569 (1985). On the same page Palmer & Steyermark treated the unarmed glabrous-leaved Rosa setigera as a form, forma inermis Palmer & Steyermark, 1. ¢., while the unarmed shrub with dull leaflets tomentose beneath was called a variety because “It appears to be more distinet and constant in its distinguishing characters, as well as more isolated geographically, than the variety based solely on the more or less pubescent character of the leaves". Since, however, unarmed or essentially unarmed shrubs with the foliage of var. tomentosa occur far outside *the Ozark region", in Ohio, Indiana, Alabama, ete., the geographic isolation seems less pronounced and the rose which is serene in having no prickles seems to be a form parallel with forma inermis, which in the Gray Herbarium is represented chiefly from Ozark Co., Missouri. R. viRGINIANA Mill., forma nanella (Rydb.), stat. nov. R. nanella Rydb. in N. Am. Fl. xxii*. 497 (1918). Surely Rosa nanella is only the most stunted and rather xero- phytic extreme of R. virginiana. 16 occurs on wind-swept crests, barrens, talus and sand-dunes from eastern Newfoundland south in the coastwise area to New Jersey, but I find no morphological character to separate it from the taller and larger KR. virginiana. R. CAROLINA L., forma glandulosa (Crépin), stat. nov. R. parviflora Ehrh., var. @. glandulosa Crépin in Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. xv. 68 (1876). Plants with more or less glandular teeth or with glands on the leaf-rachis occur occasionally throughout the broad area of gland- less typical Rosa carolina, from New England to southern On- tario and southward. They seem to have no distinctive range, and the number of glands on the foliage is thoroughly inconstant. There seems no justification for treating it as a species, as is done by Rydberg іп N. Am. Fl. 1. c. 500 (1918) and none for his calling 146 Rhodora [JUNE this species R. serrulata Raf. As characterized by Rydberg R. serrulata is said to have “Leaflets glandular-dentate and usually glandular on the rachis. Branches not bristly or rarely slightly so; teeth of the leaflets ovate” (Key, p. 484), “stipules... strongly glandular-ciliate . . . ; petioles and rachis glandular- hispid . . . ; leaflets . . . lance-elliptie or rarely oval ..., with gland-tipped teeth". How very different was the account of R. serrulata Raf. in Ann. Gén. Sci. Phys. v. 218 (1820), repr. as Prodr. Monog. Rosiers, 9 (1820): 23. Rosa serrulata. Raf. Tige et pétioles aiguillonés et hispidules, aiguillons stipulaires droits, stipules ciliées; folioles 5-7, obovées, ser- retées et serrulées, glabres, páles en dessous; fleurs 1-3, calices hispides, sépales simples serrulés: fruits globuleux hispidules. Var. rotundi folia. Aiguillons menus, droits et nombreux; folioles ovales, arrondies, base entière. Obs. Arbuste d'un pied; dans les bois avec le précédent, à fleurs roses peu odorantes, médiocres, pétales à peine échanerés. Les dents des feuilles sont serrulées, La variété croit en Kentuky; c'est peut-être une espéce distincte. Surely Rafinesque would have detected the glands and he would not have called the leaflets **obovées" if they were “1апсе- elliptic or rarely oval". As to Crépin's AK. parviflora, var. glandulosa, his description was clear: “А dents plus ou moins com- posées-glanduleuses". Crépin cited no type but several charac- teristic sheets in the Gray Herbarium bear his annotations made in 1896, “Rosa humilis Dents composées-glanduleuses", he then recognizing it as an unnamed form of R. humilis Marsh. (1785) — R.carolina L. (1753). R. BLANDA Ait., forma alba (Schuette), stat. nov. Var. alba Schuette ex Erlanson in Papers Mich. Acad. Sci. v. 88 (1926). A frequent albino, but certainly a mere color-form, not a geo- graphic variety. One of the most remarkable of roses only recently described is Rosa Rousseauiorum Boivin in Naturaliste Canadien, Ixxii. 225 (1945), the third very characteristic species endemic to the area centering on the lower River and the Gulf of St. Lawrence, the new one strongly marked by its very large and dilated stipules (2-3.5 em. long) bordered by crowded red stipitate glands so that the teeth often appear glandular-pectinate, the sepals 1.8-2.5 em. long. The earliest collections cited for this endemic of the 1948] Dayton,— Juglans nigra oblonga in Missouri 147 lower St. Lawrence were made in 1927. It is, therefore, worth noting that among the accumulation of “unidentified” roses in the Gray Herbarium there is a very characteristic specimen from “Canada, Herb. Shepard", with Crépin’s note “R. blanda Ait. rar. А dents composées-glanduleuses". What Crépin could not have known from this very old specimen (just in bud) is the fact that in maturity the sepals would have become reflexed against the fruit, the very striking character which distinguishes this species, А. Williamsii Fernald and R. johannensis Fernald from k. blanda, in which the sepals form a porrect beak at summit of the fruit. Since this specimen came from “Herb. Shepard" it is probable that John Shepard received it from Frederic Pursh, who explored the lower St. Lawrence.— M. L. FERNALD. JUGLANS NIGRA OBLONGA IN Missovnr.—Mr. John T. Wood- ruff, Pinebrook Farms on Highway 14, Siloam Springs, Howell County, Missouri, has sent to the U. S. Forest Service a few fruits from a black walnut tree on his premises in which and its progeny he has taken much interest. The parent tree was dis- covered by him in 1984 as “а likely sprout some distance from any other walnut tree." The fruits and relatively rather thin- shelled nuts are distinetly oblong and definitely appear to be forma oblonga (Marsh.) Fern. (RHoporA 39: 334. 1937), which Fernald & Long collected on the banks of the Meherrin River, Southampton County, Virginia, and noted as “The rare form which was described in 1785 by Humphrey Marshall as ‘Juglans nigra oblonga. Black oblong fruited walnut? ” Sargent indicates in both his Silva and Manual that black walnut fruits are sometimes oblong but does not differentiate the form by name, range or in any other way. Nor do other publica- tions on black walnut, so far as I have observed. The form may be close to the hort. var. STABLER, the original of which was discovered by Henry Stabler on the Prebe Brothers’ farm in Howard County, Maryland. In F. S. Baker's “Black walnut— its growth and management" (U. 8. Dept. Agr. Bul. 933. 1921) Missouri, Illinois and Ohio form the bulk of the “primary com- mercial range” of this species, 7. e., as timber (see map, р. 2).— WiLLiAM A. Dayton, U. S. Forest Service. 148 Rhodora [JUNE Two Forms IN EUPHORBIA.— EUPHORBIA IPECACUANHAE L., forma linearis (Moldenke), comb. nov. Tithymalopsis Ipecacuanhae (L.) Small, f. linearis Moldenke in Phytologia, ii. 321 (1947). Е. gracilis Ell. Sk. ii. 657 (1824). Vallaris Ipecacuanha Raf., var. linearifolia Raf. Aut. Bot. 96 (1840). It is perhaps futile to give names to the many variations of leaf-outline and color in Zuphorbia I pecacuanhae but the extreme with linear leaves is possibly more definite than those with oblong, oval or obovate blades. At least on one of our Virginia trips Mr. Bayard Long and I collected in the same habitat plants with leaves of various outlines and color. When these were dried between ventilators and on a hot, sunny roof, the linear- leaves plants were thoroughly dry in a couple of days; those with broader leaves required a full week. This seemed to indieate that the former are less succulent than the latter. Incidentally, Elliott went so far as to treat the linear-leaved form as a distinet species. If anyone is seeking names for the plants with other leaf-outlines he can find them in the writings of Rafinesque. E. pENTATA Michx., forma cuphosperma (Engelm.), stat. nov. E. dentata, var. cuphosperma Engelm. Bot. Mex. Bound. Surv. 190 (1859). ŒE. cuphosperma Boiss. in DC. Prodr. xv”. 73 (1862). Poinsettia cuphosperma Small, Fl. Se. U. S. 721 (1903). Although in its extreme development the linear- or narrowly lanceolate-leaved form is striking, it seems to be only a form, for the transition to broad-leaved plants is gradual and the distinction in the seed completely fails.—M. L. FERNALD. Volume 50, по. 598, including pages 101—132, was issued $ May, 1948. Hovora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. July, 1948. No. 595. CONTENTS: Contributions from the Gray Herbarium of Harvard University— No. CLXVII. Studies of American Types in British Herbaria. Part I. Prefatory Notes by Dr. Schubert; Part II. Some Linnaean Species. М. L. Fernald and Bernice G. Schubert. .. 149 Six Additions to the Adventitious Flora of Quebec. Marcel Raymond and James Kucymiak. ..................... 176 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. А monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10—34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets сап be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad. vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical M m, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, РА. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. Тһе Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939, $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora Plate 1097 2 А ` = E: к ` CELTIS OCCIDENTALIS L.: FIG. 1, TYPE, X 15, C. CRASSIFOLIA Lam.: FIG. 2, TYPE, X l4. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. July, 1948. No. 595. CONTRIBUTIONS FROM THE GRAY HERBARIUM OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY—NO. CLXVII STUDIES OF AMERICAN TYPES IN BRITISH HERBARIA М. L. FERNALD AND BERNICE О. SCHUBERT (Plates 1097-1117) Part I. PREFATORY Notes By Dr. SCHUBERT In the early spring of 1945, when the work on the new edition of Gray’s Manual had progressed to the point where only prob- lems remained, Professor Fernald spoke occasionally of the necessity of having photographs of many of the type-specimens in British herbaria. In May of that year, shortly after V-E Day, he suggested that perhaps I could go to Britain when the war ended; and in August, during the two-day holiday pro- claimed after V-J Day, he began to form a definite plan. In the winter of 1945-46, after being assured in correspondence with botanical colleagues at the British Museum (Natural History) and at Kew that their specimens might be returned from war- time sanctuaries and in working order by May, although other conditions might not be favorable, the likelihood of the project seemed less remote. The passage of three years since the beginning of preparations have now made the difficulties of the period from March, 1946, to the end of October, when I finally embarked on the Queen Elizabeth, seem much less enormous. A pleasant haze has settled over what seemed at the time very grim circumstances, surely not to be forgotten so soon. The really 150 Rhodora [JULY outstanding recollection now is of the help very generously given us by friends! of the Gray Herbarium and by the members of the staff. The strictly technical problems of camera and equipment had of necessity to be worked out in great detail because the possi- bility of buying anything at all abroad was not to be considered. With the aid and ingenuity of Dr. Ian D. Clement, then a gradu- ate student very recently returned from service in Britain, this particular set of problems was worked out with sufficient care so that, with only minor modifications after arrival at the British Museum, the work was carried out as planned with no loss of negatives. The equipment, though simple, was designed with several considerations in mind, among them need for the least possible weight and probable lack of special lighting equipment and dark-room. We decided that the most portable case for carrying all the equipment would be a standard size student’s laundry-case, which, after the camera, a Voigtlander Avus, 214 X 314, was our first acquisition. With the inside measure- ments of the case at hand Dr. Clement proceeded to design a copying stand which could be used at one limit to photograph whole specimens (at 26 natural size) and at the other to photo- graph details at natural size. Built in the University work- shop, the extendable vertical rack was attached to the base by bolts and wing-nuts and the two portions of the rack were similarly joined, but the whole stand could be separated and packed with enough room left for film, film-holders, change-bag, notes, etc. The completely full case, with sufficient equipment for taking approximately one thousand specialized photographs (including all needs except lights), weighed 38 pounds, a not impossible load and one with sufficient padding in the form of “‘lab-coat”’ and kleenex to withstand the rigors of travel. While the camera-stand was being constructed my occupa- tions were many: trying to procure passage, finding film in quantity, copying descriptions of all the species to be studied and, in general, getting ready for a trip which might begin in May of 1946 or a year from then. A passport was not received until late in June and then the 1 Particularly the financial aid from Miss Edith Scamman, Mr. Walter D. Edmonds and Mr. Philip Wrenn. 1948| Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 151 vicious circle of “no visa, no passage; no passage, no visa" was run around for about two months until the British Consul, by this time probably a little tired of my frequent calls, said if all haste were made I could probably get passage on the Queen Elizabeth and if I did he would assume the responsibility of giving mea visa. Finally on the 28th of October, with too much luggage and a full sheaf of documents, I embarked on the beauti- fully refinished Cunarder in а state of complete exhaustion and great uncertainty. I do not know what I expected that distracted me to the point of leaving one piece of baggage in Customs at Southampton and the сазе with all my notes on the train at Waterloo Station (both of which, thanks to British efficiency, were very soon recovered) but my equilibrium returned promptly on reaching the British Museum in South Kensington. The complete friendliness with which I was received by the Keeper of the Botany Department and his staff was very reas- suring and the amount of help given me, particularly by Dr. George Taylor, immeasurable. For some weeks before my ar- rival Dr. Taylor, the Deputy Keeper, and his assistant, Mr. L. H. J. Williams, had worked from lists sent earlier, to get out a large number of the specimens I needed (since the Herbarium was not yet rearranged in actual working order), This meant a great saving in time and made it possible to start photographing immediately. As Dr. Clement and I had expected, an unforeseen problem arose at once—the herbarium-sheets at the British Museum are considerably larger than the standard size in American herbaria. This required certain rearrangements but there was enough lee- way in the rack so that the difficulty was satisfactorily overcome. The matter of lighting which had somewhat concerned us offered no particular problem and three (or sometimes only two) ordinary desk-lamps provided sufficient light. During my six continuous weeks at the British Museum I took some 400 photographs of about 300 specimens in addition to the Walter Herbarium, photographed in its entirety and described in detail later in this paper. In the problems of photography particularly, Mr. James A. Crabbe of the technical staff was especially helpful and encouraging. In many historical and bibliographical as well as taxonomic 152 Rhodora [JULY questions Mr. A. H. G. Alston took particular pains to assist me. He also arranged a visit to the Chelsea Physic Garden, once in the charge of Philip Miller, many of whose types I was studying. Both space and time prohibit my writing in any more detail of my stay at the British Museum. Although the larger amount of material needed was there, important types were also at Kew and in the middle of December I started working there, although, because of the acute housing shortage, I continued to live in South Kensington (on the tiny but well protected street on which Mr. Winston Churchill resides). At Kew (where in contrast to the British Museum there was essentially no war-damage) I felt very much at home and it was obvious that the basic plans for the Gray Herbarium building were adapted from this splendid herbarium. The Keeper, Dr. Turrill, Mr. Sandwith in charge of American plants, Mr. Summer- hayes in charge of Orchidaceae, and many others helped me to make rapid progress and do as much as possible in my limited time. The technical problems, solved in South Kensington, were no longer of any consequence. At Kew, in addition to studies of the North American types, it was also possible to photograph, though not study, types in many Central and South American genera in which my colleagues and I had special interest. In all I made just over 100 photographs at Kew and settled several bibliographical questions. Before Christmas too, I made a hurried trip to Cambridge to see some of Lindley’s material (all preserved there but the Orchidaceae). Through the kindness of Dr. F. T. Brooks of the Botany School and the cordial assistance of Dr. J. G. Hawkes of the Imperial Institute of Genetics and Plant Breeding, my stay was made most interesting and profitable. A short visit with Mrs. Agnes Arber, who has done outstanding work, especially on the Monocots, was a very pleasant occasion in Cambridge too, planned for me by Mr. W. T. Stearn of the Royal Horticultural Society. By the first of January, 1947, the period allotted for the proj- ect had passed but some summer vacation-time not used in 1946, made possible a short trip to Geneva and then a few days in London to study at the herbarium of the Linnean Society before departure. My purpose in Geneva was chiefly to photograph DeCandolle’s 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 153 types in Begonia and Desmodium, kept separately there, in the order of the Prodromus. In a very short two weeks it was possible only to photograph the specimens (about 200), take very brief notes and make a firm resolve to return really to study more of the fascinating material and to become better acquainted with Geneva, a particularly interesting city historically (to say nothing of its very numerous wonderful book-shops). My stay in Geneva was made especially pleasant by the help of Dr. Baehni, Director of the Conservatoire et Jardin Botaniques, and the Secretary-librarian, Mlle. Nelly Dubugnon, who wrote innumerable notes in French, to ensure my not getting lost, and performed many other kind services. It was most interesting also to meet in Geneva Dr. Hochreutiner, former director of the Conservatoire, a most gracious gentleman, and Dr. J. C. Willis of "Age and Area" fame, then putting the final touches on а new work. heturning to London in the last week of January, it was necessary to close off some unfinished bits at the British Museum, collect my negatives, which the officers of the Museum had kindly arranged to have developed for me, and to spend a few days at the Linnean Society of London. The devoted Assistant- Secretary of the Society, Mr. Spencer Savage, made working there а most interesting and stimulating experience, and the privilege of working on the herbarium as well as Linnaeus' own books, with his annotations, was a very great one. My departure from London was made at the time of the beginning of one of the most severe winters there recorded. The low temperatures, plus the restrictions in use of electricity and fuel imposed soon thereafter, would have made photography impossible; so, although my time was all too short, an extension then would not have greatly helped. It 1s quite impossible here to express adequately the real significance of this short journey to a few of the older, historical botanical collections abroad. Those who helped, here named and unnamed, both botanists and others of whom there were very many, have made a positive contribution to the accuracy and authenticity of the new edition of Gray’s Manual. To all these friends this brief note is a small token of my appreciation and the gratitude of the senior author, Professor Fernald, and myself. 154 Rhodora [JULY Part П. Some LiNNAEAN SPEciES (РгАтЕз 1097-1102) PTERIS ATROPURPUREA L. Sp. Pl. ii. 1076 (1753). The specimen so marked in the Linnaean Herbarium is the plant currently interpreted as that species. The first sentence in the Linnaean description might or might not refer to this plant. The Grono- vian diagnosis seems to refer to Pellaea glabella Mett., but the Gronovian collection is not available. Since Linnaeus’s speci- men, annotated by him, is the pubescent plant, P. atropurpurea of authors generally, it is best not to disturb the present concept. Linnaeus's ‘‘stipes nitidus" does not hold for this plant. POTAMOGETON PUSILLUS L. = P. panormitanus Bivona-Ber- nardi, var. major G. Fischer. As pointed out in RHopona xlii. 246 (1940) Dandy and Taylor indicated (in Journ. Bot. Ixxvi. 91 (1938)) that the TYPE of Potamogeton pusillus L. Sp. Pl. i. 127 (1753) has been regularly misinterpreted and that it is actually the later published P. panormitamus Biv. Nuove Piante ined. Barone Ant. Biv.-Bern. pub. del Figlio Andrea, 6 (1838). "They did not make any differentiation between the two varieties of P. panormitanus which in America, at least, are very definite: var. major G. Fischer, Berichte Bayer. Bot. Gesells. xi. 109 (1907), and var. minor Biv. 1. c. The former, with the larger or primary leaves 1-3 mm. wide, was illustrated in Fernald, Mem. Gray Herb. iii. pls. ix, xxix, fig. 7, xxxiii, fig. 4 and xxxix, fig. 10 (1932). The latter, with the larger leaves only 0.3-1 mm. wide and relatively short, was illustrated (Fernald l. c.) in plates x, xxix, fig. 8 and xxxiii, fig. 5. Until it could be determined which of these plants is matched by the Linnaean type of P. pusillus it was inadvisable to transfer either of the varietal names. It is now established that the TYPE of P. pusillus is identical with Р. panormitanus var. major; this necessitates the new combination: P. PvsiLLUS L., var. minor (Biv.) comb. nov. P. panormi- tanus Biv. var. minor l. c.; Gussoni, Fl. Sic. Syn. i. 207 (1842); G. Fischer 1. c. ANDROPOGON IscHAEMUM L. Sp. Pl. ii. 1047 (1753). The plant which Linnaeus labeled “11 Ischaemum” is A. Gerardi Vitm. (A. provinciale Lam. non Retz.), native in North America and cultivated and probably escaped in southern France. А. Ischaemum, as described and generally understood, is a wholly 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 155 different species, native to central and southeastern Europe, Asia and Africa and is the plant to which all the references cited by Linnaeus apply. The identity of A. Gerardi was discussed in Ruopora xlv. 255 et seq. (1943). CYPERUS ALTERNIFOLIUS L. Mant. 28 (1767), “Habitat in Virginia." Cited by C. B. Clarke in Journ. Linn. Soc. xxi. 130 (1884) in his paper On Indian Species of Cyperus with the range given as Madagascar". There seems to be no question about the identity of the plant, which is not known in America. Juncus хороѕов L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2, 466 (1762). The material under this name is as mixed as were Linnaeus's bibliographical citations. The two specimens marked by Linnaeus as J. nodosus are (1) characteristic J. scirpoides Michx. (specimen no. 449.16) and (2) the little stoloniferous northern plant which regularly passes as J. nodosus (specimen no. 449.17). By some of the early authors J. nodosus was taken up in the sense of J. scirpoides and the latter cited as a synonym. Since, however, the brief diagnosis applies better to the second plant (no. 449.17), which for more than a century has been regularly treated as J. nodosus, it would be superfluous to interpret the species as intended primarily for J. scirpoides. Tue TYPE or CELTIS OCCIDENTALIS L., our PLATES 1097, 1098. —Celtis occidentalis, one of the most variable and taxonomically difficult of species, was defined by Linnaeus, Sp. Pl. ii. 1044 (1753), as follows: occidentalis. 3. CELTIS foliis oblique ovatis serratis acuminatis. Celtis procera, foliis ovato-lanceolatis serratis, fructu pullo. Gron. virg. 195. a virginiana, fructu rubro. Raj. hist. Habitat in Virginia. b Folia tenera, ovato-lanceolata, parum pubescentia; adulta lato-ovata, acuminata, acumine & basi integerrima, ceterum serrata, nuda, nervoso- venosa, latere postico duplo minore. It will at once be noted that in the four-line new description by Linnaeus he obviously had two quite different plants confused: (1) “Folia tenera, ovato-lanceolata, parum pubescentia"; (2) "adulta lato-ovata, acuminata, acumine & basi integerrima, ceterum serrata, nuda, nervoso-venosa, latere postico duplo minore". Furthermore, the quotation from Ray said "fructu rubro" ; that 156 Rhodora [JULY from Gronovius, which obviously coincided with the first part of the longer Linnaean description with “foliis ovato-lanceolatis", had “fructu pullo". Recent interpretation of C. occidentalis and its varieties started with Sargent in Bot. Gaz. Ixvii. 217, 218 (1919). "There Sargent gave the following definitions. CELTIS OCCIDENTALIS L.—''On what is usually considered the type of this species the leaves are broadly ovate, acute or short-acuminate at apex, obliquely rounded at base, coarsely or finely serrate, smooth on the upper surface, glabrous or sparingly pilose along the midribs and veins below, thin, not conspicuously venulose; petioles glabrous or rarely puberulous. The fruit is borne on glabrous or rarely puberulous ‘pedicels much longer than the petioles and is subglobose, ellipsoidal, or slightly obovoid, and 9—10 mm. in diameter; the stone is only slightly reticulate. The branchlets are glabrous or occasionally pubescent.” Var. CANINA.—". . . Differing from the type in the usually narrower long-acuminate leaves. “Extreme forms of this variety look very distinct, but trees with leaves intermediate between these and those of the typical form are common. The fruit varies as in the type from subglobose to obovoid, and there seems little difference in the length of the pedicels, which are always longer than the petioles. The leaves are usually glabrous, but on some of Bush’s Missouri specimens the midribs and veins are pilose on the lower surface and the petioles are pubescent, as in the variety crassifolia . . . " "Var. CRASSIFOLIA Gray, Man. ed. 2, 397. 1856.—C. crassifolia Lamarck, Encycl. Meth. 4: 138. 1797.— Differing from the type in its usually narrower, acuminate, thicker leaves, often more coarsely serrate or nearly entire, scabrate on the upper surface and pilose below along the midribs and veins. "In this form the petioles are usually villose-pubescent, but occa- sionally are quite glabrous; the pedicels are slightly villose, and the branchlets are glabrous or pubescent.” At the same time Sargent took up for the tree of the southern Coastal Plain, which extends northward abundantly to the James River and inland northward in the Mississippi basin, the name C. laevigata Willd. of which, as Sargent said on his page 222, "when it grows under favorable conditions, is a tree sometimes 30 m. high, with somewhat pendulous branches and slender, glabrous, red- brown branchlets. The leaves are thin, usually oblong-lanceolate, long-pointed and acuminate at apex, unsymmetrically rounded and often oblique or cuneate at base, frequently more or less falcate, entire or furnished with a few teeth usually toward the apex, green on both surfaces, glabrous, smooth or occasionally scabrate above. The fruit is bright orange-red on pedicels shorter or slightly longer than the petioles.” Sargent recognized (р. 223) C. laevigata, var. Smallii (Beadle) Rhodora Plate 1098 "y Rte- S ГАУ preva: Ја ^t лї, ата hacar "E A. es ЙУ терма gaa A K dd GM RA, Soles эро... ә Pre e VIL EUR. х HU oo ode i CELTIS PROCERA, FOLIIS OVATO-LANCEOLATIS SERRATIS, FRUCTU PULLO Of Cironovius, cited by Linnaeus as a secondary element of his C. occipENTALIS: FIG. 1, the Clayton (Gronovian) specimen, X ca. l4 C PUMILA Pursh: rics. 2 and 3, TYPE, X 5/7, courtesy of Messrs. Pennell and Long. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 157 Sarg., in which the leaves of the fertile branchlets are constantly serrate, as well as some other variations of this often red-fruited species from farther to the southwest. In his Manual (ed. 2) 318, 319 (1922), Sargent placed C. occidentalis with “fruit dark purple" under a heading ‘‘fruit on pedicels much longer than the petioles’? and his fig. 289 thus illustrated it; while С. laevigata came under the general heading “fruit on pedicels shorter or only slightly longer than the petioles" the fruit being described as orange-color or yellow. The artist, however, showed the fruiting pedicels two or three times as long as the subtending petioles! When the material which Linnaeus had before him is checked it is significant that the specimen, our PLATE 1097, FIG. 1, which he personally marked as species “3 K C. occidentalis", the specimen, collected by Kalm and now numbered in the Linnaean Herbarium 1209.4, has the fruiting pedicel scarcely as long as the petiole. This is the specimen which supplied the second portion of the Linnaean description, *adulta lato-ovata", etc. The citation from Ray with “fructu rubro" is not good for a species with purple-black fruit and may be passed as not typifying C. occidentalis. The Gronovian account of ‘Celtis procera, foliis ovato- lanceolatis serratis, fructu pullo" is supported by a beautiful sheet in the Gronovian herbarium at the British Museum (our PLATE 1098, FIG. 1) which is clearly of C. laevigata, var. Smallii, a very characteristic tree which reaches its northern limit in Clayton’s territory. This tree, with very thin oblong- or ovate- lanceolate, long-attenuate leaves, formed the basis of the first portion of the Linnaean description ‘‘Folia tenera, ovato-lanceo- lata". In the Linnaean Herbarium, but not bearing Linnaeus's identifications, there is a branch (1209.5) in anthesis (with one flower) the sheet bearing in Gronovius’s hand “Celtis fol. ovato- lanceolatis", ete., but with the "fructu atro purpurascato sub- dulci". Since this specimen was not marked by Linnaeus and since most of its elongate leaves have the tips broken, it is of secondary importance, but the long-attenuate tips of the two unbroken upper leaves are readily matched by those of modern specimens of C. laevigata, var. тат. The Gronovian "fructu atro purpurascato" certainly was not deduced from the single 158 Rhodora [JULY flower. At any rate, this specimen, without Linnaeus’s identi- fication, cannot be taken as the type of Celtis occidentalis. Since the one specimen which bears Linnaeus’s identification and is certainly the basis of the description of the adult branch, while the far handsomer Clayton specimen of the tree “folia tenera, ovato-lanceolata" and the unidentified fragment in the Linnaean Herbarium are characteristic C. laevigata, var. Smallii, it seems only right to treat the first (1209.4) as the TYPE of Celtis occidentalis. This decision coincides with that of Mr. Savage in a letter to us, under date of 30 May, 1947, which refers unequivocally to '"The type-specimen of Celtis occidentalis L. in Hb. Linn. no. 1209.4". At the time the junior author made the photographs of Celtis in the Linnaean Herbarium the severe winter of 1946—47 was coming on in London and the resulting numbness of fingers made it impossible to ascertain clearly whether the leaves of 1209.4 were smooth or scabrous. This point is now settled for us in Mr. Savage's letter, written when the weather in London was "almost unbearably hot", Mr. Savage stating explicitly that "the leaves of this specimen are scabrous”. The type of Celtis occidentalis is, then, as already surmised, identical with C. crassifolia Lam., Encycl. Méth. iv. 138 (1796), Lamarck's TYPE shown as our PLATE 1097, rra. 2. The thin- and smooth-leaved tree or shrub which has recently been passing as true C. occidentalis must be called C. occidentalis, var. pumila (Pursh) Gray, Man. ed. 2: 397 (1856), for this was based on C. pumila Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. i. 200 (1814). This interpretation of Celtis pumila needs explanation, since, by the treatments of Sargent, Rehder and their followers, C. pumila is supposed to be the shrub or small tree of exposed or very bleak habitats with the leaves of the fertile branchlets entire or essen- tially so and the small and spherical fruits bright red or reddish to brown and with relatively small stones, whereas the fruit of the serrate-leaved and mostly taller C. occidentalis is larger, slightly longer than broad to spherieal, and varying in the different trends from orange or amber-color to purple-black, the stones positively larger than in so-called C. pumila. The gener- ally aecepted but erroneous interpretation is well stated in the key and description in Rehder, Man. Cult. Trees and Shrubs, ed. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 159 2: 184, 185 (1940). His C. pumila there comes under the first capital А of his key, "Leaves entire or occasionally with few teeth . . . : stone pitted’’, while C. occidentalis comes under AA "Leaves serrate”. His C. pumila has its fruit described as "purple or tan-color". Deam’s Flora of Indiana (1940), based upon a very close field-study of the plants of his region, thus separates C. occidentalis and the traditional C. pumila. In his key on page 392 the following is given for C. occidentalis: Margins of leaves of fruiting branchlets and shoots sharply serrate all around to the base; leaf blades of an ovate to broadly ovate type, oblique at base, sometimes strongly so, those of fruiting branchlets 5-15 em long; pedicels of fruit much longer than the petioles; nutlets 6-8 mm long; small or large trees. This opposed to Margins of leaves of fruiting branchlets usually entire, or some with а few teeth on one side or with a few teeth on both sides but never serrate on either side to the base; margins of leaves of vegetative branchlets and shoots similar to those of fruiting branchlets, or with the margins serrate nearly all around but never serrate to the base; pedicels of fruit shorter or only slightly longer than the petioles; nutlets 5-6 mm long, this definition covering both C. laevigata and C. pumila. The latter is separated by Deam as follows: Leaves mostly of an ovate-lanceolate type, sometimes ovate to broadly ovate or rarely oblong-lanceolate, generally thick and yellow green beneath, generally smooth but sometimes rough above; blades extremely variable in size and shape, mostly 3-10 cm long and 2-6 em wide, usually about half the maximum size; branchlets usually more or less pubescent; pedicels shorter or longer than the petioles; mature fruit (collected in October) a dark cherry red; trees usually 1-2.5 m high, but sometimes 4—6 m high and up to 1 dm in diameter near the base; of a dry sandy, gravelly or rocky habitat. Deam's very detailed description is of C. pumila as nowadays generally interpreted. Unfortunately, however, recent authors seem not to have paid very close attention to Pursh's own ac- count. Otherwise they would not emphasize the entire leaves and the small and spherical purple or tan-color or cherry-red drupe. Asa matter of fact, wherever the senior author has seen the entire-leaved so-called C. pumila its small spherical fruits have always been red to red-orange when ripe. Pursh’s brief account was as follows: pumila, 3. C. foliis ovatis acuminatis aequaliter serratis basi inaequalibus utrinque glabriusculis: junioribus tantum pubescentibus, pedunculis sub- trifloris, fructu solitario. 160 Rhodora [JULY On the banks of rivers: Maryland and Virginia. b . May. v.v. A small straggling bush; berries ovate, black. The small to medium-sized tree or shrub with relatively thin and smooth serrate leaves, which has passed as true C. occiden- talis, is obviously what Pursh described. Fortunately Pursh's own material (the Type), with his own identification clearly written, is preserved in the Pursh herbarium at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. We are indebted to the generous interest of Mr. Bayard Long for a photograph of it, X '/; (PLATE 1098, rias. 2 and 3) and to Dr. Francis W. Pennell for a transcript of the label, Dr. Pennell remarking that Pursh's labels are the most complete of any on old collections preserved at the Academy. Pursh collected this specimen “in 1806 on his Virginia trip made for Dr. B. S. Barton". The shrub or small tree of usually exposed habitats which has erroneously been passing as Celtis pumila is C. tenuifolia Nutt. Gen. N. Am. Pl. i. 202 (1818). Although Nuttall thought his new species might be the C. pumila of Pursh, he definitely ex- pressed doubt. His new name was not, then, a superfluous substitute but that of the shrub which erroneously passes as C. pumila. Here is Nuttall's description: 3. tenuifolia. C. pumila, Pursh 1. p. 200? A low bush, in the mountains of Virginia, flowering at the height of 2 feet. Leaves nearly as broad as long, now and then without serratures, often cordate- ovate, very little acuminated and almost perfectly smooth on both sides. Berries solitary, brown and glaucous. The extreme with leaves thicker, more pubescent, and harshly scabrous above is: C. TENUIFOLIA Nutt., var. georgiana (Small), comb. nov. C. georgiana Small in Bull, Torr. Bot. Cl. xxiv. 439 (1897). C. fre var. georgiana (Small) Sargent in Bot. Gaz. lxvii. 227 In some cases, as in the work of Deam, we find Celtis pumila ascribed to '*(Muhl.) Pursh”; in others called C. occidentalis, var. pumila Muhl. "The evident basis for such citations is the nomen nudum “С. occidentalis, B, pumila dwarf Pens. fl. Maio." of Muhl. Cat. 95 (1813). Without any differentiation, the word "dwarf" being a mere translation of “pumila”, Muhlenberg’s name must be treated as a nomen nudum. Rhodora Plate 1099 ье. Ж”, ©. A Ta pe. p i POLYGALA CRUCIATA L.: FIG. 1, portion of plant, X 1, from west of Snead’s, Jackson Co., Florida, Wiegand & Manning, no. 1735; FIG. 2, portion of raceme, showing bracts, X 5, from no. 1735; FIG. З, seeds, X 10, from Duval Co., Florida, Curtiss, no. 509. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 161 Another name which may sometime have to be taken up is that of Persoon, Syn. i. 292 (1805), his C. occidentalis ''Q.? tenuifolia, fol. tenuioribus minus acuminatis, dentib. majoribus basi magis rotundatis; vid. Enc. bot. l. e. p. 137 et 138. Cresc. in Ludoviscana; colitur in H. P. An distineta?". This is based on C. occidentalis “8. eadem? foliis tenuioribus minis acumi- natis" of Lam. Encycl. Méth. iv. 137 (1796). Lamarck further saying (p. 138): L'arbre g, dont je ne connois ni les fleurs ni les fruits, est originaire de la Louisiane, & cultivé également au jardin des plantes. Il a les feuilles moins acuminées, plus minces, dentées plus grossiérement, un peu plus arondies à la báse. La gelée a d'ailleurs beaucoup de prise sur lui, & le fait ordinairement périr tous les ans jusqu' à la racine, au moins dans notre climat. N’est-il qu'une simple variété du celtis occidentalis, ou bien doit-il former une espèce particulière? (У. v. 5. Flor. & 5. Fr.) It is not improbable that this variety may prove to be C. laevigata Willd., var. та: (Beadle) Sarg. l. c. 223 (1919). Until this matter 18 settled Sargent's varietal name should stand. An early varietal name for typical Celtis laevigata Willd., the name to be taken up if entire-leaved typical C. laevigata is treated as а variety of C. occidentalis (a course for which there is logical argument, in view of the frequent overlapping of characters) is C. occidentalis L., var. integrifolia Nutt. Gen. i. 202 (1818). This varietal name was unjustifiably cited in the synonymy of C. mississippiensis Bose ex Spach (1841) as “C. integrifolia, Nutt." by Gray, Man. ed. 2: 397 (1856), thus unfortunately saddling upon Nuttall a binomial which he apparently did not make, Nuttall having used only the varietal combination. The only legitimately published C. integrifolia seems to be that of Lam. Encyc. Meth. iv. 140 (1796), with “foliis ovato-subrotundis" and coming from Senegal. Obviously this has nothing to do with С. laevigata, although Index Kewensis, with uncanny lack of understanding, refers it to the synonymy of the narrow-leaved ‚ American C. mississippiensis Bose ex Spach (1841), a synonym of C. laevigata Willd. (1811). Even if the round-leaved C. integrifolia Lam. (1796) of Senegal were forced into the narrow- leaved C. mississippiensis of 1841 or C. laevigata of 1811 (reduced by Ind. Kew. to C. mississippiensis), it is not clear on what basis this indispensable but too often misleading work was com- 162 Rhodora [JULY piled. Celtis was obviously as puzzling to its editors as to those who have to hunt for its morphological characters. Another name for entire-leaved typical C. laevigata Willd. (1811) is C. longifolia Nutt. N. Am. Sylva, i. 134, t. xl (1842), described in detail, beautifully illustrated and based on “С. occidentalis 0. integrifolia, Nutr. Gen. Am. vol. 1. p. 202. (not of LAMAnCK.)," Nuttall giving the tree а new name because of the earlier C. integrifolia Lam. (1796). Миа” C. longifolia has not made its way into Index Kewensis, presumably because it was thought to be the same as C. longifolia Raf. Atl. Journ. i. 177 (1833), a tree of “Texas & Arkanzas”, which, from the description, “Fol. distichis, elongato oblongis acum. basi obliq. truncatis, equal. serratis" etc. was presumably C. laevigata, var. Smallii. This discussion of nomenclatural and taxonomic problems is only typical of much which must be cleared before the exact names and identities of our plants (and especially the ligneous ones) can be finally settled. To the problem of evaluating the often fluctuating morphological characters is added the interpre- tation of authors of the past. The present authors do not deceive themselves into thinking that the problems. of eastern American Celtis are finally settled. They may have done something to clear away some of the obstacles. SALICORNIA VIRGINICA L. Sp. Pl. i. 4 (1753) as virginia. S. herbacea, 8. virginica (L.) L. Sp. Pl. ed. 2:1. 5 (1762). S. ambigua Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. 1. 2 (1803). Although Linnaeus confused the characteristic Atlantic North American perennial with a quite different plant of Europe, his brief diagnosis and his quoted description were both based on Virginian material from Clayton, described in Gronovius, Fl. Virg. ii. 129 (1743). The Gronovian account was clear and to the point: SALICORNIA caulium ramorumque articulis apice bicornibus. Salicornia erecta ramosa, caule ad imum nudo, plerumque rubente. Clayt. n. 527 & 667. Linnaeus wrote virginia. 3. SALICORNIA articulis apice compressis emarginatis bifidis. Salicornia caulium ramorumque articulis apice bicornibus. Gron. virg. 129. Habitat in Virginia, & ad Salinas Saxoniae. © 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 163 In Species Plantarum, ed. 2, i. 5 (1762) Linnaeus corrected the spelling of the name but reduced the Virginian species to varietal rank under the annual S. herbacea L. as S. herbacea Q. virginica, giving merely the description from Gronovius but adding the comment: “Virginica 8. ad Salinas Saxoniae frequentissima, vix ac ne vix distincta est species; articuli in salsis enim magis emargi- nati evadunt." Even though Linnaeus confused the quite different plant of Saxony with the plant described by Gronovius from Clayton specimens and erroneously inferred that the Clayton specimens were annual, the collection of Clayton, preserved in the Gro- novian Herbarium at the British Museum of Natural History, must stand as the TYPE of Salicornia virginica, especially since Linnaeus had no material in his own herbarium. This Clayton sheet, bearing the brief diagnoses above quoted from Gronovius and the nos. 572 and 667 (the former evidently misquoted by Gronovius as 527), consists of three branches, two of them forking from below the middle and with very prominent 2- horned scales (“саит ramorumque articulis apice bicorni- bus"), the third a long and simple stem with few simple branches at summit (“erecta ramosa, caule ad imum nudo"). This material is very readily matched by specimens of S. ambigua Michx., a species which Clayton would have had great difficulty in avoiding along the coastal sands of Virginia. PoLyGaLa CRUCIATA L., var. aquilonia, var. nov., TAB. 1100, planta 0.5-2.5 dm. alta, simplex vel divergenter ramosa; foliae verticilis primariis 3-5 (-7), foliis spathulatis vel spathulato- linearibus; racemis sessilibus vel breviter pedunculatis (peduncu- lo ad 5 mm. longo) primariis 0.7-1.5 cm. crassis; bracteis persis- tentibus 1.5-2 mm. longis; alae late deltoideo-cordatae, quam latis quam longis, 2.5-4 mm. longis in apice subulato, 0.5-1 mm. longo; seminibus ellipsoideo-obovoideis rugulosis.—Southern Maine to Virginia, there passing to typical P. cruciata; inland from northern Ohio to northern Illinois and Minnesota south to mountains of Alabama and Tennessee. 'ТүрЕ from inner edge of salt-marsh, Stratford, Connecticut, August 30, 1896, E. H. Eames in Herb. Gray. In general, botanists have interpreted the more northern var. aquilonia as true Polygala cruciata, and the wide-ranging southern P. cuspidata Hook. & Arn. in Hook. Journ. Bot. 1. 194 (1834), not DC. (1824), has been treated as a fairly distinct and larger 164 Rhodora [JULY variety, P. cruciata, var. cuspidata (Hook. & Arn.) Wood, Class-bk. ed. of 1861: 296 (1861) or var. ramosior Nash ex Robinson in Gray, Syn. Fl. i'. 458 (1897). Small, furthermore, considered the latter a distinct species, P. ramosior (Nash) Small, Man. 771 (1933). The Linnaean Polygala cruciata, Sp. Pl. 706 (1753), was based on two references, one of which, Gron. Virg. 80, contains a cita- tion to a Clayton specimen, по. 157. This specimen, now in the British Museum, was examined and photographed. It consists of two depauperate plants with all the tendencies of the southern variety, although not quite approaching most such material in the size of its parts. Its leaves are linear-spatulate and its nodes numerous (for its size). On the same sheet with the Clayton collection is mounted a collection, also somewhat de- pauperate, from Maine. The latter plants show equally well the characteristics of var. aquilonia, with divergent branches and spatulate to narrowly oblanceolate leaves. The two collections could hardly be considered the same and better developed material makes clear that the tendencies here displayed, when fully developed, characterize real varieties. The Clayton material, immature though it is, unquestionably represents the more southern branch of the species, typical P. cruciata. Although in eastern Virginia typical Polygala cruciata and var. aquilonia obviously merge, the material from Florida to eastern Texas, thence northward into eastern North Carolina (and largely eastern Virginia) seems to be well distinguished from the more northern series. The following characters may be noted: P. СЕССТАТА (typical), our PLATE 1099. P. cuspidata Hook. & Arn. in Hook. Journ. Bot. i. 194 (1834), not DC. (1824). Var. cuspidata (Hook. & Arn.) Wood, Class-bk., ed. of 1861: 296 (1861). Var. ramosior Nash ex Robinson in Gray, Syn. Fl. it. 458 (1897). P. ramosior (Nash) Small, Man. 771 (1933). Plant 1-5 dm. high, simple to much branched, the primary axis with 5-12 leaf-bearing nodes; leaves linear-spatulate or linear-oblanceolate, firm, the larger ones 1.5-3 (-4) mm. wide; racemes sessile or on peduncles up to 4 cm. long, the leading raceme before falling off of lower flowers (1—) 1.54.5 cm. long and 1.2-2 cm. thick; persistent bracts 2-3 mm. long; wings longer than broad, their blades 3.5-5.5 mm. long, tapering to an awn 1.5-3 mm. long; seed ellipsoid, faintly rugulose. Var. AQUILONIA, PLATE 1100. Plant 0.5-2.5 dm. high, simple or divergently few-branched, the primary axis with 3-5 (-6) leaf-bearing nodes; leaves spatulate to narrowly oblanceolate, herbaceous, the larger ones (2-) 3-7 mm. wide; racemes sessile or on very short (up to 5 mm.) peduncles, the leading raceme before falling of flowers 0.7-3.5 cm. long and 0.7-1.5 cm. thick; per- sistent bracts 1.5-2 mm. long; wings about as wide as long, 2.5-4 mm. long, with subulate tip 0.5-1 mm. long; seed ellipsoid-obovoid, coarsely rugulose. Rhodor: Plate 1100 PonLvGALA cRUCIATA Li, var. AQUILONIA Fernald & Schubert: FIG. 1, portion of TYPE-SHEET, X 1; FIG. 2, portion of raceme, showing bracts, X 5, from Centerville, Massachusetts, September 6, 1896, E. F. Williams; ric. 3, seeds, X 10, from Well- fleet, Massachusetts, Fernald & Long, no. 17,037. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 165 True southern Polygala cruciata seems never to occur in sub- saline habitats but to prefer wet pineland or pine-barren or boggy savannas, Chapman, Fl. So. U. S. 84 (1860) assigning it to "Pine-barren swamps” and Small, Fl. to “Low pinelands and swamps”. The 41 collections in the Gray Herbarium which have clear indication of habitat give the following score: moist pineland, pine-barren swamps or flat pineland, 14; savanna, sphagnous swale or sphagnous bog, 15; swamp, 3; meadow, 5; and moist soil, river-swamp, low ground and grass-palmetto land, 1 each. On the other hand the generally more northern or inland var. aquilonia is a plant of usually less saturatedly wet habitats and from Delaware northward it is partial to the outer coastal or coastwise region, even the upper borders of salt- marshes. Thus, in their report on the Flora of the Boston District, Knowlton and Deane recorded it in RHODORA xxi. 81 (1919) as “not reported from western towns, but occasional throughout the towns nearer the coast". In fact, of the 90 collections from Massachusetts before us the farthest inland is from Westford, only about 25 miles from the sea. Similarly, the Connecticut Botanical Society's Catalogue of the Flowering Plants and Ferns of Connecticut says: “Occasional or frequent near the coast, but rare or wanting inland". For the whole of New York state House could say only “In sandy swamps and depressions and the borders of salt marshes. Frequent or common on Long Island and Staten Island", not far inland. Again, Stone, reporting on the Plants of Southern New Jersey, says: “Соттоп in damp ground in the Pine Barrens and locally in the Middle, Coast and Cape May districts, occurring at a few stations north of our limits, but all within the coastal plain”. From the 70 collections before us from New England, which have the habitat clearly indicated, we get the following score: border of salt-marsh or sea-shore, 10; sandy, gravelly or peaty pond- margin, 31; meadow or low field, 13; eranberry-bog or boggy swale, 8; grassy swamp, damp sandy soil or sandy swamp, 2 each; dry field and damp woods, 1 each. Farther inland (as in the case of many other coastwise species) var. aquilonia occurs near the Great Lakes, thence southward along the mountains to northern Alabama: swamps near Hender- son, Henderson Co., North Carolina [between Blue Rrdge and 166 Rhodora [JULY Pisgah Ridge], Biltmore Herb. no. 731°; Pine Knot, McCreary Co., Kentucky [Pine Mts. to Cumberland Plateau], H. J. Rogers, no. 39; 6 miles east of Crossville, alt. 2300 ft., Cumber- land Co., Tennessee (Cumberland Mts.), Svenson, no. 4181; Sand Mountain, Jackson Co., Alabama, August 29, 1938, Lillian V. Porter. Extending locally inland from the Gulf States true P. cruciata reaches south-central Tennessee: Coffee Co., alt. 1100 ft., Svenson, no. 4258; Van Buren Co., Svenson, no. 9391; Grundy Co., Svenson, no. 8930. From Blake's synonymy in the North American Flora it might be thought that Polygala missurica Raf. New Fl. iv. 89 (1838) should be taken up for the inland phase of P. cruciata, var. aquilonia; but it is probable that there was some misinterpreta- tion of Rafinesque’s plant. On his pp. 87 and 88 Rafinesque subdivided Polygala into 10 subgenera, with sugbenus "5. SExiLIA R. stamens 6 sessile, corolla bilabiate cristate, type P. verticillata and all whorled species, chiefly annuals”. His P. missurica was described as follows: “966. PorvGaLA4 (Sexilia) MissurrcA Raf. stem branched diffuse 4gone, leaves quaternate and opposite broad lanceolate smooth, base acute, end mucronate; spikes terminal oblong imbricate—in the prairies of Missouri and Illinois, 3 to 4 inches high, leaves larger and broader than in others, flowers white, not in filiform spikes. Annual". Since subgenus Serilia was typified by Polygala verticillata and the only additional species definitely named by Rafinesque in this place was his P. missurica with lanceolate (not oblanceolate nor spatulate) leaves and white flowers and since the ordinarily green- to bronze- or purple-flowered P. cruciata has never been recorded from Missouri (at least not recorded by Palmer & Steyermark), it would seem that Rafinesque was describing a white-flowered, lanceolate-leaved variety of P. verticillata with “spikes . . . oblong’. Just such a plant is P. verticillata, var. sphenostachya Pennell in Bartonia, xiii. 9 and 12 (1931) which is represented by specimens before us from ‘‘sandy prairie", Havana, Illinois, Gleason; “sterile prairie", Stark Co., Illinois, V. H. Chase, no. 198; “prairies” Leeds, North Dakota, Lunell; “common on prairies", Black Hills, Forwood; and by material from Missouri. At least P. missurica can hardly be P. cruciata. Ordinarily the racemes of var. aquilonia are greenish, reddish or purple-tinged. Very rarely an albino occurs. This is 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 167 Var. AQUILONIA, forma alba (Oakes), comb. nov. P. cruciata b. alba Oakes in Hovey’s Mag. vii. 185 (1841). HYPERICUM CALYCINUM L. Mant. 106 (1767). The habitat of this species was cited with doubt by Linnaeus as in America septentrionali. The species is, however, native in the Old World and the type-specimen is matched by a large amount of herbarium-material. HYPERICUM PROLIFICUM L. 1. C. our PLATE 1101, FIGs. 1-3. The material under this name in the Linnaean Herbarium was discussed in some detail by Svenson in KHopona, xlii. 9 (1940). Svenson's decision that sheet no. 20 must be taken as the TYPE of H. prolificum L. is correct, as 1s his statement that sheets 22 (our FIG. 4), 23 and 24 represent H. prolificum in the sense of American authors generally, not Linnaeus (except in very small part, the Gronovian reference). In the original account Linnaeus included two very different plants: prolifi- 31. HYPERICUM floribus trigynis, caule tetragono cum. fruticoso, foliis lanceolato-linearibus, flori- bus primordialibus sessilibus. Hypericum floribus semitrigynis, staminibus corol- la breuioribus, caule fruticoso semperuirente. Gruan. virg. 112. Habitat in America septentrionali. b. Caules recti, purpurascentes. Folia saepius reuoluta, vnde angusta Rosmarini. | Foliola ramulorum primordia, ex alis plurima. | Panieula parua, terminalis. Flores primae secundaeque dichotomiae sessiles; reliqui terminales, pedunculati, numero rarius vltra 7. Stamina petalis non longiora. That the quotation from Gronovius (misprinted ‘‘Gruan.’’), Fl. Virg. ed. 2: 112 (1762) and the further notes given by Grono- vius referred to the plant familiarly known as H. prolificum (our FIG. 4) has already been noted by Gray and others. The difficulty is, that the plant described in detail (our Fras. 1-3) “Folia saepius reuoluta, vnde angusta Rosmarini. | Voliola ramu- lorum primordia, ex alis plurima . . . Stamina petalis non longiora", is the one which Linnaeus had in his herbarium as “proliferum” with an additional memorandum of some of the characters given in his description. His published specific name prolificum was, obviously, from the axillary fascicles (^ Foliola . ez alis plurima"). 168 Rhodora [Jury The relationship of sheet no. 20 seems, from examination of the inflorescence and the comparative length of stamens and petals to be, as Svenson indicated, possibly with what we have considered true H. prolificum rather than with H. densiflorum. The extreme variation in leaf-characters, however, seems to us to indicate a differentiation more basic than the mere aberrancy from H. prolificum which Svenson considers it. In the vast amount of herbarium-material available we have not been able to find anything which can be identified unquestionably with the Linnaean sheet number 20. The only name which we have found in the literature which is possibly applicable to H. pro- lificum sensu Gray, Man. (and current authors) is H. SPATHU- LATUM (Spach) Steud. Nomencl. ed. 2, i. 789 (1840), based on Myriandra spathulata Spach, Hist. Nat. Vég. v. 440 (1836). Spach’s description was detailed and he cited as its basis material at Paris received from Leconte as H. prolificum. Asa Gray, looking up the Spach type, made the unpublished memorandum that it was H. prolificum (in his sense). This name of course invalidates H. spathulatum Keller in Engler, Bot. Jahrb. lviii. 195 (1923), based on one of Harper’s numbers from Georgia which we have not seen. FRAXINUS AMERICANA L. Sp. Pl. ii. 1057 (1753), as pointed out by the senior author in Journ. Arn. Arb. xxvii. 390, 391 (1946), was based by Linnaeus primarily on the Gronovian account and Catesby’s plate. The Catesby plant is clearly of the southern Water Ash, Fraxinus caroliniana Mill. (1768) and the quotation from Gronovius was altered by the addition of ‘‘petiolis tereti- bus”, a phrase which Gronovius did not use. Since the latter character is a distinctive one of the Water Ash and not of the White Ash, universally known as F. americana, it was naturally inferred that the Clayton specimen cited by Gronovius was of the same species as Catesby’s. It was, however, pointed out that Linnaeus had in his own herbarium as F. americana a ! Unfortunately Index Kewensis cites Myriandra spathulata and other species fully described by Spach in his extended treatment of the Hypericaceae in his Histoire Naturelle des Végétaux, vol. 5 (June, 1836) as published only in Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Sér. 2, v. (June, 1836), a mere summary of the more extended mono- graph then being printed. In the briefer summary most of the species appear only as names, with reference to Spach's forthcoming ‘‘Suites à Buffon", the latter name used for Spach’s series of monographs published in his Histoire Naturelle des Végétaux (see Pritzel, Thesaurus, entry 8805). The publication of most of the species should date from the latter work. Rhodora Plate 1101 = HYPERICUM PROLIFICUM L.: rics. 1-3, ТҮРЕ; FIG. 1, plant, X 14; FIG. 2, portion of description (quoted by Svenson), X 1»; FIG. 8, summit of plant, X +. T . : H. sPATHULATUM (Spach) Steud. = H. prolificum, in part, of L. and sensu most authors: FIG. 4, a specimen, X 15, in the Linnaean Herbarium. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 169 mature leaf of characteristic White Ash. The argument was used that only by accepting this specimen as the type could the name Ё. americana be retained in its long-established sense. It now proves, happily, that the Clayton sheet, described by Gronovius, consists of a very young branchlet of undeveloped leaves and a mature leaf of perfectly typical F. americana, the leaflets rounded at base and definitely whitened beneath. This mature leaf is so like the leaf in the Linnaean Herbarium that it is difficult to believe that the two were from different branchlets. The ground for maintaining F. americana in its traditional sense is thus vastly strengthened. CHELONE GLABRA L. Sp. Pl. ii. 611 (1753). The uppermost leaves on the type-specimen are not measurably reduced in size as implied in Pennell's key (Serophulariaceae of E. Temp. N. Am. 187 (1935)). Although there is some variation in leaf-size in the large number of specimens in the Gray Herbarium some modification in the key, which allows for no variation, is necessary. CassiNE PERAGUA L.—In 1900 Loesener! discussed in some detail the status of the name Cassine L. and reviewed Linnaeus's disposition of C. Peragua through several of his works. Не concluded that C. Peragua is a nomen nudum. Obviously, he has confused his terms, because the name was perfectly validly published. It is, however, an outstanding example of a nomen ambiguum as well as of a nomen confusum! In the Linnaean Herbarium there are two specimens of Ameri- can shrubs under the name Cassine Peragua. One of them (numbered 380.2) bears the name ‘‘Peragua” in Linnaeus’s hand as well as an inscription by Sir James Edward Smith: ‘Viburnum cassinoides HB. diversum a V. cassia. HL. Viburnum laeviga- tum. Ait. Willd. Sp. Pl. v. 1. 1492". This plant is a vigorous sprout with narrowly elliptic and acuminate leaves, those of the leading shoot abundantly crenate-dentate. It is easily matched by narrow-leaved specimens of Viburnwm cassinoides L. The second specimen (numbered 380.3 and pinned to 380.2), also marked “Peragua” by Linnaeus, is a characterisftic sterile shoot with obovate, remotely dentate leaves of Viburnum obovatum Walt. Fl. Carol. 116 (1788). This identification has 1 Loesener in Engl. Bot. Jahrb. xxviii?. 154, 155 [footnote] (1900); and in Monog. Aquifol. in Nov. Act. Abh. der Kaiserl. Leop.-Carol. Deutschen. Akad. Naturf. Ixxviii. 496 (1901). 170 Rhodora [JULY been many times noted in the literature and there seems no good reason to doubt it; particularly since the Linnaean specimen can be well matched by a small specimen of leaves and flowers in Walter’s Herbarium which agrees well with his description of V. obovatum, although labeled simply “Viburnum”. As Loesener showed, Linnaeus’s own concept of Cassine Peragua was not clear. First mention of the plant by Linnaeus was in his Materia Medica, 50 [genus no. 153] (1749) where, under Cassine of Hort. Cliff. 72 he took up CASSINE vera perquam similis arbuscula, phillyreae foliis antagonistis. Pluk. mant. 40. t. 371. f. 3? Loc: Aethiopia, Carolina. Arbor mansveta Рнлкм: PERAGUAE Folia. r a у „Уу, rd In Species Plantarum, ed. 1, Linnaeus cited his Hort. Cliff. and Materia Medica references among many others, all of which referred to an Old World plant, giving again however, the "Habitat in Aethiopia, Carolina. b". In ed. 2 of Species Plantarum one reference of ed. 1 was removed, another reference was added and the habitat altered to read “Habitat in Aethiopia. b.". Also, in ed. 2 a new Vi- burnum, V. cassinoides was described with one of the citations being “Mill. dict. t. 83. f. 1.". In the Mantissa Altera the reference newly added to Cassine Peragua in Sp. Pl. ed. 2 was transferred to C. capensis; the Miller reference given under Viburnum cassinoides of ed. 2 was placed here under C. Peragua and the habitat revised to read “Habitat in Carolina, Virginia. b.". Also, an additional diagnosis was appended: Folia petiolata, lato-lanceolata, acutiuscula, serrata absque venis elevatis. Petioli dorso decurrentes, unde Ramuli ancipites. Corymbi breves. Obs. caute distinguenda a C. capensi. The new diagnosis as well as the reference to the Miller plate seem to be based on the narrow-leaved form of V. cassinoides to which we are referring specimen 380.2 of Linnaeus. Although specimen 380.3 is Viburnum obovatum, it is clear that Linnaeus did not describe that species as his C. Peragua, but rather V. cassinoides which he had already defined under Viburnum. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 171 Since the taxonomic elements of Linnaeus’s Cassine Peragua can be disposed of by placing them in species of Viburnum under relatively well understood names, it would seem soundest policy to reject the name Cassine Peragua permanently rather than to apply it in still another sense and further increase the confusion. RUDBECKIA LACINIATA L. Sp. Pl. ii. 906 (1753) occurs as four fairly well defined geographic varieties. "True R. laciniata (photograph of the түрЕ before us) is very coarse, up to 3 m. high, with soon reflexed ligules 2-6 cm. long; the greenish- yellow disk at first hemispherical but soon columnar and elon- gated to 1.5-3 em. and becoming 1.3-2.5 ст. broad; achenes 5-6 mm. long. Its lower leaves are petioled and pinnate, with 5-7 incised or 3-lobed leaflets, the median and upper similar but ses- sile, the uppermost often simple. This coarse species extends from Quebec to Montana, south to Nova Scotia, New England, northern Florida, Louisiana, Texas, New Mexico and Arizona, including Р. ampla Nels. in Bull. Torr. Bot. Cl. xxviii. 234 (1901). In the southeastern United States most Rudbeckia laciniata 1s lower, 0.7-1.5 m. high, and more slender, with disks only 0.7-1.3 em. thick and elongating only to 0.7-1.5 em.; the ligules 1.5-3.5 em. long; and achenes 3.5-5 mm. long. This southeastern series consists of three well defined varieties. The commonest, var. DIGITATA (Mill.) Fiori in Fiori & Paoletti, Fl. Anal. Ital. iii. 300 (1904), based on KR. digitata [as digitatis] Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8, no. 6 (1768), is smooth or with the thin leaves merely scabrous, the basal and lower cauline leaves with their pinnae cut into narrowly lanceolate to almost linear segments. This variety occurs from eastern Maryland to Georgia. А photo- graph of the TYPE of R. digitata Mill., secured by the junior author, is thoroughly characteristic of the variety as here interpreted. Var. HUMILIS Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. i*. 262 (1884), is quite as slender and low as var. digitata, with some, usually all, the thin lower leaves ovate and uncleft or but slightly cleft into 1 or 2 pairs of broad undivided segments or leaflets, its upper leaves mostly simple and ovate or ovate-elliptic and petioled. De- scribed as growing on “Alleghany Mountains from Virginia to Georgia and Tennessee, common in open woods, &e., at 4,000 to 6,000 feet”, it has an isolated station on the Peninsula of Virginia: 172 Rhodora [JULY floodplain of wooded swamp, near Mill Creek, 34% miles south- west of Williamsburg, Grimes, no. 4600, in an area where many other montane plants are isolated; and it is also found in the mountains of Kentucky: near Poor Fork Post Office, Harlan Co., Kearney, no. 324. The fourth variety is the cinereous plant of Florida, with leaves densely soft-pilose beneath, described as R. heterophylla Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. ii. 312 (1842). In everything but its dense and short pubescence and firmer leaves it closely resembles var. humilis. Neither Gray, Syn. FL, nor Small gave any characters, except the pubescence, to separate it and we can find none. The tTypr-series has simple cordate-ovate basal leaves with coarse dentation, in outline quite as in most typical var. humilis. Var. heterophylla seems to be confined to Florida, south of the slightly more northern and chiefly montane var. humilis. We are calling it R. LAciNIATA L., var. heterophylla (Torr. & Gray), stat. nov. R. heterophylla Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. ii. 312 (1842). THe ТҮРЕ or RUDBECKIA HIRTA (PLATE 1102).—Rudbeckia hirta L. Sp. Pl. ii. 907 (1753), his species no. 3, rested in part on references to earlier authors, in part upon material actually before Linnaeus while preparing Species Plantarum. The treatment was as follows: 3. RUDBECKIA foliis indivisis spatulato-ovatis, radii hirta petalis emarginatis. Rudbeckia, ramis indivisis unifloris, foliis ovato-lan- ceolatis, hirta. Büttn. cunon. 227.* Rudbeckia foliis lanceolato-ovatis alternis indivisis, petalis radii integris. Gron. virg. 181. Obeliscotheca integrifolia, radio aureo, umboae atro- rubente. Dill. elth. 295. t. 218. f. 285. Chrysanthemum helenii folio, umbone floris gradiuscu- lo prominente. Pluk. alm. 99. t. 242. f. 2. Moris. hist. 3. p. 23. Raj. suppl. 210. Habitat in Virginia, Canada. с. A Two of the older references were to illustrations, but certainly Plukenet's figure is not of the same plant as that well illustrated and described by Dillenius, whose plate and description have been generally accepted as the standard, at least, of true R. hirta. Thus, in the Synoptical Flora, i?. 260 (1884), Gray's first citation for R. hirta read: “Spec. ii. 907 (Dill. Elth. t. 218)". Rhodora Plate 1102 RUDBECKIA HIRTA L.: FIGs. 1 and 2, ryPE, X ca. l4. R. SEROTINA Nutt.: FIG. 2, TYPE or ISOTYPE, X 14; FIG. 4, upper, and FIG. 5, lower surface of leaf, X 10. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 173 Again, T. V. Moore in Pittonia, iv. 174 (1900) wrote: “The typical R. hirta can be identified easily, by reference to the figure and full description given by Dillenius, on which figure and description Linnaeus founded the species". The latter state- ment is, of course, somewhat overdrawn, since Linnaeus cited other descriptions and one other illustration and gave his own brief descriptive phrase. Furthermore, Linnaeus at that time had his own specimen (our FIGs. | and 2) which he clearly marked “Hort ups. [Hortus Upsaliensis] 3 hirta”. This, of course, is the real TYPE of the species, although clearly conspecific with the Dillenian plant, both plants cultivated in Europe and derived from Virginia. This plant is native in open woods and thickets from western Massachusetts to Illinois, south to Georgia and Alabama and was described as R. monticola Small in Torreya, i. 67 (1901) or as R. hirta, var. monticola (Small) Fernald in Ruo- DORA, xxxix. 457 (1937). The Linnaean type is clearly matched by many specimens, such as Fernald & Long, no. S895 from rich woods south of Williamsburg, Virginia. At first glance Linnaeus's type of Rudbeckia hirta suggests that he had a pied or parti-colored form such as is so frequent but rarely twice alike in the narrow-leaved plant which commonly though erroneously passes as R. hirta but which, originating in the Great Plains area of North America, has spread (long after the days of Linnaeus) as a field-weed generally eastward to New- foundland and the Atlantic states. Close examination, however, shows that the dark areas, some of them not at the bases of ligules, are really crushed disk-florets which, owing to too much pressure on the disk, have assumed the false appearance of dark bases of golden ligules! The common field-weed which has crossed the continent from the Great Plains, the plant with narrowly oblanceolate basal leaves and oblanceolate to lance-linear cauline leaves, which was erroneously treated and illustrated by the senior author as true Rudbeckia hirta in Кнорова, 1. е. pl. 487, fig. 4 (1937), the weedy plant with somewhat bulbous-based trichomes, seems first to have been described as R. serotina by Nuttall in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. vii. 80 (1834), our PLATE 1102, Fics. 3-5. Gray, in the Synoptical Flora, identified Nuttall's western plant, “at least the cult. plant described, fide herb. Acad. Philad." 174 Rhodora [JULY with the wide-ranging plant he then called R. hirta, with the blanket-range, “Saskatchewan and W. Canada to Florida, Texas and Colorado: naturalized in grass-fields in Eastern States”. This originally western narrow-leaved plant is also R. flava T. V. Moore, 1. с. 179 (1900), an isotype from Wyoming well displaying RUDBECKIA HIRTA (left) and R. SEROTINA (right): median cauline leaf, X 1; flower and pale, X ca. 10. the characteristic bulbous-based trichomes. This now essen- tially transcontinental weed is, then, R. вЕкотїхА Nuttall. Originating on the Great Plains or the foothills of the eastern Rocky Mountains, the plant obviously has had a wholly different history from the indigenous and broader-leaved plant of the eastern woodlands and thickets. Although the western species has now become thoroughly naturalized and is an aggressive 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 175 weed of fields, clearings and even borders of woodland near town, eastward to Newfoundland and the Atlantic coast of the United States, it differs from true Rudbeckia hirta in its consis- tently narrower leaves which are entire or only slightly crenate, whereas the lower and median leaves of R. hirta are broader and coarsely toothed (usually serrate); and the pales, disk- corollas and styles show striking differences, as brought out in the text-figures, p. 174, prepared for us by Mrs. Chester Cross (Shirley Gale). R. serotina seems better treated as a species than as a series of varieties of true R. hirta. Incidentally, genuine R. hirta has the conservatism of the old Appalachian forest-flora, while R. serotina, originating in a much more youthful cam- pestrian region and with a strongly aggressive and pioneering habit, has shown a very great tendency to sport, especially in the form, size and color of its ligules, since it moved into the disturbed and cultivated areas to the east of its original home. In other words, in its newly adopted eastern area it is in a wholly unstable and aggressive stage of evolution, while true R. hirta is quite stabilized. The nomenclature of R. serotina and its | principal variations is as follows: RUDBECKIA SEROTINA Nutt. in Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. vii. 80 (1834). R. flava T. V. Moore in Pittonia, iv. 179 (1900). R. hirta sensu Am. auth. in large part and especially Fernald in Кнорока, xxxix. 458 (1937). Var. lanceolata (Bisch.) stat. nov. R. lanceolata Bisch., Del. Sem. Hort. Heidelb. 4 (1848); ex Walp. Ann. ii. 855 (1852). Var. sericea (T. V. Moore), comb. nov. R. sericea T. V. Moore, І. с. 178 (1900). R. hirta L., var. sericea (T. V. Moore) Fern., l. c. 457, t. 487, fig. 3 (1937). Var. corymbifera (Fern.), comb. nov. R. hirta L., var. corymbifera Vern. l. c. t. 487, figs. 1 and 2 (1937). Among the innumerable sports of Rudbeckia serotina are the following: Forma tubuliformis (Burnham), stat. nov. R. hirta, var. tubuliformis [as tubuliforme] Burnham in Am. Botanist, xx. 22 (1914). Forma rubra (Clute), stat. nov. R. hirta, var. rubra Clute in Am. Botanist, xix. 134 (1913). Forma pulcherrima (Farwell), stat. nov. R. hirta, var. pulcherrima Farwell in Mich. Acad. Sci. Rep. vi. 209 (1904). 176 Rhodora [JULY Forma annulata (Clute), stat. nov. R. hirta, var. annulata Clute, 1. с. (1918). Forma viridiflora (Burnham), comb. nov. R. hirta, f. viridi- flora Burnham, op. cit. xxii. 151 (1916). Forma homochroma (Steyerm.), comb. nov. R. hirta, f. homochroma Steyerm. in Rnopona xl. 179 (1938). Forma pleniflora (Moldenke), comb. nov. R. hirta, f. pleni- flora Moldenke in Phytologia, ii. 320 (1947). Many other forms doubtless occur. In this connection the statement from Clute is illuminating: ‘The original plant, with a blotch of red at the base of each ray-flower, is known as Rud- beckia hirta pulcherrima. Another form... is R. h. rubra. Still others . . . R. h. annulata . . . R. h. tubuliforme . . . and R. h. flavescens . . . The longer one works with Rudbeckia hirta, the clearer it becomes that the botanical species consists of a large number of elementary forms."—Clute in Am. Botanist, xxx. 159 (1924). CHONDRILLA NUDICAULIS L. Mant. Alt. 278 (1771). "This species is cited by Linnaeus as having its “Habitat in America septentrionali; ad pyramides aegypti". The plant is, as earlier recognized, Lannaea nudicaulis (L.) Hook. f. of Mediterranean regions and not known in America. (To be continued) SIX ADDITIONS TO THE ADVENTITIOUS FLORA OF QUEBEC MARCEL RAYMOND AND JAMES KUCYNIAK The purpose of the present communication is to furnish fuller detail on five introduced species which the authors are responsible for inclusion in Prof. Ernest RouLrau’s recently published “Supplément a la Flore laurentienne" (64 pp., Institut Botanique, Université de Montréal. 1947). They are Bromus tectorum L., Cynosurus cristatus L., Alliaria officinalis Andrz., Epilobium hir- sutum L. and Thladiantha dubia Bunge. Mention of the occur- rence of a sixth, Centaurea montana L., is made here for the first time. In June 1945, the senior author observed a number of patches of Bromus TECTORUM L., a European grass of common occur- 1948 Raymond and Kucyniak,—The Flora of Quebec [1 rence in New England, growing alongside the Canadian Pacific Railroad line running through St. Jean (St. Jean Co.). Some time later, Frére RoLLAND-GERMAIN located another stand at Laval des Rapides (Laval Co.), near Montreal. The authors now report a third station found, in August 1945, at St. Joseph de la Rive, in distant Charlevoix County, where the brome- grass throve as a railroad-side weed. With as many stations to its eredit to date, Promus tectorum L. may well be included with the flora adventitious to Quebec. CYNOSURUS CRISTATUS L., belonging to the same family, pro- vides still another addition. To the authors’ knowledge no record exists at present reporting the appearance of the dog’s- tail grass in Quebec. However, in the Marie-Victorin Her- barium, there is, and has been for a number of years now, a specimen collected by Marir-Vicrorin & al. at Baie de Gaspé (Gaspé Co.), in 1923. Last summer, interest in its occurrence in the province was revived when it was discovered, during the recent foray of the Botanical Society of America in August, growing in marked abundance in a wet pasture at Duchesnay (Portneuf Co.). 'The odd-looking grass with its dense, stiff, spikelike panicles proved somewhat of a puzzle to a number of those seeing it for the first time before Dr. Jason SwaALLEN recognized it on sight. Naturalized from the Old World a number of years ago, its present range of distribution in North America extends from Newfoundland, Quebec and Nova Scotia to Michigan, southward to Virginia, and westward to Oregon and Washington. ALLIARIA OFFICINALIS Andrz., the third introduction, on the other hand, belongs to an altogether different family. In an old record (Ott. Nat. 12: 163. 1898), James M. Macoun states that the crucifer, “Not before recorded from the province of Quebec", was found at the Cove, Quebec city, by Mrs. Bropir. The senior author first came across the species growing in Iberville (Iberville Co.) and imparted the information to Bernard BoiviN who incorporated it in a report published some time ago (Con- trib. Inst. Bot. Univ. de Montréal 44: 37-38. 1942). The plants have increased in number since the colony was first noted and have now invaded an adjoining waste field and a neglected garden. А new station was descried early last summer by Dr. 178 Rhodora [JULY Risto Тоомікоѕкі, of Finland, and the junior author of the present note. Plants of the officinal species of Alliaria bordered the sidewalk in the east end of Notre Dame street, within close proximity of the Montreal Harbor grain-elevators. Though some authors, notably W. С. Muenscher (*Weeds", p. 344, 1936), have gone as far as to include Quebec in the Ameri- can range of EPILOBIUM HIRSUTUM L., no specimen of the Euro- pean willow-herb collected in the province was known to exist in the more important Canadian herbaria prior to 1940. In carrying out botanical investigations along the upper St. Law- rence river, to estimate to what extent the construction of a new dam would affect existing beach-lines, MARIE-VICTORIN & al., first came across the tall, hirsute species of Epilobium, new to their experience in the field. Other large clumps were observed, in 1944, growing at а new station, Riviére Beaudette (Soulanges Co.), which lies on the opposite shore in the same upper St. Lawrence river district. A year later, the authors found a number of plants about a mile or so within the western limits of the city of Montreal. The station is near the Turcot stop on the Montreal Tramways Company line “Lachine No. 91", in the lowlands bordering the stream marking the bed and last vestige of the St. Pierre river of local historical prominence. It seems probable that the plant, first introduced in the region of Lake Ontario, has come into Quebec along the route of migration followed by several native plants, such as Allium canadense and Justicia americana to name but two, via the shores of the St. Lawrence river. Legal surveys of the type mentioned above, have recently given local botanists the opportunity to scrutinize more carefully a region which has always been looked upon as warranting little interest and, consequently, left quite neglected. Some justifica- tion for the former lack of enthusiasm may be found in noting that the intensive work carried out so far in the territory has yielded but little: an extra-estuarine locality for SCIRPUS SMITHII Gray, the western ASTER ANGUsTUS (Lindl.) T. & G. with a rather “indigenous” look to it, and the first record in America for ALISMA GRAMINEUM Gmelin ssp. WAHLENBERGIL Holmberg ар. 1948] Raymond and Kucyniak,—The Flora of Quebec 179 Samuelsson (Svensk Bot. Tidskr. 16: 41. 1922)!, which according to SAMUELSSON’, is known only from “Suecia media et in Fennia”. Like Butomus umbellatus L., typical Alisma gramineum Gmelin is a pesky weed around Montreal. It, too, is now progressively invading the Richelieu river valley. Another native of Europe, CENTAUREA MONTANA L., comes within the scope of this note. In July 1947, it was found grow- ing in Vaudreuil (Vaudreuil Co.), in a well preserved maplewood far removed from any garden-site. Giving the discovery closer attention, the authors, searching through herbarium material, have turned up an earlier and hitherto unreported collection from the island of Orleans made by F. Міснет,, in 1933. The above stations permit listing this composite with entire, decurrent leaves as an additional item to Quebec’s subspontaneous flora. The mountain bluet, as it is popularly called, is frequently cultivated in one or more of its numerous color-forms in flower gardens. The final addition to report upon in this note is an Asiatic member of the Cucurbitaceae: THLADIANTHA DUBIA Bunge. Producing tubers, bearing heart-shaped leaves uniformly clothed with a rather stiff pubescence, and yellow campanulate unisexual flowers, for features more or less as salient as those listed above, the plant has suscitated marked interest among taxonomists since BUNGE first discovered it in waste places in the vicinity of Peking (Enum. Plant. Chin. Bor. 29. 1833). Its culture in the Jardin des Plantes de Paris dates to almost a century ago. With living plants at hand, Ch. Naupin (Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Série IV. 12: 150. 1859) redeseribed and ably illus- trated the species, while W. Н. Hooker later contributed a fine colored plate which accompanies his lengthy description in Curtis’s Botanical Magazine (XC. Tab. 5469. 1864). The climber is not often grown by amateur gardeners according to L. Н. BarLEv (Hortus Second. 728. 1941), but, when planted, has shown a marked tendency to escape from cultivation. 1 Alisma gramineum Gmelin var. Wahlenbergii (Holmberg Raymond & Kucyniak, stat. nov.—Alisma gramineum Gmel. ssp. Wahlenbergii Holmberg ap. Samuelsson, Svensk Bot. Tidskr. 16: 41. 1922; Skandinaviens Flora Н, I: 110. 1922; Bot. Notis. 1922, p. 207; Ark. for Bot. Band 24А. (N: О 7): 45-46. Taf. 6. 1932; A. Plantago 8. graminifolia Wahlenberg, Flora Upsaliensis. 122. 1820 et auct. suec. (non cet.). 2? SAMUELSSON, G., Die Arten der Gattung Alisma L. Arkiv. for Botanik. Band 24А. (N:O 7):1-46. Mit 6 Tafeln. 1932. 180. Rhodora [JULY A member of the Garden staff, Mr. Wilfrid Mr.ocue, found the cucurbit in a vacant lot in Lachine, and brought it to the authors’ attention who, in turn, established its identity. Three tubers were unearthed and transplanted to the Montreal Botani- cal Garden. In an inauspicious locality bordering a nursery- fence, the plants have fared well in spite of regular hoeing be- tween rows and mechanical weeding by means of the “rototiller’’. To find Thladiantha dubia thriving as a garden escape in a locality with winters as rigorous as ours tends to show that the species is hardier than most authors have so far assumed it to be. MONTREAL BOTANICAL GARDEN Volume 49, no. 594, consisting of pages 148-148 and one portrait, was issued 16 June 1948. [000га JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. August, 1948, No. 596. CONTENTS: Studies of American Types in British Herbaria. Part III. A Few of Philip Miller's Species; Part IV. Some Species of Thomas Walter. M. L. Fernald and Bernice Q. Schubert. ... 181 Podostemum, Hippuris and Hottonia in New Hampshire. А. R. Hodgdon and Stanley B. Krochmal. ................... 209 A Model Flora of Nova Scotia (Review). M.L.F............ 211 The Name Taraxacum officinale. M. L. Fernald. ............. 216 The New England Botanical Club, Jne. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA.—aA monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical M è Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879.. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. I. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp., 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. ‘The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora Plate 1103 P d M №4 STELLARIA UNIFLORA Walt.; FIG. 1, TYPE, X 14; FIG. 2, portion of TYPE, X 2; FIG. 3, ARENARIA BREVIFOLIA Nutt., plant, X 1, from Pine Mountain, Georgia, Perry & Myers in Pl. Exsiec. Gray., no. 546, not A. uniflora Luce (1823). TRbooora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. August, 1948. No. 596 STUDIES OF AMERICAN TYPES IN BRITISH HERBARIA M. L. FERNALD AND BERNICE G. SCHUBERT (Continued from page 176) Part III. А Few or PHILIP MILLER’S SPECIES Pinus PALUSTRIS Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8, no. 14 (1768).— Miller's description of Pinus palustris was very brief and rather inconclusive: 14. Pinus (Palustris) foliis ternis longissimis. Pine-tree with the longest leaves growing by threes out of each sheath. Pinus Americana palustris trifolia, foliis longissimis. Du Hamel. Three-leaved, Marsh, American Pine with the longest leaves. Then, after discussing at length the propagation of pines, Miller continued: The fourteenth sort grows naturally on swamps in many parts of North America, where I have been informed they grow to the height of twenty-five or thirty feet. Their leaves are a foot or more in length, growing in tufts at the end of the branches, so have a singular appearance, but I have not heard the wood was of any use but for fuel; and there are few places here where these plants do well, for in very severe frosts their leading shoots are often killed, and in dry ground they will not thrive; so that unless the soil is adapted for them, it is to little purpose planting them. Miller's Pinus palustris followed five other North American species, three of them with 3-leaved fascicles: P. rigida (leaves «43'-5' long", Sargent, Man.); P. Taeda (leaves '*6'-9' long", Sargent) and P. echinata (leaves ''3'-5' long", Sargent) and 182 Rhodora [AUGUST "longissimis" was evidently in comparison with these, unless borrowed from Du Hamel, although Miller's supplementary account of “leaves . . . a foot or more in length" was perhaps hearsay but must be taken into account. Du Hamel, quoted by Miller, had simply 18. PINUS Americana palustris trifolia, foliis longissimis. Pin de marais à trois feuilles trés-longues.! Du Hamel had life-size plates of six species (not including his no. 18), these with leaves from 1-5 inches long. His ''longis- simis", then, meant more than 5 inches.. Although it is somewhat customary to treat as Pinus palustris Mill. the Lona-Lear or GkonaGrA Prine, Michaux filius, who surely knew our commoner trees, refused to take it up and named Long-leaf Pine P. australis Michx. f. Hist. Arb. Am. 1. 64, pl. 6 (1810). It certainly is most doubtful if Miller (or Du Hamel before him) had Pinus australis growing in England or France. This tree is an inhabitant of sandy barrens or dry to dryish pine-barren or, extending locally back to the outer Pied- mont, of dry crests or slopes of granitic or other siliceous rock: “C’est à peu de distance de Norfolk, dans la basse Virginie, ot commencent les landes americanes, Pine Barrens, que le Pinus australis commence aussi à se montrer" (Michx. f., 1. с. 65). “The name originally imposed on this species is unfortunate, as it produces a false impression, and has been the source of error to for- eigners, if not to our own countrymen. If an inhabitant of the Southern States, ignorant of Botany, should be interrogated respecting the P. Palustris or Swamp Pine, he would instantly revert to the P. Taeda, and his answers would be drawn from that species. “Grows in dry sandy soils, where the sub-soil however, though 2 or 3 feet below the surface is usually of clay, covering nearly all of the ridges along the coast of Carolina and Georgia within 120 miles of the ocean. Wherever the land becomes moist or fertile, the P. Taeda, and sometimes the Р. Rigida encroach upon it."—Elliott, Sk. п. 637, 638 (1824). “Occupying all the highest and driest sandy lands" of eastern North Carolina (Pinchot & Ashe, Timber Trees and Forests of North Carolina, 131 (1897)); ete., ete. Everyone who knows the Long-leaf Pine in its native soil will agree with К. A. Michaux and Elliott that the specific epithet palustris as applied to it is wholly misleading. "They will also 1 Du Hamel, Traité des Arbres, ii. 126 (1755). Rhodora Plate 1104 STELLARIA PALUDICOLA Fernald & Schubert: ria. 1, TYPE, X 15, from Myrtle Beach, Horry Co., South Carolina, Weatherby & Griscom, no. 16,523; ric. 2, flower, 1, from North Carolina, M. А. Curtis. Mistakenly supposed to be S. uniflora Walt. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 183 agree that there are 3-leaved pines in the South which delight in savannas, marshes or wet shores: such characteristic trees as Loblolly or Swamp Pine, P. Taeda L., its tendency (although often enough in old fields and dry soils) to grow in swamps noted (above) by Elliott and emphasized by Pinchot & Ashe (р. 125) when they wrote: “The original growth is on moist deep soil, but the second growth has sprung up largely in old fields", ete., whence the common name Old-field Pine. In other words, P. Taeda, one of the most aggressive and weedy pines of the South, will grow in either dry or wet habitats and many labels before us bear such data as the following: “peaty pineland’’, "light, moist soil"; “light, mostly damp soil" ; “old fields (also in swamps)”; “moist or wet woods". Another 3-leaved pine of wet or marshy habitats is Pond Pine, Muss Pine or Swamp Pine, P. serotina Michx., Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 205 (1803), deseribed by the elder Michaux as growing “їп humidis . . . cupressetis’’ habitats restated in Elliott's “Grows around ponds and in damp soils"; and well stated by Pinchot & Ashe's *It occurs on low peaty or wet sandy soils of the worst quality". A third southern pine which often has three leaves and to which Small applies the name Р. palustris, is the very southern Slash or Swamp Pine, which was first recognized by Elliott as P. Taeda, var. hetero- phylla Ell., Sk. ii. 636, growing “Along the marshes near the mouths of the fresh-water rivers (at least in Georgia)". This was renamed P. Elliottii Engelm. in Sargent, Cat. Forest Trees, 74 (1880) and in Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis, iv. 186, t. 1-3 (1880). In his Report on Forests N. Am. 202 (1884) Sargent reduced this species to P. cubensis Griseb., a West Indian species which, passing up the Florida Keys to peninsular Florida, reaches its northern limit in marshes of southeastern South Carolina. То be sure, Small maintains the West Indian tree which reaches the Keys as distinct from P. Elliottii, to which he applies the name Р. palustris. The separation of the two seems rather doubtful but, even so, P. Elliottii (Small's P. palustris) is assigned by Small to “Shallow ponds, swamps and low grounds . . . thriving under the influence of either salt or fresh water." Sargent’s statement in the Silva, xi. 158, is very different: calling it P. heterophylla (EIl) Sudworth, Sargent said: “mingled with the Long-leaved and Loblolly Pines in the open forests . . . As a timber-tree the 184 Rhodora [AuGUST Slash Pine, which produces straight sound spars of large dimen- sions, is little inferior to the Long-leaved Pine, the wood of the two trees being usually manufactured and sold indiscriminately. It is heavy, exceedingly hard, very strong, tough, durable... ..”’ That is not a very good match for Miller's “I have not heard the wood was of any use but for fuel; . . . and in dry ground they will not thrive". Here, then, are species for which the name P. palustris or “Marsh Pine" of Miller or “Pin de marais" of Du Hamel would be perfectly appropriate; for surely these names, аз F. A. Michaux and Elliott clearly stated, are not appropriate for Long-leaf Pine. As emphasized, Miller, who, as shown by his second paragraph, was quoting vaguely what “I have been informed" by those who had seen trees “growing naturally on swamps in many parts of North America", had “not heard the wood was of any use but for fuel". Surely such а characterization of the wood 18 not applicable to that of Long-leaf Pine, “The most valuable of the Pitch Pines and one of the most important timber-trees of North America, . . . produces heavy, exceedingly hard very strong tough coarse-grained durable wood" (Sargent, Silva, xi. 153 (1897)); nor is it applicable to P. Elliottii, heterophylla or cu- bensis, as noted above. But P. Taeda, “introduced into Europe before 1713” (Sargent, 1. с. 114), has long been called Loblolly Pine, from loblolly, a loutish, foolish or useless person, and, although, when grown on dry upland now an important wood in eastern Virginia, it has the timber thus described by Sargent (1. с. 113): “A large part of the trees of original growth and the oldest and best matured second-growth trees now produce coarse-grained wood, nearly one half the diameter of the trunk being sapwood, while the wood of trees which have grown rapidly on abandoned fields and now supply an important part of the timber cut on the south Atlantic coast, whence it is shipped in large quantities to the north, is very coarse-grained and still more largely composed of sapwood.” F. A. Michaux wrote (p. 99): “Jai toujours vu ауес surprise que des arbres de 7 décimétres (30 pouces) de diamétre, à 1 métre (3 pieds) de terre, avoient 5 à 6 décimétres (20 à 24 pouces) d'aubier, et je n'ai jamais trouvé dans des individus d'environ 3 décimétres (un pied) de grosseur, et de 10 à 11 métres (30 à 35 pieds) de haut, plus de 3 centimétres (un pouce) de 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 185 coeur ou de vrai bois: aussi les couches concentriques sont-elles extréme- ment espacées dans ce Pin, et c'est ce qui explique la grande rapidité avec laquelle il croit, surtout dans les Etats méridionaux, où j'ai le plus souvent fait cette observation. Еп Virginie où il vient dans des terreins plus secs, et par conséquent moins rapidement, il n'a pas autant d'au- bier, et son bois est d'une contexture plus compacte." Elliott (p. 636) summarized his account: “but the heart or real wood is much smaller in proportion to its diameter, and even in its best state it is very inferior". So, even though upland (rather than marsh or lowland) stands of P. Taeda, especially in Virginia, are now sources of valued timber, the original swamp- grown trees could well have merited Miller's *I have not heard the wood was of any use but for fuel". While she was in England the junior author was not able to get at any of Miller's material of Pinus palustris. However, Dr. George Taylor has obligingly hunted for this material and, though he found no indication that there ever was an actual type of Miller's, he writes: “At Tring. . . . I... found an old speci- men from Dr. Collinson's Garden at Millhill which it is just possible Miller saw. The sheet is inscribed on the back ‘Hort. Drs’ Collinson ad Millhil'. The sheet is written up 'Pinus palustris Swamp Pine' in an old hand which, unfortunately, is now hardly legible. I have compared the writing with that of Philip Miller and, though there are certain minor discrepancies, it is possible that he may have put the identification on the sheet. I have mounted two spur shoots from this specimen and send them herewith.” These fascicles and their sheaths, 8 to 814 inches long (not “a foot or more in length", as stated by Miller), are readily matched by those of Pinus Taeda but not by those of the Long- leaf Pine; they could be from Pond Pine, P. serotina Michx., but not so well from P. cubensis. That the only possibly authentic material of P. palustris, bearing that name in a hand only doubtfully Miller's, was from a cultivated specimen of P. Taeda L. seems fairly apparent, that species in its primitive habitat (before it became Old-field Pine) well justifying the name P. palustris. It is not without significance that Bean, in his remarkably detailed Trees and Shrubs Hardy in the British Isles, ii. 170 (1914), should have very definitely excluded from consideration some species *because their garden value is nil". 186 Rhodora [AvGUsT These include “Р. rPALvsTRIS Miller (P. australis, Michaux) . . . too tender to succeed well in our climate" and P. Taeda which “сап only be grown in the mildest parts of our islands". If Miller's very mixed and indefinite account, based largely on hearsay, stood for a definite species it probably did not include Long-leaf Pine, “too tender to succeed well", and there is no evidence (at least in Bean's synopsis) that the more southern and largely tropical P. cubensis was ever grown in England. It seems right, therefore, to follow F. A. Michaux, Loudon, Spach, Endlicher, Lindley & Gordon, Dietrich, Chapman, M. A. Curtis, Parlatore, Engelmann, Small and others in calling Long- leaf Pine PrNvs AvsTRALIS Michx. f. That name is absolutely definite; P. palustris hopelessly indefinite.! CLEMATIS CANADENSIS Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8, no. 5 (1768) is represented by characteristic foliage-material and a flowering spray of C. virginiana L. (1753). Miller stated that *'the seeds do not ripen in England, unless the season is very warm. There is little beauty in this sort." The fact that his material was staminate may account for the “little beauty” of his plant. FRAXINUS CAROLINIANA Mill. Dict. ed. 8, no. 6 (1768) was rather vaguely described by Miller: 6. Fraxinus (Caroliniana) integerrimis petiolis terretibus fructu latiore. Prod. Leyd. 533. Ash-tree with entire leaves and taper foot- stalks. Fraxinus Caroliniana, latiore fructu. Rand. Cat. H. Chels. Carolina Ash with a broad fruit. Miller also stated: The sixth sort was raised from seeds which were sent from Carolina in the year 1724, by Mr. Catesby. The leaves of this sort hath seldom more than three pair of lobes, the lower being the least, and the upper the largest; these are about five inches long and two broad, of a light green colour, and slightly sawed on their edges; the foot-stalk, or rather the midrib, of the leaves is taper, and has short downy hairs; the seeds are broader than those of the common Ash, and are of a very light colour. As this sort hath not yet produced seeds in England, it is propagated by grafting it upon the common Ash. Florae Leydensis Prodromus by Royen (1740), cited by Miller, has simply the two citations later given by Linnaeus for his mixed F. americana (see p. 168). In other words, the latter references were to two quite different species, since the Gronovian account was based upon a specimen of conventional F. americana 18ince this discussion went into type Dr. E. L. Little, in Phytologia, ii. 457, 458, July, 1948, has urged the retention of the name Pinus palustris in place of P. australis. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 187 L. (1753), while the Catesby plate is of the species generally interpreted as F. caroliniana. In the herbarium of the British Museum of Natural History there is a sheet which has sometimes been taken to be the type of F. caroliniana (our neg. 110) and which reflects the confusion which has prevailed from the first; for this specimen, bearing the identification, apparently in Miller's hand, F. caroliniana, is a characteristic fruiting branch of F. pennsylvanica Marsh. In view of Miller's statement that his F. caroliniana had not fruited in England this specimen with abundant fruit can hardly be taken as the type of Miller's species! Incidentally, Miller's emphasis on the broad fruit is certainly not applicable to the unusually slender-based and narrow samaras of F. pennsylvanica. Furthermore, when Lamarck described his F. pubescens Lam. Encycl. ii. 548 (1786) he gave a detailed description of the flowers, F. pubescens being identical with F. pennsylvanica. Even though an authentic specimen of Miller’s species may yet be found, the facts, that the seeds were sent by Catesby and the fruit described as broad, are fair justification for the general inter- pretation of Miller’s species, which for want of a known type is exemplified in the Catesby plate. The inclusive Ё. caroliniana of the southern Coastal Plain and Cuba is extremely variable, especially in outline of leaflets, degree of pubescence and shape of samara, and upon these characters many species and varieties have been proposed. A study of the assembled material in the Gray Herbarium and that of the Arnold Arboretum indicates that the species may appropriately be treated as consisting of its primary element and two fairly marked geographical varieties, but that otherwise the minor variations, such as three-winged fruits and fluctuating pubes- cence, are not of such strong character. In all three varieties glabrous and pubescent foliage occur and in the commonest and typical variety the fruits may be flat and two-winged, concave and spoon-shaped or definitely three-winged. In regard to this point the late M. A. Curtis, who certainly knew the trees of North Carolina, wrote when defining his two varieties of Frazinus platicarpa Michx. (which is identical with F. caroliniana): “These varieties, like the more common form, frequently have the samaras three winged". In the material with three-winged 188 Rhodora [AUGUST samaras two-winged fruits often occur in the same inflorescence, while on those which bear concave and spoon-shaped fruits flat samaras are often found. These variations are in the nature of sports rather than true varieties or forms. Briefly summarized the three seemingly significant varieties are: Е. CAROLINIANA (typical).—Petioles and rachis glabrous; lower leaflet-surface glabrous or only sparsely pilose along nerves; fruit broadly oblong-oblanceolate to rhombic or sub- elliptic, either obtuse or acutish, 1-2 em. broad, 2.5-4.5 cm. long.—Swamps, low woods and pond-margins, Florida to eastern Texas, north on Coastal Plain to southeastern Virginia and Arkansas.—F. caroliniana Miller, Gard. Dict., ed. 8, no. 6 (1768). F. americana sensu Marsh. Arbust. Am. 50 (1785), not L. (1753). F. excelsior sensu Walt. Fl. Carol. 254 (1788), not L. (1753). F. platicarpa Michx., Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 256 (1803); Michx. f. Hist. Arb. Am. iii. 128, t. xiii (1813). F. triptera Nutt. Gen. ii. 232 (1818) and Am. Sylva, iii. 62, t. C [large fruit at left] (1849). Samarpses triptera (Nutt.) Raf. New Flora, iii. 93 (1838). Fraxinus americana L., var. caroliniana (Mill. D. J. Browne, Trees of Am. 398 (1846). F. americana, var. triptera (Nutt.) D. J. Browne, 1. c. 399. Е. nigra Marsh., subsp. caroliniana (Mill.) Wesmael in Bull. Soc. Bot. Belg. xxxi. 113 (1892). F. caroliniana Mill, var. platicarpa (Michx.) Lingelsh. їп Engl., Bot. Jahrb. xl. 221 (1907). Forma pubescens (M. A. Curtis), stat. nov.—Petioles, rachis and lower surface of leaflets tomentose.— Occasional with the tree with glabrous leaflets.—F. platicarpa Michx., 6. pubescens M. A. Curtis in Am. Journ. Sci. ser. 2, vii. 408 (1849), ISOTYPE in Gray Herb. F. Rehderiana Lingelsh. in Engl., Pflanzenr. iv, 42 (1920), rsorvrk in Herb. Arn. Arb. F. caroliniana MilL, var. Rehderiana (Lingelsh.) Sarg. in Journ. Arn. Arb. ii. 173 (1921). F. caroliniana Mill., var. pubescens (M. A. Curtis) Fern. in Ruopona, xxxix. 442 (1937). Var. oblanceolata (M. A. Curtis), comb. nov.—Foliage glab- rous or essentially so; samaras oblanceolate, either obtuse or acute, 1-1.3 em. broad, 3.5-5.5 сш. long.—Less common, Florida to southeastern Virginia.—F. platicarpa Michx., y. oblanceolata M. A. Curtis in Am. Journ. Sci. ser. 2, vii. 408 (1849), Іѕ0тҮРЕ in Gray Herb. F. pauciflora Nutt. Am. Sylva, iii. 61, t. C [excl. 3-winged samara] (1849). F. platicarpa Michx., var. floridana Wenzig in Engl, Bot. Jahrb. iv. 185 (1883), ІѕотүРЕ in Herb. Arn. Arb. F. Nuttallii Buckley in Proc. Phil. Acad. 444 (1860). F. hybrida Lingelsh. in Engl., Bot. Jahrb. xl. 220 (1907), portion of түрЕ in Herb. Arn. Arb. Curtis's description of his F. platicarpa, ү. oblanceolata read 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 189 “Glabrous. Samaras oblanceolate” and he stated that he had received it from the region of Santee Canal, sent by Ravenel. Such a sheet from Santee Canal is in Ravenel’s herbarium at Converse College and a fragment from it is in the Gray Her- barium. Its fruit is like that illustrated by Nuttall for his F. pauciflora and by Lingelsheim for his F. hybrida. The following are characteristic northern specimens: VIR- GINIA: swamp bordering West Neck Creek, west of Pungo, Princess Anne County, Randolph & Randolph, no. 500; siliceous and argillaecous alluvium bordering cypress-swamp, bottomland of Nottoway River, above Cypress Bridge, Southampton County, Fernald & Long, no. 6335; wooded bottomland on Fontaine Creek southeast of Taylor's Millpond, Greensville County, Fernald & Long, no. 10,391. Var. OBLANCEOLATA, forma hypomalaca, f. nov., foliolis subtus tomentosis.—Local.— The following specimens have been examined: VIRGINIA: cypress-swamp, wooded bottomland, Fontaine Creek, southwest of Haley's Bridge, Greensville County, June 9, 1946, Fernald & Moore, no. 15,139 (ТҮРЕ in Herb. Gray.; isorvprE in Herb. Phil. Acad.). SOUTH CAROLINA: Santee River-swamp, H. W. Ravenel. Louisiana: without further locality, //ale (fruit 3-winged). Var. CUBENSIS (Griseb.) Lingelsh.—Leaflets glabrous or sparsely pilose beneath; samaras narrowly oblanceolate, 5-9 mm. broad, 3-5 em. long.— Cuba and Florida and presumably farther north.—F. cubensis Griseb. Cat. Pl. Cub. 170 (1866). F. caroliniana Mill., var. 8. cubensis (Griseb.) Lingelsh. in Engl., Bot. Jahrb. xl. 221 (1907). Р. viridis Michx., var. Berlandierana sensu Wright et Sauvalle, Fl. Cub. 88 (1873), not var. Ber- landieriana Torr. (1859). Although Grisebach originally cited no number, Wright and Sauvalle, citing Fraxinus cubensis as a synonym of F. viridis, var. Berlandierana, gave only one number, Wright, no. 3624. The specimen of this number in the Gray Herbarium has leaflets pilose on the nerves beneath, while all other material from Cuba and from Florida has quite glabrous leaflets. Var. CUBENSIS, forma lasiophylla, f. nov., ramulis petiolis rhachibus et paginis inferioribus foliolorum dense tomentosis.— VIRGINIA: upper border of sandy and peaty shore of Darden's Pond, north of Courtland, Southampton County, September 15 and 16, 1946, Fernald, Long & Clement, no. 15,835 (TYPE in Herb. Gray.; risoryrE in Herb. Phil. Acad.). At Darden's Pond var. cubensis, forma lasiophylla is far re- 190 Rhodora [AUGUST moved geographically from typical glabrous or subglabrous var. cubensis which, in the two herbaria studied, is represented only from Cuba and very slightly from Florida. The weakness of these herbaria in material from the Coastal Plain of Georgia and the Carolinas may account for its seeming absence from the inter- mediate broad belt. Forma lasiophylla differs from typical var. cubensis only in the dense pubescence, a character which in the two commoner varieties seems only formal. PRUNELLA CAROLINIANA Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8, no. 6 (1768), described "foliis lanceolatis integerrimis . . . petiolatis" ete., is represented by a characteristic specimen of P. vulgaris L., var. lanceolata (Barton) Fernald in Rnopona, xv. 183 (1913). Hul- tén treats this plant as a subspecies; should it be treated as a species, Miller's binomial would be the proper name. P. Nova- ANGLIA Mill. l. c., no. 7, is characteristic introduced P. vulgaris L. His P. CANADENSIS, l. c. no. 4, is surely not a Prunella. The photograph of a very distinctive species which accords with Miller's description of a plant which “grows naturally in North America" has yet to be matched. EvuPATORIUM RAMOSUM Miller, Gard. Dict. ed. 8, no. 13 (1768), which “grows naturally in Maryland", is represented by a very characteristic specimen of E. altissimum L. Sp. Pl. ii. 837 (1753). Since Gray (Syn. ЕІ.) does not mention Miller's species and Index Kewensis maintains it as а kept-up species, its identity seems not previously to have been established. The photograph shows, not only the habit and inflorescence, but the obtuse linear-oblong phyllaries of E. altissimum. HELIANTHUS RAMOSISSIMUS Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8, no. 8 (1768) is represented by a freely branched specimen of H. decapetalus L. (1753). Miller's "foliis lanceolatis" for this and for his no. 7, H. rRACHELIFOLIUS would have been more descrip- tive of his types if changed to lanceolato-ovatis. Part IV. Some ӨРЕСТЕ8 or THoMAS WALTER (PLares 1103-1115) Thomas Walters own herbarium, on which he based his Flora Caroliniana (1788), was early destroyed, but he had given fragments of many of his plants to his publisher, John Fraser (1750-1811) of London, these, so far as known, being essentially R hodors Plate 1105 CUCUBALUS POLYPETALUS Walt., basis of SILENE POLYPETALA (Walt.) Fernald & Schubert = S. Baldwynit Nutt.: ric. 1, Walter's type, X 15; FIG. 2, S. Baldwynit: two inflorescences, X 1, from Aspalaga, Florida, Chapman. SAPONARIA OFFICINALIS L., to which Asa Gray referred the Walter type: FIG. 3, portion of inflorescence, X 1, from Enfield, Massachusetts, July 22, 1931, Goodale, Potsubay and St. John. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 191 all that exist to show what Walter was describing. John Fraser, senior, passed the collection on to his son and namesake (1799— 1860?), who, on May 23, 1849, presented it to the Linnean Society of London, where, as not the work of Linnaeus, it was treated as a “Surplus Collection” (fortunately not as mere rubbish) and sold to the British Museum of Natural History in 1863 for the sum of 15 shillings. This collection, constituting a folio volume of 117 pages, each page with several scraps pasted on, is now carefully safeguarded at South Kensington. Accord- ing to the detailed account of it by the late James Britten! it was studied by only a few American botanists before it reached the British Museum: by Pursh and by Gray but few, if any, others. Numerous recent students have studied Walter’s plants and in 1915 Blake discussed in detail several of his species, in RHODORA, xvii. 129-137; the senior author and Mr. Bayard Long studied them in 1930 and the junior author in the winter of 1946-47 made detailed studies of many heretofore unconsidered specimens and photographed the whole series, her results now in a very plump volume on the shelves of the Gray Herbarium. Blake and, after him, Britten have commented on the absence of some of Walter's species from the Fraser volume and the very confused and often quite misleading names which are attached to many specimens; and Britten pointed out that the small specimens and their labels, too often in the hand of one of the Frasers, rather than of Walter, had obviously been cut from their earlier place of mounting and had been remounted in alphabetical order, according to the often wholly erroneous identifications which the mounter (presumably one of the Frasers) had seen fit to place with them. Thus perfectly obvious Oxalis is called Pinguicula and characteristic Pinguicula is called Utricularia. On the other hand, a large proportion of the labels are correctly placed, such distinctive species as Arethusa racemosa (Ponthieva), A. divaricata (Cleistes), Cypripedium reginae or Eupatorium fusco-rubrum being properly labeled. As others have pointed out, however, the labels, as they now stand, must be partly ignored and the effort directed to matching the frag- ments with Walter’s descriptions. This we have done in some ! See James Britten in Journ. Bot. lix. 69-74 (1921). For an enumeration of articles regarding Walter and his collections see Maxon in Smithsonian Misc. Coll. xcv. no. 8 (1936). 192 Rhodora [AUGUST cases and the results are presented in the following pages and plates; many others, not yet worked out, must await future study. The earliest very critical study of this Fraser series of Walter's plants was, evidently, that of Frederick Pursh; the next by Asa Gray, on his first European trip, in 1839. Gray, most fortu- nately, left a note-book containing his identifications, although he was inclined to doubt the value of the collection on account of the confusion of labels. To what extent the Fraser series had been tampered with, aside from the remounting and the misiden- tifications, we can not say, but some of the authentic specimens were surely removed. Thus Gray in 1839, made memoranda which, though already published, may be here repeated, the first from RHopona, xli. 537, footnote (1939). “Gray noted under Clematis holosericea, which Pursh described from ‘Herb. Walter’: ‘There is nothing in Walter's herb. to correspond to this . . . Pursh must have carried off the specimen, or part of it’. 'Then follows in another ink: “Р. S. He has taken it all to herb. Lambert—which see’. Pursh and his patron, Lambert, were not the only early botanists who felt that Walter's plants would be of better service elsewhere (for instance, see note on Lobelia glandulosa by Fernald & Griscom, RHODORA, xxxix. 497)”. The latter note was as follows, this after the statement that nothing could be found in 1937 in Walter's herbarium to match his description of L. glandulosa. ‘‘However, in the Gray Her- barium there is а full raceme of such a plant, with definitely dentate calyx-lobes, which was labeled by Asa Gray as follows; ‘Lobelia Walt. L. glandulosa fl.! Cf. no. 2in notes. This speci- men is in a pocket labeled in Gray’s hand: ‘Herb. Walter! See notes.' “The pertinent facts are as follows. Asa Gray examined the Walter Herbarium in February, 1839, and left a small book of notes upon it. Under Lobelia glandulosa there is the following comment: 'I take fl. fr. specimen verum, but the cal. segments are entire. A loose spec. without specific name—a smooth plant—agrees better with descr [iption] as to calyx (no. 2). It becomes apparent, therefore, that the only element which Walter had with ‘calycis laciniis dentatis! was given to Asa Gray. In view of the fact that this is the only extant type of the Walter Rhodor: Plate 1106 THERMOPSIS VILLOSA (Walt.) Fernald & Schubert, all figs. X 115: кїс. 1, TYPE of Sophora villosa Walt.; Fics. 2 and 3, portions of inflorescence of Thermopsis caroliniana M. A. Curtis, from mountains of North Carolina, 1842, Buckley; FIG. 4, portion of inflorescence of T. caroliniana from near Highlands, Macon Co., North Carolina, Biltmore Herb., no. 1332". BAPTISIA CINEREA (Raf.) Fernald & Schubert: ria. 5, portion of inflorescence, X 1154, from Franklin, Virginia, 1867, W. M. Canby, the species erroneously supposed to be Thermopsis villosa Walt. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 198 plant with dentate calyx-lobes, the plant definitely accepted by Elliott, Gray and McVaugh as L. glandulosa, the name should stand for this element. A portion of the inflorescence has been returned to the British Museum.” If anything is now removed from the Fraser volume we shall know about it; we have a com- plete photographic reproduction of all the pages. MELANTHIUM HYBRIDUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 125 (1788), is often cited with a mark of interrogation as probably synonymous with M. latifolium Desr. in Lam. Encycl. iv. 25 (1796), the latter collected in Virginia by Fraser and described with “Les pétales . unguiculés, à onglets presqu'aussi longs que les lames. Celles-ci ont une forme pour ainsi dire orbiculaire, & paroissent légérement ondulées sur les bords." A photograph of Desrous- seaux's TYPE before us shows it to be correctly understood. "We feel, however, that Walter's earlier name was given to the same species. Walter divided Melanthium into two series, the first with “Petalis unguiculatis imprimis albis demum obscuro-rubris seminibus semi ovatis", the second ‘‘Petalis sessilibus, seminibus ovatis", the second series containing plants now referred to A mian- thium, Tofieldia, ete. Walter’s M. hybridum, with unguiculate petals and semi-ovate seed, was further described “petalis plicato- undulatis mmaculatis [evident misprint], floribus masculis et foemineis mixtis". Опе has only to look at representative specimens of M. latifolium and at the illustration (fig. 982 in ed. 1, fig. 1236 in ed. 2) in Britton & Brown in order to see a depiction of the “petalis plicato-undulatis" and an inflorescence ‘‘floribus masculis et foemineis mixtis". The species occurs in both the Carolinas and the detailed illustrations in 8mall's Manual show nothing else in the South which could have been meant by Walter. We are taking up M. нүвкіром Walter. It was recognized by Elliott, who gave a detailed description of a specimen received from Georgia, with "sterile and fertile flowers intermingled in each panicle. Petals persistent, orbicular, plaited, the margins waved or repand.”’ PANCRATIUM CAROLINIANUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 120 (1788), is represented by an unusually well prepared inflorescence, showing the very large crown with stamens borne at the summits of the broad lobes exactly as in the Carolinian and Georgian P. coro- narium LeConte in Ann. Lyc. N. Y. iii. 145, t. 4, figs. 7-9 (1830), 194 Rhodora [August which ‘Inhabits in Savannah river, at the rapids, a few miles above Augusta, where it covers the rocky islets. I have also seen it in the Congaree river, at Columbia, in South Carolina, occupying similar situations." Marc Catesby had a beautiful plate of the plant, the large crown and other characters as shown in the Walter specimen and in LeConte’s figures, Catesby calling it Lilio-Narcissus Polianthus, flore albo, Catesby Carol. ii. Append. 5 (1754), he saying ‘‘These Plants I saw growing in a bog near Palluchucula, an Indian town on the Savanna river, within the precinct of Georgia." The Catesby account and plate be- came the basis of Hymenocallis caroliniana Herbert, Append. 44 (1821), Herbert making no reference to Walter. H. caro- liniana Herbert, was, then, identical with and found in the same region as Walter’s Pancratium carolinianum but not based upon it. The later Hymenocallis coronaria (LeConte) Kunth (1850) should, therefore, be called HYMENOCALLIS CAROLINIANA Herbert, Append. (to Bot. Reg. vil), 44 (1821). Pancratium carolinianum Walt. Fl. Carol. 120 (1788). P. coronarium Le Conte in Ann. Lyc. N. Y. iii. 145, t. 4, figs. 7-9 (1830). H. coronaria Kunth, Enum. v. 855 (1850). Index Kewensis does not clarify the situation by referring Hymenocallis caroliniana Herb. to the quite different Mediter- ranean Pancrattum maritimum L., while H. coronaria, identical with and from the same region as /7. caroliniana, is referred to the smaller-crowned H. crassifolia Herbert. It is evident that the names in the genus need clarification. ASARUM CAROLINIANUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 143 (1788) is repre- sented by no specimen but the description clearly indicates, as has been thought, some form of A. canadense L. (1753). A. VIRGINICUM sensu Walt., not L. (1753) is represented by a characteristic leaf of A. arzifolium Michx. (1803) and it agrees with Walter's description. POLYCARPON UNIFLORUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 83 (1788). The very clear description of this plant, with “foliis succulentis ellip- ticis humisparsis, pedunculis lateralibus unifloris’’, is so like that of Michaux's Spergulastrum lanuginosum, the basis of Arenaria lanuginosa (Michx.) Rohrb., that it seems wholly probable that the suggested identification of the two as one species by Robinson in Gray, Syn. Fl. i'. 240 (1897) was quite justified. Since the Rhodora Plate 1107 P | Е | z ИШШИШШШҤШИШ m2 | AN LH HH GG e d ( А ANONYMOS (Lupino affinis) ROTUNDIFOLIA Walt. CROTALARIA ROTUNDIFOLIA (Walt.) Poir., as to basonym only, = C. maritima Chapm.: віс. 1, Walter's TYPE, X са. l4; FIG. 2, the TYPE, X 1; FIG. 3, plant of C. maritima Chapm., X 1, from Hills- borough Co., Florida, Fredholm, no. 6290. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 195 name Arenaria uniflora is preempted no transfer of Walter’s name to Arenaria is called for. STELLARIA UNIFLORA Walt. Fl. Carol. 141 (1788), our PLATE 1103, rias. 1 and 2, has evidently been misinterpreted by Robin- son in Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. 1!. 237 (1897) and by later as well as some earlier authors. Robinson’s description reads: “weak and slender: stems decumbent or suberect, a foot in length: leaves linear, acute, or the lower lanceolate, gradually narrowed below, mucronate, 8 to 12 lines [1.7-2.5 ст.] in length; the floral much reduced: flowers few, solitary, on elongated slender peduncles: calyx soft in texture, sepals scarcely veined", this species coming under a section with “Petals retuse or shortly bifid, divided only one fourth to one half the way to the base", etc. Small, calling the plant of Robinson’s treatment Sabulina uniflora (Walt.) Small, gives (Man. 498) the following description : “Stems 1-3 dm. tall: leaf-blades linear, 1-4 em. long, acute: pedicels 2-8 em. long: sepals lanceolate, 4-5 mm. long, acute: petals linear- cuneate, 6-8 mm. long: seed 0.5 mm. long, minutely roughened. [Stel- laria uniflora Walt.]—Meadows or springy places, Coastal Plain and adj. provinces, Fla. to Ala. and N. C.—Spr.” There is no question about what plant Robinson and, after him, Small intended by Stellaria uniflora or Sabulina uniflora, a paludal species illustrated in our PLATE 1104; but that it is what Walter had before him and described is very seriously doubted. Walter, calling his species a Stellaria because of the emarginate petals, his Arenaria having “Petala 5 integra" (Walter having the characters, as now understood, reversed), gave a description which is scarcely applicable to the plant of Robinson and of Small, for the latter weak and paludal species has dilated and fleshy leaves, glabrous calyx and rather deeply notched petals. Here was Walter’s account: uniflora 1. foliis subulatis oppositis; pedunculis alternis unifloris foliis triplo longioribus; calycibus subhirsutis (non striatis) petalis calyce longioribus, albis, emarginatis; capsulis ovatis. Such a description, emphasizing the subulate leaves, subhirsute calyx and merely emarginate petals, certainly would be mis- applied to the plant generally called Stellaria or Sabulina uniflora but, most fortunately, Fraser had a good specimen (our PLATE 1103, rics. 1 and 2) of a plant marked by him “No Name" 196 Rhodora [Асаоѕт (оп р. 100) which to us seems to be what Walter described. This has subulate leaves, and specimens (rra. 3) which closely match it have the plane sepals somewhat glandular-hispidulous (“calycibus subhirsutis (non striatis)"). Asa Gray, examining this page, made the memorandum in his notes that the specimen marked “No Name" looked like Arenaria brevifolia Nutt. The Walter diagnosis and the specimen which it matches are certainly of the latter species, as Gray indicated. Small’s figures on page 499 of his Manual, illustrating Sabulina, were evidently made from S. brevifolia (Nutt.) Small, they showing the details of flower and fruit of A. brevifolia: the white-margined blunt sepals with hispidulous back, the emarginate petals and the ovoid capsule slightly exceeding the calyx! (“calycibus subhirsutis (non striatis) petalis calyce longioribus, albis, emarginatis; capsulis ovatis" .—Walter). From Index Kewensis one would assume that the name Arenaria uniflora was used for a species by Poiret, Encycl. vi. 375 (1804), but Poiret was not describing a species but a minor variation of A. recurva Allioni as “@. Arenaria (uniflora)", this plant treated by such authors as Schinz & Thellung or Ascherson & Graebner as a trivial variation, with no binomial cited in their bibliography. There is, however, an earlier Arenaria uniflora which "was properly described as a new species, so that Walter's Stellaria uniflora cannot be transferred to Arenaria. The name in ques- tion is Arenaria uniflora Luce, Topogr. Nachr. Oesel, 141 (1823). This volume by Luce or Lucé seems to be very rare and its contents often unknown even to botanists of the Baltic area. Thus, Fenzl in Ledebour, Fl. Ross. ii. 167 (1843) cites with doubt “Arenaria uniflora. LucÉ Fl. osil.?", while some other writers on the region, even in modern works on the flora of Oesel, do not mention the author or his species. The name of the author, likewise, seems to vary. On the title-page of the Topographische Nachrichten von der Insel Oesel he appears as “Dr. Joh. Wilh. Ludw. v. Luce". On the secondary title-page, Prodromus Florae osiliensis, his name is similarly given, and the long Vorrede ! Although Small's artist well displayed the entire blunt sepals and the emarginate petals, the author or printer of Small’s description got badly tangled, the text reading "sepals . . . truncate or emarginate: petals spatulate or obovate: spatulate, 4—5 mm. long”. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 197 is signed Dr. v. Luce. Pritzel, however, lists him as Lucé and such of his binomials as were caught in Index Kewensis are ascribed to Lucé. The Prodromus is very rarely represented in American libra- ries. For an opportunity to examine a copy we are indebted to the courtesy of the Librarian of the University of Chicago. As to the plant treated by Torrey & Gray and by Robinson as Stellaria uniflora and by Small as Sabulina uniflora, some earlier authors were much confused. Thus, Elliott, Sk. 1. 520 (1821), described as A. glabra Michx. (which Small assigns to “Cliffs, Blue Ridge and Appalachian Plateau") a plant which “Grows in the swamps of the Santee river, from Murray’s to Nelson’s Ferry. Dr. Macbride’’, and cited Stellaria uniflora Walt. as an unquestioned synonym. The plant of swamps of the Santee River, as shown by characteristic material collected by Ravenel as “Arenaria glabra" but marked by Gray as Stellaria uniflora, is the paludal plant of Torrey & Gray, Robinson and Small. Although Gray, supposing the latter to be Walter's Stellaria uniflora, renamed it Alsine Walteri Gray, Genera, n. 34 (1849)—Alsine “Walteri (Stellaria uniflora, Walt.)", his new name must apply nomenclaturally to the plant of Walter, not to the one mistakenly taken for it. The paludal species should evidently be called STELLARIA paludicola, sp. nov. (TAB. 1104), planta stolonifera stolonibus filiformibus diffusis repentibus; caulibus laxe adscenden- tibus vel diffusis pergracilibus ad 4 dm. longis glabris deinde ram- osis; foliis linearibus vel oblanceolatis glabris primariis 1.5-4 cm. longis 1-4.5 mm. latis acutis; pedunculis axillaribus vel terminali- bus valde adscendentibus 2-8 em. longis; sepalis glabris lanceo- latis acuminatis 3-5 mm. longis; petalis anguste cuneatis 6—10 mm. longis apice emarginatis; staminibus petalis brevioribus.— Shallow streams, pools, wet meadows, boggy depressions and grassy swamps, Florida and Alabama, north along the Coastal Plain to North Carolina. Type: edge of small stream, golf- links, Myrtle Beach, South Carolina, April 19, 1932, Weatherby & Griscom, no. 16,523 (in Herb. Gray.). CuCUBALUS POLYPETALUS Walt. Fl. Carol. 141 (1788), under a genus defined “Cal. inflatus. Petala, fauce nuda. Caps. 3- locularis", was, obviously a Silene. The species was very briefly characterized: polypetalus. foliis oppositis, ovato-lanceolatis; floribus polypetalis. I. 198 Rhodora [Аосовт Asa Gray, in manuscript memoranda, as well as beside the specimen in the Fraser volume, stated that it is Saponaria officinalis with double flowers; but the specimen, no. 112 on page 38 (our PLATE 1105, FIG. 1) is quite evidently the summit of a flowering stem of Silene Baldwynii Nutt. Gen. i. 288 (1818), originally described with “petals divaricately laciniate (Fic. 2), the very narrow laciniae rendered by Walter “polypetalis’’. The long and narrow segments of the petals are displayed in Walter’s specimen (although crumpled) as well as in the speci- mens of Silene Baldwynii. They do not occur in the flowers of Saponaria officinalis (FIG. 3). Index Kewensis hit somewhat nearer by identifying Cucubalus polypetalus with Silene ovata Pursh, in this following a suggestion made by Pursh himself. That tall species, however, has long acuminate leaves, a pro- longed thyrse of relatively small flowers with the slender calyx in anthesis only 6-10 mm. long. Walter’s species has the small bluntish leaves, corymbiform inflorescence and large calyx (in anthesis 1.8 cm. long) of Silene Baldwynii. It is, therefore, necessary to call it SILENE polypetala (Walt.), comb. nov. Cucubalus poly- petalus Walt. Fl. Carol. 141 (1788). Silene Baldwynii Nutt. Gen. i. 288 (1818). In view of Asa Gray's unfortunate identification of Cucubalus polypetalus with the very different Saponaria officinalis, we quote, as did the late James Britten (in Journ. Bot. l. c. 70 (1921)) from the Letters of Asa Gray, i. 136 (1893) and append Britten's remarks. "D... find the examination very tedious, as the specimens are very often not labeled, except with the genus in his ‘Flora,’ so that I have first to make out his own species, and then what they are of succeeding authors. “The specimens are mostly mere bits, pasted down in a huge folio volume. І suspect this was done by Fraser, and the labels have some- times been exchanged, so that it requires no little patience. Some of the things I most wished to see are not in the collection, and there are several in the collection which are not mentioned in the ‘Flora’. You would laugh to see what some of the things are that have puzzled us: thus, for instance, his ‘Cucubalus polypetalus’ is Saponaria officinalis! His ‘Dianthus Carolinianus’ is Frasera! in fruit." Britten added: “Gray is probably right in his identification of the wretched specimen of “С. polypetalus’ with Saponaria—though Pursh (Fl. Amer. Sept., 316) had doubtfully referred it to his Silene ovata, which is based on a speci- Rhodora Plate 1108 IMPATIENS CAPENSIS Meerburgh, portion of original plate, X 1 = I. BrrLora Walt. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 199 men in Herb. Banks endorsed: ‘Cherrokee Countrey, W. V. Turner, 1769: Indian name Ounenake QOunostaatse—White root’: but the Dianthus is not Frasera, but Dodecatheon Meadia. Gray made notes on the collection which, or a copy, he sent to Torrey; if these are any- where preserved, their publication would be of considerable interest." Without very careful checking, Gray's note-book, before us, might be misleading, since, at the age of 28 and with limited knowledge of southern plants, his identifications were often based on familiarity with the flora of eastern New York. АСТАЕА PENTAGYNA Walt. Fl. Carol. 151 (1788), although not represented by any preserved specimen, was presumably Anemo- nella thalictroides (L.) Spach. Walter’s description is good: pentagyna floribus solitariis, pedunculis e sinu foliorum 2. ortis; corollis petalis septem obovato-oblongis, albis; pericarpio lanceolato monospermo; foliis biternatis, foliolis obtusis tridentatis. Except for the “pericarpio . . . monospermo" the description could apply to Isopyrum biternatum (Raf.) Torr. & Gray, but Isopyrum has follicles with more than 1 seed and it is not reported from east of the Alleghenies. Anemonella is common in south- eastern Virginia and extends across western Carolina to northern Florida. Its lanceolate achenes are 1-оушаќе and, though com- monly 7 or more, are frequently only 3 (or even 2 or 1). The disposition by Index Kewensis of Actaea ‘‘pentagyna, Walt. Fl. Carol. 151 — Cimicifuga americana" is far from satisfactory. CHRYSOSPLENIUM OPPOSITIFOLIUM sensu Walt. Fl. Carol. 140 (1788), is a striking illustration of Walter’s isolation from com- parative material and of the Frasers’ inaccuracy in guessing at the identities of the fragments they had from Walter. Walter was in doubt as to both genus and species, accompanying a com- piled generic diagnosis by the generic name “183. CHRYSO- SPLENIUM?" and considering his plant as possibly C. oppositi- folium L., a Eurasian herb resembling our C. americanum. How far from the Eurasian plant was Walter's is shown by his description: oppositifoli- foliis oppositis luteis tomentosis ovatis um? т. sessilibus, caule aureo tomentoso. The marginal memorandum in the hand which was presumably that of Dr. James Macbride (see below) gives the clue, for this reads ‘“Eriogonum tomentosum Michx.” The Fraser scrap- 200 Rhodora [AvaUsT book contains no specimen marked Chrysosplenium but on p. 38 there is a broken-off branch of an inflorescence of Hriogonum tomentosum bearing Fraser’s label “F. 306 Cucumis”, etc., an even more unfortunate identification than Walter's. Since the lower leaf-surfaces of Eriogonum tomentosum become fulvous in age, it seems evident that Chrysosplenium oppositifolium sensu Walter, not L., belongs in the synonymy of that species. As stated, our clue to the above identification was the marginal memorandum made, evidently by James Macbride, а South Carolinian and contemporary of Stephen Elliott, in the copy of Walter's Flora Caroliniana which belonged to him from 1812- 1816 and which, after passing through various hands, originally from Thomas Walter to John Watson, then to James M. Watson in 1789, then to Macbride, through J. M. Watson's daughter, Mrs. Catharine Davis, then by James Macbride to Jacob Bige- low and on through Francis Parkman to Charles Sprague Sargent, was finally reproduced and issued by Dr. E. D. Merrill in 1947. The marginal memoranda, apparently in the handwriting of Macbride, who knew the flora of Walter's region, are very signifi- cant. As stated, it was he who detected what Walter meant by Chrysosplenium. Tug TYPE or SOPHORA VILLOSA Walt. Fl. Carol. 134 (1788), our PLATE 1106, ric. 1, was very briefly described as follows: villosa 3. fol. ternatis lanceolatis, caule calyci- busque villosis, floribus cinereis spica terminali. The species was transferred to Podalyria as P. villosa (Walt.) Michx. and then to Baptisia by Nuttall. Elliott, Sk. i. 468 (1817), expressed some doubt as to the identity of the plant, saying “It is not improbable that Michaux has described, under this name, a different species from that of Walter". Torrey & Gray, Fl. N. Am. 1. 384 (1843), similarly indicated doubt: “Ме have drawn up our description from the specimen of Mr. Curtis, which we think is the same with the plant of Michaux. We are doubtful, however, whether it be the Sophora villosa of Walter, in whose herbarium a portion of a raceme of the plant only exists; and in this the calyx is more villous.” The Walter type (ria. 1) consists of a portion of a spiciform raceme with the flowers subsessile, each subtended by an oblong 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 201 bract when young. The rachis and calyces are densely spreading- villous and the plant obviously has nothing to do with that which currently passes as Baptisia villosa (FIG. 5). In its sub- sessile flowers, oblong bracts and heavily villous rachis and calyx it is, however, closely matched by specimens of Thermopsis caroliniana M. A. Curtis (rigs. 2-4). Although the latter varies in having the inflorescence open or relatively dense, the inflores- cence of the Walter plant is readily matched by specimens of T. caroliniana with more open inflorescences. It therefore be- comes necessary to call T. caroliniana TnurnMorsis villosa (Walt.) comb. nov. Sophora villosa Walt., Fl. Carol. 134 (1788). Thermopsis caroliniana M. А. Curtis in Am. Jour. Sci. ser. I, xliv. 80 (1843). Рт. 1106, Fics. 1-4. In PLATE 1106 Fic. 1 shows a portion of the inflorescence of Walter's plant, X 116; FIGs. 2-4, portions of the inflorescence of T. caroliniana, from North Carolina, also X 116; and ria. 5, a portion of the inflorescence from Virginia of Baptisia cinerea, which has erroneously passed as the same as the Walter plant, also X 116. Since the binomial, Baptisia villosa, was based on a plant which was not conspecific nor even congeneric with what usually passes as Baptisia villosa, the latter plant requires a new name. The only available name published for it seems to be Lasinia cinerea Raf., New Fl. N. Am. ii. 50 (1837), clearly a substitute for the B. villosa of authors. Rafinesque's account was as follows: “333. LASINIA CINEREA Raf. В. villosa of Authors, stem and leaves beneath pubescent, stipules linear, leaves subsessile, folioles elliptic obtuse—in Carolina, Michaux says the flowers are pale, Elliot calls them grey." This necessitates the combination: BaprisiA cinerea (Raf.), comb. nov. Lasinia cinerea Raf., New Fl. N. Am. ii. 50 (1837). B. villosa sensu Nutt., Gen. N. Am. Р]. i. 281 (1818) and later auth., not Sophora villosa Walt., basonym. PrarE 1106, ria. 5, X 116. In her monograph of the genus Baptisia (Ann. Mo. Bot. Gard. xxvii. 181 (1940)), Larisey cites, in the synonymy of B. villosa, Lasinia fulva Raf. 1. c. 49, described from “Tennessee and Arkan- zas”, but she states the range of her B. villosa “coastal plain of Virginia, south to South Carolina" (page 182), and describes as 202 Rhodora [AUGUST a separate plant, X B. stricta Larisey, l. c. 166, from Arkansas and Oklahoma, stating that this is the B. villosa of recent authors in part (as to the plant of Arkansas) and on page 131 she specially points out that the plant which has been mistakenly called B. villosa in Arkansas is really her newly proposed XB. stricta. It seems probable that XB. stricta is antedated by Rafinesque’s Lasinia fulva which he called “А very distinct sp. probably blended among B. villosa . . ." ANONYMOS (Lupino affinis) ROTUNDIFOLIA Walt. Fl. Carol. 181 (1788), our PLATE 1107, rias. 1 and 2, the Crotalaria rotundifolia Poiret (1811) as to basonym, has usually been identified with C. ovalis Pursh (1814) and later, by Senn in Rnopona, xli. 341 (1939), with C. angulata Mill. (1768). This identification of Walter's plant was made by Gray in 1839, he then recording in his manuscript-notes under Lupino affinis that “rotundifolia! = ovalis". At that time, of course, only the single rounded-leaved and decumbent species was recognized in the southeastern states, the plant now called C. angulata, with leaves elliptic or elliptic- oblong and strongly rounded at both ends, the new growth, rachis, calyces, etc. rufescent or fulvous with spreading villosity. Subsequently, C. maritima Chapman (1883) has been separated out, a similar plant with short and appressed pilosity, the leaves subcuneately tapering to but slightly rounded at base. This more localized species is cited by Small as extending from Florida northward on the Coastal Plain to North Carolina, and Senn cites characteristic material of it from the neighborhood of Savannah, close to Walter’s territory. It is, therefore, significant that the very well preserved TYPE or 1soTYPE of Walter’s species on p. 67 of the Fraser volume (our rias. 1 and 2), which Gray examined, is of characteristic C. maritima. Walter’s specific name was unfortunately selected but his “caule subdecumbente, foliis integris rotundatis pilosis" is all right if we take “rotunda- tis" to refer to the rounded summit of the leaf. The leaves of the preserved specimen from Walter exemplify Daydon Jackson's definition under ‘rotund’, rotund'us (Lat., round), rounded in outline . . . but a little inclined towards oblong"! It would seem, then, that we must take up Walter's name in a different sense than has been done: CROTALARIA ROTUNDIFOLIA (Walt.) Poir. Encycl. Suppl. ii. Rhodora Plate 1109 ч 4 / J U Wert MAFIA a «9:4 E 109€ Р ‘ * p / j © P etat cee J a Cetohna L414, HYPERICUM DENTICULATUM Walt., var. rYPICUM = H. angulosum Michx. = Brathys linoides Spach = H. virgatum ovalifolium Britton = H. denticulatum, var. ovalifolium (Britton) Blake: віс. 1 (right and left) түре of H. angulosum Michx. and of Brathys linoides Spach, X 15; FIG. 2, portion of a characteristic specimen from Walter’s region, east of Andrews, Georgetown Co., South Carolina, Godfrey & Tryon, no. 156, X 1. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 208 402 (1811), as to basonym, not as to plant described with “feuilles АТТОО ев ко velues à leur insertion . . . ; pédoncules velus, un peu rousseátres . . . bractées . . . velues; le calice velu” ; not C. rotundifolia sensu later authors. Anonymos rotundi- folia Walt. Fl. Carol. 181(1788). C.maritima Chapm. Fl. So. U.S. ed. 2, Suppl. 614 (1883). Var. Linaria (Small, comb. nov. С. Linaria Small, Man. Se. Fl. 679, 1505 (1933). С. maritima, var. Linaria (Small) Senn in RHopora, xli. 347 (1939). HEDYSARUM GRANDIFLORUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 185 (1788).—As Blake! pointed out, the name Desmodium grandiflorum (Walt.) DC., based on H. grandiflorum Walt., was incorrectly applied by American authors to Desmodium glutinosum (Muhl. ex Willd.) Wood (D. acuminatum (Michx.) DC.) for many years. On the basis of an examination and comparisons made of Walter’s TYPE at the British Museum by Mr. E. G. Baker, Blake recommended that the the name D. grandiflorum (Walt.) DC. be taken up for the plant long known as D. bracteosum (Michx.) DC. (and also, more correctly, as D. cuspidatum (Muhl. ex Willd.) Loud.). Recent examination of Walter’s specimen, which is extremely fragmentary, confirms, nevertheless, the identity of his plant with those of Michaux and Muhlenberg. In КноровА, xxxviii. 96-97 (1936), Fassett showed that appli- cation of the homonym rule would preclude use of Walter’s epithet, since it was a later homonym, antedated by Hedysarum grandiflorum Pall. (1773), and that, since a legitimate epithet was available in Desmodium, it must be used. The proper name to use for this species is, therefore, DESMODIUM CUSPIDATUM (Muhl. ex Willd.) Loud., Hort. Brit. 309 (1830) [incorrectly attributed to DC.]; Torr. & Gray, Fl. N. Am. i. 360 (1838). NOTE ON IMPATIENS BIFLORA Walt. Fl. Carol. 219 (1788).— Apparently no type-material of this species is preserved, but a space on the page where it would be expected shows that a speci- men has been destroyed. However, it seems to have been over- looked by American botanists that there is an earlier binomial which can hardly be set aside and which, without doubt, was based upon the familiar American plant. This was Impatiens capensis Meerburgh, Afb. Zeldz. Gewass. t. x (1775); Pl. Rar. 1 Blake, S. F. in Bot. Gaz. Ixxviii. 277, 278 (1924). 204 Rhodora [Ассовт t. x (1789). Meerburgh, having cultivated plants in Holland, unfortunately assumed that they had originated at the Cape of Good Hope; but his beautiful life-sized colored plate is clearly that of I. biflora Walter which was published thirteen years later. Meerburgh's description was good: "IMPATIENS (Capensis) TAB. X. Planta annua, sub dio laete crescens, ad altitudinem quatuor pedum, caules lucide rubescunt, geniculatae, stabiles, ra- mi alterni teretes, flores lutei intus rubro maculati; Habitus Impatientis Noli-tangere. Habitat ad Promontorium Bonae. Sp." A portion of his plate, from the second reference cited above, is reproduced, without color, X 1, as our PLATE 1108. Attention was directed to Meerburgh's species by G. M. Schulze in Notizbl. Bot. Gart. Mus. Berlin-Dahlem, xiii, nr. 120: 662-665 (1937), Schulze pointing out that Т. capensis Meerb. is not the same as J. capensis Thunb., Prod. Fl. Cap. 41 (1794), the latter being а species actually of the Cape; while the former, although not positively identified by Schulze, was a plant un- known from the Cape, for which he suggested identity with Walter's species. Somewhat later B. L. Burtt, under the title “MEERBURGH’S IMPATIENS CAPENSIS”, discussed the matter at length in Kew Bulletin for 1938, no. 4: 161-163, demon- strating by a study of the literature of the period that plate 10 was the last plate of the first part of Meerburgh's great illustrated work and that it was definitely published in 1775; Burtt saying in part: “A glance at the plate is sufficient to show that it is quite different from any of the South African balsams and it may, I think, be easily recognized as Impatiens biflora Walt. (I. fulva Nutt.), a common North American species now naturalized in several parts of Britain. There is no specimen of Meerburgh's now in existence and Schulze (l. e.) is of the opinion that the plate cannot be identified as I. biflora with absolute certainty; he therefore ranks I. capensis as ‘species incerta’. Several botanists at Kew, however, have recognized the illustration of I. capensis as I. biflora, and there does not seem to be sufficient doubt to justify the rejection of Meerburgh’s name. I. capensis Meerburgh (1775) clearly antedates I. biflora Walt. (1788) and must therefore stand as the correct name for the North American species, although the specific epithet is unfortunately quite inappro- priate.” Since there seems no way to avoid the inappropriate binomial, Rhodora Plate 1110 Hypericum DENTICULATUM Walt., var. RECOGNITUM Fernald & Schubert: portion of ТҮРЕ, Х 1. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 205 Impatiens capensis Meerb., it is necessary to make the following minor transfers: I. capensis Meerb., forma immaculata (Weatherby), comb. nov. I. biflora Walt., f. immaculata Weatherby in RHODORA abc EZ RE WA Forma citrina (Weatherby), comb. nov. J. biflora Walt., f. citrina Weatherby in Кнорока 1. c. 115. Forma albiflora (Rand & Redfield), comb. nov. J. fulva Nutt., f. albiflora Rand & Redfield, Fl. Mt. Desert, 88 (1894); I. biflora Walt., f. albiflora (Rand & Redfield) Weatherby in RHODORA 1. c. 115. Forma Peasei (A. Н. Moore), comb. nov. T. biflora Walt., f. Peasei А. Н. Moore ex Weatherby in Ruopora 1. c. 116. Forma platymeris (Weatherby), comb. nov. J. biflora Walt., f. platymeris Weatherby in Ruopora xxi. 99 (1919). HYPERICUM DENTICULATUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 190 (1788) is represented by no material but the description is a good one for the plant of the Coastal Plain from New Jersey to South Carolina which Michaux described as H. angulosum Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 78 (1803). In fact, Michaux himself thought, correctly it would seem from his type of H. angulosum (our PLATE 1109, FIG. 1, X V4) and from abundant material from Walter's general region in eastern South Carolina (our PLATE 1109, ric. 2), that his newly proposed species might be Walter's H. denticulatum. Walter’s description of his species, standing between and allied to his H. pilosum (H. setosum L.) and his H. quinquenervium (H. mutilum L.), was as follows: denticula- floribus trigynis submagnis, petalis dente unico tum 5. laterali, caule erecto quadrangulo, foliis sub- amplexicaulibus crassis ovatis. Michaux's aecount of his Н. angulosum was similar: ANGULOSUM. H. herbaceum, erectum, quadrangulum: foliis lanceolato-ovalibus, acutis: panicula dichotoma, distanter alterniflora: calyce inferne anguloso. H. denticulatum? WALT. OBS. Hypertco canadensi paulo majus. Folia arcte sessilia, erectiuscula, 5-nervia. Flores pusilli; calyce subeampanu- lato; foliolis oblongis, inferne prominenti-carinatis. HAB. in paludosis Carolinae. The short and narrowly oval or ovate leaves rounded to sub- amplexicaul bases and the broad sepals characterizing typical H. denticulatum (H. angulosum), contrasted with the mostly much 206 Rhodora [Аововт longer and narrowly elliptic-oblong leaves with acute or subacute bases of the plant which Blake in Ruopora, xvii. 134 (1915) treated as typical H. denticulatum. As synonyms of the plant with narrower and acute-based leaves Blake gave “Н. virgatum Lam. Encyc. iv. 158 (1796); H. angulosum Michx."; and he treated the plant with short ovate or oval leaves, so frequent in the Pine Barrens of New Jersey, thence to the Coastal Plain of the Carolinas (the plant described by Walter and by Michaux) as “Н. DENTICULATUM Walt. var. ovalifolium (Britton) Blake (Н. virgatum ovalifolium Britton, Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. ix. 10 (1889)". Forthwith, as true H. denticulatum (originally de- scribed ‘‘foliis subamplexicaulibus. . . ovatis") there appears in Small, Man. 870 (1933) the plant with "leaf-blades elliptic or nearly so, 1-3 cm. long, acute (oval and relatively shorter, with the sepals oval to ovate, in H. denticulatum ovalifolium)”. As a matter of fact, true H. denticulatum has the larger round- based leaves only 0.8-2 (rarely -2.5) cm. long and mostly 0.6-1.7 em. broad, while the reputed but obviously not typical “Н. denticulatum" has the larger acutish- to acute-based leaves 1.5-3.5 cm. long and 4-10 mm. broad. This plant (our PLATE 1110), then, stands between short- and broad-leaved true H. denticulatum and the extreme with all or at least the upper nearly linear leaves sharply pointed, the upper cauline leaves (the lower ones often broader) 1-3.5 cm. long and only 1.5-7 mm. broad. The latter is H. denticulatum, var. acutifolium (Ell.) Blake, 1. c., based on H. acutifolium Ell. Sk. ii. 26 (1821), Elliott's type, X 15, shown in our PLATE 1111, ria. 2. Had those who have recently pronounced on the identities here involved read Walter's “‘foliis subamplexicaulibus . . . ovatis" they would not have rendered it as *'elliptie or nearly so" and then separated from it as a differ- ent variety plants with ovate or oval leaves; and they would not have placed Lamarck's H. virgatum (type shown, X 16, in our PLATE 1111, ria. 1), which was correctly described: "feuilles . . sessiles, amplexicaules, linéaires-lancéolees, étroites, un peu pointues, entiéres, . . . les plus grandes, d'environ un pouce sur une largeur de trois à quatre lignes", in the synonymy of the restricted H. denticulatum. 1 The stained paper on which Elliott's type is preserved is due to the long storage, during and after the Civil War, of the herbarium in a damp basement.—See Weatherby in Ruopora, xl. 250 (1942). Rhodora Plate 1111 Ay petet иаа Dit HYPERICUM DENTICULATUM Walt., var. ACUTIFOLIUM (Ell.) Blake = H. virgatum Lam. = H.acutifoium Ell. = H. Harperi Keller: FIG. 1, portion of TYPE of H. virgatum, X 19; FIG. 2, TYPE of H. acutifolium, X ca. 15; FIG. 3, portion of corveE of H. Harperi X 1. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 207 At least four numbers of Н. denticulatum, var. acutifolium were distributed by Dr. R. M. Harper without identifications, as nos. 457, 1006, 1028 and 1731, from pinelands of Sumter County, Georgia. Evidently thinking that the labels needed completion, Dr. Robert Keller, who habitually assumed that our eastern North American plants awaited recognition!, de- scribed three numbers as a new species, H. Harperi Keller in Engler, Bot. Jahrb. lviii. 198 (1923), he defining Harper's defi- nitely soboliferous, soft-based herbaceous specimens as “‘suffruti- соѕит, e rhizomate lignoso" and comparing them only with the strictly annual Н. Drummondii (Grev. & Hook.) T. & G. Had he understood American botanical literature and plants he could have found it already described several times, beginning in 1797. A portion of a cotype (no. 1006)? of H. Harperi is shown, X 1, in PLATE 1111, Fic. 3. That it belongs with H. denticulatum, var. acutifolium seems apparent. 2 oO Exposed sxe гт close of the Paleozoic. m Exposed since the close of the Cretaceous. Exposed since the close of » the Tertiary. С) Nunatak areas wholly or partly exposed during Pleistocene, g Exposed after disappearance Of Pleistoeene ice. B Coastal plain areas exposed ^ during the Quaternary Ы Existing glacial fields Ranges of (1) HYPERICUM DENTICULATUM, var. TYPICUM; (2) var. RECOG- NITUM; (3) var. ACUTIFOLIUM. Although the three varieties may merge and nondescript individuals can be found, while var. acutifolium is sometimes associated with the broader- and less attenuate-leaved plant in the southern part of their range, they are generally quite distinct and, as shown in the Gray Herbarium, they have distinctive areas. The maps here published show the localities of all speci- mens in the Gray Herbarium. They clearly indicate definite centers of development. The three varieties are HYPERICUM DENTICULATUM Walt., var. typicum. H. denticu- latum Walt. Fl. Carol. 190 (1788). H. angulosum Michx. Fl. 1 See discussion of his new Polygonum by Fernald in Ruopora, xlviii. 53 (1946). ? Although Keller cited three numbers, he gave the detailed data for only one of them, no. 1028. This we, therefore, designate as the type. 208 Rhodora | [AUGUST Bor.-Am. ii. 78 (1803). Brathys denticulata (Walt.) Spach in Ann. Sci. Nat. sér. 2, v. 367 (1836), wrongly ascribed to Kunth: "B. DENTICULATA Kunth (sub Hyperico)". B. linoides Spach, Hist. Nat. Vég. v. 452 (1836), renaming (illegitimate) of H. angulosum Michx. Н. virgatum var. ovalifolium Britton in Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci. ix. 10 (1889). H. denticulatum, var. ovali- folium (Britton) Blake in Кнорова, xvii. 135 (1915).— Coastal Plain, New Jersey to South Carolina and presumably Georgia; Coffee Co., Tennessee. PraATE 1109. МАР 1. Var. recognitum, var. nov. (TAB. 1110, X 1), foliis anguste ellipticis vel elliptico-oblongis vel anguste obovatis basin versus acutis apice acutis vel obtusis, laminis 1.5-3.5 сш. longis 4—10 mm. latis.—Georgia to Mississippi, northward (mostly in the upland and mountainous areas, barely reaching the inner margin of the Coastal Plain) to southeastern Virginia, southern West Virginia, Kentucky and southern Indiana. 'ТҮүРЕ from moist ground, Knoxville, Tennessee, July, 1895, A. Ruth in Herb. Gray. МАР, 2. This variety was taken by Blake and by Small to be typical Н. denticulatum. Var. ACUTIFOLIUM (Ell.) Blake, 1. c. 134 (1915). H. virgatum Lam. Encyc. iv. 158 (1796). Н. acutifolium Ell. Sk. ii. 26 (1821). H. virgatum, var. acutifolium (Ell.) Coulter in Bot. Gaz. xi. 106 (1886). H. Harperi Keller in Engler, Bot. Jahrb. lviii. 198 (1923).—Rather local, northern Florida, northward on Coastal Plain and upland to North Carolina, southern Virginia and central Tennessee. РАТЕ 1111. МАР 3. Var. aculifoliwm is often much taller than the other varieties, large specimens up to 1 m. or more in height, whereas the other two varieties rarely exceed 6.5 dm. in height. Although Coulter in Gray, Synopt. Fl. N. Am. 1!. 288 (1897) cites unequivocally as a synonym of Hypericum virgatum Lam. the later H. hedyotifolium Poir. Suppl. iii. 700 (1813) from Nova Scotia, it is clear that Poiret's species could not have been any form of H. denticulatum. Poiret’s “Espèce remarquable par sa délicatesse . . . hautes de quatre pouces, . . . les feuilles . . . linéaires, obtuses, droites, longues de quatre lignes, larges d'une ligne . . . ; les fleurs petites; . . . les bractées petites, lancéo- lées, aigués: la corolle . . . plus courte que le calice", etc. indi- cate that he had tiny plants of H. canadense L., such as abound in Newfoundland and Nova Scotia. (To be continued) 1948] Hodgdon & Krochmal,—Podostemum 209 PODOSTEMUM, HIPPURIS AND HOTTONIA IN NEW HAMPSHIRE A. В. Норсром AND STANLEY В. KROCHMAL PoposrTEMUM CERATOPHYLLUM Michx. During the past two years, collections of this much overlooked species have been made from four streams in different New Hampshire townships. A diligent search in the literature and in herbaria has failed to reveal a solitary record for the species in the state up to now. However, Podostemum has been collected from all bordering states as well as the adjacent province of Quebec'. In Maine from the central part southward there are at least five known localities; in Massachusetts, at least two are well known; and in Vermont, one. In recent years there has been an intensification of interest in the aquatic flowering plants of New Hampshire, partly at least, because of the prosecution of the “Waterway Improvement Survey for Waterfowl" by the State Fish & Game Department. In the course of the work, a majority of our streams, ponds and marsh-areas have been investigated systematically and a large number of new stations for some of the less common species have been discovered. Some of these “finds” are reported in this paper along with two stations for Podostemum discovered by University of New Hampshire biologists in the course of work quite unrelated to the "Survey". The first of the Podostemum specimens to have been collected was from the township of Lee. Data on label reads: “Bed of Lamprey River between Wadleigh Falls and Long Hill, abundant for one-third of mile in fast water, June 27, 1946, Hodgdon, Harrington and Jahoda, No. 5335. Where the plants abounded the water averaged about 1 foot in depth during a moderately dry part of the year. However, plants were found growing on loose 1 For the general distribution of Podostemum in Eastern North America, see Fassett, М. С. Rhodora 41: 525-526, 1939. This is not a complete listing of all known Podo- stemum stations in New England, though specimens from Maine, Massachusetts and Connecticut are cited. The map showing the distribution of Podostemum on page 257 in Muenscher's ‘‘Aquatic Plants of the United States" Comstock 1944 is incomplete, since it indicates stations in New England only in Maine (one dot) and Massachusetts (one dot). In all fairness to New England collectors we should point out that Podo- stemum has been represented for some time from every state in New England except New Hampshire in the Gray Herbarium and the Herbarium of the New England Botanical Club. 210 Rhodora [AvausT boulders and on apparent bed-rocks surfaces at depth of three to four feet on the same day and in the same general locality. Later on in September, 1946, a much less extensive colony was dis- covered in the township of Rochester at a swift, rocky place in the Isinglass River. Specimens of this collection, Hodgdon No. 5587, and of the Lee material as well are deposited in the Her- barium of the New England Botanical Club and of the University of New Hampshire. During July 1936 one other excursion to the Lamprey River above Wadleigh Falls disclosed Podostemum in a swift rocky part of the river on the Lee-Epping boundary. Further collecting at likely places in the major streams flowing into Great Bay should yield other stations. On July 31, 1947, H. R. Siegler and Ernest Gould of the N. H. Fish & Game Department collected Podostemum in North Branch Brook in Antrim and about a week later the junior author and Sumner Dole, working on the “survey’’, discovered an area of the species in a particularly swift part of Beards’ Brook in the township of Hillsborough (Krochmal No. 1015). On August 13, Krochmal and Dole visited the Antrim station and obtained excellent fruiting specimens (Krochmal No. 1040). Hirrunis vuLGamis L. Three new stations in the state for this localized species were discovered during the 1947 season. At the Coós County stations in Pittsburg discovered by the junior author the species occurred in some abundance. Speci- mens were collected there from Scotts' Bog (Krochmal No. 1139). At East Inlet specimens were noted as occurring but none were collected. The other new locality for Hippuris is far to the south in Cheshire County—Highland Lake in the township of Stoddard. This was discovered by Ernest Gould. Svenson! reported the discovery of Hippuris immediately to the north of Stoddard in the township of Washington. Specimens of Hippuris and of Podostemum from the stations herein reported, collected by representatives of the State Fish and Game Department, have been presented to the Herbaria of St. Anselm's College and the University of New Hampshire. Horronia INFLATA Ell. The junior author of this paper and Ernest Gould collected Hottonia from “Long Pond in Danville- 1 Ruopona 31: 97, 1929. 1948] М. L. F.,—A Model Flora of Nova Scotia 211 Kingston on the 25th of June 1946”. The plant was common. This specimen is in the Herbarium of St. Anselm’s College. Also in 1946 Hottonia was observed, but not collected because its casual nature was not at that time suspected, in the Pow-wow River in Hampton and at Cub Pond in Sandown. Another locality, also in Sandown, New Hampshire, was reported several years ago by the senior author.’ UNIVERSITY ОЕ New HAMPSHIRE ST. ANSELM's COLLEGE А Море, Frona or Nova Scorra.—The recently published Flora of Nova Scotia by Professor А. E. Roland? is a most welcome addition to the local floras of eastern North America. Provided with practical keys, characteristic drawings of many species and detailed maps of the occurrence in the province of most indigenous species, it is bound to be a much used volume. The introductory pages contain a clear statement of the geological and physio- graphic background so essential to a proper understanding of the flora, and the maps go outside in order to show the relation of the provincial flora to that of adjacent eastern New Brunswick, Prince Edward Island and the Magdalen Islands. In the statement of local ranges there is evidence that the author has made a canvass of some of the more inclusive herbaria where plants of his region have been assembled, though, from the occasional omission of species enumerated by Macoun as found by him within the province, one wonders if the National Herbarium at Ottawa was checked. Often the old identifications under which plants have been recorded are shown to need correction, a valuable phase of such a work. There is an evident attempt to keep up-to-date on nomenclature and the latest published revisions are often followed, with the result that this is one of the most up-to-date local floras of eastern America. Whether some recent revisions are of equal value with more careful predecessors may, however, be questioned. For instance, the present reviewer can not maintain as a good species the recently described Suaeda Fernaldii; this evaluation paralleling Dr. Roland's own decision that the still more recently described Aster Rolandii is not worthy recognition! When a piece of work which has obviously been done with care comes out it may seem to some inappropriate to note points which, in another edition of the book, might be improved. This the present writer does in all friendliness, especially since the greater share of his field-work has been prosecuted in eastern Canada or Newfoundland. In some cases localized species or varieties are taken into the new book and given regular numbers as if they are part of the provincial flora, although in the discussion the author states that they are to be watched for, not that they there occur. To this group belong one of the ! RHODORA 46: 143, 1944. ? A. E. Коглмо. The Flora of Nova Scotia. Reprinted from Proc. N. S. Inst. Sci. xxi, pt. 3 (1947). Repr. 1948. 552 pp., 127 figs. (each of more than one species) and 477 maps. Truro Printing and Publishing Co., Truro, Nova Scotia. 212 Rhodora [AvGUsT varieties (by some considered a species) of Ruppia maritima “found on the Magdalens and on P. E. I., but not yet in N. S."; Carex sterilis, unknown in eastern Canada from south of caleareous marshes of the Magdalens; and Atripler sabulosa Rouy (A. maritima E. Haller, not Crantz), a remarkable species, isolated from the region of the Baltic and the North Sea, as are Poly- gonum oxyspermum Meyer & Bunge, which, before the identity was recognized, was supposed to be endemic to the Bras d'Or Lakes (as P. acadiense Fern.), and as are Polygonum Кай Babington and several other species. The strik- ingly disjunct range of Atriplex sabulosa, known with us only from the coastal sands of the Magdalen Islands, Prince Edward Island and northeastern New Brunswick, was discussed at length and shown in maps on pp. 1503 and 1504 of Proc. Internat. Congr. Pl. Sci. ii (1929). Another case, a little different (because the species is of broad and continuous range), is Galium labradoricum “apparently overlooked’’. This species delights in mediacid to calcareous soils in moss under arbor-vitae and larch and in such habitats in Gaspé and northern Maine it is difficult to overlook because of its clear white inflores- cences. Во far as we yet know, its southern limit in the Maritime Provinces is on Prince Edward Island and in New Brunswick. If such plants, actually unknown in Nova Scotia, are to be included, many scores of others which occur on Prince Edward Island or the Magdalens or in adjacent New Brunswick have the same claim as prospective Nova Scotians. A few wide-ranging species, like Cryptogramma Stelleri, Carex vaginata or Pilea pumila, are likely to be found there; but Prince Edward Island, the Magdalens or the recently unglaciated northeastern corner of New Brunswick support a surprising series of isolated “relict” plants or endemics remotely isolated from their closest allies, plants which give these areas floristic indi- viduality. If such distinctive plants as Potamogeton filiformis var. Macounii Morong (western North America), Ruppia maritima var. brevirostris Agardh or R. brachypus J. Gay (Europe and North Africa), Montia rivularis K. C. Gmel. (se. Newfoundland and Europe); Myriophyllum magdalenense Fern. (endemic), Pterospora andromedea Nutt. (chiefly western American), Aster laurentianus Fern. (endemic representative of a western species) and Bidens heterodoxa Fern. & St. John (endemie, with vars. in southern Connecticut) and many others are not included as plants we hope sometime to find in Nova Scotia, then Atriplex sabulosa (maritima) and several others should be excluded!. Would it not be better in such cases to note them as desired “prospects”, either in smaller type or in brackets? As between Prince Edward Island and Nova Scotia the “wires sometimes get crossed”. Thus, Pyrola asarifolia, as the text correctly states, occurs from Cape Breton to Kings County, Nova Scotia; but P. asarifolia, var. incarnata, unknown in Nova Scotia, occurs in Kings County, Prince Edward Island (Fernald, Long & St. John, no. 7891). 1 One is reminded of summers spent on Prince Edward Island, where it was impos- sible to get away from the current conviction among the untravelled and most con- servative residents, that ''the Island" is the Dominion of Canada, if not the British Empire; and of a similar local belief about Nova Scotia often met in older residents there. However, not all interesting plants of Prince Edward Island or the Magdalen Islands belong to Nova Scotia. 1948] М. L. F.,—A Model Flora of Nova Scotia 213 Yet the map indicates the latter as true P. asarifolia, and true P. asarifolia (Nova Scotian) as var. incarnata! Such things happen to us all. Another point which may well be altered in a future issue is one which very few botanists seem to understand. This is the citation of so-called sensu names, i. e. names under which plants have erroneously passed. In the synonymy one too often finds citations like the following, under Polygonum: “Р, exertum Small, including P. ramosissimum Michx.” The plant of borders of saline marshes in Nova Scotia is P. exsertum (described in 1894); whereas P. ramosissimum Michx. (described in 1803) is a wholly different and nearly transcontinental species (s. Quebee to Washington and southward). What was obviously meant in the quotation was: P. ramosissimum sensu someone or local records, not Michx. Аз stated, this differentiation between wrongly applied and correetly applied names is too often not made clear. In fact, authors can not be too clear if they wish to avoid misinterpretation. In Ruopona, ху. 68-73 (1913), the present reviewer discussed at some length the several North American plants which have erroneously passed as the quite different European Polygonum maritimum but, unfortunately, he did not summarize the conclusions in concrete differentiating paragraphs or keys. The plant on the sands along the coast from Massachusetts southward is P. glaucum Nutt.; that on the coast of the Maritime Provinces the very different P. Raii Bab.; yet, possibly due to the obscurity of the article cited, the southern P. glaucum appears in the new Flora as “а variant of the European P. mariti- mum [which it is not] . . . found along the coast of eastern New Brunswick". The plant of eastern New Brunswick is P. Razz. Happily the author of the new Flora has drawn together many recent records of species not ordinarily recognized as Nova Scotian. Unfortunately, among these is another stoloniferous Hieracium, H. Auricula L., which, unless promptly choked off, will add to our aggressive weed-population. In some cases he has found only one collection which can be cited, although others are known, their records perhaps lost in the fire which destroyed his original notes; and, quite understandably, in the going over of large herbaria some species have been missed. "These will doubtless be added in a future issue. As a slight contribution toward such an appendix, the following, all (unless noted) before me in the Gray Herbarium, may be listed. LUZULA LUZULOIDES (Lam.) Dandy & Wilmott. Forming mats in a lawn at Pictou, Fernald & St. John, no. 10,989. Sterile but with typical base and foliage. A weedy species from Europe, known westward into Ontario and in the northeastern states. SMILACINA STELLATA (L.) Desf., var. crassa Victorin. А strongly marked thick- and broad-leaved variety following the seacoast from southern Labrador to the lower St. Lawrence, south to Long Island Sound. Dry barren, Trinity Cove, St. Paul Island, Perry & Roscoe, no. 149; sand-dunes, West End, Sable Island, St. John, no. 1183; dry rocky headlands, Central Port Mouton, Fernald et al., no, 2074 in part. RUMEX PERSICARIOIDES L. Local in Queens County: moist cobble-beach near mouth of Broad River, Fernald & Bissell, no. 21,056; Central Port Mouton, Fernald et al., no. 21,057. Dr. Roland says it “тау occur along the North Shore of N. 8”. It probably does, but the South Shore won the competition. 214 Rhodora [August CERASTIUM ARVENSE L., var. VISCIDULUM Gremli. Edge of Granite Cliffs, Trinity Cove, St. Paul Island, Perry & Roscoe, no. 203. Only North American station known from east of North Dakota. AMELANCHIER INTERMEDIA Spach. From Cape Breton to Yarmouth; common. Very many nos. RuBus ARENICOLA Blanchard. On railroad east of station, Granville, Annapolis Co., August 1, 1909, “very characteristic of this species", Blanchard, no. 730. К. gEcURvICAULIS Blanchard. Very common from St. Paul Island and Cape Breton to Digby, Yarmouth and Shelburne Counties; many numbers collected by Howe & Lang, Blanchard and their successors. К. TRIFRONS Blanchard. Common from Canso (coll. Fowler) to Digby and Yarmouth Counties. R. TRIFRONS var. PUDENS (Bailey) Fernald (R. pudens Bailey). Louisburg, 1898, Macoun, no. 19,072 (as R. hispidus); sphagnous swamp, North Sydney, 1901, Howe & Lang, no. 684 (as R. hispidus). R. Tarpatus Blanchard. Common from Hants and Halifax Counties to Yarmouth and Shelburne Counties; many collections from Blanchard and others. R. muttirormis Blanchard. Very common from Kings and Queens Counties westward; many collections by Blanchard and others. К. vERMONTANUS Blanchard. Common from Annapolis and Digby Counties to Shelburne County. R. uwivocus Bailey. Dryish thickets, Sand Beach, Yarmouth Co., Fernald & Long, no. 21,544 (as R. vermontanus). К. лміСАІЛЅ Blanchard. Several collections by Blanchard from Kings County to Yarmouth County. R. ALUMNUS Bailey. Annapolis, June 24, 1924, J. G. Jack, no. 3335. К. GLANDICAULIS Blanchard. Several collections by Blanchard and others from Hants, Annapolis and Shelburne Counties. | TRIFOLIUM PRATENSE L. (typical). See Ruopora, xlv. 331 (1943). Scat- tered collections from St. Paul Island to Yarmouth County, mostly from waste places or neglected fields. The larger cultivated plant is var. sarrvum (Mill.) Schreb. T. nvBRIDUM L., var. ELEGANS (Savi) Boiss. See RHODORA, l. c. Weed, Sable Island, St. John, no. 1264; roadsides and borders of fields, Yarmouth, Bissell, Pease, Long & Linder, no. 21,693. Me itorus INDICA (L.) All. Ballast-heaps, Pictou, July 24, 1883, Macoun, no. 65, cited by Macoun (Cat.) as M. parviflora Desf. ErrLoBrUM HoRNEMANNI Reichenb. Big Intervale, Cape Breton, July 14, 1898, Macoun, no. 19,137. FRAXINUS EXCELSIOR L. Escaped to roadsides, railroad-embankments, etc., Pictou, Fernald & St. John, no. 11,160; waste ground, railroad-ballast and roadsides, Dartmouth, Fernald, Bartram, Long & St. John, no. 24,347; naturalized, Lahave River, Bridgewater, J. G. Jack, no. 3518. MENTHA GENTILIS L. Border of cultivated field, Harper Lake, Shelburne County, Fernald & Long, no. 24,431. LiNARIA DALMATICA (L.) Mill Fields and roadsides, South Ingonish, Edith Scamman, no. 4430 DIGITALIS PURPUREA L. Grassy roadside, Baddeck, Fernald & Long, no. 22,431. Macoun, Cat. 360, says ' Apparently naturalized" on Cape Breton. It is too much so in southwestern Newfoundland. 1948] M. L. Е.,—А Model Flora of Nova Scotia 215 PLANTAGO MAJOR L., var. scoPULORUM Fries & Broberg (P. halophila Bicknell). See Pilger in Engler, Pflanzenr. iv?9. 51 and 52, fig. 8 (1937).— А very distinct maritime plant, so distinct as to have been three times separa- ted as a species. Beach, Ingonish, August 5, 1904, J. R. Churchill; gravelly shore, Canso, Rouss:au, no. 35,458; brackish rocky shore of Eel Lake, Belle- ville, Fernald & Long, no. 24,510. SOLIDAGO TENUIFOLIA Pursh. Perfectly characteristic S. tenuifolia from gravelly beach of Feindel’s Lake, west of Bridgewater, Fernald & Long, no. 24,608; boggy margin of Wile’s (Oakhill) Lake, Lunenburg Co., no. 24,609; Harper’s Lake, Shelburne County, no. 24,604; Mistake Lake, Digby Co., no. 24,605. Numerous collections from Yarmouth County, making clear transi- tions to var. pycnocephala Fern. = S. galetorum (Greene) Friesner (not simply Greene, who published it as Huthamia galetorum). Similar transitions are quite apparent on eastern Cape Cod. GNAPHALIUM Macount Greene (G. decurrens Ives, not L.). Since only a single specimen from Windsor is cited, with “по other collection . . . known for the province", it is worth noting two made in 1921: dry clearings, North Mt., Granville, Annapolis County, Bartram & Long, no. 24,674; dry clearings and burns near Five-River (Morris) Lake, Shelburne County, Fernald & Long, no. 24,675. ACHILLEA LANULOSA Nutt., a native American species, differs in several characters from the introduced A. Millefolium L. In the latter the stems are 3-10 dm. high, either arachnoid or glabrescent. Its corymbs are flattish- topped and 0.6-3 dm. broad; its ligules short-oblong. A. lanulosa is mostly lower (up to 6 dm. high), densely woolly, the relatively few leaves silky- lanate; the round-topped or convex corymbs only 2-10 cm. broad; the ligules narrow and short. It is transcontinental, following south along the coast or in open ground to southern New England. Clearing, St. Paul Island, Perry & Roscoe, no. 404; sand-dunes, Sable Island, St. John, no. 1346; roadside in dry soil, Windsor Junction, Howe & Lang, no. 434; low sand-dunes, Central Port Mouton, Graves, Long & Linder, no. 22,884; sand-hills, Villagedale, Fernald, Long & Linder, no. 22,883. This brief enumeration of additions to the recorded flora indicates that there is plenty yet to do for the alert field-botanist. If species quite clear to those who have long known their diagnostic characters, Scirpus acutus and S. validus, for example, were included, the new list would be longer. If the collections made by John Macoun and often recorded by him were checked а considerable addition both of species and localities would follow. On page 169 of the Ottawa Naturalist, xiii. (1899) the late J. M. Macoun recorded his father's two localities for Carer Crawei Dewey on Cape Breton, a species with which John Macoun was perfectly familiar. A citation on the same page of Scirpus rufus from Cape Breton (Macoun in 1898) would give the earliest record for the province. All of which sums up to the conclusion that there is still much to be done in carefully checking old collections. There is more to do in making new discoveries. The present writer and his companions thought it a poor day if they did not bring in two to several species new to the province; Mr. Weatherby, venturing into slightly different areas, has made extraordinary additions and other plants are waiting discovery. The new and very useful Flora should stimulate new exploration. The reviewer regrets that he can not join in it, —M. L. F. 216 Rhodora [AUGUST Тнк Малме TARAXACUM OFFICINALE.—In Castanea, xii. 61, 62 (1947) Dr. F. R. Fosberg, citing my taking up of the name Taraxacum officinale Weber, concludes: Why he uses the later Taraxacum officinale rather than T. vulgare is not clear". Since others have asked the same question, a word of explanation may help them: the name Т. vulgare (Lam.) Schrank (1792), based on Leontodon vulgaris Lam. Fl. Fr. ii. 113 (1778), is illegitimate under the International Rules. Lamarck’s name was a substitute for Leontodon Taraxacum L.: “Pissenlit commun. Leontodon vulgare. Leontodon taraxacum Lin. Sp. 1122.” As said, by the International Rules such mere substitute- names are ruled out and cannot be taken up under another generic name if, at the date of transfer, there already existed a legitimate epithet of its own rank. When the combination Taraxacum vulgare (Lam.) Schrank (1792) was published there already ex- isted the legitimate name Taraxacum officinale Weber (1780). Therefore, T. officinale is the correct name, unless someone turns up one which is earlier. Since this working of an important rule is not understood by many botanists this brief statement may be clarifying.—M. L. FERNALD. Volume 49, no. 595, consisting of pages 149-180 and plates 1097—1102, was issued 2 July, 1948. 000га JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. September, 1948. No. 597. CONTENTS: Studies of American Types in British Herbaria (concluded). Part IV. Some Species of Thomas Walter (continued); Part V. A Few Species of later Authors. М. L. Fernald and Бейсек G Ос нне ONDE EE CN is ER 217 Two New Names in Populus. Ernest Rouleau. ................ 233 Notes on the Flora of Ontario. I. Epipactis Helleborine. Kan Montgomery cese ВИ Tn MEE c pe oll 236 Erigeron compositus, var, discoideus, forma trifidus. MEETS Henna ld ЕИ TIN Tcr 238 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. —a monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray’s Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35-46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. А. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton, Section Axillares, by М. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora Plate 1112 ORIGANUM FL! XUcSUM Walt. = PycNANTHEMUM FLEXUOSUM (Walt.) BSP., as to basonym only = P. hyssopifolium Benth., both figs. from Walter's ТҮРЕ: FIG. 1, TYPE, х 25; FIG. 2, inflorescence, X 3. D ’ Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. September, 1948. No. 597 STUDIES OF AMERICAN TYPES IN BRITISH HERBARIA М. L. FERNALD AND BERNICE С. SCHUBERT (Continued from page 208) Srum suave Walt. Fl. Carol. 115 (1788).—In Ruopora, xlv. 454 (1943) the senior author, recording the extension northward into southeastern Virginia of 5. floridanum Small, Man. Se. FI. 976, 1506 (1933), suggested that the type of Walter's species could have been a specimen of the latter species. Fortunately, how- ever, the fragment preserved in the Walter collection is from perfectly characteristic material of the wide-ranging northern, as well as southern, plant, with stiffly ascending and strongly cor- rugated stems, relatively coarse rays of the umbel and very numerous flowers in the umbellets, of the plant now generally known as S. suave. А synonym of S. floridanum is S. lineare Michx., 6. intermedium Torr. & Gray, Fl. i. 611 (1840). One of Chapman's original specimens in the Gray Herbarium is definitely of S. floridanum. Should the latter eventually be placed under S. suave as an extreme variation, Torrey & Gray's varietal name will have to be considered. ANGELICA LOBATA Walt. Fl. Carol. 115 (1788).— The type, a badly crumpled leaf is, without doubt, from a plant of Ligusticum canadense (L.) Britt., as already suggested by Mathias & Con- stance in N. Am. Fl. 28b. 145 (1944), a characteristic woodland species of the southeastern states. 218 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER LrevcorHoE editorum, nom. nov. L. Catesbaei sensu Gray, Man. ed. 2, 252 (1856), not Andromeda Catesbaei Walt. Fl. Carol. 137 (1788), basonym. In Ruopora, xlvii. 169-171 (1945), the senior author pointed out the utter confusion which has existed as to the true basis of Leucothoe Catesbaei, through the fact that Walter's type had not been clearly understood and that Pursh in describing Andromeda spinulosa had well defined the montane species but had given the locality as “Lower Carolina" and had cited A. Catesbae: Walt. as an exact synonym. The Walter type (572), clearly labeled Andromeda Catesbaet, proves to be a flowering branch of very characteristic Leucothoe axillaris (Lam.) D. Don or Andromeda axillaris Lam. Encycl. i. 157 (1783). In the Synoptical Flora of North America, ii'. 34 (1878), Gray treated the montane species with caudate-attenuate leaf-tips and acutish bracts and sepals as L. Catesbaei, with the synonym A. spinulosa Pursh “excl. habitat"; and he added the parenthetical note, “Pursh characterized the two species but transposed the habitats", Pursh having cited the coastwise Andromeda axillaris as “оп the mountains" and, as already noted, his A. spinulosa from the low country. Since Andromeda spinu- losa Pursh had the exact synonym A. Catesbaei Walt., it must be treated as having an illegitimate name because Pursh should have used the earlier name which he cited. Other names which have been assigned to the synonymy of the montane shrub, Leucothoe editorum, are Andromeda Walteri Willd. Enum. 453 (1809), a renaming of A. Catesbaei Walt., and A. lanceolata Desf. Cat. Р]. Hort. Paris, 136 and 398 (1829), an unencumbered name but unfortunately antedated by A. lanceolata Wallich (1820) and A. lanceolata Vell. (1825). There seems, therefore, to be no bi- nomial except possibly the later homonym, Andromeda lanceolata Desf., available which can legitimately be taken up for the plant which has erroneously passed as L. Catesbaet. It is important to record the fact that it was clearly stated in his manuscript notes of 1887 by Asa Gray of *'Andromeda Catesbaei 572’. It is A. ахШагіѕ!” Apparently Gray found no opportunity to make the correction. ASCLEPIAS POLYSTACHIA Walt. Fl. Carol. 107 (1788) was well described: 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 219 polystachia fol. petiolatis oppositis lanceolatis laevibus, 13. subtus venosis umbellis pluribus terminalibus lateralibusque, petalis et auriculis cornicu- latis purpurascenti-rubris, corpusculo latere fusco, apice albo; caulis 4-pedalibus. This description, with ‘fol. petiolatis . . . lanceolatis laevibus, . umbellis . . . terminalibus lateralibusque", is so little suggestive of A. rubra L. which has, to quote Gray (Syn. Fl.), "leaves . . . tapering from near the rounded or obscurely cor- date base to an acuminate apex”, that it is surprising that Gray, Syn. Fl. ii'. 90 (1878), should have suggested the identity of A. polystachia (although with a saving “?”) with A. rubra. Не also suggested, likewise with a query, the identity of A. cordata Walt., l. c. 105, with A. rubra. There is no preserved specimen of the latter but Walter's “fol. cordato-lanceolatis subsessilibus" and his other characters pretty definitely indicate that his A. cordata is A. rubra L. (1753). Walter’s account of his A. polystachia is very similar to Gray’s (Syn. Fl.) description of the leaves of A. phytolaccoides Pursh and Small’s (Man.) account of the same species, as the earlier A. exaltata '*(L.) Muhl.", that one automatically looks for a Walter specimen to match these accounts. Gray has “Bright green and glabrous: stem 4 or 5 feet high: leaves membranaceous, from oval to ovate-lanceolate, acuminate at both ends, short-petioled, 4 to 8 inches long" (compare 0]. petiolatis . . . lanceolatis laevi- bus’—Walt.). Small, describing the flowers of the same species, which extends southward to Georgia and Mississippi, says: “corolla-lobes greenish or greenish-purple . . . : hoods... white or flushed with pink" (compare “ре{айз et auriculis corniculatis purpurascenti-rubris, corpusculo latere fusco, apice albo"—Walt.). Fortunately, on p. 10 of the Fraser volume there is a comparatively good foliage-specimen of ''Asclepias Novum" with the ovate-lanceolate leaves acuminate to both ends, petioled and with the venation of the leaves of characteristic A. exaltata or phytolaccoides. From the bibliography given by Britton & Brown, iii. 9 (1898), A. Syriaca var. exaltata L. Sp. Pl. Ed. 2, 313. 1762. Asclepias exaltata Muhl. Cat. 28. 1813. A. phytolaccoides Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. 180. 1814, one might infer that Walter's binomial of 1788 should be taken 220 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER up, but Muhlenberg happened, although citing no basonym nor giving any diagnosis, to hit on the correct binomial; for in Species Plantarum, ed. 2, 1. c., Linnaeus cited under his A. syriaca, 6. exaltata an earlier reference. Following this back we find the species, properly with a binomial and a very detailed description, as А. EXALTATA L. in Amoen. Acad. iii. 404 (1756). That is the correct binomial. ORIGANUM FLEXUOSUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 165 (1788), our PLATE 1112, was one of two new species described by him under a genus defined “Jnvolucrum multisetum verticillo subjectum" etc.; 27. e. his Origanum was primarily the species of Pycnanthe- mum, $ Tullia Benth., with bristle-tipped calyx-teeth. Walter’s description was flexuosum 2. capitulis axillaribus, floribus sessilibus, An satureja bracteis quam corollulae minoribus, caule virginiana? flexuoso, foliis sublinearibus. LINN. This species is one of the two of the genus represented, without specific name, on p. 79 in the Fraser series. The specimen (our PLATE 1112, FIG. 1, X 25, FIG. 2, X 3) is an unusually good one of the characteristic plant of Walter's region with heads on axillary branches, calyx-lobes aristate, stem often flexuous and leaves "sublinear" (linear-oblong to narrowly oblong-lanceolate and blunt, entire or nearly so) which was described as Pycnanthemum hyssopifolium Benth. (1834), almost as if he had Walter's speci- men before him: “foliis subsessilibus oblongo-lanceolatis lineari- busve obtusis subintegerrimis . . . , verticillastris paucis multi- floris laxiusculis, bracteis subulatis aristatis extimis oblongis, calycis dentibus subaequalibus subulatis rigidis". There is no question about the true identity of Origanum flexuosum Walt. with the consequent carelessly made combination, PycNANTHE- MUM FLEXUOSUM (Walt.) BSP., Prelim. Cat. N. Y. Pl. 42 (1888), the combination unintelligently published without bibliographic citation as P. “flexuosum, (Walt.) (P. linifolium, Pursh.)", unintelligently because the Walter description and plant are of a section very distinct from that containing Pursh's P. linifolium! In Mem. Torr. Bot. Cl. v. 279 (1894) Britton clarified the essen- tial bibliography by basing Koellia flexuosa (Walt.) Britton on Origanum flexuosum Walt. Fl. Carol. 165 (1788), overlooking the Rhodor: Plate 1113 PINGUICULA CAERULEA Walt.: rig. З, Type, X ca. !3, mislabeled by Fraser as Utri- cularia gibba; FIG. 4, plant and flowers, X 1, from Summerville, South Carolina, H unne- well, no. 8115. P. nvuTEA Walt.; FIG. 2, TYPE, X l3. OXALIS VIOLACEA L.: FIG. 1, inflorescence, X 15, mislabeled by Fraser as Pinguicula caerulea! . 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 221 fact that the combination K. flexuosa (Walt.) MacMillan, based on “Nepeta [instead of Origanum] fleruosa Walt.", without citation of page (presumably not seen by MacMillan), was pub- lished in Metasp. Minn. Val. 452 (1892), for a mixture of three species said to grow in Minnesota, at least 650 miles northwest of the western limit of Walter’s species. Britton gave other synonyms, including P. linifolium Pursh (1814) and “Satureia Thymus Virginicus L. Mant. 2: 409 (1771)". Before discussing the latter names it should be noted that Grant & Epling, Study of Pycnanthemum, Univ. Calif. Pub. Bot. xx. no. 3: 224 (1943), explicitly say, we know not why: “there are no specimens of this species [Walters Origanum flexuosum] among the Walter plants in the British Museum; Р. aristatum is represented, however". Since P. aristatum Michx. (i. e. Р. setosum Nutt.—see Fernald in Ruopora, xlvii. 178 (1945)) has, as correctly described by Grant & Epling “leaf blades narrowly ovate, infrequently ovate-lanceolate, usually rather acute, . . . 1-3 em. broad", it is difficult to understand how the Walter specimen could have been so misidentified; there is nothing pre- served in the Fraser series but this one easily identifiable speci- men and two unmatched fragments which have subulate-aristate ealyx-lobes but very narrowly linear leaves. These fragments, which are surely not of the section Brachystemum Benth., which contains P. linifolium, definitely belong, like P. setosum and true P. flezuosum (P. hyssopifolium) to § Tullia and apparently represent an unrecognized species, which should be sought in eastern South Carolina. In the synonymy of Koellia flexuosa sensu Britton, l. c., ex- cluding basonym, there appears another name which was pub- lished earlier than Brachystemum linifolium Willd. Enum. 623 (1809), basonym of Pycnanthemum linifolium (Willd.) Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. ii. 409 (1814). This was the already quoted ‘‘Satureia Thymus Virginicus" L. Mant. ii. 409 (1771) which leads us to the Linnaean account. This gives no justification for the trinomial listed by Britton, for here is what Linnaeus said: Satureja virginic. THYMUS capitulis terminalibus, caule erecto, foliis lanceolatis rectius. Without further explanation it would seem that here was a variant of the old and much confused S. virginiana L. (1753), 222 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER which has been well established in the sense of P. lanceolatum Pursh (see Grant & Epling, 1. с. 221). Grant & Epling cite under Pycnanthemum flexuosum in their sense the synonym Koellia capitata Moench, Meth. 408 (1794) which, obviously antedates Brachystemum linifolium Willd. (1809) and Pycnanthemum lini- folium (Willd.) Pursh, but Moench, describing a plant "foliis lanceolatis", cited as an unquestioned synonym “Thymus vir- ginicus. Linn.". Since he did not take up this earlier name Moench’s name was illegitimate; its lanceolate leaves are not good for P. linifolium. Incidentally, Grant & Epling, with many . collections before them could map the latter species (their map 11) from South Carolina only from the mountains, and assiduous collectors have not secured it from the Coastal Plain south of North Carolina. In other words it is not known from near Walter’s home, where the plant Walter described and collected abounds (see Grant & Epling, map 13). With many stations recorded in eastern but none in western South Carolina and copious material from Walter’s own county the identity of his species might have been surmised. The upshot seems to be that, since the preserved specimen which exactly coincides with Walter’s description of his Origanum flexuosum, is characteristic Pycnanthemum hyssopifolium, we are forced to a change: PYCNANTHEMUM FLEXUOSUM (Walt. BSP. Prelim. Cat. N. Y. Pl. 42 (1888), as amplified by Britton in Mem. Torr. Bot. Cl. v. 279 (1894) as to basonym, notsensu BSP. Origanum flexuosum Walt. Fl. Carol. 165 (1788). Р. hyssopifolium Benth. Lab. Gen. Sp. 329 (1834). P. aristatum Michx., var. hyssopifolium (Benth.) Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. ii'. 354 (1878). Koellia flexuosa (Walt.) MacMillan, Metasp. Minn. Val. 452 (1892) as to name only; sensu Britton in Mem. Torr. Bot. Cl. v. 279 (1894), not as to other synonyms. We now reach the stiffly branched and tough (not ‘‘flexuous’’) plant, of Bentham's $ Brachystemum, which has been: erroneously passing as Pycnanthemum flecuosum. That it is P. linifolium (Willd.) Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. ii. 409 (1814), based on Brachyste- mum linifolium Willd. Enum. Hort. Berol. 623 (1809), there is no doubt; but it is also P. tenuifolium Schrader, Hort. Gott. 10, tab. iv (1809). Schrader gave a very full analytical description of the plant (unfortunately said to have its “Habitat in Archi- 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 223 pelago") and a full-size colored plate of our common linear- leaved species which Willdenow defined the same year. But by present rules of nomenclature Willdenow's Brachystemum lint- folium was an illegitimate name for, after a two-line diagnosis, Willdenow cited as exact synonyms the earlier B. virginicum Michx., which rested on Thymus virginicus L., and also Thymus virginicus of “Sp. pl. ed. W. 3. p. 145". Since the Thymus virginicus of Willdenow's Species was the T. virginicus L., Willdenow should have retained the original specifie epithet. Thus, although published slightly later, Pycnanthemum tenui- folium, beautifully described and illustrated and without citation of an earlier name, is the legitimate name of the plant, the bibliography of which is PYCNANTHEMUM TENUIFOLIUM Schrader, Hort. Gott. 10, t. iv (1809). Satureja, virginiana L. Sp. Pl. ii. 567 (1753) in part only. Thymus virginicus L. Mant. ii. 409 (1771), in part only, renaming of the preceding. Brachystemum virginicum Michx. Fl. Bor. Am. ii. 6 (1803) as to plant only. B. linifolium Willd. Enum. 623 (1809) as to plant, name illegitimate. P. linifolium Pursh, Fl. Am. Sept. ii. 409 (1814). P. flecuosum sensu BSP. Prelim. Cat. N. Y. Pl. 42 (1888), as to plant, not as to basonym. Koellia flexuosa MacMillan, Metasp. Minn. Val. 452 (1892) in part only, not as to basonym; Britton in Mem. Torr. Bot. Cl. v. 279 (1894) as to plant, not as to basonym.! COLLINSONIA SEROTINA Walt., Fl. Carol. 65 (1788), was well described “fol. magnis oppositis ovatis, petiolis longis, supremo pari unice sessili, cordato; panicula terminali ramosissima”. Asa Gray, in the Synoptical Flora, ii'. 351 (1878), cited it without question as identical with C. punctata Ell., Sk. 1.86 (1816), which he treated as C. canadensis, var. punctata (Ell.) Gray. The species is now often treated as distinct and in such cases Walter's name should have precedence over Elliott's. In the varietal category Elliott’s epithet is applicable. PINGUICULA CAERULEA Walt. Fl. Carol. 63 (1788), as repre- sented in the Fraser series of Walter's plants, our PLATE 1113, FIG. 3, X ca. 14, well illustrates the almost absurd confusion made 1 On sheets in the Gray Herbarium we find the following combination which should be published, as it indicates the correct status of the plant: PycNANTHEMUM Torre Benth., var. leptodon (Gray) Boomhour, comb. nov. in Herb. Gray. P. pilosum Nutt., B. leptodon Gray in Am. Journ. Sci. xlii. 46 (1842). P. leptodon Gray, Syn. Fl. N. Am. іі!. 355 (1878). 224 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER by Fraser or the Frasers in attempting to identify the specimens or fragments. On page 83 of the series a small umbel, Fria. 1, mounted just above the properly identified Pinguicula lutea Walt. (Fic. 2), bears Fraser’s label “Pinguicula caerulea". Asa Gray, as shown in his manuscript notes, recognized that this fragment is an inflorescence of Oxalis violacea. However, on another page (no. 526 on p. 80), there is a different specimen, correctly called O. violacea, this one with bulb and leaves, as well as umbel. Finally, specimen no. 487 on p. 104, bearing the appended name “Utricularia gibba”, solves the mystery, for this is a plant of Pinguicula (our FIG. 3, X ca. 14) with dark and opaque rosette-leaves and a characteristic flower, which is readily matched (as to profile) by such a representative sheet of P. elatior Michx. (1803) as that of F. W. Hunnewell, no. 8115 (FIG. 4), from Summerville, South Carolina. The decision by Barnhart in Addisonia, xviii. 21, t. 587 (1933), to take up P. CAERULEA Walt. (1788) instead of P. elatior Michx. (1803) seems quite justified. In fact, when he published P. elatior Michaux himself suggested that it might be Walter's P. caerulea. DIANTHERA OVATA Walt. Fl. Carol. 63 (1788) was well de- scribed but there seems to be no specimen preserved. It was transferred in 1900 to Justicia as J. ovata (Walt.) Lindau in Urban, Symb. Antill. ii. 237 (1900). In Кнорока, xliii. 641 (1941) the senior author took up for it the later J. humilis Michx. (1803) because J. ovata Dietrich in Steudel, Nom. ed. 2, i. 888 (1840) seemed to invalidate Lindau's combination. Un- fortunately, however, as we are now beginning to understand, many names newly published by Steudel are illegitimate and have no nomenclatural force because they were published as synonyms only. Examination of the name J. ovata Dietr. clearly shows that it was a mere synonym. On p. 838 of Steudel it appeared in italics (as a synonym) under Justicia as “ovata. Dietr. Diclip- tera peruviana” and on p. 504, under the maintained Dicliptera (with Justicia as a generic synonym) D. “peruviana. Juss." had the synonym Justicia ovata Dietr. Index Kewensis also lists J. ovata E. Meyer in Drége, Zwei РЯ. Docum. (Flora, xxvi?. Beig.) 196 (1843), from South Africa. There again the name had no nomenclatural force for it was a nomen nudum. In enumerating the plants of different localities Drége listed on p. 149, his no. Rhodora Plate 1114 ТЕГЕЛЕ ТЕ ТЕ = EUPATORIUM PILOSUM Walt. = E. verbenaefolium Michx. and Е. teucrifolium Willd., all figs. from Walter's түрк: ria, 1, TYPE, X 25; FIG. 2, upper leaf, X 2; Fra. 3, portion of inflorescence, X 2. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 225 4818 as “Justicia ovata, 4818". Then on p. 196, in an alpha- betical list of his South African plants, he gave Justicia “ovata E.M.)". That seems to be the full publication of J. ovata E. Meyer. Later authors have regularly cited it in the synonymy of the species with which the Drége material has been identified but they do not seem to have defined it as J. ovata. Thus, Presl, Bot. Bemerk. 95 (1844), without a word of definition, said “Justicia ovata E. Meyer in Drege—est Dicliptera ovata Presl”. In his treatment of the Acanthaceae in DC. Prodr. xi. 336 (1847) Nees ab Esenbeck described in detail the Drége material as Rhytiglossa ovata, with the synonym “‘Justicia ovata E. Meyer! cat. pl. Drég." but the latter name can hardly be said to have been defined, except as a synonym. Similarly, C. B. Clarke in Thiselton-Dyer, Fl. Capensis, у!. 80, 81 (1901) takes up Iso- glossa “ovata (Lindau in Engl. & Prantl, Pflanzenfam. iv. 3B, 344)", giving a full description of the South African plant with the synonym “Justicia ovata, E. Meyer in Drége" etc. cited, as if that name had been defined. Just to show how hit-or-miss is the bibliographie work of too many of us (and we all get caught unless we scrupulously verify citations) we may turn to Clarke's reference (correct it would seem) to Isoglossa ovata Lindau in Engler & Prantl. Turning to the reference we find under Iso- glossa “I. ovata (Nees) Órst." along with many other binomials referred to Orsted; but, unhappily, Orsted in publishing the genus Isoglossa in Kjoeb. Vidensk. Meddel. for 1854: 155 (1855) made no combinations, merely saying, after his definition of the genus “Rhytiglossa ciliata et ceterae species capenses hue pertinent". According to Index Kewensis this constituted the publication of I. ciliata, but, even admitting that it does do so (by the Interna- tional Rules), Örsted certainly did not there publish 7. ovata. The primary author of the trivial name ovata for the South African plant seems to be Nees. It surely can not be taken up as based on the undescribed Justicia ovata Dietr. with which this complicated digression began. But the combination JUSTICIA ovata (Walt.) Lindau should stand for the North American plant which was later defined as J. humilis Michx. EvPATORIUM PILOSUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 199 (1788) (our PLATE 1114, ric. 1, X 26; FIGs. 2 and 3, X 2), described: “foliis lance- olato-ovatis, basi obtusis, serratis sessilibus, calycibus pilosis", 226 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER has very generally been thought possibly to be the same as Ё. verbenaefolium Michx. (1803), which antedates the identical E. teucrifolium Willd. (1804). Thus Gray, Syn. Fl. N. A. i?. 99 (1884), taking up E. teucrifolium, gave as its first synonym “E. pilosum, Walt. Car. 199?". This interrogated identity is given in Index Kewensis, doubtless following Gray, and Britton & Brown give it (also with the interrogation) under Æ. verbenae- folium. Walter’s description obviously applies to this common species of his region, in which the leaves of the primary axis are rounded to sessile bases, the reduced upper ones either sessile or with very short petioles. On the three pages of Fraser's series of Walter plants only one individual agrees with Walter's diagnosis. That, no. 755 (on p. 45), is a very characteristic inflorescence, with the lance-ovate, serrate and roundish-based leaves (although very short-petioled) of thoroughly typical E. verbenaefolium, the type of the latter and a pilose involucre (“calycibus pilosis") shown in Ruopora xlvii. t. 910 (1945). The Walter specimen could well have been the pattern for the inflorescence of E. verbenaefolium shown in Britton & Brown, Ill. Fl. iii. fig. 3624, p. 310 (1898). There seems no valid reason further to doubt that EuPATORIUM PrILOsUM Walt. (1788) is the earliest and correct name for E. verbenaefolium Michx. (1803) or E. teucrifolium Willd. (1804). EUPATORIUM LINEARIFOLIUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 199 (1788). It has generally been inferred, without examination of Walter's material, that E. linearifolium is the extreme and wide-ranging variety of E. hyssopifolium L. with very narrowly linear or linear- oblanceolate leaves only 0.5-5 mm. broad, these opposite or most often in whorls of 4 or 6 and subtending very dense suppressed axillary branchlets of fascicled shorter leaves. Following this common interpretation the senior author named and illustrated this commonest variety of E. hyssopifolium as var. linearifolium (Walt.) Fernald in Ruopora, xliv. 460, pl. 737, fig. 3 (1942). Most surprisingly, however, there is nothing of this sort in the Fraser series of Walter's plants. The only one of Walter’s preserved specimens which matches his description of E. lineari- folium, "foliis linearibus integris subverticillatis, calycibus 3 ad 9-floris", is no. 671 on page 44. This specimen, with few-leaved axillary fascicles, is a good match for E. tortifolium Chapm. in 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 227 Bot. Gaz. iii. 5 (1878), with "leaves vertical, lanceolate, entire, ., the upper ones linear, alternate; ... heads . . . 5- flowered; . . . Leaves 1-114 in. long", Walter's “foliis linearibus . subverticillatis” evidently referring to the false whorls produced by the suppressed axillary branches of few leaves which regularly occur in E. tortifolium, as shown by isotypic material from Chapman and Ravenel’s material from Santee Canal, the home of Thomas Walter. 16 is evident that the name E. tortifolium Chapm. (1878) must give way to E. LINEARI- FOLIUM Walt. (1788). 'The plant which has erroneously passed as Eupatorium lineari- foliwm 18 E. HYSSOPIFOLIUM L., var. calearatum, nom. nov., foliis anguste linearibus vel lineari-oblanceolatis integris 0.5-5 mm. latis, laminis primariis 3-6 em. longis oppositis vel verticillatis verticillis 4—6 foliis, fasciculo axillari densissime breviori.— Var. linearifolium sensu Fernald in Ruopora, xliv. 459, 460, pl. 737, fig. 3 (1942), not E. linearifolium Walt., basonym. Tyrer from dry sands back of beach near Bass River Light, Dennis, Massa- chusetts, September 2, 1918, Fernald & Long, no. 17,448 in Herb. Gray.; isotype in Herb. Phil. Асад. All others of Walter's new species of Eupatorium, in so far as specimens are preserved, seem to have been correctly interpreted. His E. fusco-rubrum, no. 733 on p. 46 of the collection, is small Ё. purpureum L. His E. Marrubium seems to be missing. Ё. foeniculoides (on p. 45) is represented by a large panicle of Е. capillifolium (Lam.) Small, based on Artemisia capillifolia Lam. (1783); while E. compositum (on p. 46) is represented by a char- acteristic inflorescence. 2. cordatum seems to be missing but a specimen of E. incarnatum is at the lower right hand corner of p. 46. No. 24 on page 44, marked simply "Eupatorium" is Kuhn?a eupatorioides L. (1762). Another specimen, marked simply Eupatorium (at the right on p. 45), is a characteristic summit of E. serotinum Michx. (1803); this can not be reconciled with any species defined by Walter. CHRYSANTHEMUM CAROLINIANUM Walt. Fl. Carol. 204 (1788). 'The specimen (684) in the Walter Herbarium is an exceptionally good one, the summit of a large flowering plant. It is, happily, what it was supposed to be when it was transferred to Boltonia as В. caroliniana (Walt.) Fern. in Rropona, xlii. 487, pl. 642 (1940). 228 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER The plant from which the latter plate was made very closely matches Walter’s specimen. CARDUUS SPINOSISSIMUS Walt. Fl. Carol. 194 (1788), our PLATE 1115, FIG. 1, X 2$, has generally been interpreted as identical with Cirsium horridulum Michx. Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 90 (1803). This identification of the two may have started with Darlington, Fl. Cestr. ed. 2: 438 (1837), Darlington reducing Cirsium horridulum to Carduus ‘“sprnosissimus, Walt.?” but giving a detailed description of the former. Even when, in КнорокА, xiii. 239, 240 (1911), Robinson pointed out that the combination Cirsium spinosissimum "*(Walt.) Scop." was a sad confusion, since Scopoli’s combination was really based on the European Cnicus spinosissimus L., he made no suggestion that Walter’s plant is not Cirsium horridulum. The TYPE of Walter's Carduus spinosissimus is a whole plant, even includiing the base, but it is not Cirsium horridulum. Instead, it is a very charac- teristic, small specimen of Cirsium Smallii Britton in Britt. & Millsp. Baham. Fl. 458 (1920), a renaming of Cirsium pinetorum Small, Fl. Miami, 199, 200 (1913), not Greenm. (1905), Small having originally called it Carduus pinetorum Small, Fl. Se. U. S. 1308, 1341 (1903). Walter’s plant is not only a good match for Florida material sent out by Small; it is almost identical with material collected from “Наї pineland" by Ravenel close to Walter's home, in Santee Canal, South Carolina. Owing to the European Cirsium spinosissimum (L.) Scop. the name C. SMALLII has right-of-way. Walter had two other species of Carduus and, from the char- acter of the tiny snips which he gave to Fraser, Asa Gray was justified in his manuscript note of February 9, 1839, in writing merely “Carduus = 3 thistles"". He was then unfamiliar, of course, with Cirsium Smallii, which was first recognized in 1903, and the two fragments mounted beside that superior specimen were of species then unfamiliar to him. Carduus virginianus L. was clearly described by Walter “foliis lanceolatis spinulosis” etc. and he obviously had that species. His third species was Carduus caroliniamus foliis amplexicaulibus, hastato-pinnatifidis, 2. spinis inaequalibus ciliatis, subtus tomentosis, calycibus aphyllis, squamis spinulosis, floribus paucis rubris. Rhodor: Plate 1115 — 25 Carbuus sPINOSISSIMUS Walt.: rra, 1, түрк, X 25 = Cirsium Smaku Britton, not Cirsium spinosissimum (1) Scop. CaRDUUS CAROLINIANUS Walt. = Crrsrum CAROLINIANUM (Walt.) Fernald & Schubert Carduus flaccidus Small and Cirsium flaccidum (Small) Petrak: ria. 2, Walter's TYPE, 25; FIGS. 3 and 4, portions of a recent specimen from Houston, Texas, E. Hall, no. 371, x3 X 1. Rhodora Plate 1116 LIN I ki TI ғ M LISTERA BANKSIANA Lindl. = L. caurina Piper: FIG. 1, TYPE, X 25 of L. banksiana at right; specimens, X 25, from Banks Island, Menzies, at left. L. cauRINA Piper: ric. 2, inflorescence, X 35, from Wreck Bay, west coast of Vancouver Island, W. R. Carter, no. 843. 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 229 In Кнорока, xlv. 509, 510 (1943) the senior author, engaged at that time in a close study of eastern North American Cirsium, pointed out the many characters which distinguish C. flaccidum (Small) Petrak in Beiheft. Bot. Centralbl. xxxv. Ab. 2: 543 (1917), based on Carduus flaccidus Small, Fl. Se. U. S. 1307, 1341 (1903), and Cirsium virginianum (L.) Michx. Among the many characters then noted were the following: “In C. virginianum the peduncle-like flowering branches have several bracteiform leaves, in C. flaccidum the peduncles are naked or with only 1 or 2 bracts; in C. virginianum the involucre is 1.5-3 cm. high, in C. flaccidum only up to 2 cm. high". The small bit preserved by Fraser (no. 376 on p. 25) 1s merely a portion of an inflorescence (our PLATE 1115, ria. 2, X 25) but it shows the naked leading peduncle of C. flaccidum and the involucre about 1.4 cm. high, a measurement below that shown in C. virginianum but duplicated or approximated by heads of many specimens of C. flaccidum. Fraser's fragment shows no well developed cauline leaves but numerous well collected specimens of C. flaccidum, such as Hall's material (our PLATE 1115, FIGs. З and 4) from slightly west of Small’s type-region, in eastern Texas, well display the ‘‘foliis amplexicaulibus hastato-pinnatifidis spinis inaequalibus ciliatis" of Carduus carolinianus. They also show the naked leading peduncle as in the fragment preserved in the Fraser volume. 1%, therefore, seems that we should call the characteristic southern and inland species Crrsium carolinianum (Walt.), comb. nov. Carduus caro- linianus Walt. Fl. Carol. 195 (1788). C. flaccidus Small, Fl. Se. U. S. 1307, 1341 (1903). Cirsium flaccidum (Small) Petrak in Beiheft. Bot. Centrabl. xxxv. Ab. 2: 543 (1917); Fernald in Кнорока, xlv. 509 (1943). Our PLATE 1115, Figs. 2 and 3. Part V. А FEW SPECIES OF LATER AUTHORS BETULA EXCELSA Ait. Hort. Kew. iii. 337 (1789) is, as shown by the very complete TYPE preserved, not an American, although thought by Aiton to be “Nat. of North America", and by various American and European students guessed to be B. papyrifera Marsh. There must have been other misconceptions regarding it, these reflected in the specific name and the English “Tall Birch Tree", for the fruiting type shows round-ovate leaves 230 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER hardly 3 em. long and nearly as broad, while the excellent plate of the cultivated B. excelsa in Watson, Dendr. Brit. ii. t. 95 (1825) is obviously from a similar source, the tree described by Watson as 12-14 feet high (“70—80 in native country"), the leaves “‘subcordate-rotund, subincised-dentate", after which Watson gave the “Country . . . Province of Maine, Hudson's River". As what many botanists would delight to call him, a native “Mainiac’’, the senior author can vouch that nothing like it is known from Maine (nor from ‘‘Hudson’s River"). Schneider, Ill. Handb. Laubholzk. i. 108 (1904), called it a hybrid of B. pumila L. and B. papyrifera, a not very convincing identification, while Rehder, Man. Cult. Trees and Shrubs, 142 (1927) said ““регһарз a form of B. pubescens [European]’’, a reasonable guess. FAGUS FERRUGINEA Ait. Hort. Kew. iii. 362 (1789) is charac- teristic F. grandifolia Ehrh., var. caroliniana (Loud.) Fern. & Rehd., forma mollis Fern. & Rehd. in Кнорока, ix. 114 (1907). Aiton's brief description, “foliis ovato-oblongis remote acute serratis acuminatis subtus tomentosis", indicates pubescence but not the leaf-base. His specimen shows the relatively broad leaves of the fruiting branch rounded to subcordate at base and the involucre with subdistant prickles. "Those who consider this а separate species should note that F. ferruginea is, apparently, the earliest binomial for it. CYPRIPEDIUM REGINAE Walt., forma albolabium, nom. nov. C. spectabile Salisb., @. album Sweet, Brit. Flower Garden, iii. t. 240A (1828); C. Reginae album Rolfe in Orchid Rev. v. 196 (1897) and xix. 208 (1911); C. reginae, forma album House in Bull. N. Y. State Mus., nos. 243-244: 37 (1923); not C. album Ait. Hort. Kew. iii. 303 (1789), basonym of all three combinations. When Sweet described the plant with “labello extus albo" he called the one with “labello incarnato” Cypripedium spectabile a. incarnatum, and in the general synonymy of the two he cited C. album of Aiton. While it is possible to argue that Sweet did not mean that his 8. album was truly C. album Ait., nomencla- turally, Aiton's name being there cited, must be considered the basonym. Sweet recognized that his a. incarnatum was the plant which had long been cultivated in England and he said of the “beautiful white variety": “We had never before seen or heard of a white variety". It is unfortunate, then, that he picked up 1948] Fernald & Schubert,—Studies in the British Herbaria 231 Aiton’s misleading name. Rolfe, nearly 80 years later (1897), left no doubt when he wrote: ““А most beautiful albino of Cypri- pedium Reginae, better known as C. spectabile, might recently be seen in the Orchid house at Kew, in which the rose-pink colour had vanished from the lip, leaving it as pure snow-white as the sepals and petals. . . The old specific name of C. album given by Aiton has been superseded by the still older C. Reginae, but can be most appropriately revived for the variety—C. Reginae album." In describing Cypripedium album Aiton said nothing in his description about the lip or its color, although he called the plant “White Lady's Slipper" to contrast with yellow and purple C. Calceolus and with C. acaule, the latter “flore purpureo"; but he cited Plukenet’s figure of the American plant ‘‘flore gemello [frequently so in C. reginae] candido venis purpureis striato". Since the plate in Bot. Mag. vi. t. 216 (1793), of the plant then being cultivated at Kew and elsewhere in England as C. album Ait., shows the roseate lip of ordinary C. reginae, we appealed for aid to Mr. Victor Summerhayes, Keeper of Orchids in the Herbarium at Kew. From his very illuminating letter of July 14, 1948 we quote: We have a copy of an uncommon book by a Miss Margaret Meen entitled “Exotic Plants from the Royal Gardens at Kew”, consisting of two parts both published in 1790. This consists of a number of folio coloured plates and plate 3 of part i represents Cypripedium album. In this plate the sepals and petals are white but the lip is quite dark reddish with a paler interior. Taking this plate in conjunction with that in Botanical Magazine, t. 216 and Aiton's own citation of Plukenet's plant, there seems to me little doubt that the plant in general cultivation at that time, including Kew, had & pink or reddish lip and that the albino form, with pure white lip, was not grown until later. I quite agree with you that the name “album” cannot be applied to the white-lipped variety, at any rate not with Aiton's name associated with it. Most singularly, the brief diagnosis of Cypripedium reginae Walt. Fl. Carol. 222 (1778) contains the phrases “саше multi- floro, flore albo magno". The specimen in the Fraser series (on p. 39) has two flowers and the lip is obviously darker than the sepals and petals; 7. e. it was the usual roseate-lipped plant. LISTERA BANKSIANA Lindl. Gen. & Sp. Orchid. Pl. 455 (1840); our PLATE 1116. "The original sheet of this species in herb. 282 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER Lindley at Kew, our FIG. 1, X 24, contains two collections from Banks Island (on the west coast of British Columbia), collected by Menzies, the material at the right being the түрЕ, but with two much better specimens at the left, also from Banks Island, Menzies, which are identical. Below the latter specimen has been added ''?California Mr Menzies” which is confusing and an assumption not well according with the location of the original Banks Island, an island nearly 50 miles long and lying between latitudes 53 and 54 degrees, opposite Graham Island of the Queen Charlotte group. The specimens are a very close match for L. caurina Piper in Erythea, vi. 32 (1898), our ға. 2, X 3%, and the latter name should lapse in favor of L. banksiana Lindl., based upon “Ophrys banksiana Menzies MSS.". Wiegand, in Bull. Torr. Bot. Cl. xxvi. 157 et seq. (1899), somewhat further complicated matters by assuming that the Banks Island plant is L. convallarioides (Sw.) Torr., from which, however, it differs in many characters, most notable being the relative length of bracts and pedicels. Notes made at Kew, where L. banksiana was examined, indicate that the bracts were “much shorter than the pedicels”. In L. caurina the bracts are described as “14 the length of the pedicel". In L. conval- larioides, on the other hand, the bracts and pedicels are equal or with the bracts barely exceeding the pedicels and in L. Eschscholz- тапа the pedicels are somewhat exceeded by the bracts. It would seem, therefore, that the identity is between the latter two species rather than that all four are identical. Wiegand believed that Piper’s L. caurina does not occur in Alaska (to the north of Banks Island), stating that ‘‘there is no other species [except L. convallarioides] of this section found in Alaska". More recent collecting shows that L. banksiana (L. caurina) extends northward into southeastern Alaska, considerably to the north of Banks Island. ListeRA EscHSCHOLZIANA Cham. in Linnaea iii. 33 (1828); our PLATE 1117, X %. There has been some question regarding the identity of this plant; Wiegand, l. c. 160, merely inferring from the description that it is L. convallarioides (Sw.) Torr.; while Ames, Enum. Orchids U. 8. & Can. 75 (1924) made the note: “Listera Eschscholoziana Chamisso, which is questionably referred to L. convallarioides (Swartz) Nuttall [not a validly made Rhodora Plate 1117 4 E су E A Vd С Aot nanu A ol a c "vá С фри ae "eel. a Mich. v tirk tht piana Ё. АТ E М Ue А ^ Ита Слоан C рано in amn C 33 fz ж олар etre! =. 1029 HERB J GAY Рен by Dr Heber. February 0964, LisrrRA FscuscHOLZIANA Chamisso CONVALLARIOIDES (Sw.) Torr.: FIG. 1, isorTYPE of L. Eschscholziana, X 15, Chamisso in Herb. Gray.; ; FIGS. 2 and 3, two specimens, X 15, from Chamisso in Herb. J. Gay in the Lindley Herbarium (Kew). 1948] Rouleau,—Two New Names in Populus 233 combination by Nuttall], may be conspecific with L. caurina Piper". It is, consequently, worth noting that in the Gray Herbarium there are three plants of the original collection bearing Chamisso's own label. This collection, with the label, is shown in PLATE 1117, Fic. 1, the material also bearing Wiegand's identifieation as L. convallarioides and validation of the latter name by Hultén. Similar material from the herbarium of Jacques Gay is in the Lindley Herbarium at Kew, this marked by Gay “Chamisso misit Jan. 1829". These two specimens better displaying the broad lip are shown in FIG. 2. TWO NEW NAMES IN POPULUS ERNEST ROULEAU A good geographical variety of Populus balsamifera L. is the tree that was known as Populus balsamifera var. Michauxit (Dode) Henry (P. Tacamahacca Mill. var. Michauxi (Dode) Farwell). It ranges from George River, Ungava, to the Thunder Bay District, Ontario, south to Newfoundland, Gaspé Peninsula, northern New England, northern New York and northern Michi- gan. Srour (Journ. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 30: 32. 1929) has claimed that Populus candicans Aiton represents the same variety and made the new combination Populus Tacamahacca var. candicans (Aiton) Stout in place of P. Tacamahacca var. Michauxi; the commonly cultivated Balm-of-Gilead being considered by him as a clone of this variety. This variety is characterized by its cordate or subcordate leaves, very often strongly asymmetrical at the base, a little pubescent underneath along the veins, and by its slightly pubes- cent petioles. If one goes back to Doper’s description of Populus Michauar (Bull. Soc. Hist. Nat. Autun, 18: 220, pl. 12, fig. 100. 1905; re- printed in Extr. Monogr. Inéd. Populus p. 62 et in Fedde, Rep. Spec. Nov. 3: 355. 1907), it is very surprising to find the following description: 100 F. tur. ovales-elliptiques, arrondies 4 la b., un peu en coeur à l'insertion du pétiole, acuminées; f. més. 284 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER sublancéolées, cunéiformes, un peu arrondies А la b., acuminées, subrhomboidales; f. brach. elliptiques- deltoides, largement arrondies à la b., un peu en coeur à l'insertion du pétiole, aigües-acuminées; jeunes pétioles pubescents et jeunes feuilles ciliées, puis glabrescents; dents en scie peu profonde, peu apparentes; dessous des f. blanc, un peu roussátre; turions un peu pubescents........ Pop. Michauxi. = P. balsamifera Michaux f., Hist. Arb. for. Am. sept. 1813 (non Nouv. Duh., L. pro parte.) Amérique du Nord. C**, The only mention of cordate or subcordate leaf is in the “un peu en coeur à l'insertion du pétiole", both for the macroblasts and the brachyblasts; that is to say that the leaf is a little cordate at its junction with the petiole, although the general outline is oval-elliptie, rounded at the base. Moreover, Dope’s figures do not represent any cordate or subcordate leaves. In addition, the synonym given by Dope (i. e. Populus balsamifera Michx. f., Hist. Arb. For. Am. Sept. 3: 306, 307, t. 13, fig. 1. 1813) is a good illustration of typical Populus balsamifera with ovate leaves. So, Populus Michauxi Dode must be reduced to the synonymy of Р. balsamifera L. It is then necessary to propose a new name for this plant as the name-bringing synonym does not represent the identity of the tree as understood by HENRY, FARWELL, SARGENT, REHDER and others. I propose to associate this variety with the name of Professor MERRITT LynpoN FERNALD who has very often col- lected this variety in Newfoundland, Gaspé and Maine. POPULUS BALSAMIFERA L., var. Fernaldiana, nom. nov. Populus balsamifera var. Michauxii Henry, Gard. Chron., ser. 3, 59: 230. 1916 (as to plant involved only); Populus balsamifera var. candicans Gray, Man. Bot. N. U. S. (ed. 2) 419. 1856 (pro parte, as to plant involved only); Populus Tacamahacca var. Michauaii Farwell, Ruopora 21:101. 1919 (as to plant involved only); Populus Tacamahacca var. candicans Stout, Journ. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 30: 32. 1929 (pro parte, as to plant involved only). In order to verify Srout’s statement that the Balm-of-Gilead, i. e. Populus candicans Ait., was the same as P. balsamifera var. Fernaldiana, or but a clone of it, I asked Dr. GeonaE TAYLOR of the British Museum for a photograph of the type-specimen of Populus candicans Aiton, which he very kindly sent to me. The 1948] Rouleau,— Two New Names in Populus 235 type-specimen of AITON’s species is but a macroblast of good straight Populus balsamifera so that Arrov's name has to be re- duced to the synonymy of that species. Of course, the easiest way to identify this tree has been to match the leaves with those illustrated by Mıcmavux rF. who was the first to draw a figure of what he thought was the newly described Populus candicans Aiton without referring to the type-specimen. There has been much discussion about the status of the Balm- of-Gilead, since it has been confused with Populus balsamifera var. Fernaldiana, has never been found in the wild state (though often freely escaping from cultivation and then, sterile) and that it is known only as a pistillate tree. I prefer to consider the Balm-of-Gilead as a hybrid, propagated from a single clone. That the Balm-of-Gilead has a series of characters which makes it resemble Populus balsamifera, I admit. The under-surface of the leaves is rusty, the petioles are only slightly flattened, but these are the only characters that lead one into Populus § Taca- mahacca. On the other hand, the crenate teeth of the leaves, the long petioles, the type of venation, the long-pedicelled female flowers and the cordate leaves tend to prove that there is some blood of § Aegirus in it. The petioles covered with stiff fulvous hairs, the lower surface of the leaves also covered with hairs, seem to indicate that the other parent of this hybrid might have been Populus deltoides Marsh. var. missouriensis Henry. Young specimens of the last variety have the leaves and petioles with the same type of pubes- cence as in the hybrid. In the hybrid, this pubescence persists, whilst in P. deltoides var. missouriensis, it usually disappears but sometimes persists (P. deltoides var. missouriensis f. pilosa (Sarg.) Palmer & Steyermark). It is quite probable that this hybrid originated in North America and that it was later intro- duced into European gardens. In order to prevent future confusion as to the application of the name of the Balm-of-Gilead (i. e. Populus candicans sensu Michx. f. et auct. plur., non Ait.), I propose a new name that will recall its popular name, i. e. х PopruLus gileadensis stat. et nom. nov. (balsamifera X deltoides var. missouriensis). Populus candicans sensu Michx. f., Hist. Arb. For. Am. Sept. 3: 308, 309, t. 13, fig. 2. 1813 (as to 236 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER plant involved only, non Aiton, Hortus Kewensis 3: 406. 1789); Populus balsamifera var. candicans Gray, Man. Bot. N. U. S. (ed. 2) 419. 1856 (pro parte, as to plant involved only); Aigeiros candicans Nieuwl., Am. Midl. Nat. 3: 223. 1914 (as to plant involved only); Populus Tacamahacca var. candicans Stout, Journ. N. Y. Bot. Gard. 30: 32. 1929 (pro parte, as to plant involved only); Populus Tacamahacca sensu Moss, Cambr. Brit. Fl. 2: 13. 1914; sensu Schinz & Thellung, Viert. Naturf. Gesell. Zürich 60: 349. 1915; sensu Farwell, Ruopona 21: 101. 1919 (as to plant involved only), not Miller, Gard. Dict. (ed. 8), no. 6. 1768); P. ontariensis Desf. [Cat. Hort. Reg. Par. 1829] ex Loudon, Arbor. Frut. Brit. (ed. 1), 3: 1676. 1838 (in synonymy). The name Populus ontariensis Desf. was never validly pub- lished and there is still doubt if it can be properly reduced to the synonymy of X P. gileadensis, since the specific epithet tends to show that the original tree seen by DxrsroNTAINES might have been an indigenous tree. Dealing with the taxonomy and nomenclature of Populus is not an easy task. Before a satisfactory treatment of the species of the genus can be worked out, good specimens of flowers (male and female) collected at various stages, together with leaves (both of the macroblasts and the brachyblasts) collected from the same tree are very badly needed. INSTITUT BOTANIQUE, UNIVERSITÉ DE MONTRÉAL. NOTES ON THE FLORA OF ONTARIO. I. EPIPACTIS HELLEBORINE F. H. MoNTGOMERY It is almost sixty years since the introduced orchid, the Broad- leaved Epipactis, E. Helleborine (L.) Crantz, was reported occur- ring near Toronto, Ontario, by Messrs. Otto and Ward White!. This first Canadian record was in 1890, and since that time the observation of it has been considered interesting, but unworthy of serious comment. During the past few years my interest in the plant has been increased by frequently seeing it in the field, and by the receipt of specimens for identification. An appeal to herbaria and many naturalists for specimens and information brought to me a num- 1948] Montgomery,—Notes on the Flora of Ontario 237 ber of herbarium sheets and reports, and from these, I have pre- pared the following map showing what is known of its present distribution. The counties for which information is available by herbarium specimens, represented by black dots, and recorded observations, shown by clear circles, are as follows: 3, Elgin; 4, Norfolk; 6, Welland; 8, Wentworth; 12, Brant; 15, Waterloo; 16, Wellington; 17, Halton; 21, Simcoe; 22, Peel; 23, York; 24, Ontario; 25, E EX Epipactis Helleborine(L)Crantz. e Herbarium Records O Sight Records Durham; 26, Northumberland; 30, Leeds; 37, Carleton; 40, Peterborough; 49, Prince Edward (See map). It is not expected that this should represent a complete picture of its distribution, for it is undoubtedly much more widely spread than present records show. The fact that it is common at the eastern, western and northern limits shown on the map would seem to verify this supposition. More extensive collecting will probably show it existing in all of the counties along Lake Ontario and the St. Lawrence River, and along the Ottawa River to the vicinity of Ottawa. It is possible that it is rarer in south- western Ontario, since several competent observers and collectors have not reported it west of Waterloo County. Northward, it 288 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER is said to be very common around Lake Simcoe in Simcoe County, number 21 on the map. The information also shows that the orchid is found most fre- quently in open deciduous woods, borders of woods, and on wood- ed hillsides, particularly along the river valleys. Occasionally it is found in open spaces such as meadows, lawns and gardens. Epipactis, like many other Old World introductions, is apparently finding its Ontario home very much to its liking, for it occurs commonly in most of the localities shown on the map, and in a few places becomes frequent enough to be classed as a weed. During 1947, I received an interesting specimen collected at Cedar Springs, near Hamilton, by Miss Elizabeth Taylor of McMaster University. She describes the plant as having creamy colored leaves and pinkish flowers, instead of the usual green leaves and purple tinged, greenish flowers. Frère Marie Victorin describes apparently similar variations occurring in plants found in Quebec?. I wish to thank all who have assisted in this investigation, particularly Mr. Hubert Н. Brown of Toronto, from whose her- barium much material was obtained, and Dr. F. A. Clarkson, also of Toronto, for much pertinent information. ONTARIO AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE, Guelph, Ontario. (1) Macoun, J. M., The Canadian Record of Science, 1894. (2) ManrE-VicTonIN, FRÈRE, Flore Laurentienne, Imprimerie de la Salle, Montreal, 1935. ERIGERON coMPosrrUS Pursh, var. pniscorpEvus Gray, forma trifidus (Hook.), stat. nov. Е, trifidus Hook. Fl. Bor.-Am. ii. 17, t. cxx (1834). Е. compositus, var. trifidus (Hook.) Gray, Proc. Am. Acad. xvi. 90 (1880). It is most unfortunate that the rules of nomenclature demand that, because of priority of publication, the name of a trivial and unusual form (var. discoideus) must be taken up to include а wide-ranging and locally abundant plant with showy ligules and that the latter has to be treated as a mere form of the almost aberrant state of the inclusive variety. In the Rocky Mountain area, in Arctic America and Greenland, as well as on the Gaspé 1948] Fernald—Erigeron compositus 239 Peninsula, the abundant plant is, as noted, the ligulate-flowered one, while the discoid plants are very exceptional ones growing with them. In Brittonia, vi. 242-244 (1947) Cronquist treats plants with leaves “mostly 2-3 times ternate” as var. glabratus Macoun (1884), this most inadequately described merely as “Perfectly smooth"—inadequately because the latest monogra- pher of the genus does not use the degree of pubescence or its absence as of importance in the species. Ву him plants with "Leaves mostly only once ternate" are called a different variety, var. discoideus Gray (1862), this variety including the basic Æ. trifidus Hook. and E. pedatus Nutt., E. compositus var. trifidus (Hook.) Gray, E. Gormani Greene and several later synonyms. In the Gray Herbarium Cronquist has annotated many speci- mens from Greenland and Gaspé as var. discoideus, although they show, especially among the newer leaves, plenty of twice ternate blades, and other eastern, as well as western, specimens with just such leaves are similarly annotated; while in eastern strongly pubescent plants, annotated by the monographer as var. glabratus, leaves variously cleft, from simply trifid to twice ternate, аге readily seen. In fact, the type of var. discoideus (Parry no. 5) shows several twice ternate blades, while of the leaves of his Æ. trifidus Hooker wrote: “а few . . . being compound". Further- more, Nuttall’s description of the leaves of his E. pedatus read: "primary leaves simple or trifid, afterwards pedate, unequally five-cleft"; and Greene’s account of his E. Gormani was “Earliest foliage merely 3-cleft or lobed . . . later leaves with the lateral lobes, and sometimes the terminal one, 3-lobed". In other words, the later and abundant leaves are often quite as much cleft as in the so-called var. glabratus. In view of the magnification of the value of the degree of leaf- cutting and the complete neglect of the fact that most plants treated by Cronquist as E. compositus, var. discoideus have showy ligules, it is disconcerting, to put it mildly, to those whose field-experience has taught them that the scattered or few almost rayless individuals which, by close watching, may be found in a large colony of definitely ligulate Erigeron strigosus, are casual sports—it is disconcerting to see that a monographer of the genus maintains as а good variety E. strigosus, var. dis- coideus Robbins, the plants with “ligules about equalling the 240 Rhodora [SEPTEMBER disk’’, 7. e. essentially invisible, and then, on top of that, adds as a “var. nov.” the plants with ligules obsolete, these being var. eligulatus Cronquist. Now, as stated, careful observers know that such aberrations (of the plants) are not true varieties, in the sense of having definite ranges. It should be noted, therefore, that when var. discoideus of Robbins was published by Gray, Man. ed. 5: 237 (1867) it was not given a separate paragraph nor was its name in bold-face type. As Gray explicitly stated, p. 16, it was one of the variations “which cannot be doubted” to belong in the species, while those to which he gave independent para- graphs and bold-face type (Thalictrum purpurascens var. cerif- erum, Ranunculus Flammula var. reptans, or Geum radiatum var. Peckii, for example) were “зо distinct and peculiar that they have been, or readily may be, taken for species." The varieties of Gray's first group are often such as are now generally con- sidered to be forms, а term which he did not use in its technical sense. As reflecting the understanding of those whose field- observations have been exceptionally accurate, one may quote Dame & Collins, in their Flora of Middlesex County, Massa- chusetts, 49 (1888) under E. strigosus “the form known as var. discoideus"' ; while the reduction of it essentially to synonymy by Gray (Synoptical Fl.) and its omission by Britton & Brown are eloquent. As a striking form forma discoideus is interesting but the difference from it of var. eligulatus seems not very practical nor necessary.—M. L. FERNALD. Volume 50, no. 596, including pages 181—216 and plates 1103—1111, was issued 16 August, 1948. 000га JOURNAL ОЕ THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. October, 1948. No. 598, CONTENTS: The Confused Bases of the Name Pinus palustris. AREORA жыгачка ce canes Fh НЛ ТО, Pec! ceca ee 241 The Proposed Changes in Article 58, International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature. Norman C. Fassett. ............... 240 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. DUPLICATE BOOKS FOR SALE Bigelow, Jacob. Florula Bostoniensis. Second edition. Boston, ША. О! Миг Меке; 7, о ee ss... $1.50 [Britton, N. L. et al.] List of Pteridophyta and Spermatophyta growing without cultivation in northeastern North America. Mem. Torrey Bot. Club, vol. 5. New York, 1893-94. 377 pp. BENE Leere cruces leche aus Fin ee cvs as e ELI $1.50 Gray, A. List of the Writings of Dr. Asa Gray. Chronologically arranged, with an Index. 1888. 68 рр. .................. $ .50 Hitchcock, А. S. & Chase, Agnes. North American Species of Panicum. Contrib. U. S. Nat. Herb. vol. 15. Рр. xiv+396, сИ eu ww. Cu .......у.....у eins esac nese $2.00 Strasburger, E., Noll, F., Schenck, H., Karsten, G. Textbook of Botany. 4th English ed. revised with the 10th German ed. by W. H. Lang. 782 Illus. (partly colored.) London, 1912. РОР РРА ЕЕЕ AS ONERE $2.50 Vasey, George. Grasses of the Southwest. 2 pts., 100 plates. Washington, 1890-91. Large 8vo. Half leather, rubbed. .. $2.50 Wolle, Е. Desmids of the United States and List of American Pediastrums. 53 colored plates. Bethlehem, 1884. Cloth. $15.00 Prices include cost of transportation in U. S. A. Address Librarian GRAY HERBARIUM OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY 79 Garden St., Cambridge 38, Mass. CARD-INDEX OF NEW GENERA, SPECIES AND VARIETIES OF AMERICAN PLANTS For all students of American Plants the Gray Herbarium Card-index of Botanical Names is indispensable. It is a work of reference essen- tial to scientific libraries and academies and all centers of botanical activity. It includes genera and species from 1885 to date. The sub- divisions of species from 1885 to date are now included and from 1753 to 1886 are in the process of being inserted. Issued quarterly, at $25.50 per thousand cards. Sets of paper facsimiles of issues 1-186 (through July, 1945) alphabeted in a single series can now be supplied for $4,500 f.o.b. Massachusetts; issue 187 through 194 at $22.50 per thousand. GRAY HERBARIUM of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass., U. S. A. Rbhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. October, 1948. No. 598. THE CONFUSED BASES OF THE NAME PINUS PALUSTRIS M. L. FERNALD While Dr. Schubert’s and my study of the only probably existing type of Pinus palustris Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 8, species no. 14 (1768) was in course of publication in RHODORA, 1. 181—186 (1948) Dr. E. L. Little, Jr. of the Forest Service was publishing, in Phytologia, 11. 457—458 (1948), a conclusion which was quite contrary to ours. Subsequently I have received from Mr. W. A. Dayton a letter in which he pleads for the retention of the name Pinus palustris for Longleaf Pine and a statement that Little had shown that the name, P. australis Michx. f. Hist. Arb. Am. i. 64, pl. 6 (1810), was an illegitimate substitute, because after his diagnosis Michaux filius had cited “Р. palustris. Linn." Dr. Schubert and I had felt that P. d'üstralis, described in great detail, beautifully illustrated and clearly understood by the younger Michaux, who had for years known it with evident understanding, was a wholly legitimate name, the synonym “Р. palustris, Linn." being what nowadays would be cited as "sensu L.", although Linnaeus had no such species. "The younger Michaux not only clearly defined, discussed, illustrated and knew the species; he specially pointed out (p. 85) that it could not be what some others, including **Linn.", i. e. Willde- now, but notably Lambert, had described as P. palustris. F. A. Michaux was definitely defining a new species, not merely pub- lishing a substitute-name, in the manner of Salisbury and some others. 242 Rhodora [OcroBER As already shown, the only extant specimen which bears in a hand, possibly Miller’s, the identification as P. palustris is a leafy branch of P. Taeda L. and Miller's account of the wood and the habitat are those of the early stands of P. Taeda, not those of P. australis. The phrases in Miller's account which seem vividly to impress those who wish to keep the names they have learned are "foliis longissimis", “the longest leaves" and “leaves are a foot or more in length", without too much regard to the charac- ters which do not belong to P. australis. As already noted, “longissimis” could well have been in contrast with the relatively short-leaved species more familiar to both Miller and Du Hamel (quoted by him). The “foot or more in length" is the only contradictory phrase. Although Pinus palustris dates nomenclaturally from 1768, the first edition of Miller's Dictionary in which binomials were some- what consistently used, Miller's treatment there was a consid- erable departure from his first account. The species was, ap- parently, first defined in Mill. Gard. Dict. ed. 3, iii. sp. no. 19 (1737) as 19. Pinus Americana palustris patula, longissimis & viridibus setts. Marsh spreading American Pine, with the longest green Leaves. and, some pages beyond, Miller went on: АП these Sorts of American Pines should be planted on a Soil rather moist than dry, but especially the nineteenth Sort, which grows nat- urally on low moist boggy Places, and will not thrive on a dry Soil. This Tree hath а very remarkable Growth; for the Branches spread on the Ground to a great Distance from the Stem, and never rise in Height [^patula"]. Not only the habitat, “low moist boggy Places", but the “very remarkable Growth" is completely wrong for P. australis. For an unprejudiced account of Longleaf Pine see Charles Mohr, The Timber Pines of the Southern United States, U. S. Dept. Agric., Div. Forestry, Bull. no. 13 (1896). There plates I and II show the branches certainly not “spread on the Ground to a great Distance from the Stem, and never rise in Height". In other words, the original Pinus Americana palustris patula of Miller had little in common with Longleaf Pine. By 1741 (date ace. to Pritzel), in his ed. 4, Miller slightly modified his description, dropping out the words “patula” and 1948] Fernald,—Confused Bases of Name Pinus palustris 243 "spreading". His discussion, however, showed that whatever he called P. Americana palustris was neither successful nor appreciated in England: “There are very few Plants of the nineteenth Sort at present in England, which are grown to any Height; but some Years ago there were many of them growing at Mr. Balls, near Exeter, which were upward of ten Feet high; but these were destroyed by their Owner, who did not like them: this Sort grows on Swamps in America,” ete. By the 7th edition (1759) Miller began to share responsibility with DuHamel and had “been informed" and had “not heard" of various items which he repeated in his binomial ed. 8 (sp. no. 14), quoted by Fernald & Schubert. These add nothing to one’s confidence that Pinus palustris was really or primarily Longleaf Pine. Then came the era of still further misunderstandings and mis- interpretations. In 1787 Wangenheim published his Beytrag zur teutschen holzgerechten Forstwissenschaft, die Anpflanzung Nordamericanischer Holzarten, a work in which many state- ments were made which were at once seized upon, by those who had no first-hand experience with our trees, as the last word. It was Wangenheim’s account of the habitat, range and wood of “Pinus palustris” or "Swamp Pine", as quoted in translation by Lambert! in his Descr. Gen. Pinus, 27, 28, t. 20 (1803), which finally persuaded F. A. Michaux (his p. 85) to abandon the name P. palustris for Longleaf Pine; and surely anyone who knows P. australis must agree that Lambert was as badly confused as was Miller. The great brush of foliage, with staminate aments, was not from Miller but was drawn from one brought back “by that indefatigable colleetor, Mr. John Fraser", who was not born until 13 years after Miller's first account of his Pinus Americana palustris. The cone, described by Lambert '*Strobili spithamaci, subeylindracei, recti, tubereuloso-murieati, spinis brevibus, in- 1The various editions of Miller's Dictionary, whether folio or “abridged”, are obscure enough to follow but Lambert's Description of the Genus Pinus was one of the most republished and rearranged of works, to the point that in Joura. Linn. Soc. Lond, (Bot.), xlviii. 439—466 (1930) Renkema & Ardagh were forced to use 28 pages in order to enumerate and clarify the very many issues, rearrangements of plates and other changes. Fortunately for us, the treatment in the folio issue of ed. 1 (1803) was not materially changed in ‘‘Editio minor” of 1832. In the former tab. 20 consists of à staminate flowering branch, with great brush of foliage 4 dm. across, a cone and details: in the latter these illustrations are cut apart, tab. 24 being three-eighths of the brush, tab. 25 the cone and details. 244 Rhodora [OcroBER curvis, obsoletis", is, on the other hand, what at Miller's estab- lishment, the Chelsea Gardens, was supposed to belong to Miller's species, Lambert definitely saying: “I am indebted to Mr. Fairbairn, of Chelsea Gardens, for the cone from which that in the plate was drawn". Now, the cone of Longleaf Pine, as well illustrated by F. A. Michaux, who intimately knew the tree, by Mohr, l. c. plates V and VI, who was considered by the Division of Forests competent to prepare a memoir, by Faxon in Sargent, Silva, xi. t. dxe or by Shaw, Genus Pinus, pl. xxviii (1914) and by very many preserved specimens, has the central apophysis of each scale with a strong and recurved unguiculate short spine, very tough and sharp in dried cones. Examination of the drawing of the cone which, at Chelsea Gardens nearly a century and a half ago, was preserved as representing Miller’s species, shows apophyses projected for- ward and not with a recurving short spine (“spinis brevibus, incurvis, obsoletis"). This drawing at once set the standard and was copied repeatedly—by Loudon, James Forbes (Pinetum Woburnense) and others; but if accurately drawn (and who can doubt it?) it could hardly have come originally from Longleaf Pine. It is, however, very similar, in the central umbo of the scale, with the prickle obscure (*'obsoletis") and not recurved, to the cone of the common eastern Mexican P. montezumae Lambert, Descr. Pinus, ed. of 1832: t. 22 (1832). P. montezumae was a renaming of P. occidentalis sensu HBK. (1817), not Swartz; Kunth, in describing it, citing many stations, including Mt. Orizaba and others within or adjacent to the state of Vera Cruz. Comparison of Lambert’s cone, which at the Chelsea Gardens was supposed to represent Miller’s P. palustris, with the illustration of Lambert’s original cone under his P. montezu- mae or with those shown as P. montezwmae in Shaw’s Pines of Mexico, pl. xiv (1909) or his Genus Pinus, pl. xxv (1914) shows not much to distinguish them. It is impossible to scan the pages of Miller’s ed. 8 without noting hundreds of entries such as the following: “‘sent me from La Vera Cruz, by the late Dr. Houstoun" (Jussiaea, no. 5). In other words, Dr. William Houstoun (1695-1733), Surgeon to the South Sea Company, was regularly supplying the Chelsea Gardens with material from Vera Cruz and other areas in eastern Mexico. What more 1948] Fernald,—Confused Bases of Name Pinus palustris 245 probable than his including fruits of the more conspicuous trees? It does not add to the clear identification of Longleaf Pine as Miller’s P. palustris, that his successors at Chelsea Gardens and the learned Dr. Lambert (and his many followers) should have used to illustrate it a cone which obviously did not come from Longleaf Pine. Incidentally, as already noted, since the only preserved specimen which may have been identified by Miller as his P. palustris is a foliage-specimen of P. Taeda L., the con- clusion is obvious. If other evidence were needed that the name Pinus palustris covered several species and is not clearly identifiable with just one, it can easily be found—it makes itself very obvious. For instance, Poiret, in Lam. Encyc. v. 341, sp. no. 12 (1804), writing at approximately the same time as Lambert’s first edition and citing the stock phrases of DuHamel, Miller and others, about a tree of “les lieux humides & marécageux”, but with leaves only “longues de huit à neuf pouces", gave a rather startling account of its immediate distinction from other pines because of “1а position de ses feuilles toutes unilatérales ou attachées à un seul côté des branches", this reading, not like a description of the heavy brushes of overlapping fascicles of Longleaf Pine but very much like an account of a branch with a single unilateral row of fascicles of Pinus patula Schlecht. & Chamisso of Vera Cruz and adjacent states of eastern Mexico. See Shaw, Pines of Mexico, pl. xxii. This again shows the utter confusion which early inter- preters of Miller’s hearsay species, P. palustris, added to the problem; and when Lambert in a monograph of the genus so sumptuously published as to look authoritative to those who did not trouble to check the sources, swallowed whole everything Wangenheim had written he showed as blank ignorance of Long- leaf Pine as did Miller. As noted above, it seems to have been this inclusion of Wangenheim’s impossible account which forced Е. A. Michaux to abandon the name Р. palustris, for he cited as “défectueux” details of Lambert’s plate and quoted Lambert’s account of the wood, etc. as offering a description ‘‘de toute manière, une telle disparité avec la mienne". Lambert’s sum- mary from Wangenheim, also translated by Michaux into English and French, was as follows: Wangenheim found it in Pennsylvania, as far northward as forty degrees latitude, but there, he remarks, ф is generally solitary and the 246 Rhodora [OCTOBER offspring of cultivation.. . . Dry, elevated land does not seem to suit it, but low marshy spots sufficiently sheltered, says Wangenheim. . . . The bark is grey and much cracked upon old trees. The wood is of a reddish white colour, soft, light, and very sparingly impregnated with resin; it soon decays and burns badly. It is so little esteemed, that as long as any other kind of wood is to be had, not the least use is made of it. Compare the authoritative statements in Mohr's splendid account published by the Division of Forestry: The northern limit . . . on the coast near the southern boundary of Virginia (p. 30) . . . [in] The Atlantic pine region . . . The highly siliceous soil of these pine barrens offers but little inducement for its cultivation . . . by far the greater part of the timber standing has been tapped for its resin . . . impregnated as they are with resin, are used for piling and for posts of great durability (pp. 31, 32) . . . The wood of the Longleaf Pine is hardly surpassed by any of our timber trees . . . in naval architecture, for masts and spars; . . . for the building of bridges, viaducts, trestlework . . . Whenever the sapwood . Is laid bare copious exudation of resin takes place and the sur- rounding wood becomes charged with it. Thus the wood . . . soon becomes charged with this .. . and... the wood increases in weight and durability. (pp. 46, 47) . . . The trunk is covered with a reddish-brown bark . . . scaling off in thin, bluish, almost transparent rhombic flakes (p. 49). It is certainly impossible to reconcile Mohr's authoritative account with that of Wangenheim, which has been copied and recopied from its start and which, surely, was not based on real Longleaf Pine. Incidentally, if Longleaf Pine had spread from cultivation northward to the latitude of Philadelphia, it is remarkable that that untiring group of local explorers from Barton to Porter and the present corps of active botanizers, have not seen it, especially when they have laid such stress on every- thing which wanders outside the garden-fence. It should be quite apparent that Pinus palustris started as a vague conception, the only extant specimen possibly identified by Miller being of P. Taeda L.; that with the addition of further items, largely by Miller, the identity became more confused; that Wangenheim wholly tangled the identity and that his followers from Lambert on further made ‘‘confusion worse con- founded" of the concept. When F. A. Michaux broke from line and properly defined and illustrated Longleaf Pine as P. australis he clarified the situation. His clarification was accepted by many of the most careful students up to 1880, when Sargent 1948] Fernald,—Confused Bases of Name Pinus palustris 247 revived the name P. palustris. One other name has been cited, this antedating P. australis. I refer to P. lutea Walt. Fl. Carol. 237 (1788). This is commonly cited as identical with “Р. palustris", but Walter's diagnosis of 7 words was inconclusive. Of P. palustris he said "spinis adscendentibus", not good for Longleaf Pine; of his P. lutea "spinis rectis", equally poor. Fraser had four sterile leafy branches of Walter's pines in his Herb. Walt. If the thoroughly clear P. australis Michx. f. is unsatisfactory to some, they could make an anatomical study of the leaves of the pines preserved in the Fraser volume and pre- sumably find that one of the long-leaved branches is from Long- leaf Pine, the other from Slash Pine; then they would have to decide convincingly which of them was meant by Walter's P. lutea. In Phytologia, ü. 451—456 (1948) Dr. Little stated that he would “prohibit” in the future the revival of old names, because careful study of types or bases of old but heretofore not accurately typified names often leads to inconvenient changes, inconvenient to those who bave learned and are satisfied with the wrong name. His proposition supplements one by Mr. W. A. Dayton in Journ. Forestry, xli. 373 (1943) “to disallow priority changes due to later discoveries in obscure books 100 years or more old". But certainly the names in many supposedly available works often lead to change. Undoubtedly, when Miller's hundreds of types (if they can be found) are hunted out and carefully studied, they will upset some later names; but if taxonomic work is to involve the exact typification of species, as it should, we must carefully check the identities of species long ago described but too long neglected. An edict sponsored by scientists of any government, which would prohibit further investigation of basic facts or factors in chemistry, physics, geology, history or other fields of learning would be an intellectual boomerang and not to the credit of the sponsoring agent. True science is not the out- growth of shackling. Everyone is inconvenienced by change from the rut in which he has proceeded but ruts are not the best routes to thorough understanding. Personally I have seen tremendous changes in the current names of plants of the area I best know. As a young man I used Gray’s Manual, ed. 5; later ed. 6; then ed. 7; and I am 248 Rhodora [OcroBER trying to finish ed. 8. Of the names of vascular plants described in ed. 5 at least 45% have been changed through restudy of the plants or their nomenclatural types or through changes in the International Rules of Nomenclature; of the names accepted in ed. 6 3395 have been changed; of those in ed. 7 at least 3097. All this has been very inconvenient; but it is very doubtful if scientists would have welcomed at any of these dates a prohibi- tion of further study of the types. Several times writers on forests at Washington have issued supposedly authoritative lists of names of our trees. In 1884 the federal government issued Sargent's Catalogue of Forest Trees. If the prohibition of change had then been in force we should be writing Magnolia glauca (instead of M. virginiana), Acer saccharinum (instead of A. saccharum) for the northern Sugar Maple, Rhus venenata (instead of R. Verniz), Nyssa uniflora (instead of N. aquatica) and Chamaecyparis sphaeroides (instead of C. thyoides). Those would be the names I first learned and gray hair accompanying the unlearning might have been delayed. In 1898 (14 years later than Sargent’s Report) a Check List of correct names was issued by the Division of Forestry. If there had been govern- mental prohibition of any changes after that we should be under orders to write Pinus divaricata but the Check List of 1927 called it P. Banksiana (but as “banksiana”, perhaps because growing on a bank). At both those dates Pecan was called Hickoria pecan but now Dr. Little (happily) discards both the generic and the specific names; and so on with many others. It would have pleased me if the names I learned in the late 80’s had never changed; it would have been convenient to stop at any of the other magic dates; but would that have been real progress, if our nomenclature and identifications are to rest on exact study of types, not on hit-or-miss guesses? Prior to the International Congress of 1930 a proposition was pushed, to conserve the names of important economic plants from the changes which might come from applying to them the principle of priority of publication. But almost immediately, as I saw in going over the responses with Dr. Sprague at Kew, botanists of different age-groups in the same countries saw an opportunity to conserve all the binomials they had learned. This formula, followed in many countries and by different 1948] Fassett,—Proposed Changes in Rules generations, caused the prompt withdrawal of the proposition. Those who earnestly wish conservation of really very important names of economic plants should proceed with care, looking out that their would-be conserved names rest upon undoubted types. The seeking out of types and their conscientious study is an exacting task, neglected by many, but conservation based on accumulated errors, such as surrounded all the early accounts of Pinus palustris, is not worth the name. We are not, as scientists, aiming to perpetuate error. THE PROPOSED CHANGES IN ARTICLE 58, INTERNATIONAL RULES OF BOTANICAL NOMENCLATURE! NoRMAN C. Fassett The present Article 58 of the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature provides that “ .. . when a group changes its rank, the earliest legitimate name or epithet given to the group in its new rank is valid, . . . " The proposed changes, origi- nally submitted by Professor Rehder (Journ. Arnold Arb. 20: 275. 1939) and somewhat modified by the Central Committee on Nomenclature of the American Society of Plant Taxono- mists, specify that “When no legitimate name exists in the new rank, the earliest existing name or epithet in any rank must be retained . . . For purposes of nomenclatural priority, all sub- divisions of species are regarded of the same rank.” The proposed changes are not retroactive; if they were the mortality might be high. But, to see how this rule might work ! For the benefit of such of our readers as have not seen it, the proposal in regard to Article 58, as sent out by the Central Committee on Nomenclature of the American Society of Plant Taxonomists is here reprinted in full. "Art. 58. Change the basic Article to read as follows and delete paragraphs (2) and (3) of Rec. XXXVI: “When a tribe becomes a family, when a subgenus or section becomes a genus, when a subdivision of a species becomes a species, or when the reverse of these changes takes place, the earliest legitimate name or epithet given to the group in its new rank is valid, unless that name or the resulting association or combination is a later homonym. (see Arts. 60, 61). “When no legitimate name exists in the new rank, the earliest existing name or ope in any rank must be retained, unless the resulting association or combination is a later homonym (see Arts. 60, 61); but this applies only to names published after Jan. 1, 1953. “For purposes of priority, all subdivisions of species are regarded as of the 250 Rhodora [OcroBER in the future, we may examine what would have been the result if it had been in force in the past. The northwestern phase of Phlox pilosa, from Wisconsin and Illinois westward to the Dakotas and eastern Kansas, differs from the eastern phase of the species in the lustrous glandless hairs in the inflorescence; it was named P. pilosa var. fulgida Wherry, Bartonia, no. 12: 47. 1931. But the earliest name, аз any subdivision of а species, based on a type identifiable with var. fulgida, is P. pilosa f. albiflora MacMillan, Metasp. Minn. Vall. 432. 1892, founded on one of the rather uncommon white- flowered individuals such as are occasionally found among the mass of purple-flowered plants. Under the proposed rule, all the plants now known as var. fulgida would carry a varietal name signifying, not that they have lustrous hairs (true), but that they have white flowers (nearly always false). We could, of course, then coin a quadrinomial for the common phase of the population, following the varietal name (stating that the flowers are white) with a formal name (stating that the flowers are not white). The northern representative of Epigaea repens differs from the seabrous-leaved southern plant by having the leaf-surfaces nearly or quite glabrous, and has been described as E. repens var. glabrifolia Fernald, Кнорока 41: 446. 1939. The earliest name, as any subdivision of a species, based on a type from the north, is E. repens f. plena Rehder, Journ. Arnold Arb. 7: 244. 1926, describing an exceptional individual with petaloid stamens. same rank, except as provided for subdivisions containing the type of the species, “Examples may be retained. —Argument— “The practice of changing names or epithets on change of rank was rather common in the past; it is, however, contrary to both the spirit and letter of the present Rules (see Arts. 4 (paragraph 2), 59 and 60 (2)), and Rec. XXXVI shows quite clearly the intent of the Congress to stop it. Nevertheless, some recent authors have changed epithets with change of rank, for no better reason than that they regarded available epithets already existing as inappropriate. The proposed amendment is intended to make perfectly clear that this practice is illegitimate. It cannot be made fully retroactive without causing much confusion in past nomenclature; its application is accordingly fixed with a future date so that there will be no additional confusion. "Proposed by: This is a proposal combining elements of that submitted by Alfred Rehder (Jour. Arnold Arb. 20: 275. 1939—which see for his argument) together with further additions and modifications made by the Committee.’ No alternative proposal was received by the Committee.—C. A. W. 1948] Fassett,—Proposed Changes in Rules 251 Under the amended Art. 58, our northern Trailing Arbutus would carry a name implying double flowers, a phenomenon observed, apparently, but once. Again, a name originally in- tended to distinguish an exceptional individual from the bulk of the population would be forced upon that entire population. The author of f. plena intended, of course, to give the name plena to the double-flowered minority, not to the single-flowered majority. Discovery of the fact that the type of Streptopus roseus Michx. represents the rather local southeastern extreme of the species necessitated the coining of a new varietal name for the common S. roseus of the eastern United States and Canada. The present writer gave it a name meaning “well-known,” calling it S. roseus var. perspectus Fassett, RHODORA, 37: 109. 1935. It happens that in the far western variety of S. roseus, branching stems are rare, and in the middle western variety a majority of plants have simple stems, while in var. perspectus the vast majority of plants have branching stems. Опе of the rare un- branched individuals so impressed Brother Victorin as something unusual that he described it as S. roseus f. simplex Victorin, Contrib. Lab. Bot. Univ. Montreal, no. 14: 23. 1929. Had the amended Art. 58 been in force in 1935, the most freely branching phase of Streptopus roseus would now be bearing a varietal name based on f. simpler, and botanists in general would be asking by what logic these taxonomists concoct their names. Brother Victorin would never have been silly enough to give the name simplex to the most freely branching variety of Strepto- pus roseus: what adjective can we apply to a rule that would have forced this unintended application of his name? The point is, a majority of taxonomists have made a distinction between subspecies, varieties and forms. In the last-named category, there is a vast assemblage of names based on albinos, double flowers, simple stems, and other trivial states, coined to point out something unusual; these would be highly inappropriate and contradictory if forced to embrace the whole population from which the author of each name intended only to differentiate the unusual thing. The argument for the change in Art. 58 seems to be, mainly, that “ .. . some recent authors have changed epithets with 252 Rhodora [OCTOBER change of rank, for no better reason than that they regarded available epithets already existing as inappropriate.” Is that bad? Admitted, we cannot indulge, as did Rafinesque and C. G. Lloyd, in wholesale rejection of names that do not appeal to our fancy; admitted, consistent application of rules unavoidably results in an occasional inappropriate name. But is this a reason for deliberately changing the rules to force the adoption of inappropriate names in a sense different from that originally intended by their authors? Art 58 states that the earliest name in the new rank is valid; a footnote to Art. 16 states that “the valid name is the binary or ternary combination containing the earliest epithet published with the same rank.” To bring Art. 55 into line with these rules, phrase (2) should read: “that there is available an earlier validly published subdivi- sional epithet in the same rank.” In Art. 60 (2), the phrase “їп the correct rank" should be added after the word “epithet.” Modification of Art. 59 is not necessary, for that article carries no injunction against a well-chosen name if its adoption is not out of harmony with the rest of the rules. To Art. 58 the following example might be added: Peltigera canina var. rufescens f. innovans (Körb.) Thomson, Trans. Wis. Acad. 38: 265. 1947, is based on the earliest valid name as a forma, Peltigera rufescens f. innovans Körb. Syst. Lich. Germ. 60. 1855, not on Peltidea ulorrhiza var. praetextata Flk. apud Som- merf. Suppl. Flor. Lappon. 123. 1826.—N. C. F. DEPARTMENT OF BOTANY, UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN. Volume 50, no. 597, including pages 217-240 and plates 1112-1117, was issued 17 September, 1948. 000га JOURNAL ОЕ THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS Vol. 50. November, 1948. No. 599, CONTENTS: The Flora of Penikese, Seventy-four Years after. I. Penikese Island Marine Algae. Mazwell S. DOC s o ERE 253 IL. Fresh and Brackish Water Algae of Penikese Island. атлап Сто ro pu ECC MET а 270 Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus, a Weed of potential Importance insFlorida. НОКОТ СЕИР 279 Floerkea proserpinacoides іп Nova Scotia. David Erskine and Walred-SoHoReid M МО IE RENE Зв 283 Scirpus verecundus, nom. nov. М. L. Fernald. ................ 288 The New England Botanical Club, Jne. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. —4 monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray's Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see Зга cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35-46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. A. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. 1. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ш. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939. $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora Plate 1118 ALGAE OF PENIKESE ISLAND Rbodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. November, 1948. No. 599. THE FLORA OF PENIKESE, SEVENTY-FOUR YEARS AFTER I. PENIKESE ISLAND MARINE ALGAE MAXWELL S. Dory! In 1873 and 1874 Penikese Island, one of the southernmost of the Elizabeth Islands, off the southern elbow of Cape Cod, was the site of the first marine biological station in North America. Though it was in operation only two years, the enthusiasm for marine biology engendered by the founder, Louis Agassiz, swelled and endured. It persists today in the sincere aggregation of organizations assembled at Woods Hole, Massachusetts. In commemoration of that initial effort, a fifty-year resurvey of the flora and fauna of the Island was completed in 1923, the floral portion being published under the editorship of Lewis (3). In preparation for the celebration of the seventy-fifth anniversary, several visits were made to this historic site during the summer of 1947. The major findings insofar as marine algae are con- cerned are listed below. The findings of other botanical ma- terials will be reported in subsequent papers. In 1874 Jordan (1) published a list of 81 species of algae found during the operation of Agassiz’ school. Shortly after the founding of the Marine Biological Laboratory and the U. S. Bureau of Fisheries station at Woods Hole, a marine biological survey of the region was undertaken. Davis (2) published the botanical results in 1913. Other publications (e. g. 3, 4, 5, 6, 7), 1 Department of Botany, Northwestern University, Evanston, Illinois. 254 Rhodora [NOVEMBER largely of Taylor’s work, have amplified and modified the list of algae known from Penikese. It is unfortunate that only a very small amount of the material foundation for the published records is known to be extant. Some of this material was rein- vestigated (4) and some of the earlier records shown to be prob- ably incorrect. Some of the early recorded species are not now recognized as specifically distinct; some of the specific names used earlier are currently considered to be synonyms. An effort is made here to assemble the records of Penikese Island algae, sort out the synonyms and point out which of the old records are unique. In an effort to accomplish this end in a concise manner that will still indicate the opinions of the original authors the follow- ing treatment is given. Names that are accepted as valid for the purposes of this paper appear in small capital letters. Names which for the purposes of this paper are considered as synonyms in reference to reports of Penikese algae appear in italics. The numbers following entries in the lists below refer to the publications in the list of literature in which that species is reported from Penikese. Key citations for species not previously reported from the Northwest Atlantic by Taylor (8) and for names not previously used for species found in this area are given by similar numbers in parentheses following the authority name. The letter “A” indicates that the species was reported from the Island on good authority by one or more of the investi- gators visiting the Island during the summer. A “B” indicates that herbarium material was prepared and is to be found in the herbarium of the Marine Biological Laboratory or in the her- barium of the collector. The four-place numbers above 5000 identify herbarium specimens in the author’s herbarium. At least one collection of each blue-green algal species reported here has been identified by Dr. Francis Drouet of the Chicago Museum of Natural History. The determinations of Clado- phoraceae have all been made or checked by Dr. Harry Phinney of Oregon State College. The determinations of many of the microscopic Rhodophyta were made by Mrs. Isabella Abbott of the University of California. Many of the more interesting observations and collections were provided by Dr. Hannah T. Croasdale of Dartmouth College. The author has had the 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 255 privilege of drawing upon the herbarium and experience of Prof. Wm. Randolph Taylor in many instances. Most of the collec- ting of materials was done by the following who accompanied the author on trips to the island and collected as three teams: Miss Marie Boyle, Mr. Remi J. Cadoret, Miss Elizabeth M. Fahey, Miss Amy Gage, Mr. Edwin Moul, Mr. Leonard Spiegel, Prof. Wm. Randolph Taylor, Dr. R. D. Wood, Mrs. Urda Wood— whose cooperation was greatly appreciated. The floral, and probably the faunal, associations are delimited vertically in such a way that the intertidal area seems broken into four zones. Serially the uppermost of these zones has been named adlittoral, and the remaining three, in order, after Feld- mann (9), supralittoral, littoral, and infralittoral. From a distance or from an aerial photograph these appear from the uppermost downwards as a white zone, largely bare boulders devoid of vegetation, above the normal reach of the spray; a blackish zone dominated by blue-green algae extending from the highest tide and normal spray levels down to approximate mean high tide level; a brown zone extending from approximate mean high tide level to approximate mean low tide level; a darker brown zone, including many of the Rhodophyta, extending down at least 10 meters, and probably much farther, below approximate mean low tide level. Subdivisions of these major zones may be recognized as various horizons correlated with various tide levels and supporting associations characteristically dominated by different algal species. At the head of each divisional list notes on the dominant members of one or more associations are given. No attempt has been made to indicate all the associations or their distribution around the Island. No major differences between the situation as reported by Lewis (3) and the current situation were noted other than the further destruction of Gull Island, perhaps due to its being used as a practice-bombing target during the war and during the survey. Accordingly, no close investigation was made of Gull Island. SCHIZOPHYTA No consideration was given to members of this division other than “blue-green algae." Herbarium materials of all species found by the present survey are deposited in the herbarium of the 256 Rhodora [NOVEMBER Chicago Museum of Natural History. In general the species may be recognized as belonging in one of three categories. The first of these is of species that are restricted to peculiar habitats or particular hosts. As examples we might list Calothrix para- sitica in the fronds of Nemalion and Aegira or Isactis plana on the fronds of Punctaria. The second category consists of the species generally distributed in and on the calcareous remains of molluscs and similar substrata. Species such as /Hyella caespitosa,” Mastigocoleus testarum, Lyngbya lutea and Plectonema terebrans may be listed here. A third category of species consists of the algae contributing to the conspicuous ‘‘Calothrix-zone,” the supralittoral zone of Feldmann (9). Because of their interest here from a physiologico-ecological viewpoint (10) particular attention was paid to this association. Here, though Calothrix crustacea and Plectonema calothrichoides are perhaps the most frequent or dominant, other species such as Calothrix scopulorum, C. vivipara, Entophysalis granulosa? and Plectonema norvegicum are frequent. Late in the season Rivularia atra became con- spicuous near mean high-tide level as hard, gelatinous, black, pin-head-sized hemispheres on the barnacles and rocks. It had been present earlier as an inconspicuous occasional alga on stones near mean low water. ANABAENA TORULOSA (Carm.) Lagerh. 3. CALOTHRIX CONFERVICOLA (Roth) Ag. ex Born. & Flah. 1,3. CALOTHRIX CRUSTACEA Born. & Flah. 3, A, B 7018, 6956. CALOTHRIX FUSCOVIOLACEA Crouan. 3. CALOTHRIX PARASITICA (Chauv.) Thur. & Flah. 3, B 6958a. CALOTHRIX SCOPULORUM Born. & Flah. 1,3, B 6958. CALOTHRIX VIVIPARA Born. & Flah. В. ENTOPHYSALIS GRANULOSA Kütz. B 7018, 6957. HYDROCOLEUM LYNGBYACEUM бош. 22. HYvDROCOLEUM GLUTINOSUM (Ag.) Gom. 3, 22. HvELLA cAESPITOSA Born. & Ваһ. 3, A, В. 18АСТ18 PLANA (Harv.) Thur. ex Born. & Flah. 3, A, B. LYNGBYA AESTUARII (Mert.) Liebm. 3. LYNGBYA LUTEA Gom.? B. MASTIGOCOLEUS TESTARUM Born. & Flah. 3, B. OSCILLATORIA MARGARITIFERA Kütz. 3. PHORMIDIUM PAPYRACEUM (Ag.) Gom. 3 (but see 22). PLECTONEMA CALOTHRICHOIDES Gom. ? Forms found on shells between tide levels that otherwise could very well have been identifled with Entophysalis granulosa have been treated as Hyella species. 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 257 PLECTONEMA NORVEGICUM Gom. B 6958. PLECTONEMA TEREBRANS Gom. B. RIVULARIA ATRA Roth ex Born. & Flah. 3, A, B. CHLOROPHYTA Prasiola stipitata often appears in characteristic fashion in the supralittoral zone (8, 11). On often sprayed rocks in the same zone elsewhere green algae are conspicuous as associations of stunted Blidingia minima and, with abnormally upwardly dis- placed Fucus, forms of Ulothrix flacca. Where there is an exposure either to fresh water or in pools where the salinity is apt to vary considerably beyond the normal range of variation, associations of Hnteromorpha intestinalis are apt to appear. These latter three associations may, very likely, really belong with the next lower level, or at least to the same horizons as Fucus spiralis. In the littoral zone little was found in the way of more or less enduring associations in which green algae were dominant forms. Often here, though, such forms as Ulothrix flacca are conspicuous in limited areas or, as reported by Fahey & Doty (12), Entero- morpha species make their appearance as relatively transitory dominants. In coves and along open shores among boulders, and so in a way protected, Enteromorpha linza will often be a dominant form, usually definitely above Ulva Lactuca. In the most protected parts of the embayment between Tub Point and the main part of the island Ulva Lactuca var. latissima becomes conspicuous at- tached there to shells and stones on the sandy mud at about mean low water level. At no place was Cladophora (see Lewis, 3) a dominant alga. BLIDINGIA MINIMA (Nag. in Kiitz.) Kylin (24). 3, A, B.? All forms found were small and unbranched (e. g. 7159, 7143, 7123). з Burpineara Kylin Thalli tamquam proliferatio una vel plures e lamina in centro duarum cellularum crassa orientes, non ramosi ramosive, basibus ramorum latis factis; cellulae uno chloro- plasto atque plerumque uno pyrenoideo praeditae, non ordinatae vel in ordinibus irregularibus dispositae, plerumque diametro 5—7 и, membrana saepius fere crassi- tudine eadem; reproductio asexualis per zoosporas nonphototacticas, astigmaticas, quadriflagellatasque; reproductio sexualis ignota. Type species: Enteromorpha minima Nügeli in Kützing. Species Algarum. 1849. 258 Rhodora [NOVEMBER Bryopsis PLUMOSA (Huds.) C. Ag. 1, A, В 7136. CHAETOMORPHA AEREA (Dillw.) Kütz. 1, A, B 7210. CHAETOMORPHA LiNvM (Miill.) Kütz. 3. CHAETOMORPHA MELAGONIUM (Weber & Mohr) Kütz. 1,8. Chaetomorpha Olneyi 1 = C. AEREA (Dillw.) Kitz. Cladophora albida 1, З = C. reFRacTA (Roth) Kitz. Cladophora albida var. refracta З = C. вЕЕВАСТА (Roth) Kitz. Cladophora arcta (Dillw.) Kütz. = SPONGOMORPHA ARCTA (Dillw.) Kütz. CLADOPHORA EXPANSA (Mert.) Kütz. 3. CLADOPHORA FLEXUOSA Griff. ex Harv. 1. Cladophora fracta (Müll. Kütz. 1. This is probably C. expansa (Mert.) Kütz. or C. flavescens (Roth) Kütz. CLADOPHORA GLAUCESCENS Griff. ex Harv. 1. CLADOPHORA GRACILIS (Griff. ex Harv.) Kütz. 1,4, A, B 7263. Cladophora lanosa 1 = SPONGOMORPHA LANOSA (Roth) Kütz. CLADOPHORA REFRACTA (Roth) Kütz. 1,3, A, B 7127, 7150, 7181. CopIOLUM GREGARIUM A. Braun. А. Endoderma Wittrockii З = Enrocuapia WrrTROCKII Wille. ENTEROMORPHA CLATHRATA (Roth) Grev. 1,3, 4, A. ENTEROMORPHA COMPRESSA (L.) Grev. 1, 3. Enteromorpha erecta (Lyngb.) J. Ag. = E. CLATHRATA (Roth) Grev. Enteromorpha Hopkirkii 1 = E. cLATHRATA (Roth) Grev. ENTEROMORPHA INTESTINALIS (L.) Link. 1, 3, A, B. Many of the named forms were found, but of particular interest was a completely compressed linear form (7152) found in a high pool with normally inflated forms near by (e. g. 7144, 7142), and a very small tubular form, 7156. ENTEROMORPHA LINZA (L.) J. Ag. 3, A, B. ENTEROMORPHA LINZA Var. OBLANCEOLATA Doty (13). A, B. The material (7133) washed in along the southeastern shore of the island is very much like the type material both macro- and If one attempts to follow the International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature Kylin’s name cannot be considered as anything but illegitimate (a nomen nudum under Article 38). Being aware both of Bliding’s (Botaniska Notiser. 1938.) detailed work and apparent belief that E. minima represented the type for a distinct genus and of Kylin’s (24) opinion, the author can do little but make these acknowledgments and follow the above procedure. He could, of course, not follow the rules in this par- ticular case or he could, with or without pretending ignorance of these two authorities’ prior opinions, propose an entirely new generic name in the prescribed manner. The same situation prevailed in the case of Sphaerotrichia Kylin (15). 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 259 microscopically, and distinct from all other Enteromorphoid algae found along either coast. This is the first record from the northwestern Atlantic. Enteromorpha minima Nag. in Kütz. = BLIDINGIA MINIMA (Nag. in Kiitz.) Kylin. Enteromorpha plumosa 3 = E. сгАтнЕАТА (Roth) Grev. ENTEROMORPHA PROLIFERA (Müll. J. Ag. А, B 7009, 6950, 7139, 7124, 7132. This species is characterized by having the cells typically in rows; even when sometimes the rows are irregular the cells are angular to squarish in outline and in the middle of the membrane, which is usually са. 12 џ thick. In surface view full-sized cells of this species usually average from 12 to 18 y. long and the rows are usually within this range in width. If proliferous the branches are attenuated basally (e. g. 7140), blunt, rounded, and usually inflated at the apex. ENTEROMORPHA PROLIFERA var. FLEXUOSA (Wulf. Doty (13). A, B. In South Pond where the salinity was 13.2 and the pH 9. ENTEROMORPHA PROLIFERA Var. TUBULOSA (Kütz.) Reinb. А,В. In both South Pond (pH 9; salinity 13.2) and Tub Pond (pH 8.5-9.5; salinity 34.4) mixed with other varieties. The surface of the fronds from South Pond is papillose in cross section due to the convexity of each cell's outer membrane; this phenom- enon is less pronounced in the case of specimens from more truly marine habitats. The Feldmanns (14) describe similar experi- mentally induced modifications of E. marginata J. Ag. with variation in salinity. EwTocLApiA Wirrrocki Wille. 3, B. On Ectocarpus confer- voides 6949. GOMONTIA POLYRHIZA (Lagerh.) Born. & Flah. 3, B 7300. Hormotrichum Younganum 1 = UROSPORA PENICILLIFORMIS (Roth) Aresch. OCHLOCHAETE LENTIFORMIS Huber (23). B 7281. Collected for an Ulvella as minute patches of microscopic green crustlets on whitish granitic stones, 7281. PLATYMONAS SUBCORDIFORMIS (Wille) Hazen. 3. PRASIOLA STIPITATA Suhr. 3, A, B 7283, 7282. PROTODERMA MARINUM Reinke. 3, A, B 7064. 260 Rhodora [NOVEMBER Growing on very high rocks giving the highest algal coated rocks a brownish cast, e. g., just north of the stone pier. RHIZOCLONIUM KERNERI Stockm. 3. SPONGOMORPHA ARCTA (Dillw.) Kütz. 1. SPONGOMORPHA LANOSA (Roth) Kütz. 1. In studying the material collected the author could find no Spongomorpha in the collections of the different cooperators, though several specimens so labeled were turned in. АП these materials were considered forms of Cladophora refracta. SPONGOMORPHA LANOSA Var. UNCIALIS (Müll.) Kjellm. 3. TELLAMIA CONTORTA Batt. А,В. In shell of Busycon with Lyngbya lutea?, 7299. UrorHnnix FLACCA (Dillw.) Thur. А, B. On stunted high-growing Fucus, 6951; on Polysiphonia lanosa collected by Leonard Spiegel; on a Busycon shell in the mid-tide levels just north of the stone pier, and on rocks, 6951, along the north end of the island. Urva Lactuca L. 3, A. Urva LACTUCA var. LATISSIMA (L.) D. С. 1, A. Ulva latissima 1 = U. Lacruca var. LATISSIMA (L.) D. C. UROSPORA PENICILLIFORMIS (Roth) Aresch. 1. VAUCHERIA spp. “allied to V. murina" 1. PHAEOPHYTA There are no conspicuous brown algal communities in the supralittoral reaches, but in the littoral and below they are the most frequently found dominant forms. The Fucus spiralis association in the upper part of the littoral zone with the Fucus vesiculosus association just below are perhaps the most generally occurring, with the Ascophyllum nodosum association extending about one foot lower than the Fucus vesiculosus association, and ranking a close second to the first two in prominence. Ralfsia verrucosa becomes dominant on the rocks, barnacles and Littorina in restricted localities, such as small coves, in the middle horizons of the littoral zone with or below the Fucus and Asco- phyllum associations. In comparatively quiet waters Laminaria Agardhii may be the conspicuous alga just below low tide level 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 261 (often along with Chorda or Sargassum), while in the most exposed situations Laminaria digitata may be conspicuous, as around the rocks off the north end of the island. The Laminaria associations here as elsewhere in the world seem to be indicators of the infralittoral zone. ACROTHRIX NOVAE-ANGLIAE Taylor. 4, 19, A, B 7138. ASCOCYCLUS DISTROMATICUS Taylor. 5. ASCOPHYLLUM NODOSUM (L.) LeJol. 1,3, A, B 7188. ^ ASPEROCOCCUS ECHINATUS (Mert.) Grev. П. Castagnea virescens З = EUDESME VIRESCENS (Carm.) J. Ag. Castagnea Zosterae З = CLADOSIPHON ZosTERAE (J. Ag.) Kylin. CHORDA Fitum (L.) Lam. 24, 3, A, В 7189. Chordaria divaricata 1 = SPHAEROTRICHIA DIVARICATA (C. Ag.) Kylin. CHORDARIA FLAGELLIFORMIS (Müll.) C. Ag. 1,3, A, B 7130. CLADOSIPHON ZOSTERAE (J. Ag.) Kylin (15). 3. DESMARESTIA ACULEATA (L.) Lam. 2, 3, A. DESMARESTIA ACULEATA var. ATTENUATA Taylor. 5, A, B 7016. DESMARESTIA viRIDIS (Müll.) Lam. 1, 3, А. DESMOTRICHUM UNDULATUM (J. Ag.) Reinke. 1, 3. DIcTYOSIPHON FOENICULACEUS (Huds.) Grev. 1, 2,3, A, B 7016. The author has seen none of the specimens reported as D. hippuroides, but feels that species is perhaps but a seasonal variety of the present species, an opinion expressed earlier by Farlow (7). Dictyosiphon hippuroides 2 = D. rokNicuLACEUS (Huds.) Grev. EcrocarPus CONFERVOIDES (Roth) LeJol. 3, A, B 6949. Ectocarpus confervoides var. hiemalis З = E. sticuLosus var. HIEMALIS (Crouan) Kuck. ECTOCARPUS FASCICULATUS Griff. ex Harv. 3. Ectocarpus littoralis 1 = PyrArELLA LITORALIS (L.) Kjell. EcrocanPus ovatus Kjell. A. EcTocarPUs SILICULOSUS (Dillw.) Lyngb. 1, 3, A, B 7166. EcTOCARPUS SILICULOSUS Var. HIEMALIS (Crouan) Kuck. 3. EcrocanPus TOMENTOSUS (Huds.) Lyngb. 3, A. ELACHISTEA FUCICOLA (Vell.) Aresch. 1, 3, A, B 7147, 7018. EUDESME VIRESCENS (Carm.) J. Ag. (15). 3, A, B 6959. Awash in abundance all around the islands during early July; е. 0. 6952 unilocular, 6959. Fucus EVANESCENS C. Ag. A, B. * This, and some other records from Davis' paper, are accepted from the charts in part I. 262 Rhodora [NovEMBER Fucus nodosus 1 = AscoPHYLLUM NODOSUM (L.) Le Jol. Fucus sprrauis L. А, В. Fucus vEsICULOSUS L. 1,3, A, B. Fucus vESICULOSUS Var. SPIRALIS Farl. A. Iura FASCIA (Müll.) Fries. 1, A. ILEA FASCIA var. CAESPITOSA (J. Ag.) S. & G. (21). 3. LAMINARIA AGARDHII Kjellm. 2, 3, A, В 7196. Laminaria ascia 1 = кА ЕА8С1А (Müll.) Fries. LAMINARIA DIGITATA (L.) Edmons. 1,3, A, B 7191. Collected in situ among offshore rocks along the north end of the island about three to five feet below mean low water line. Laminaria longicornis 1 = LAMINARIA LONGICRURIS De la Pyl. LAMINARIA LONGICRURIS De la Pyl. 1. LAMINARIA PLATYMERIS De la Ру]. 3, 6. LAMINARIA SACCHARINA (L.) Lam. 1. Lathesia tuberiformis 1 = LEATHESIA DrFFORMIS (L.) Aresch. LEATHESIA DIFFORMIS (L.) Aresch. 1, 3, A, В. On Corallina on the offshore rocks at the north end of the island, 7158. Mesogloia divaricata 3 = SPHAEROTRICHIA DIVARICATA (C. Ag.) Kylin. MYRIONEMA BALTICUM (Rein.) Foslie. А. MYRIONEMA GLOBOSUM (Rein.) Foslie. A, B. MyrioneMA LECLANCHERI (Chauv.) Harv. 3. MYRIOTRICHIA CLAVAEFORMIS Нагу. 4. Petalonia fascia З = вА Fascia (Müll.) Fr. Petalonia fascia var. caespitosa 3 = ILEA FASCIA var. CAESPITOSA (J. Ag.) S. & G. PUNCTARIA LATIFOLIA Grev. 3, А. PUNCTARIA PLANTAGINEA (Roth) Grev. А. Punctaria tenuissima 1 = DrsMoTRICHUM UNDULATUM (J. Ag.) Rein. PYLAIELLA LITORALIS (L.) Kjellm. 1, 3. RALFSIA VERRUCOSA (Aresch.) J. Ag. 3, A, B 7016, 7276. SAnGASSUM FILIPENDULA C. Ag. 1, 2, A, В. SARGASSUM FILIPENDULA var. MoNTAGNEI (Bail.) Coll. & Herv. 1. Sargassum Montagnei 1 = 8. FILIPENDULA var. MONTAGNEI (Bail.) Coll. & Herv. Sargassum vulgare 1 = 8. FILIPENDULA C. Ag. ScvTOSIPHON LOMENTARIA (Lyngb.) J. Ag. 3, A, B. ScyTOSIPHON ATTENUATUS Kjellm. (25) (= Chordaria attenuata Foslie. 1887. Tromsø Mus. Aarshefter 10: 175-195.) (= Scytosiphon attenuatus (Foslie) Doty, Farlowia 3: 38.) A new record for the New England flora. 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 263 SPHACELARIA CIRRHOSA (Roth) C. Ag. 1, 3, A, B. Also an undetermined species on Ahnfeltia 7169a. SPHAEROTRICHIA DIVARICATA (C. Ag.) Kylin Шо) ЗАЕВ: RHODOPHYTA As was the case with the brown algae, there seem to be no associations in the supralittoral zone on Penikese that are dom- inated by red algae. In the littoral zone Bangia, often mixed with Calothrix or Codiolum, may show as a distinct dominant in the upper horizon of the littoral zone. Polysiphonia novae- angliae and Ceramium rubrum, though extending lower, are frequently dominant forms in the lower horizons of the littoral zone. Lewis (3) mentioned such forms as “noticeably absent” during the 50-year survey. Hildenbrandia is often a dominant form between the upper and infralittoral zone species and the Ralfsia, Ascophyllum and Fucus associations of the higher littoral zone. Chondrus crispus, extending down at least else- where as far as forty feet, and, in exposed places, Corallina form conspicuous associations from the upper infralittoral limits downwards at least three meters. On rocks and shells over sandy bottoms, as for example off Tub Point in the bay, Dasya, Ceramium, and less frequently Champia or other genera (usually delicate species) may be dominant Rhodophyta in the lower horizons of the superior infralittoral zone. ACROCHAETIUM AMPHIROAE (Drew) Pap. (16). B in Herb. I. A. Abbott, 1694. A new record for the Northwestern Atlantic collected on Corallina officinalis by Mr. David Erskine. AcnocHAETIUM Daviestr (Dillw.) Näg. 1, A. ACROCHAETIUM Тновкети (Born.) Coll. & Herv. B. Determined as the forma agama of Rosenvinge on Rhodymenia 5 Sphaerotrichia Kylin Phaeophyceae cylindricae, divaricate ramosae; monaxiales, crescentes in longitu- dinem activitate meristematis apicalis cuius cellula terminalis dilatata globosaque; regio medullaris cava infra facta aut cellulis magnis parenchymatis impleta; rhizoidea solum ad basim adsunt; filamenta assimilatoria brevia, cellulis inflatissimis terminata ; pili phaeophyceani meristemate basali praediti; sporangia unilocularia in cortice dispersa e partibus basalibus systematum pilorum enascentia. Type species: Chordaria divaricata C. Agardh. Syn. Alg. Scand. 1817. See footnote under Blidingia minima (Nüg. in Kütz.) Kylin. 264 Rhodora [NovEMBER palmata (7149) by Mrs. Abbott, and again (7261) from Phyllo- phora membranifolia, a new generic host for the species. Acrochaetium | virgatulum З = |. CHROMASTRUM VIRGATULUM (Harv.) Pap. ACROCHAETIUM ZOSTERAE Pap. (16). B 7186. On the tips of Laminaria digitata; forming irregular red flecks and minute tufts on the surface. Actinococcus subcutaneus З = PHYLLOPHORA BmopiaE: (Turn.) J. Ag. AGARDHIELLA TENERA (J. Ag.) Schmitz. 2, A. AHNFELTIA PLICATA (Huds.) Fries. 1, 2, 3, A, B. ANTITHAMNION AMERICANUM (Harv.) Farl. 1 (but see 4), A. ANTITHAMNION cRUCIATUM (C. Ag.) Мар. 2, 3, 4, A, В. Other sterile material was colleeted by Mrs. Abbott, 30-VII- '47, on both Zostera and Chondrus. ANTITHAMNION PLuMULA (Ellis) Thur. 1, 20. ASPARAGOPSIS HAMIFERA (Har.) Okam. 4, A, B. Found in abundance in early July and in much less abundance in August (7119, cystocarpic). BANGIA FUSCOPURPUREA (Dillw.) Lyngb. 1, A, B. In places оп Fucus and with Blidingia minima (7159) and forming slick felty coatings on high-tide rocks. This latter material (7018, sterile) was a uniseriate thick-elastic-walled form. During the month of July small forms were collected on Chondrus that were seen to have short rhizoids from the lower- most three to four cells only after the fashion of B. ciliaris Carm. as illustrated by Taylor (8). Callithamnion americanum 1 = ANTITHAMNION AMERICANUM (Harv.) Farl. CALLITHAMNION BarnLEyr Нагу. 1, 4, A, В. Growing in truncated stubby tufts on Corallina on the exposed sides of the offshore rocks at the north end of the island (7209, tetrasporic). Callithamnion Borreri 1 = PuEoNosrporiuM Borreri (J. E. Smith) Nag. - CALLITHAMNION BYSSOIDEUM Arn. 1, A, В 7179. One collection (7179) washed in bearing an abundance of procarps. 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 265 CALLITHAMNION CORYMBOSUM (J. E. Smith) С. Ag. 1,3, 4, A, B. Callithamnion Daviesii 1 = AcnocHaETIUM Daviesit (Dillw.) Nag. Callithamnion luxurians 1 = CHROMASTRUM VIRGATULUM (Harv.) Pap. Callithamnion plumula 1, 20 = ANTITHAMNION PLUMULA (Ellis) Thur. CALLITHAMNION ROSEUM (Roth) Harv. 4, A, B 7174. Callithamnion setrospermum 1 = SEIROSPORA GRIFFITHSIANA Harv. Callithamnion Turneri 1 = SPERMOTHAMNION TURNERI (Mert.) Aresch. Ceramium arachnoideum 1 = C. rasTIGIATUM Harv., or C. RUBRUM (Huds.) С. Ag. (4). CERAMIUM DIAPHANUM (Lightf.) Roth. 1 (but see 4), A, B. The material found (e. g. 7160, 7182) was adrift and sterile. Lewis & Taylor (4) say all the Jordan herbarium material investigated was C. fastigiatum Harv. CERAMIUM FASTIGIATUM Harv. 1, 3, 4, A, B. Washed in all around the island (7018, 7177, tetrasporic) and on the bottom below low tide level (7180). CERAMIUM RUBRUM (Huds.) C. Ag. 1, 2, 3, 4, A, B 7183. Many of the ambiguous forms of this species were observed and collected; of these a particularly proliferous cystocarpic specimen (7181) and one cystocarpie covered with crustose corallines (7018), might be specifically mentioned as unusual. CERAMIUM STRICTUM (Kütz.) Grev. & Harv. 3, A. Ceramium tenuissimum authors = C. rAsTIGIATUM Нагу. CHAMPIA PARVULA (C. Ag.) Harv. 1, 2, 3, A, В 7162. CHonpriA BArLEYANA (Mont.) Harv. 3, 4, A, B. Tetrasporic (7121) just below Fucus vesiculosus in large hemi- spherical clumps. CHONDRIA SEDIFOLIA Harv. A, B 7135, 7141. CHONDRIA TENUISSIMA (Good. & Wood.) С. Ag. А,В 7192. Chondria tenuissima var. Baileyana 3 = CHONDRIA BAILEYANA (Mont.) Harv. Chondriopsis tenuissima authors = CHONDRIA TENUISSIMA (Good. & Wood.) C. Ag. CHONDRUS скѕров (L.) Stack. 1, 2, 3, A, B. CHOREOCOLAX POLYSIPHONIAE Reinsch. 3. 266 Rhodora [NOVEMBER CHROMASTRUM VIRGATULUM (Harv.) Pap. (16). 1,3. CORALLINA OFFICINALIS L. 1, 2, 3, A, B. Cytoclonium purpurascens 1,3 = C. puRPUREUM (Huds.) Batt. Cystoclonium purpurascens var. cirrhosa З = C. PURPUREUM var. CIRRHOSUM Harv. Cystoclonium purpurascens var. stellata 3 = С. PURPUREUM (Huds.) Batt. CysTOCLONIUM PURPUREUM (Huds.) Batt. 1, 3, A, B 7011, 7190. CYsTOCLONIUM PURPUREUM Var. CIRRHOSUM Harv. apud Taylor (8). 2, 3, A, B 7018. Dasya elegans 1 = D. PEDICELLATA C. Ag. DASYA PEDICELLATA C. Ag. 1, A, B 7017, 7178. Delesseria sinuosa 1, 2, 3 = Puvcopnys RUBENS (Huds.) Batt. Dumontia filiformis 6 = D. iNcRASSATA (Müll.) Lam. DuMONTIA INCRASSATA (Müll. Lam. 6, A. ERYTHROTRICHIA CARNEA (Dillw.) J. Ag. 6, A. Erythrotrichia ceramicola 3 = E. carnea (Dillw.) J. Ag. ERYTHROTRICHIA RHIZOIDEA Clel. B. On Sphacelaria 71962. FosrrELLA Lesouisit (Rosan.) Howe. 3, А. Furcellaria fastigiata? 1 = PoLYIDES RorTUNDUS (Gmel.) Grev. Gelidium corneum 1 = LOMENTARIA BAILEYANA (Harv.) Farl. (4). Griffithsia Bornetiana 2 = G. GLOBULIFERA Нагу. Griffithsia corallina 1 = С. GLOBULIFERA Нагу. (4). GRIFFITHSIA GLOBULIFERA Harv. 1, 2, 4, A. GRINNELLIA AMERICANA (С. Ag.) Harv. 1, 2, 3, А,В. HinpENBRANDIA Protoryrus Nardo. 2,3, A, B 7277, 7013. KvLINIA COMPACTA (Jao) Pap. (16). B. Collected by Dr. Hannah T. Croasdale on Ceramium strictum (in Herb. I. A. Abbott, 1550). LrrHoPHYLLUM MACROCARPUM (Rosan.) Foslie. A, B. In abundance on Ascophyllum but all material investigated closely was sterile. LITHOPHYLLUM PUSTULATUM (Lam.) Foslie. 3. LirHoTHAMNIUM LENORMANDI (Aresch.) Foslie? 3. Lithothamnion polymorphum 2 = PHYMATOLITHON POLYMORPHUM (L.) Foslie. LoMENTARIA BAILEYANA (Harv.) Farl. 1, 2, 4, A. Lomentaria uncinata 2,4 = L. BAILEYANA (Harv.) Farl. Melobesia Lejolisii 3 = FosrrELLA LEJoLrsn (Rosan.) Howe. 1948] Doty,—Penikese Island Marine Algae 267 Melobesia pustulata 3 = LITHOPHYLLUM PUSTULATUM (Lam.) Foslie. NEMALION MULTIFIDUM (Web. et Mohr) J. Ag. 2, 3, A. NULLIPORA POLYPHYLLAMEA? 1. PHYCODRYS RUBENS (Huds.) Batt. 1, 2,3, A, B. PHYLLOPHORA ВкОргАЕт (Turn.) J. Ag. 1 (but see 4), 2, 3, A, B 7163. PHYLLOPHORA MEMBRANIFOLIA (Good. et Wood.) J. Ag. 2, 3, 4, A, B 7018. PHYMATOLITHON POLYMORPHUM (L.) Foslie. 2. PLEONOSPORIUM BonnEmi (J. E. Smith) Nag. 1. Plumaria elegans 3 = PLUMARIA SERICEA (Harv.) Rupr. PLUMARIA SERICEA (Harv.) Rupr. 1, 2, 3. POLYIDES ROTUNDUS (Gmel.) Grev. 1, 2, A, B in Herb. Eliz. M. Fahey. Polysiphonia affinis 1 = P. NovAE-ANGLIAE Taylor. Polysiphonia atrorubescens 4 = P. NIGRA (Huds.) Batt. POLYSIPHONIA ELONGATA (Huds.) Harv. 1, 2, 3, A, B. Polysiphonia fastigiata 1, 8 = P. LANosA (L.) Tandy. POLYSIPHONIA FIBRILLOSA Grev. 3, A, B 7018, 7185 cystocarpic. POLYSIPHONIA FLEXICAULIS (Harv.) Coll. 3, A. Polysiphonia formosa 1 = P. uncEorATA (Lightf.) Grev. POLYSIPHONIA Harvey! Bail. 1. POLYSIPHONIA LANOSA (L.) Tandy. 1, 3, A, B 7154. POLYSIPHONIA NIGRA (Huds.) Batt. 4, B POLYSIPHONIA NIGRESCENS (Huds.) Grev. 1, 2, 3, A, B 7184. POLYSIPHONIA NIGRESCENS var. DuRKEEI Harv. 3. POLYSIPHONIA NIGRESCENS var. FUCOIDES Harv. 8. POLYSIPHONIA NOVAE-ANGLIAE Taylor. 1, 3, 4, A, B. Polysiphonia Olneyi 1 = P. Harvey Bail. POLYSIPHONIA SUBTILISSIMA Mont. 1. POLYSIPHONIA URCEOLATA (Lightf.) Grev. 1, 4, A, B. Collected by Leonard Spiegel on Agardhiella; while sterile, it seemed to be the variety patens. Polysiphonia urceolata var. formosa 3 = P. URCEOLATA var. ROSEOLA (C. Ag.) J. Ag. POLYSIPHONIA URCEOLATA Var. PATENS (Dillw.) Grev. 3. POLYSIPHONIA URCEOLATA Var. ROSEOLA (C. Ag.) J. Ag. 3. POLYSIPHONIA VARIEGATA (C. Ag.) Zan. 1, A. Polysiphonia violacea 1, 3, 4 = P. NOVAE-ANGLIAE Taylor. Polysiphonia violacea var. flexicaulis 3 = P. FLEXICAULIS (Harv.) Coll. Porphyra laciniata 3 = P. омвплсАІ8 (L.) J. Ag. PoRPHYRA UMBILICALIS (L.) J. Ag. 1,3, A, B 7155. With monosporangia in whitish areas scattered submargin- 268 Rhodora [NOVEMBER ally as would be expected of the spermatangial areas of P. leucosticta Thur. Porphyra vulgaris 1 С. Ag. = P. umBILICALIS (L.) J. Ag. Ptilota elegans 1 authors = PLUMARIA SERICEA (Harv.) Rupr. ВнорорЕвмїз GEonarr (Batt.) Coll. 3, A, В 7317. Pointed out by W. R. Taylor on the leaves of Zostera. RHODOMELA SUBFUSCA (Wood.) C. Ag. 1,3. Collected by Dr. Hannah Croasdale in wash at the south end of the island during the summer of 1946. RHODYMENIA PALMATA (L.) Grev. 1, 3, 5, A, В. ScINAIA FURCELLATA (Turn.) Biv. 4. SErROSPORA GRIFFITHSIANA Harv. 1,3, A, B 7183, 7176. SPERMOTHAMNION TURNERI (Mert.) Aresch. 1, 2, 3, A, B 7175. SPYRIDIA FILAMENTOSA (Wulf.) Harv. 2, 3, A. SPYRIDIA FILAMENTOSA Var. REFRACTA Нагу. 1. TRAILLIELLA INTRICATA (J. Ag.) Batt. 4, A, B. LITERATURE CITED (1) жир, D. S. The flora of Penikese Island. Amer. Nat. 8: 193-197. 1874 (2) Davis, B. M. General characteristics of the algal vegetation of Buz- zard's Bay and Vineyard Sound in the vicinity of Woods Hole. U.S. Bur. Fisheries, Bull. 31 (1): 443-544; 31 (2): 795-833. 1913. (3) Lewis, I. Е. The flora of Penikese, fifty years after. Кнорока 26: 181-195, 211-219, 222-229. 1924. (4) Lewis, I. F., anb W. R. Taytor. Notes from the Woods Hole Labora- tory,—1932. Ruopora 35: 147-154. Plate no. 274. 1933. (5) TAYLOR, W. R. Notes on North Atlantic marine algae. I. Papers of the cupan Acad. of Sci., Arts and Letters 22: 225-233. 3 plates. 1937. (6) Lewis, I. F., лмо W. R. Taytor. Notes from the Woods Hole Labora- tory—1928. Ruopora 30: 193-198. 1928. (7) Fartow, Wm. G. The marine algae of New England. U. 8. Comm. Fish and Fisheries, Report for 1879, Appendix A-1: 1-210. 15 plates. 1881. (8) TayLor, W. R. Marine algae of the northeastern coast of North America. 427 [viii] pages. 60 plates. Univ. of Mich. Press, Ann Arbor, Mich. 1937. (9) FELDMANN, JEAN. La végétation benthique de la Mediterranée. Mém. de la Société de Biogéographie VII: 181-195. 1940. (10) Fanney, ELIZABETH М. A preliminary study of the vertical distribution of arine organisms in the Cape Cod area. Biol. Bull. 93 (2): 193. 1947. (11) Dory, MaxwELL S. Critical tide factors that are correlated with the vertical distribution of marine algae and other organisms along the Pacific Coast. Ecology 27 (4): 315-328. 1946. (12) КАнкү, ЕЁтл7АВЕТН M., AND MaxwELL S. Dory. Repopulation of denuded transects. Ecol. Soc. of Amer., Bull. 28 (4): 68. 1947. (13) Dory, MAxwELL S. The marine algae of Oregon. Part I. Chloro- phyta and Phaeophyta. Farlowia 3 (1): 1-65. 10 plates. 1947. 1948] Croasdale,—Fresh and Brackish Water Algae 269 (14) FELDMANN, JEAN, AND GENEVIEVE FELDMANN. Influence de la vie en eu douce sur la morphologie et la cytologie de l'Enteromorpha marg- inata J. Ag. Bull. de la Société d'Histoire Naturelle de l'Afrique du Nord 22: 289-292. 1941. (15) Kyrn, Навагр. Die Phaeophyceenordnung Chordariales. Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N. F. 36 (9): 1-67. 30 figures. 8 plates. 1940. (16) PAPENFUss, GEORGE F. Review of the Acrochaetium-Rhodochorton complex of the red algae. Univ. Calif. Pubs. in Bot. 18 (14) : 299-334. 1945. (17) FELDMANN, JEAN. Les algues marines de la cóte des Albéres. IV. Rhodophycées. Rev. Algol. 11: 247-330. 1939. (18) Күм, HaRarp. Die Rhodophyceen der schwedischen Westküste. Lunds Univ. Arsskr., N. F., Avd. 2. 40 (2): 1-104. 32 plates. 1944. (19) TavrLon, W. R. A species of Acrothrix on the Massachusetts Coast. Amer. Jour. Bot. 15: 577-583. 2 plates. 1928. (20) JonpaN, D. 5. A key to the higher algae of the Atlantic Coast, between Newfoundland and Florida. Part II. Rhodospermeae (Red Algae). Amer. Nat. 8: 479-488. 1874. (21) SETCHELL, W. A., anD N. L. Garpner. Phycological contributions, VII. Univ. Calif. Pubs. in Bot. 13 (1): 1-13. 1924. (22) DRovET, Francis. The Oscillatoriaceae of Southern Massachusetts. Ruopora 40: 221-273. 1938. (23) Тніуү, Francesca. New records of some marine Chaetophoraceae and Chaetosphaeridiaceae for North America. Biol. Bull. 85 (3): 244-264. 88 figures. 1943. (24) Kvriw, Hararo. Uber die Fortpflanzungsverhültnisse in der Ordnung Ulvales. Kungl. Fysiogr. Sallsk. Lund Forhandl. 17 (17):1-9. 1947. (25) KyELLMAN, Е. К. Norra Ishafvets algflora. Vega-expeditionens vetensk- apliga iakttagelser Bd. 3. Stockholm. 1883. II. FRESH AND BRACKISH WATER ALGAE OF PENIKESE ISLAND HANNAH CROASDALE! (Plate 1118) The island of Penikese boasts only two brackish ponds and a fleeting number of freshwater ones. The former, being replen- ished from the sea by splash or seepage, apparently hold water throughout the summer. The others all dry up sooner or later. SoutH Ponp. The deeper of the brackish ponds is at the southern tip of the island and is known as South Pond. It lies very near the east shore, separated from the sea only by a bar of shingle, and has practically no aquatic vegetation around it. It is approximately 200 x 70 feet. On August 3rd its salinity was 13.2, its pH 9.0, its temperature 30? C. It had a heavy scum of Enteromorpha and bluegreens all around the edge. 1 DARTMOUTH CoLLEGE, Hanover, New Hampshire. 270 Rhodora [NOVEMBER Tus Ponp. The other brackish pond lies in the southwest corner of Tub Point, and is sometimes shown on maps as two ponds, although the two were merged in 1947. It is relatively shallow and, being further from the sea and on a quieter shore, probably gets little splash. It is surrounded mainly by coarse grass. When full it is about 200 x 100 feet, but it dries down somewhat during the summer. In August its salinity was 34.4, its pH 9.0-9.5, its temperature 29° C. It had a heavy scum of Enteromorpha and bluegreens; there was also much guano flavoring it. Typua Ponp. This lies near the east shore, but protected by high land from the sea, across from Tub Point. It is the nearest thing to a freshwater pond on the island, but it undoubtedly dries up completely most summers. When full it is about 150 feet in diameter, and has much aquatic vegetation in and around it. On July 6th it was nearly full but by August 3rd it was nearly dry. Its salinity then was 0.8, its pH 8.0-8.5, its tem- perature 33? С. In July about half its surface was covered with a scum of conjugates and Oedogonium, and there was a fine bed of Chara. By August the Chara had disappeared, the scum was rotting, and patches of blue-greens were appearing on the newly exposed bottom. Marsu. The area known as “The Marsh" lies at the north- east end of the island, where the neck leads off to Tub Point. When wet it covers an area of about 400 x 100 feet, but it dries up drastically during the summer: in July there was standing water over most of it, by August it was all dry except for about 4 square feet. In August the salinity was 0.6, the pH 8.5, the temperature 33? C (except for one springy spot, under a board, that was 22? C.) There was a bluegreen or flagellate film over much of the exposed bottom. Dry Ponp, “ZINN Рохр”, Leper Ponp, TERN Рохр. On the west side of the island there is a series of small kettle holes which contain water during the early part of the summer. By August they were all dry. From north to south they are known as Dry Pond, “Zinn Pond", Leper Pond and Tern Pond. There was a little water in Tern Pond in July, and it showed a pH of 7.0. CISTERN. An old cistern among the ruins of the Leper Houses, containing rusty water, supported a variety of flagellates. 1948] Croasdale,—Fresh and Brackish Water Algae 271 Reservoirs. There are two reservoirs, on the high land at the center of the island. The deeper of these was dry in July and August and showed only encysted Sphaerella. The shallower one had several inches of water over a thin layer of silt, tinted green with Scenedesmus and Pediastrum. The water showed a salinity of 0.6, a pH of 9.0-9.5, and a temperature of 30? C. As may be seen the freshwater algae of Penikese are severely handicapped by having no stable freshwater environment, such as a permanent pond or stream. This factor naturally out- weighs most others, and a collection made during any one visit probably reflects the past and present state of dryness of habitats rather than any geographical isolation. The only way to acquire а fair knowledge of the freshwater algal population of the island would be to stay there throughout the season, for several seasons, and take repeated samples from the transient ponds as they fill and dry. Diatoms: In the case of the diatoms, however, because of their durable shells, a careful study of the bottom mud of a pond, however small, dried or not, might reveal what diatoms it had harbored in previous favorable periods. Such a study was made by Paul 8. Conger in 1923 and indicated what the diatom flora had been during the past. Mr. Conger has pointed out that another diatom survey, after а mere 25 years, would probably only bring the same forms to light again, and serve to confuse the issue. “The possibility of invasion of a new form or forms in these ponds which might make them different from the previous examination is so remote as to suggest nothing of significance." Consequently, on his recommendation, a diatom list is omitted here but may be obtained from the 1923 survey. CHLOROPHYCEAE: Ав might be expected, collections from brackish ponds and from small freshwater ones on the verge of drying up yielded a relatively poor assortment of green algae. Oedogonium and Spirogyra in one pond formed extensive mats in July but disappeared later. The most conspicuous genus was Scenedesmus which was present in great abundance and variety in nearly all the samples. Desmids were naturally sparse, being represented mainly by Closterium and Cosmarium. XANTHOPHYCEAE were inconspicuous on the whole but fur- nished several new and interesting forms. 272 Rhodora [NOVEMBER MYXOPHYCEAE dominated the field by August, and though no wealth of species was noted, in most collections one or more genera of the Oscillatoriaceae formed the bulk of the algal material. CHRYSOPHYCEAE? were disappointingly few in number con- sidering the numbers usually found in salt and brackish water. It was hoped that Chrysococcus, frequently the most abundant inland water summer genus would be found; not one was seen. Two of the four genera are believed to be new records for this country, however: Olisthodiscus luteus Carter and Prymnesium parvum Carter’. The former had been previously observed at Woods Hole, and possibly in some of the Wisconsin lakes, but not identified. CRYPTOPHYCEAE were numerous. The five species included a red Cryptomonas, but this is not believed to be new. Species erection has probably been too greatly extended for this genus whose members vary a great deal, and the red form from South Pond was probably only a variant of С. erosa, common to four other stations. Chroomonas baltica is probably a new U. 8. record. DINOPHYCEAE were extremely few, which was unexpected, because similar situations around Woods Hole frequently have an abundance of these. Chlorophycean flagellates were also sparse. Dunaliella was found in South Pond and Haematococcus developed in the laboratory in a few hours from a dried red crust. Two small organisms which might be Chlamydomonas or might be algal reproductive cells are shown. Euglenophycean species were most numerous. None was particularly unexpected except possibly Menoidium gracile. One heavily ribbed form while abundant could not be satisfac- torily placed: it has been doubtfully termed Tropidoscyphus. The protozoan flagellates are the usual ubiquitous group, and in this case are rather fewer than might have been expected. A single one was found in some abundance which could not be identified at all and is not listed here. 2 The paragraphs and tables concerning the flagellate groups of the Chrysophyceae, Cryptophyceae, Dinophyceae, Chlorophyceae and Euglenophyceae were provided by Dr. J. B. Lackey, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, from his collections and observations while cooperating in the general survey of the Island on August 3, 1947. 3 Carter, Nellie. New or interesting algae from brackish water. Arch. f. Pro- tistenk. 70: 1—68. 1938. 1948] Croasdale,—Fresh and Brackish Water Algae 273 The following lists, from collections obtained during a few hours spent on the island in July, and again in August, are not to be considered as complete. Any differences from the lists obtained in 1923 probably indicate the current collecting condi- tions rather than the lapse of 25 years. The flagellate collections, by Dr. Lackey, were limited to August. Despite the poor condi- tions a total of 88 flagellated algae and protozoa were found and identified to genus, and in 74 cases to species. Excluding flagellates, of the 37 forms recorded in 1924 about a third were re-found in 1947, and also, about half have been found during that interval on the other Elizabeth Islands. Of the present list of 107 forms, 49 have been found on the other Elizabeth Islands, an additional 18 have been reported elsewhere in Massachusetts, 29 are believed to be new to the state, and 5 new to science. List ОЕ FRESHWATER ALGAE (EXCLUSIVE OF FLAGELLATES AND Dratoms)* CHLOROPHYCEAE ** ANKISTRODESMUS CHODATI (Tann.-Fullem.) Brunnth.—Marsh **A. CONVOLUTUS Chorda, v. minutus (Nüg.) Rab.—Leper, Marsh А. FLACATUS (Chorda) Ralfs—Typha *CHARA Ввлохи Gruel. (Det. R. D. Wood)—Typha *CHLOROCOCCUM HUMICOLUM (Nig.) Rab.—Soil cultures *CLOSTERIUM JUNCIDUM Ralfs—Typha *C. JUNCIDUM, v. BREVIOR (Ralfs) Roy—Typha **C. LUNULA (Müll.) Nitsch., v. coroRATUM Klebs.—Typha *C. PARVULUM Nág.—Marsh, Typha *C. Rarrsrr Bréb., v. HyBRIDUM Rab.—Leper *C. sTRIGOSUM Bréb.—Leper *C. STRIOLATUM Еһ. — Гурһа **C. VENUS Kütz., v. INcURvUM (Bréb.) Krieger—Typha *COELASTRUM CAMBRICUM Arch.— Marsh **COSMARIUM GRANATUM Bréb., f. MINOR Skuja— Typha *C. IMPRESSULUM Elfv.—Marsh, Typha **C. IMPRESSULUM, forma—Tern, Typha *C. POLYGONUM (Nüg.) Arch.—Marsh, Typha (with zygospore) *C. PUNCTULATUM Bréb., v. SUBPUNCTULATUM (Nordst.) Bórg.— Typha *C. RENIFORME (Ralfs) Arch.—Typha * Species marked with one asterisk have not been reported before from Penikese. Species marked with two asterisks are believed to be new to Massachusetts. 274 Rhodora [NOVEMBER *C. 'TunPINII Bréb., v. PorouicuM Gutw.—Typha **ENTEROMORPHA INTESTINALIS (L.) Grev., f. rENvIS Collins— Typha CGLAUCOCYSTIS NOSTOCHINEARUM Itzigs.—Marsh **GrLoEOCYSTIS AMPLA Kiitz.—Typha **(GOoNGROSIRA FASTIGIATA (Borzi) Schmidle—Typha *KENTROSPHAERA FACCIOLAAE Borzi—Tern *MICROSPORA QUADRATA Hazen—''Zinn" M. WiLLEANA Lig.—‘Zinn” *M. WrrTROcKI Lig.—Typha MIcROTHAMNION KUETZINGIANUM Niig.—Typha *OEDOGONIUM CRASSIUSCULUM Wittr., v. IDIOANDROSPORUM Nor. & Wittr.—Typha **PALMELLA MUCOSA Kütz.— l'ypha *PEDIASTRUM BonvaNuM (Turp.) Menegh.—Typha *P. ETRAS (Ehr.) Ralfs—Typha Prorococcus VIRIDIS Ag.—Typha and Soil cultures *PROTODERMA VIRIDE Kiitz.—Typha *SCENEDESMUS ABUNDANS (Kirchn.) Chod.—Marsh, Typha *S. ABUNDANS, V. ASYMMETRICA (Schréd.) Smith—Marsh, Reservoir, Typha **S. ABUNDANS, V. BREVICAUDA Smith—Marsh, Typha *S. ABUNDANS, V. LONGICAUDA Smith—Marsh *S. ACUTIFORMIS Schród.— Reservoir, Typha *S. ARCUATUS Lemm., v. CAPITATUS Smith— Reservoir *S. piJUGA (Turp.) Làg.—Leper S. BRAZILIENSIS Bohlin— Reservoir *S. prMonPHus (Turp.) Kütz.—Leper, Typha **S. LONGUS Meyen— Marsh, Reservoir *S. QUADRICAUDA (Turp.) Bréb.—Leper, Marsh, Reservoir, Typha **S. SERRATUS (Chorda) Bohlin—Reservoir **GPrROGYRA MAJUSCULA (Kütz.) Czurda emend— Typha *STAURASTRUM HEXACERUM (Ehr.) Wittr.— Typha **S. MUCRONATUM Ralfs—Typha **S. PUNCTULATUM Bréb., v. PYGMAEUM (Bréb.) W. & С. S. West — Typha **STIGEOCLONIUM NANUM Kütz.—Typha *TETRAËDRON MINIMUM (А. Br.) Hansg.—Typha *TROCHISIA RETICULARIS (Reinsch) Hansg.—Typha ` XANTHOPHYCEAE **BoTRYDIOPSIS ARHIZA Borzi—Tern *Borryococcus Brauni Kiitz.—Typha **HETEROTHRIX QUADRATA Pascher—Soil culture **MERINGOSPHAERA HENSENI Schiller, v. brevispina, var. nov.— Tern 1948] Croasdale,—Fresh and Brackish Water Algae 275 *OPHIOCYTIUM COCHLEARE A. Br.—Typha *O. MAJUS Nàg.—Marsh **O. undulatum, sp. nov.— Marsh **RADIOSPHAERA Nemiahi, sp. nov.—Marsh *"l'ETRAEDRIELLA ACUTA Pascher—Typha TRIBONEMA GAYANUM Pascher— Tern, Typha *Т. MINUS Hazen—Marsh, “Zinn” MY XOPHYCEAE **ANABAENA CALIFORNICA Borge, f. subconstricta, fa. nov.— Typha ** A. FLOS-AQUAE (Lyngb.) Bréb., v. Gracttis Klebahn— Typha * A. INAEQUALIS (Kütz.) Born. et Flah.—Marsh *CHROOCOCCUS MINUTUS (Kütz.) Nig.—Typha *C. TURGIDUS (Kiitz.) Nàg.—Marsh **LYNGBYA ALLORGEI Frémy— Zinn" *MERISMOPEDIA TENUISSIMA Lemm.—Typha **NosTOC RIVULARE Kütz.—Marsh, Typha **OSCILLATORIA ACUTISSIMA Kuff.—Marsh *O. AMPHIBIA Ag.—Marsh *O. BREVIS (Kiitz.) Gom.—Marsh *O. ORNATA Kütz.—Marsh ЖО), PROLIFICA (Grev.) Gom.—Tern **O. PSEUDOGEMINATA С. Schmid.—Soil culture О. TENUIS Ag.—Leper, Marsh, Typha, “Zinn” *PHORMIDIUM LAMINOSUM Gom.—‘‘Zinn”’ P. TENUE (Menegh.) Gom.—Marsh **SPIRULINA SUBTILISSIMA Kütz., v. brevis, var. nov.—Marsh *S. TENERRIMA Kütz.— Typha List or BRACKISH-WATER ALGAE (EXCLUSIVE OF FLAGELLATES AND DIATOMS) CHLOROPHYCEAE ENTEROMORPHA spp. MYXOPHYCEAE **ANABAENA TORULOSA (Carm.) Lüg., v. CYLINDRACEA (Playf.) Geitl.—South * APHANOTHECE CASTAGNEI (Bréb.) Rab.—Tub LYNGBYA AESTUARII Gom. (Det. F. Drowet)—Tub *L. CONFERVOIDES Ag.—South *L. EPIPHYTICA Hieron.—South, Tub * MICROCYSTIS FLOS-AQUAE (Wittr.) Kirchn.—Tub ** M. PARASITICA Kiitz.—Tub в The species of Enteromorpha have been treated with the marine forms in the preceding paper by Dr. M. S. Doty. 276 Rhodora OSCILLATORIA AMPHIBIA Ag.—Tub **Ó. ARTICULATA Gardn.—South **O. GEMINATA Menegh.— Tub O. MARGARITIFERA Kütz.— Гар ?*O. MARITIMA C. Ag. (Det. F. Drouet)—Tub *O. NIGRO-VIRIDIS Thwaites—Tub *O. TENUIS Ag.—South *SPIRULINA MAIOR Kütz.— Tub *S. sUBSALSA Oerst.—South [NOVEMBER List or FLAGELLATES FROM Six HABITATS ON PENIKESE ISLAND, AUGUST 3, 1947 (All in the trophic state) Typha Cistern Salt Reservoir Marsh | Tub CHRYSOPHYCEAE CHROMULINA OVALIS. .... seen OCHROMONAS SP... OLISTHODISCUS LUTEUS. .... sese PRYMNESIUM РАВУОМ................... CRYPTOPHYCEAE CHROOMONAS (SETONIENSIS?)..... sss. CHROOMONAS BALTICA .... ses CRYPTOMONAS EROSA.... ee CYATHOMONAS ТЕЮКСАТА................ RHODOMONAS LENS... ... een DINOPHYCEAE AMPHIDINIUM OPERCULATUM............-. EXUVIAELLA LIMA...... 0050050555 GLENODINIUM CINCTUM... 2.22.2280. GYMNODINIUM PALUSTRE. .... eee GYMNODINIUM (PUNCTATUM Or SIMPLEX)... PERIDINIUM BIPES........ se n CHLOROPHYCEAE CHLAMYDOMONAS SP. (Fig. 1)....... ose CHLAMYDOMONAS SP. (Fig. 2)............ CHLAMYDOMONAS 8P..... ees CHLAMYDOMONAS SB... es ~ » ра ра ра Ar ре ра A ра 1948] Croasdale,—Fresh and Brackish Water Algae 277 B o a eje] a| |5 >al LSN £O | eA |2 |а CHLOROGONIUM EUCHLORUM ............. X X ТОСКА ТА SALINA. ea au a a ES. X HAEMATOCOCCUS РІЛЈУІА18. ............. X EUDORINA ELEGANS........ a a X HETEROMASTIX АМаТСІАТА............... X LOBOMONAS ROSTRATA ae a. X POLYTOMA UVELLA. X PYRAMIDOMONAS SP . X THORACOMONAS PHACOTOIDES . IX EUGLENOPHYCEAE ANISUNEMA OVALE. Wools РУ кы eles X X ANISONEMA HE. аъзо X ANASTASIA л I; pihen Ioane nehi Е те X| |X X COLACIOM CALVUM came b oon ba |26 ENTOSIPHON SULCATUS", a seese iia a aa X Por AGILIS. uT i raah ne DELE qe X EUGLENA GRACILIS: cu жазышы. AN EUGLENASEUSCA ы a ые тылу р. X EUGLENA MUTABILIS e. mS X EUGLENA РІЗСІЕОВМІЅ................... X ОСЕМА SEIROGYRA у. зу X ТТЕ VIRIDIS. e a Ал eux AS X е Е у МК Т ы „кз ЛЕ X HETERONEMA ACUS. мыз. ene X LEPOCINCLIS ЕО8ТЕОЕМЇ8В................ X LEPOCINCLIS OYUM. .... eee n AX MENOIDIUM GRACILE........ ууз ANM X MENOIDIUM INCURVUM .................. X X MENOIDIUM ТОВТОО8ОМ................. X X NOTOSOLENUS АРОСАМРТО8.............. XXX NOoTOSOLENUS ORBICULARIS. ........ sss X| |X} | X PETALOMONAS CARINATA. EMT „ү X PETALOMONAS MEDIOCANELLATA MER X PERANEMA TRICHOPHORUM .............. X| |X x PHACUS BREVICAUDA ..... seen nnn X PHACUS PARVULA... 6.55.4 050.5 s URS x PHACUS PLEURONECTES ................. X PHACUBPTRUM К Г... + TER OS X X PHACUS TRIQUETER.. a. 5... М n nn X X PHEIGUBSEBONGICAUDA шша на 5 ДЕ X 278 Rhodora [NOVEMBER Cistern Salt Tub TROPIDOSCYPHUS OCTOCOSTATUS TROPIDOSCYPHUS sr. (Fig. 3)... PROTOZOA? ACTINOMONAS SP. ............ cP cw) Savi Ж їйї [0 Б-ы ЖОЮ MASTIGAMOEBA LONGIFILUM............. MONAS AMOEBINA............ „++ ж + t + t] + + n9 TET 4 | Typha X X 5d а) Reservoir bd 4 bd] Marsh ра ра ра ра ра < ра ра ра v PAPA ра рар "A ра ра DESCRIPTIONS ОЕ NEW FORMS COSMARIUM IMPRESSULUM Elfv. forma. (РІ. 1118, Figs. 5, 6). A form approaching C. impressulum f. suborthogona Racib. in shape and f. minor Turn. in size. Length 20-23 u, breadth 14- 18 u, thickness 8-13 u. Tern Pond, Typha Pond. т The few non-flagellate forms listed here are included merely as a matter of record and not through any belief that they may belong to one of the “algal series.” 1948] Croasdale,—Fresh and Brackish Water Algae 279 RaprosPHAERA Nemiahi?, sp. nov. (Pl. 1118, Fig. 8). Cellu- lae ellipsoideae, membranis levibus; spinae maxima ex parte aequatoriales, attenuatae, autem, pauciores brevioresque quam in R. sol Pascher. Cellulae intus ineognitae. Cellulae 8 x 10 y, spinae 2-5 џ long. Marsh. MERINGOSPHAERA HENSENI Schiller, v. brevispina, var. nov. (Pl. 1118, Fig. 7). Varietas spinas pauciores brevioresque, pro- cessibus consimiles, habens. Cellulae sine spinis 10-15 y. lat. ; spinae 1-1.5 y lat., 6-9 u long. Tern Pond. Орносүтгпм undulatum, sp. nov. (Pl. 1118, Fig. 9). Cellula solitaria, brevis, non convoluta sed aequaliter undulata, c. 4 undulationibus; apex rotundatus, basis spinam brevem disco basali praeditam habens. Cellula 7 y. lat., 40 » long. Specimen unicum visum. Marsh. ANABAENA CALIFORNICA Borge, f. subconstricta, fa. nov. (Pl. 1118, Fig. 1, 2). Forma a typo differens sporis subcon- strictis asperisque et magnitudine paulo minore; cellulae vegeta- tivae pseudovacuolas praebentes. Veg. cell 4—4.5 x 4-6 џ, heterocyst. cell. 6 x 10 р, sporae 5-5.5 x 12-16 џ. Typha Pond. Geitler includes this species in A. inaequalis (Kütz.) Born. et Flah., disregarding its tapered end cell. My form resembles so much more closely Borge's figures and description that I prefer to maintain his species. SPIRULINA SUBTILISSIMA Kütz., v. brevis, var. nov. (Pl. 1118, Fig. 3). Varietas multo brevior quam typus, extremitatibus acuminatis et spiris laxioribus. Trichomata 0.8-0.9 q lat., 10-20 (—25) u long., spirae 1.5-2.0 y. lat., anfractibus 3-6, inter se 3.5—4 и distantibus. Marsh. EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1118 ANABAENA CALIFORNICA Borge, f. subconstricta, fa. nov.: Fig. 1, end of fila- ment; Fig. 2, ripe spore. SPIRULINA SUBTILISSIMA Kütz., v. brevis, var. nov.: Fig. 3. COosMARIUM IMPRESSULUM Elfv., forma: Figs. 5, 6. MERINGOSPHAERA HENSENI Schiller, v. brevispina, var. nov.: Fig. 7. RapriosPHAERA Nemiahi, sp. nov.: Fig. 8. OpuiocytTium undulatum, sp. nov.: Fig. 9. CosMARIUM POLYGONUM (Nag.) Arch.: Figs. 10, 11, 2 forms; Fig. 12, zygo- spore; Fig. 13, another zygospore at lesser magnification. All figures except no. 13 drawn to same scale, with aid of camera lucida. в Named in honor of Professor R. C. МемІАН, of Dartmouth College, who has guided the author through hundreds of Latin diagnoses. 280 Rhodora [NOVEMBER PSEUDO-ELEPHANTOPUS SPICATUS, A WEED OF POTENTIAL IMPORTANCE IN FLORIDA S. F. BLAKE Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus (B. Juss.) Gleason, a composite originally described from French Guiana and now known as a wide-spread weedy plant of the American and Old World tropics, was first recorded from the United States by Dr. F. R. Fosberg (Amer. Midl. Nat. 29: 786. 1943), on the basis of a specimen collected by О. E. Baynard in April 1942 in a picnic area in Hillsborough State Park, northeastern Hillsborough County, in central western peninsular Florida, and sent for identification to the Bureau of Plant Industry. It was accompanied by the note that 2 plants had been observed in 1941, and about 50 in 1942. Dr. Erdman West of the Florida Agricultural Experiment Station has now sent another specimen collected by E. B. Hadley at Bradenton, Manatee County, the next county south of Hills- borough County, on 27 January 1947. The finder stated that it is a pestiferous weed in cultivated fields, and is not relished by cattle. Apparently it is getting well established in western peninsular Florida. The plant has usually been known as Elephantopus spicatus Juss. or Distreptus spicatus Cass. In 1902 C. F. Baker, in his revision of the Elephantopeae (Trans. Acad. Sci. St. Louis 12: 54) adopted for the genus the older name Pseudelephantopus of Rohr, and he has been followed by most recent authors, including Gleason in his treatment in the North American Flora. W. R. Philipson, who upholds the genus as distinct from Elephantopus, has recently stated (Journ. Bot. 76: 301. 1938) that the original spelling of the name was Pseudo-Elephantopus. Not having access to the original publication by Rohr!, I have followed him except for decapitalizing the second component of the name. Philipson also states that the name Pseudelephantopus spicatus, ! Since this paper was put in type, I have been able to examine Rohr's original pub- lication of the name Pseudo-Elephantopus and corroborate Philipson's statements regarding it. Each of the half dozen references to Rohr's paper that I have examined differs in details from each of the others. and each, including Philipson's, is incorrect or incomplete in at least one particular. The correct citation is: Pseudo-Elephantopus Rohr, Skrivter af Naturhistorie-Selskabet (Kigbenhavn) 2 (1): 214. 1792. Vol. 2 was published in two separately paged hefter, so that it is necessary to cite the part in which the name appeared ; de Candolle and Pfeiffer, the only authors who indicate the part, wrongly give it as part 2. 1948] Blake,—Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus 281 cited by Gleason (North Amer. Fl. 33: 109. 1922) as published by Robr in 1792, was actually first printed in the North American Flora, and should be ascribed to Gleason. The name Elephanto- pus spicatus, when first published by Aublet (Hist. Pl. Guiane Frang. 2: 808. 1775), was ascribed to В. de Jussieu. No diag- nosis was given, only a reference to Sloane’s History and Cata- logue, in the first of which a sufficient description is given to establish the name. Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus is a simple or branching perennial herb up to about 1 meter high, thinly erect-pilose, with alternate, sessile, linear to oblong or obovate, serrulate or entire leaves, and slender usually elongate terminal spikes of white or whitish, 4-flowered, subeylindrie, sessile heads, solitary or usually in small clusters in the axils of reduced leaves or bracts. The genus, which is monotypic, is related to Elephantopus, but differs remarkably in its pappus, which 1s unique in the whole family. It is described by Gleason as consisting of 10-15 bristles, includ- ing 2 long stout lateral ones plicate at the tip, 2 straight ones almost as long, and several short scarious bristles, all gradually dilated and fimbriate-ciliate at base. Although about 10 to 15 elements can be made out in the pappus, the shorter ones are mostly only incompletely separated bristles formed by the laceration of the dilated paleaceous bases of the longer ones, and the pappus seems to me better described as follows: Pappus 1-ѕегіафе, of about 5-7 bristles or awns; the 1—8 on outer side of achene (rarely wanting) usually about half as long as the others, slender, hispidulous, straight or sometimes irregularly once plicate toward apex, narrowly paleaceous-dilated and hairy at base and there sometimes lacerate into 1 or 2 much shorter bristles; the 2 (rarely 3) on the inner side of achene almost seti- form, about as long as the straight part of the lateral awns, straight, hispidulous throughout, paleaceous-dilated at base and there cleft into one to several bristly or paleaceous segments on each side; the 2 on the angles stouter, very stiff, at base paleaceous and cleft like the inner awns (rarely uncleft and merely hispidu- lous), minutely hispidulous below, smooth and terete above, abruptly twice plicate toward apex, the extreme tip minutely hispidulous. Mr. Hadley's statement regarding the weedy nature of this 282 Rhodora [NovEMBER plant in Florida is of interest because of what is known of its behavior in other regions where it has become introduced. Of special significance is a note published by Auguste Chevalier, the well-known writer on African plants and on tropical plants in general, under the title “Sur une mauvaise herbe de Tahiti" (Revue Bot. Appl. et Agr. Trop. 11: 119-120. 1931). In that island it bears the French names "'faux-tabac" and “faux-tabac des Marquises." Introduced not long ago, it tends to spread along roads and in fallow land, and is as harmful to cultivation as lantana or guava trees. In certain valleys near Papeete it forms a thick carpet which kills all grass. Its destruction, according to an article by a local agriculturist cited by Chevalier, is difficult because it has to be dug out; the hooked awns of the pappus adhere to clothing and the hair of animals and enable it to spread everywhere. According to an inhabitant of the Marquesas, the plant was imported from America as a forage plant and is said to afford good pasturage there, but in Tahiti animals do not feed upon it. I have found no other reference to support the state- ment that it is a good forage plant in tropical America. Setchell, in his paper on Tahitian spermatophytes (Univ. Calif. Publ. Bot. 12: 212. 1926), recorded Elephantopus mollis H. B. K. as abundant by waysides and in fields in the District of Faaa. Не stated that it was a weed of recent introduction, much disliked by the people of Tahiti, who call it “false tobacco"; the native Tahitians call it '"ava'ava" and ‘’ava’a,” with the same significance. Chevalier questioned whether he might not have mistaken P. spicatus for E. mollis. That Setchell did not make this very unlikely misidentification is proved by an achene of Selchell & Parkes 43, the collection cited by Setchell, kindly sent me by Miss Annetta M. Carter, which is definitely that of Elephantopus mollis. Dr. К. Raymond Fosberg, who has collected in Tahiti, informs me that both E. mollis and P. spicatus are common and bad weeds in that island, where both are called by а name or names essentially identical with those reported by Setchell. He regards E. mollis, which has broader leaves and grows rampantly to a height of 5 or 6 feet, as the more trouble- some weed of the two. In Guam, Safford (Contr. U. S. Nat. Herb. 9: 268. 1905) speaks of it, under the name Elephantopus spicatus, as a common 1948] Erskine and Schofield,—Floerkea proserpinacoides 283 and troublesome weed, and states that it was collected in the island by Chamisso, who was there in 1817. Merrill (Enum. Philipp. Flow. Plants 3: 596. 1923) gives it as common in waste places in the settled area of the Philippines, but says nothing about its weedy qualities. Grisebach (Fl. Brit. W. Ind. 355. 1861) long ago mentioned it as a troublesome weed in Jamaica. Spencer Moore, in Fawcett and Rendle’s Flora of Jamaica (7: 166. 1936) does not refer to it as a weed, but quotes Sloane (1707) to the effect that the hard stalks and leaves were used as brooms to sweep houses. In Java, Backer (Onkruidflora der Javasche suikerrietgronden, p. 755. 193?) states that it was first observed in 1917 in a shady kampong at Bidara tjina, just south of Meester Cornelis (near Batavia), where it was already well established, thereafter spreading to Buitenzorg (1919) and Pasoeroean (1925), thriving at both places and spreading spontaneously but at first slowly. All the available evidence indicates that Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus, however interesting as an addition to the adventive flora of the United States, is a potentially injurious weed which should be extirpated if possible before it becomes too thoroughly established. Division OF PLANT EXPLORATION AND INTRODUCTION BunEAU OF PLANT INDUSTRY, SOILS, AND AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING, BELTSVILLE, MARYLAND FLOERKEA PROSERPINACOIDES IN Nova Scorra.—floerkea proserpinacoides, new to the flora of Nova Scotia, was found on May 29, 1948, at Coldbrook, Kings County. The plants were growing in profusion on the wet river-meadow at the foot of a high bank close above the road-bridge, and about half a mile west of Coldbrook station. Although showing no signs of recent arrival, the species may well be of foreign origin. The material was mostly flowering, a few young fruits being seen. By the end of June the fruiting condition was predominant. The collection substantiating this report is Erskine & Schofield no. 2, sheets of which have been deposited at the Acadia and Gray Herbaria. The northeastern range-limit of this species is given as being 284 Rhodora [NOVEMBER from “w. Que. to Del.” by Gray’s Manual, while its easterly limit in Canada is the single station in Quebec (see Rouleau in Ruopora 47: 272. 1945). It may be noted that Quebec is included in the range of this species by Gray’s Manual, but omitted by Victorin from his Flore Laurentienne. Victorin apparently overlooked the old specimen preserved at McGill University and the record of the station on Nun's Island, near Montreal, only casually mentioned by Rouleau, for the plant has been known from there for a century and a quarter. It was found there by Dr. Andrew Holmes, his collection “made in the neighborhood of Montreal as early as 1821" (Macoun, Cat. Can. Pl. i. pp. v, vi and 91). Floerkea proserpinacoides represents a family, the Limnanthaceae, not hitherto found in the Maritime Provinces.—Davip ERSKINE AND WILFRED SCHOFIELD, Acadia University, Wolfville, N.S. Scirpus verecundus, nom. nov. S. planifolius Muhl. Descr. Gram. 32 (1817), not S. planifolius Grimm in Nov. Act. Nat. Cur. iii. (1767) App. 259. Unfortunately Grimm's Scirpus planifolius has not found its way into Index Kewensis, so that its priority over Muhlenberg’s name for а wholly different species has been overlooked by students of the genus in this country. Attention to the matter, with the clear statement that S. planifolius Muhl. is a much later homonym, was published in 1939 by Mansfeld in Fedde, Repert. Spec. Nov. xlvii. 270 (1939). Mansfeld identified S. planifolius Grimm with S. compressus (L.) Pers. (1805) not Moench (1794) and called it S. distichus Peterm. (1844); and Hylander, in his Nomenkl. und Systemat. Studien Nordisch. Gefüsspfl. 92 (1945) [Uppsala Universitets Arsskrift 1945: 7: 92] takes up S. planifolius Grimm to replace S. compressus (L.) Pers. The name, which was published by Grimm in 1767, with proper citations of earlier descriptions of Haller and Ruppius, cannot be used for the wholly different plant described by Muhlenberg.—M. L. FERNALD. Volume 50, no. 598, including pages 241—252, was issued 16 October, 1948. Hovova JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Conducted and published for the Club, by MERRITT LYNDON FERNALD, Editor-in-Chief CHARLES ALFRED WEATHERBY ALBERT FREDERICK HILL Associate Editors STUART KIMBALL HARRIS * Vol. 50. December, 1948. No. 600. CONTENTS: The Flora of Penikese, Seventy-four Years after. III. Penikese Island Fungi. JZAlizabeth R. Dearden. ........ 285 IV. Flora of Penikese Island. Edwin T. Moul. ............ 288 Potamogeton bicupulatus in Massachusetts. С. Earle Smith, Jr. 304 Forms of Cornus canadensis in Minnesota. Olga Lakela. ....... 304 Errata 4 c ETUR ЕЕ ЕЕЕ ЕЕЕ E ыле 306 АСИСТЕНТ bre 307 The New England Botanical Club, Ine. 8 and 10 West King St., Lancaster, Pa. Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. RHODORA. —4 monthly journal of botany, devoted primarily to the flora of the Gray's Manual Range and regions floristically related. Price, $4.00 per year, net, postpaid, in funds payable at par in United States currency in Boston; single copies (if available) of not more than 24 pages and with 1 plate, 40 cents, numbers of more than 24 pages or with more than 1 plate mostly at higher prices (see 3rd cover- page). Volumes 1-9 can be supplied at $4.00, 10-34 at $3.00, and volumes 35—46 at $4.00. Some single numbers from these volumes can be supplied only at ad- vanced prices (see 3rd cover-page). Somewhat reduced rates for complete sets can be obtained on application to Dr. Hill. Notes and short scientific papers, relating directly or indirectly to the plants of the northeastern states, will be considered for publication to the extent that the limited space of the journal permits. Forms may be closed five weeks in advance of publication. Authors (of more than two pages of print) will receive 15 copies of the issue in which their contributions appear, if they request them when returning proof. Extracted reprints, if ordered in ad- vance, will be furnished at cost. Address manuscripts and proofs to M. L. Fernald, 14 Hawthorn Street, Cambridge 38, Mass. Subscriptions (making all remittances payable to RHODORA) to Dr. А. F. Hill, 8 W. King St., Lancaster, Pa., or, preferably, Botanical Museum, Oxford St., Cambridge 38, Mass. Entered as second-class matter March 9, 1929, at the post office at Lancaster, Pa., under the Act of March 3, 1879. INTELLIGENCER PRINTING COMPANY Specialists in Scientific and Technical Publications EIGHT WEST KING ST., LANCASTER, PA. MEMOIRS OF THE GRAY HERBARIUM. A series of illustrated quarto papers issued at irregular intervals, sold separately No. l. A Monograph of the Genus Brickellia, by B. L. Robinson. 150 pp. 96 fig. 1917. $3.00. No. Ill. The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton. Section Axillares, by M. L. Fernald. 183 pp., 40 plates, 31 maps. 1932. $3.00. No. IV. The Myrtaceous Genus Syzygium Gaertner in Borneo, by E. D. Merrill and L. M. Perry. 68 pp. 1939, $1.50. No. V. The Old World Species of the Celastraceous Genus Microtropis Wallich, by E. D. Merrill and F. L. Freeman. 40 pp. 1940. $1.00. Gray Herbarium of Harvard University, Cambridge 38, Mass. Rhodora JOURNAL OF THE NEW ENGLAND BOTANICAL CLUB Vol. 50. December, 1948. No. 600. THE FLORA OF PENIKESE, SEVENTY-FOUR YEARS AFTER III. PENIKESE ISLAND FUNGI! ELIZABETH R. DEARDEN? The island of Penikese is dominated largely by an open, wind- swept, and arid grassland. To obtain a representative list of the fungous flora, several areas on the island were selected for intensive survey. These were chosen to include the habitats most nearly optimum for fungal growth, and the widest selection of possible hosts and other substrata. The results of such a localized study are likely to be more profitable than a cursory examination of the whole island necessarily limited by the time available. A large proportion of the collections were obtained from the area encompassing Typha Pond, a shallow freshwater pond. Several Pyrenomycetes and resupinate Thelephoraceae were found on the rotted wood of decorticated willow stumps. These stumps were the only trace of willows reported around the pond by Shaw in the previous survey. The branches and dead twigs of the maple trees growing on the slopes behind the caretaker’s cottage, the undersurface of fallen logs in moist areas, and the flora growing in the vicinity of the beach and pond were among the best substrates. Few fungi were collected on the herbaceous 1 The third paper reporting results of the biological survey of Penikese Island in commemoration of the 75th anniversary of the founding of Louis Agassiz’ Natural History school there in 1872. 2 Department of Botany, University of Toronto, Toronto, Canada. 286 Rhodora [DECEMBER hosts growing in very dry soil. The fungi reported from soil and on dung, and the majority of the myxothallophytes listed were collected and subsequently determined by Dr. J. T. Bonner. The fungi collected have been deposited in the Mycological Herbarium of the University of Toronto. Most of these collec- tions are meager; few fungi are represented from more than one locality on the island. These factors indicated the season not to be at an optimum for fungal growth. Thirty-five genera of fungi and five genera of other simple, non-pigmented thallophytes are reported for this survey. Thirty genera of fungi and all of the myxothallophytes are newly reported for Penikese. The apparent discrepancy between the present list and that compiled for the previous survey is not sur- prising. Both lists are admittedly incomplete, but offer some indication of the fungous vegetation to be found on the island. To all of those who have been of assistance in the collection and determination of these fungi, particularly Dr. John T. Bonner, Mr. Zelman Z. Dworkin, Dr. Roy F. Cain, and Mr. Wm. Irwin Illman, are extended sincere thanks in acknowledgment and appreciation of their aid. MYXOBACTERIALES Myxococcus sp. On (?) Muskrat dung. ACRASIALES DICTYOSTELIUM MUCOROIDES Bref. From soil and mud, and at edge of Typha-Pond in cattails. LABYRINTHULALES LABYRINTHULA MACROCYsTIS Cienk. On Zostera marina L., widespread, causal organism of epiphytotic in eel-grass. MY XOGASTRALES ARCYRIA NUTANS (Bull.) Grev. On log by side of house. DicTYDIUM CANCELLATUM (Batsch) Macbr. On log by edge of Typha Pond. FUNGI PHYCOMYCETES ALBUGO CANDIDA (Pers. ex Lév.) O. Kuntze. On Sisymbrium officinale (L.) Scop. growing in the damp bottom of reservoir no. 2. Mucor sp. From soil, widespread. 1948] Dearden,—Penikese Island Fungi 287 PILOBOLUS sp. On (?) Muskrat dung. Ruizopus sp. From soil, widespread. ASCOMYCETES AMPHISPHAERIA AQUATICA E. and E. On the inner rotted heartwood of Salix stump by Typha Pond. HyYSTEROGRAPHIUM Moni (Schw.) Rehm. On Salix stump by Typha Pond, HYSTEROGRAPHIUM sp. On (?) Catalpa twigs. This specimen is similar to the one listed above, but has larger spores (23 x 10 џ) with lighter colored walls. MYCOSPHAERELLA Sp. Оп the overwintered leaves of Panic- um virgatum L. Ап undetermined species of Hendersonia was present on the leaves of the same plant. NitscHkiA Fucke.u Nits. Оп dead twigs of Acer. ORBILIA CURVATISPORA Bourd. On frondose wood by shack and at Typha Pond. OrBILIA sp. Тоо young for specific determination. ROSELLINIA SUBICULATA (Schw.) Sace. On Salix stump by Typha Pond. BASIDIOMYCETES CONIPHORA OLIVASCENS (B. & C.) Mass. On undersurface of fallen log. CORTICIUM CONFLUENS Fr. On stump by Typha Pond. ODONTIA SPATHULATA (Fr.) Litsch. On frondose log by shack. PELLICULARIA PRUINATA (Bres.) Rogers ex Linder. On wood. PENIOPHORA CINEREA (Pers. ex Fr.) Cooke complex. On Acer twigs. PENIOPHORA SAMBUCI (Pers) Burt. On Salix stump by Typha Pond. PENIOPHORA TENUIS (Pat.) Massee. From fence pole on hill- side. PorvPonvs sp. On frondose wood, too old for determination. Portia sp. (brown) or resupinate Fomes sp. On undersurface of log by shack. Portia sp. (white). Оп frondose wood next to shack. PSALLIOTA ARVENSIS (?). In grass. PUCCINIA CORONATA Corda ог P. rubigo-vera agropyri (Eriks.) Arth. II on Holcus lanatus. STEREUM FASCIATUM Schw. On frondose log by shed. FUNGI IMPERFECTI ASPERGILLUS CANDIDUS Link. On animal cartilage, probably porpoise. ASPERGILLUS sp. In soil, widespread. CEPHALOSPORIUM sp. On log next shack. 288 Rhodora [DECEMBER Fusarium sp. In soil, widespread. HENDERSONIA sp. On leaves of Panicum virgatum L. A species of Mycosphaerella was also on this plant. HYPOXYLON RUBIGINOSUM Fr., imperfect stage. On log of fron- dose wood next to shack. OIDIUM CANDICANS (Sacc.) Linder. Imperfect stage of Pel- ren laa pruinata (Bres. Rogers ex Linder. On the log next shack. PENICILLIUM sp. In soil, widespread. STEGANOSPORIUM PIRIFORME (Hoffm.) Corda. Оп Acer. TRICHODERMA LIGNORUM (Tode) Harz. On decorticated Salix stump by Typha-Pond. TUBERCULARIA sp. The imperfect stage of Nectria cinnabarina (Tode ex Fr.) Fr. On dead twigs of Acer. TUBERCULARIA. Periola complex. On Plantago lanceolata. IV. FLORA OF PENIKESE ISLAND Epwin T. Моо, The third survey of the land flora of Penikese Island was made during the summer of 1947, commemorating the 74th Anniversary of the founding of the Anderson School of Natural History by Louis Agassiz. This survey was made by a group from the Botany Department of the Marine Biological Labora- tory. Those participating were Gladys Bulmer, Dorothy Stewart, Hazel L. Moul, David Erskine, E. M. Hulburt and Edwin T. Moul. It was our task to cover the Lichens, Bryo- phytes, Pteridophytes and Spermatophytes. А total of three trips was made to the island, the first on July 6, another on July 31 and a final trip on August З. This enabled us to secure the forms that mature early in the summer as well as collect the late summer plants. Specimens were collected of all species observed and are to be distributed to the following Herbaria. The first set of plants will be deposited in the Woods Hole Herbarium, the second set sent to the University of California at Berkeley, the third set to the University of Pennsylvania and further duplicates to Penn- sylvania State College. А complete set of grasses has been placed at Iowa State College and a set of the lichens deposited in the herbarium of the University of Wisconsin. All determina- tions not otherwise credited were made by David Erskine and 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 289 Edwin T. Moul. Acknowledgment is given here to Dr. John Thomson, Jr., University of Wisconsin; Dr. Richard W. Pohl, Iowa State College; Dr. E. Т. Wherry, University of Pennsyl- vania; Dr. Herbert A. Wahl, Pennsylvania State College; Dr. F. W. Pennell of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and Mr. Truman Yuncker for making and verifying determina- tions in specific groups. The assistance of Mr. Robert L. Schaeffer, Jr., of the University of Pennsylvania in checking synonymy is gratefully acknowledged. The first survey of the Flora of Penikese Island was made by David Starr Jordan under the direction of Louis Agassiz in 1873. The results were published in the American Naturalist, volume 8, April, 1874. А second survey was made on the 50th anniver- sary of the opening of the ‘‘Agassiz Laboratory” in 1923 and the results published in Rnopona, volume 26, beginning with the October issue, 1924. Dr. John M. Fogg, Jr., made an intensive study of the Flora of the Elizabeth Islands including Penikese Island, which was published in RHODORA, volume 32 beginning in the July issue, 1930. Using these last surveys as a basis for comparison, ecologically the island has changed very little in the last twenty-five years. The plants constituting the Tension Line community growing between the bare beaches and the grasslands are fundamentally the same. For some unaccountable reason Arenaria peploides was not found after a thorough search. Spergularia marina was either overlooked or it too has disappeared from the island. The grassland communities and the regions of the island they covered are unchanged as to dominant species. The asters recorded as occurring in the grasslands are missing or were over- looked because of their late summer flowering. Many of the cultivated ‘‘escapes’’ recorded in the last surveys have not sur- vived. The disappearance of these and some other elements in the flora may be due to the severe drenching by salt spray in the two hurricanes that have visited this part of the New England coast in recent years. The damage done to the beech forest on neighboring Naushon Island attests to the violence of these storms. It will be noticed that Rhus radicans has made its appearance in the grasslands and occurs in a number of places, but the plants 290 Rhodora [DECEMBER are small and stunted. The thickets of Sambucus canadensis have increased in size and number, particularly along the stone walls and in the depressions characteristic of glacial moraines. These depressions are filled with weedy and shrubby growth to the exclusion of the grasses. Trees and shrubs in the more exposed habitats have increased neither in number nor in size. This is apparent from the dead branches and twigs found at their tops. The tern nesting areas on the northern slopes of the island reported in 1923 as denuded are now completely covered with a pure stand of Rumex Acetosella. The bird nesting sites are now scattered all over the grasslands and thus new areas are being constantly denuded. After abandonment they are first covered by a few lichens and the moss Ceratodon purpureus, followed by Rumex Acetosella and stunted Oxalis stricta. Lichens occur on the scattered boulders, stone walls, rotten wood and bare soil all through the grasslands. In the published record of the 1923 survey, the lichens were not included, but subsequently in “Notes from the Woods Hole Laboratory, 1932", Lewis and Taylor, Ruopona 35: 149-150, a list of ten lichens collected during the survey was published. In the present paper, eleven species and forms new to the island are reported, while six species collected in 1923 were not found. 'The number of species of Bryophytes is reduced but among those collected there are two new records for the island. The flora in and around the ponds has altered very little. Typha Pond has the richest and most diversified flora of the fresh water ponds. "The willows that grew there have been cut and are dead. Dry Pond lived up to its name, although there was evidence of some water being present early in the year. Leper and Tern Ponds had become a mass of bare black mud by July 6th and had dried enough by the latter part of the month to enable a person to walk across them without sinking into the muck. ‘They were surrounded by a rank growth of Polygonum punctatum and Rumex maritimus. The Polygonum was heavily parasitized by Cuscuta polygonorum. The bare mud surface had a scattered growth of very small but mature plants of Myrio- phyllum pinnatum. South Pond and Tub Point Pond were brackish with characteristic halophiles bordering them. Ruppia 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 291 maritima was collected in South Pond but had been reported by Dr. Jordan. Тһе marshy area near the neck on the east shore of the main island almost duplicates the flora of Typha Pond. The bottom of the reservoirs have become filled with accumulated debris and humus which supports a rich growth of plants with Juncus bufonius, Cerastium vulgatum and Bidens connata as dominants. A survey of the flora of near-by Gull Island was made in 1923, but because of government restrictions this island was not visited. It has been used as a target for bombing practice in the last few years. The general aspect of the flora of the island has remained fundamentally the same in the last twenty-four years. There isa group of basic species that seem ecologically fitted to the peculiar environment of this windswept glacial moraine. Other species colonize for a time but some unusual conditions wipe them out. Now and again a colonist persists and thus over a long span of years the flora may change and the original climax of forest mentioned by Dr. Jordan may return. The botanists of the future should certainly watch and record the changes that may occur. On the other hand, the present aspect of the flora may be the new climax and not be replaced. Below is a comparative summary of the results of the previous surveys. 1873 1923 1930 1947 Species and forms of lichens — 10 — 15 Species of Bryophytes 2 12 — 1 Species of Pteridophytes 1 3 3 2 Species of Spermatophytes 113 163 202 158 Total species 116 188 205 182 New records (Vascular plants) — 94 28 29 Species missing from former surveys = —— 44 22 83 Species new to the island since the 1930 report are starred. LICHENS (Determinations made by Dr. Jonn THomson, Botany Depart- ment, University of Wisconsin.) *CLADONIA CHLOROPHAEA (Flk.) Spreng., f. SIMPLEX (Hoffm.) Arn, Bare ground in grassland. 292 Rhodora [DECEMBER *С. CRISTATELLA Tuck. (Not referable to any named form.) Rotten wood in reservoir. *C. CRISTATELLA Tuck., f. sqguamMosissimMA Robbins. Rotten wood along stone wall. *C. CRISTATELLA Tuck., f. ABBREVIATA Merrill. Rotten wood along stone wall. C. ruRCATA (Huds.) Schrad. Bare soil in grassland. *C. FURCATA (Huds.) Schrad., var. PALAMAEA (Ach.) Vainio, f. SUBULATA (Ach.) Vainio. Bare soil in grassland. *C. NEMOXYNA (Ach.) Nyl. On rocks, west slope. *C. PIEDMONTENSIS Merrill. Bare ground in grassland. *C. SsUBCARIOSA Nyl., f. EPIPHYLLA Robbins. Bare soil in grassland. *C. SUBCARIOSA Nyl., f. EvoLUTA Vainio. Bare soil in grassland. *LECANORA VARIA (Hoffm.) Ach. Rotten wood along stone wall. PARMELIA CAPERATA (L.) Ach. Оп rotten wood along stone wall. Also rocks near East cottage. P. suLCATA Tayl. Bare rocks, north of East Cottage. Bare soil in grassland, Tern nesting areas. *PHYSCIA MILLEGRANA Degel. Rocks on eastern slope. Grass- land. XANTHORIA PARIETINA (L.) T. Fr. Rocks in wharf area. Also rocks in grassland, west slope of island. BRYOPHYTES *AMBLYSTEGIUM SERPENS (Hedw.) Bry. Eur. In shallow reser- voir, on rotting wood. BRYUM ARGENTEUM (L.) Hedw. Bare spots in grassland. Not common. ` CERATODON PURPUREUS (Hedw.) Brid. Common all over the island, on bare ground and at base of boulders. *POGONATUM PENSILVANICUM (Hedw.) Paris. One collection, beside rock on bare soil north of East cottage. POLYTRICHUM COMMUNE Hedw. Road bank in grassland, north of East cottage. Р. JUNIPERINUM Hedw. Beside boulder, in grassland. Bare soil. Р. PILIFERUM Hedw. Several places on bare areas in grassland. Growing with Ceratodon in one collection. PTERIDOPHYTES (Determinations verified by Dr. E. T. Wurrry, University of Pennsylvania.) DENNSTAEDTIA PUNCTILOBULA (Michx.) Moore. Grassy hill- side, n. w. of the reservoir. DRYOPTERIS THELYPTERIS (L.) Gray, var. PUBESCENS (Lawson) akai. 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 293 (Aspidium Thelypteris (L.) Sw.). Tern Pond. No longer at Typha and Tub Ponds. SPERMATOPHYTES PINACEAE Pinus syLvestris L. In a depression along the east shore, s. w. of the cottage. The tops badly damaged and killed by the hurricanes. TYPHACEAE TypHa LATIFOLIA L. Typha Pond. No longer found at South Pond. NAJADACEAE КоррІА MARITIMA L., var. (immature). In South Pond. ZOSTERA MARINA L. Harbor in shallow water. Apparently recovering after the epidemic, but not common. GRAMINEAE (Determinations made by Dr. RicHarp W. Pout of Iowa State College.) AGROPYRON REPENS (L.) Beauv. Common in grassland on Tub Point. AGROSTIS STOLONIFERA L. Grasslands, everywhere. A. TENUIS Sibth. (A. capillaris L.). Common, grasslands and tension line between beach and grasslands. AMMOPHILA BREVILIGULATA Fernald. West slope of main island and Tub Point, elsewhere along the beaches. *ANDROPOGON SCOPARIUS Michx. In shelter of stone wall, n. of the cottage on east shore. ANTHOXANTHUM ODORATUM L. Common grass all over the island. AvENA SATIVA L. Beach at s. w. corner of the main island. Rare. *BROMUS COMMUTATUS Schrad. Grassland around the cottage on the east shore. DAcTYLIS GLOMERATA L. Grassland, chiefly on east shore and the neck. DANTHONIA SPICATA (L.) Beauv. Grassland. ELyMus virainicus L. Grassland near wharf, east shore. Festuca ovina L. Grassland and tension line. F. RUBRA L. Grassland and tension line. Also the muddy bottom of the old reservoir. Horcus LANATUS L. General everywhere. PANICUM IMPLICATUM Scribn. Sandy soil, tension line between grass and beach. P. овІсо1л Н. & C. Sandy soil, tension line. 294 Rhodora [DECEMBER P. vinGATUM L. Large clumps in grassland around Typha Pond. *PASPALUM CILIATIFOLIUM Michx. var. MUHLENBERGII (Nash) Fernald. Grassland, east slope near the wharf. PHLEUM PRATENSE L. Scattered throughout the grassland. Not common. Poa PRATENSIS L. Common throughout grassland. SPARTINA ALTERNIFLORA Lois., var. PILOSA (Merrill) Fernald. Common, Tub Point. S. PATENS (Ait. Muhl. Dense pure stand in marshy ground, east of Tub Point. CYPERACEAE (Determinations checked by Dr. HERBERT Wanr, Pennsylvania State College.) Carex Lona Mackenzie. (C. albolutescens Schwein.). Com- monest species. Grassland and tension line. *C. MunHLENBERGII Schk. Rare. Grassland, east of central ridge. C. srLICEA. Olney. Sandy soil between beach and grassland. Not common. C. sprcata Hudson. (C. muricata L.). Gra:slands generally. CYPERUS FILICULMIS Vahl, var. MACILENTUS „егп. Bare hill- top, grassland north of Typha Pond. *ELEOCHARIS PARVULA (R. & S.) Link. Muddy border of South Pond. E. Smauu Britton. (E. palustris (L.) R. & S.). Marshy margin of Typha Pond. *E. HALOPHILA l'ern. & Brack. South Pond. SCIRPUS AMERICANUS Pers. Typha Pond and South Pond and marshy area near the Neck. S. PALUDOSUS A. Nelson, var. ATLANTICUS Fern. Marshy area near the Neck. S. vaLipus Vahl. Marshy area near the Neck and Typha Pond. JUNCACEAE Juncus ACUMINATUS Michx. Typha and Leper Ponds. *J. BUFONIUS L. South Pond and bottom of reservoir. *J. picHotomus Ell. Grassland, west of the reservoir. J. EFFUSUS L., var. cosrULATUS Fernald. Tern Pond. J. GERARDI Loisel. South Pond and marshy area at the Neck. J. TENUIS Willd. Tub and Leper Ponds and tension line be- tween beach and grass. LILIACEAE ASPARAGUS OFFICINALIS L. Depressions in grasslands, through- out the main island. 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 295 IRIDACEAE *ĪRIS GERMANICA L. Beside East cottage. I. VERSICOLOR L. Tern and South Ponds. SIsYRINCHIUM ANGUSTIFOLIUM Mill. Tub Pond and grassy area near East cottage. SALICACEAE PoruLUs ALBA L. Scattered thickets on the east slope, south- west of East cottage. P. DELTOIDES Marsh. Near the east coast, south of the wharf. Suckers from the base of the dead shrub. SALIX ALBA X FRAGILIS. Leper Pond, west shore. (Only the stumps left of former growth around Typha Pond.) S. penTANDRA L. Near old foundations, west shore. (No longer at Typha Pond.) MYRICACEAE Myrica CAROLINIENSIS Mill. Small clump, grassland near the old foundations on the west shore. FAGACEAE QUERCUS RUBRA L. Grassy hillside west of East cottage. URTICACEAE *MOoRUS ALBA L. Seven clumps on the top of the hill, Tub Point. Evidence of these plants having been killed back the previous year. POLYGONACEAE POLYGONUM PUNCTATUM Ell. (P. acre HBK.). Common in all wet areas. Typha, South, Dry, Leper and Tern Ponds and the marshy area near the Neck. *RuEkuM Ruaponticum L. In the formerly cultivated area. Cottage on the East slope. Rumex ACETOSELLA L. Common in formerly denuded areas in grasslands. Everywhere. R. crispus L. Common in grasslands and at Typha and Leper Ponds. R. MARITIMUS L., var. FUEGINUS (Phil. Dusen. Margin of South and Tern Ponds and the marshy area near the Neck. CHENOPODIACEAE ATRIPLEX PATULA L., var. HASTATA (L.) Gray (A. hastata L.). Beach areas, both sandy and cobble. *BAssIA HIRSUTA (L.) Asch. At South and Tub Ponds. Marshy area. 296 Rhodora [DECEMBER CHENOPODIUM ALBUM L. ‘Tension line between grasslands and beach. Common. SALSOLA Karr L. Rare. Tension line between grass and beach. PHYTOLACCACEAE *PHYTOLACCA AMERICANA L. Rather common in grasslands in protected places, along walls, in depressions and in the old foundations. AIZOACEAE MOLLUGO vERTICILLATA L. Tension line in sandy soil. On the Neck. CARYOPHYLLACEAE CERASTIUM VULGATUM L. Weedy places in grassland. Old foundations and bottom of reservoir. Lvcuwis ALBA L. In grassland and depressions. Common in Ammophila grassland. SAGINA PROCUMBENS L. Tension line near the wharf. SPERGULARIA RUBRA (L.) Presl. Tension line in the wharf area. STELLARIA GRAMINEA L. General in grassland. S. MEDIA (L.) Cyrill. Under the back porch of the East Cot- tage. Rare. RANUNCULACEAE RANUNCULUS ACRIS L. Locally in grassland. R. CYMBALARIA Pursh. Abundant in the mud, South Pond. (Not found at Tern Pond.) CRUCIFERAE *ARMORACIA LAPATHIFOLIA Gilib. Beside shack, n. of East cottage. *BARBAREA VULGARIS R. Br. Old foundations north of the wharf. Brassica JUNCEA (L.) Cosson. Locally in grassland. *B. Kaser (DC.) Wheeler, var. PINNATIFIDA (Stokes) Wheeler. Grassland around Typha Pond. CAKILE EDENTULA (Bigel. Hook. Tension line on west shore and at Typha Pond. LEPIDIUM VIRGINICUM L. Grassland. Common. RAPHANUS RApHANISTRUM L. Around South Pond. SISYMBRIUM ALTISSIMUM L. East shore around cottage. S. OFFICINALE (L.) Scop., var. LEIOCARPUM DC. Around East cottage, foundations of west cottages and the bottoms of the reservoirs. 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 297 ROSACEAE FRAGARIA VIRGINIANA Duchesne. Grassland on east and west slopes. POTENTILLA ARGENTEA L. Grassland around East cottage. *P. PACIFICA Howell. Gravel beach around South Pond. Very rare. PRUNUS SEROTINA Ehrh. Grassland n. of Typha Pond. Suck- ers only, 4 feet tall. Dead twigs also only that high. (Not reported from south end of island as formerly.) Rosa ruGosA Thunb. Large patches in grassland, eastern shore. RUBUS FLAGELLARIS Willd. (R. procumbens Muhl.). Large areas covered in upland grassland. R. rRoNposus Bigel. Around Dry Pond. (None on Tub Point as in the last survey.) R. АСАТОВ Willd. Large thickets in bollow west of the Reservoir. (None on Tub Point as previously.) LEGUMINOSAE LaATrHYRUS JAPONICUS Willd. var. GLABER (Ser.) Fern. (L. maritimus Bigel.). Rare. Gravel beach around South Pond. TRIFOLIUM HYBRIDUM L. Grassland near Tern Pond. Rare. T. PRATENSE L. Grassland. Not common. Т. REPENS L. Grassland. East slope. Not common. *VICIA ANGUSTIFOLIA Reichard. Grassland around East cottage. V. TETRASPERMA (L.) Moench. Edge of grass and depression in cliffs, near Typha Pond. OXALIDACEAE OXALIS STRICTA L. Common in grasslands. EUPHORBIACEAE EUPHORBIA POLYGONIFOLIA L. Sandy area on the Neck. E. suPINA Raf. Sandy area around east shore and the wharf. CALLITRICHACEAE CALLITRICHE HETEROPHYLLA Pursh. Mud of Typha Pond. ANACARDIACEAE *RHUS COPALLINA L., var. LATIFOLIA Engler. Edge of grassland and beach, just s. of wharf. R. RADICANS L. Occasionally on grasslands. Not common. R. түРНІХА Torner. Hillside area near the East cottage. With pines and maples. 298 Rhodora [DECEMBER VITACEAE PARTHENOCISSUS QUINQUEFOLIA (L.) Planch. (Psedera quinque- folia (L.) Greene.). Over a shed, area near East cottage. P. rRICUSPIDATA (Sieb. & Zucc.) Planch. Shed in hillside near the pines and maples. East cottage. ACERACEAE ACER PSEUDOPLATANUS L. Southwest of East Cottage. Grove badly damaged by hurricanes. HYPERICACEAE HYPERICUM MUTILUM І. Typha and Leper Ponds. Н. perroratum L. Grasslands at East cottage and Tub Point. ONAGRACEAE LupWIGIA PALUSTRIS (L.) Ell., var. AMERICANA (DC.) Fern. & Grisc. (Isnardia palustris L.). Mud of Typha Pond. OENOTHERA BIENNIS L. Grassland in vicinity of the Neck. HALORAGIDACEAE MnRIOPHYLLUM PINNATUM (Walt.) BSP. (M. scabratum Michx.). Shallow water and mud of Typha and Leper Ponds. UMBELLIFEREAE Daucus Carora L. Grasslands, everywhere. Liagusticum scotuicum L. Tension line. Not common. ERICACEAE (Determinations verified by Dr. E. T. Wurrry, University of Pennsylvania.) *KALMIA ANGUSTIFOLIA L. Опе colony in grassland. *VACCINIUM ATROCOCCUM (Gray) Heller. Rare. Grassland, central part of main island. PRIMULACEAE ANAGALLIS ARVENSIS L. Common. Grasslands and beaches. OLEACEAE LIGUSTRUM VULGARE L. Near cottage on East shore and the foundations on west shore. The tops of the bushes have been killed. CONVOLVULACEAE *CONVOLVULUS SEPIUM L., var. COMMUNIS Tryon (C. sepium L.). Base of grassy hillside, Tub Point. 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 299 C. SEPIUM L., var. AMERICANUS Sims (C. sepium L., var. pubes- cens (Gray) Fern.). Grassland along west coast. Marshy area at the Neck and South Pond. *CUSCUTA POLYGONORUM Englm. Dry Pond. On Polygonum punctatum Ell. Identified by Dr. Truman Yuncker. LABIATAE GLECHOMA HEDERACEA (L.) Trevisan. In Ammophila grassland, n. of East cottage. Leonurus Carpraca L. Edge of grassland and beach, east side of the island. Lycorus uNIFLORUS Michx. Typha and Leper ponds. *MENTHA ARVENSIS L. Marshy area at the Neck. МЕРЕТА САТАКІА L. Grassland, east slope. Also in a mass of dead eel-grass. SCUTELLARIA GALERICULATA L. (S. epilobijfolia Hamilton). Typha Pond margin. TEUCRIUM CANADENSE L. (var. LITTORALE (Bickn.) Fern.). Grassland generally, in Ammophila area on west shore. Marsh area at the Neck and the border of South Pond. SOLANACEAE DarunASTRAMONIUM L. ‘Tension line between beach and grass, area from wharf to East cottage. SOLANUM NIGRUM L. Common in grassland all over the island. SCROPHULARIACEAE *LIMOSELLA SUBULATA Ives. Mud of Typha Pond. (Det. checked by Dr. F. W. Pennell.) LINARIA CANADENSIS (L.) Dumont. Tension line around the island. LINDERNIA ANAGALLIDEA (Michx.) Pennell (Ilysanthes inaequalis (Walt.) Pennell. Mud of Typha Pond, under the grass or thesedge. (Det. by Dr. F. W. Pennell.) VgnBASCUM TnHaPsus L. Locally in grasslands. PLANTAGINACEAE PLANTAGO LANCEOLATA L. Grasslands from the beaches to hilltop. P. masor L. Marshy area at the Neck and Typha Pond. RUBIACEAE GALIUM TINCTORIUM L. (G. Claytoni Michx.). Leper, South and Typha Ponds. (G. trifidum of 1923 survey changed by Dr. J. M. Fogg, Jr. to this species on sheet in University of Pennsylvania Herbarium.) 300 Rhodora [DECEMBER CAPRIFOLIACEAE LoNicERA JAPONICA Thunb. Near cottage foundations on the west slope. Small patches. SAMBUCUS CANADENSIS L. Common. Large thickets in de- pressions in grasslands and along stone walls. CAMPANULACEAE *TRIODANIS PERFOLIATA (L.) Nieuw. (Specularia perfoliata (L.) A. DC.). Tension line. Rare. COMPOSITAE ACHILLEA MILLEFOLIUM L. Tension line and grasslands. Common. * A. MILLEFOLIUM L. forma nosEA Rand & Redfield. Grassland beside the East cottage. AMBROSIA ARTEMISIIFOLIA L. Tension line, the Neck and Tub Point. BipENS coNNATA Muhl. Marshy area near the Neck, Typha Pond and bottom of reservoir. CHRYSANTHEMUM LEUCANTHEMUM L., var. PINNATIFIDUM Lecoq & Lamotte. Grasslands. Common. CIRSIUM ARVENSE (L.) Scop. Locally in grass and tension line. С. VULGARE (Savi) Tenore (C. lanceolatum (L.) Hill.). Grass- lands throughout, not common. COREOPSIS LANCEOLATA L. Near the foundations on west shore. Rare. | ERECHTITES HIERACIFOLIA (L.) Raf. Common in marshy area near the Neck. ERIGERON CANADENSIS L. (Leptilon canadense (L.) Britton). Grasslands and tension line, mainly on Tub Point. E. pusrttus Nutt. (Leptilon pusillum (Nutt.) Britton). In weedy patches in grasslands and along tension line. *E. strigosus Muhl. Grassland, depression on hilltop of Tub Point. GNAPHALIUM OBTUSIFOLIUM L. (G. polycephalum Michx.). Common all along shore and in grasslands, *SOLIDAGO GRAMINIFOLIA (L.) Salisb., var. NuTTALLII (Greene) Fernald. Grassland, west slope and south-east of reservoir. Not common. S. RUGOSA Mill. Grasslands. Common. S. SEMPERVIRENS L. Common in grasslands and tension line above beaches. S. TENUIFOLIA Pursh. (Huthamia tenuifolia (Pursh) Greene). Grassland around reservoir. SONCHUS ASPER (L.) Hill. Common generally over the island. Grasslands and tension line. S. OLERACEUS L, Gravel bar, east side of South Pond. 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 301 The following plants have been collected on Penikese Island in the past, but were not found in 1947. They have been re- corded in Dr. John M. Fogg’s study of the Flora of the Elizabeth Islands. PTERIDOPHYTES ATHYRIUM FILIX-FEMINA (L.) Bernh., var. Micnauxir (Spreng.) Farwell. SPERMATOPHYTES GRAMINEAE AGROSTIS STOLONIFERA L., var. compacta Hartm. BROMUS SECALINUS L. В. HORDEACEUS L. DIGITARIA SANGUINALIS (L.) Scop. Jordan’s List. DISTICHLIS SPICATA (L.) Greene. EcHINOCHLOA CRUSGALLI (L.) Beauv. FESTUCA ELATIOR L. PANICUM MERIDIONALE Ashe. Poa ANNUA L. SETARIA VIRIDIS (L.) Beauv. Jordan’s List. CYPERACEAE CAREX HORMATHODES Fernald. C. scoparia Schkuhr. ErEOCHARIS ACICULARIS (L.) R. & 8. E. ostusa (Willd.) Schultes. JUNCACEAE JUNCUS ARTICULATUS L. (Reported as J. debilis Gray in Кно- DORA 26: 223, 1924.) J. GnEENEI Oakes & Tuckerm. J. PELocARPUS Mey. Jordan’s list. LILIACEAE LILIUM TIGRINUM Ker. SMILAX ROTUNDIFOLIA L. IRIDACEAE SisyRINCHIUM ATLANTICUM Bickn. S. MoNTANUM Greene (S. angustifolium of authors, not Mill.). SALICACEAE SALIX DISCOLOR Muhl. Jordan’s List. BETULACEAE BETULA POPULIFOLIA Marsh. Jordan’s List. 302 Rhodora [DECEMBER POLYGONACEAE POLYGONUM AVICULARE L. P. CoNvoLvu.us L. P. Persicaria L. RuMEX OBTUSIFOLIUS L. Jordan’s List. CHENOPODIACEAE ATRIPLEX ARENARIA Nutt. Jordan’s List. SALICORNIA EUROPAEA L. Jordan’s List. SUAEDA MARITIMA (L.) Dumort. Jordan’s List. AMARANTHACEAE AMARANTHUS RETROFLEXUS L. CARYOPHYLLACEAE ARENARIA PEPLOIDES L., var. ROBUSTA Fernald. DIANTHUS BARBATUS L. GYPSOPHILA PANICULATA L. SPERGULA ARVENSIS L. Jordan’s List. SPERGULARIA LEIOSPERMA (Kindb.) F. Schmidt. PORTULACACEAE PORTULACA OLERACEA L. RANUNCULACEAE RANUNCULUS FLABELLARIS Raf. (R. delphinifolius Torr.) CRUCIFERAE BRASSICA NIGRA L. CAPSELLA BunsA-PASTORIS (L.) Medic. RAPHANUS SATIVUS L. ROSACEAE AMELANCHIER OBLONGIFOLIA (T. & G.) Roem. FRAGARIA VESCA L. Jordan’s List. POTENTILLA NORVEGICA L., var. HIRSUTA (Michx.) Lehm. P. CANADENSIS L. (P. pumila Poir.) Rosa PALUSTRIS Marsh. RUBUS CANADENSIS var. PERGRATUS (Blanch.) Bailey. (R. pergratus Blanch.) LEGUMINOSAE TRIFOLIUM AGRARIUM L, T. ARVENSE L. Vicia Cracca L. GERANIACEAE GERANIUM CAROLINIANUM L. 1948] Moul,—Flora of Penikese Island 303 ACERACEAE ACER PLATANOIDES L. MALVACEAE MALVA NEGLECTA Wallr. (M. rotundifolia L.) VIOLACEAE VIOLA FIMBRIATULA Өш. ONAGRACEAE OENOTHERA GRANDIFLORA Ait. UMBELLIFERAE CoELOPLEURUM LUCIDUM (L.) Fernald. Jordan’s List. ASCLEPIADACEAE ASCLEPIAS INCARNATA L., var. PULCHRA (Ehrh.) Pers. A. SYRIACA L. CONVOLVULACEAE CONVOLVULUS ARVENSIS L. LABIATAE Lycopus AMERICANUS Muhl. SOLANACEAE SOLANUM ROSTRATUM Dunal. Collected by Hollick. ScROPHULARIACEAE DIGITALIS PURPUREA L. LINARIA VULGARIS Hill. PLANTAGINACEAE PLANTAGO МАТОВ L., var. INTERMEDIA (Gilibert) Dene. CUCURBITACEAE CUCURBITA MAXIMA Duchesne. COMPOSITAE ASTER ERICOIDES L. (A. multiflorus Ait.) A. UNDULATUS L. А. VIMINEUS Lam. ANTHEMIS COTULA L. GNAPHALIUM ULIGINOSUM L. HELIANTHUS ANNUUS L. Iva ORARIA Bartlett. LEONTODON AUTUMNALIS L., var. PRATENSIS Koch. RUDBECKIA HIRTA L. SoLIDAGO CANADENSIS L. 304 Rhodora [DECEMBER S. JUNCEA Ait. TCU | S. NEMORALIS Ait. SONCHUS ARVENSIS L. TANACETUM VULGARE L. TARAXACUM OFFICINALE Weber. XANTHIUM ECHINATUM Murr. UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA POTAMOGETON BICUPULATUS IN MAssAcHUSETTS.—During the summer of 1947, as complete a collection as possible was made of the vascular plants of the township of Petersham, northwestern Worcester County, Massachusetts. Upon identification, one of the pondweeds was found to be Potamogeton bicupulatus Fernald. The species was first described by Dr. M. L. Fernald (The Linear-leaved North American Species of Potamogeton) from material taken in the mountains of Pennsylvania and Tennessee. The type-specimen was collected by Garber in Lehigh County, Pennsylvania in 1866. There is one record of the plant taken in Lake Dunmore, Vermont, which has never been corroborated. The specimens from Petersham were taken from Harvard Pond (formerly Meadow Water Pond), an artificial pond created many years ago to operate a mill with the run-off from Tom Swamp. It is nowhere very deep and an abundant growth of all types of aquatic vegetation almost obscures the pond toward its margin. Р. bicupulatus was found on the low mud-flats exposed by the low water of the pond. Probably in a summer of more abundant rainfall, these would not be exposed. Accompanying the Potamogeton were Myriophyllum humile (Raf.) Morong. and Utricularia gibba L.—C. EARLE Smita Jr., Harvard University. FORMS OF CORNUS CANADENSIS IN MinNnEsota.—Field obser- vations attendant to collecting, supported by a study of her- barium specimens, warrant the segregation of Minnesota ma- terial of Cornus canadensis L. into a few ecological variants, differing vegetatively from the typical form conceived as plants with simple stems with apparent apical whorls of leaves. CORNUS CANADENSIS L. f. ramosa Lepage is characterized by the development of leafy branches either in the axils of the leaves Lakela,— Forms of Cornus canadensis in Minnesota 305 constituting the normal whorl, or below the whorl. The follow- ing collections are referable to this form: high and heavily glaci- ated granite ridge near Bass Lake, north of Ely, St. Louis Co., Aug. 30, 1936, J. B. Moyle, no. 2394, reported in RHopona 40: 276, 1938, as Cornus suecica L., which does not occur in the state; talus-slope of Mt. Mary, Ilgen City, Lake Co., Sept. 16, 1945, Lakela no. 6242; jack pine forest, 6 miles south of Gilbert, St. Louis Co., June 25, 1939, Lakela no. 3045; mixed forest on 60- acre island, Island Lake, 20 miles north of Duluth, June 16, 1944, Lakela no. 5536; sandy ridge south of Lake Itasca, July 9, 1928, С. О. Rosendahl no. 5648; Bowstring, Itasca Co., July 1925, Н. E. Stork no. 1101, one plant on the sheet with the typical form; exposed outcrop northeast of Palmers, St. Louis Co., July 20, 1947, Lakela 6933a. CORNUS CANADENSIS L. f. MEDEOLOIDES Lepage was based on plants with two successive whorls of leaves, the uppermost de- veloping by extension of the stem above the normal verticil, in contrast to Lepage's f. mfraverticillata in which the additional verticil of leaves replaces the bracts below the normal leaves. The following collections are referred to the former category: bog-forest, north end of Decodon Pond, Anoka Co., Aug. 2, 1933, M. F. and H. F. Buell no. 672; T. 65, R. 19, St. Louis Co., Sept. 16, 1936, W. Webb; tamarack swamp, Hennepin Co., May 1891, F. H. Burglehaus (one double verticillate plant with four typical). Inconsistent with this concept is the following collection: west- facing slope of the Great Laurentian Highland Divide, % mi. east of Highway 53, St. Louis Co., John W. and Marjorie F. Moore no. 10339, two double-verticillate plants arising from the common rootstock with the typical plants. А variant bearing more than one inflorescence per erect stem appears to be undescribed. Growing with the typical form were found plants which bear above the normal verticil of leaves two to three peduncles with inflorescences, cymose-fashion, the central one more mature than the lateral ones. Sometimes the lateral peduncles are twice as long as the central one, six to three centi- meters, respectively. One of the flowering peduncles may be aborted or replaced by a leafy branch. Some plants bear leafy branches below the normal whorl of leaves, reminiscent of f. 306 Rhodora [DECEMBER ramosa which was not based on plants with multiple peduncles. The variant is herewith described as Cornus canadensis L., f. florulenta, f. nov., differt a f. typica 2-3 pedunculis floriferis vel ramulis foliosis super foliorum verticillum gestis. Түрк: Lakela no. 6933, July 20, 1947, growing in moss- and lichen-mats on flat rocks within the railroad right-of-way 1 mi. northeast of Palmers, St. Louis Co., Minn. (Univ. of Minn. Herb. Minneapolis). The form differs from the typical form by the development of two to three inflorescences on distinct peduncles in axils of leaves constituting the usual whorl. The collection of Dr. Thomas 8. Roberts, Aug. 6, 1879, Poplar River, Cook Co., Minn., (Univ. Minn. Herb. Mpls.) is referred to this form.—OrGA LAKELA, University of Minnesota, Duluth Branch. Volume 50, no. 599, conisting of pages 253-284 and plate 1118, was issued & November, 1948. ERRATA Page 17, line 23; for Basiliensis read Brasiliensis. Page 17, line 30; for Shortiana read Shortit. No. 590, Contents, line 9; for Lampylium read Campylium. Page 63, line 11; for CARUNCULATA read carunculata. Page 166, line 15; for sugbenus read subgenus. No. 599, Contents, line 4; for 270 read 269. No. 599, Contents, line 6; for 279 read 280. No. 599, Contents, line 9; for 283 read 284. Page 276, line 32; delete (Fig. 1). Page 276, line 33; delete (Fig. 2). 1948] Index to Volume 50 307 INDEX TO VOLUME 50 New scientific names are printed in full-face type Abbe, Ernst C., Braya in boreal eastern America, 1, pls. 1088— 1090; Frederic King Butters, 1878-1945 (with portrait) [obitu- ary], 133 Abies, 36, 37; americana, 118; * Americana", 106 Abutilon incanum, 93 Acanthaceae, 225 Acer, 287, 288; platanoides, 303; Pseudoplatanus, 298; saccharin- um, 248; saccharum, 248 Aceraceae, 298, 303 Acerates monocephala, 118 Achillea lanulosa, 215; Millefolium, 215, 300, f. rosea, 300 Achrochaetium | Amphiroae, 263; Daviesii, 263, 265; Thuretii, 263, f. agama, 263; virgatulum, 264; Zosterae, 264 Acorus, 139 Acrasiales, 286 Acrothrix novae-angliae, 261 Actaea pentagyna, 199 Actinococeus subcutaneus, 264 Actinomonas sp., 278 Additions to the Adventitious Flora of Quebec, Six, 176 Adenophora, 41 Adiantum, 117; Capillus-veneris, 117; Curtisii, 117 Adventitious Flora of Quebec, Six Additions to the, 176 Aegira, 256 Aesculus Hippocastaneum, 112, 119; Hippocastanum, 112, 119 Agalinis Skinneriana, 123 Agardhiella, 267; tenera, 264 Aggressive Hawkweed, Another, 15 Agoseris, 34, 35; alpestris, 34, 35; aurantiaca, 32, 33, var. auranti- aca, 33, var. purpurea, 33; cuspidata, 33, 34; gaspensis, 32; glauca, 34, 35; gracilens, 31, 32; purpurea, 33 Agropyron, 90; repens, 293; trachy- caulum, var. typicum, 90, X Hordeum jubatum, 82, 90 Agrostis capillaris, 293; heterolepis, 106; stolonifera, 293, var. com- pacta, 301; tenuis, 293 Ahnfeltia plicata, 264 Aigeiros candicans, 236 Aizoaceae, 296 Albugo candida, 286 Algae, 69, 135; from New Bruns- wick, A List of Freshwater, 67; blue-green, 255, 269, 270; brown, 263; green, 257, 271; red, 263; of Penikese Island, Fresh and Brack- ish Water, 269 Alisma gramineum, 179, ssp. Wahlenbergii, 179, var. Wahlen- bergii, 179; Plantago, 8. gramini- folia, 179 Alliaria, 178; officinalis, 176, 177 Allium canadense, 178 Alsine glabra, 119; Michauxii, 119; stricta, 119; Walteri, 197 Amaranthaceae, 302 Amaranthus retroflexus, 302; spi- nosus, 123 Amblystegium serpens, 202 Ambrosia artemisiifolia, 300 Amelanchier, 51; alnifolia, 49; cana- densis, 51; Fernaldii, 49; gaspen- sis, 49; humilis, 49; intermedia, 214; lucida, 49-51; mucronata, 49; nantucketensis, 50, 51; ob- longifolia, 302; obovalis, 50, 51; spicata, 51; stolonifera, 49, 50, var. lucida, 49 America, Braya in boreal eastern, 1, pls. 1088—1090 American Larch, 118; Types in British Herbaria, Studies of, 149— о 217-233, pls. 1097- TIS Amianthium, 193 Ammophila breviligulata, 293 Amphidinium operculatum, 276 Amphisphaeria aquatica, 287 Amphistelma scoparium, 130 Amphithrix janthina, 67 Anabaena californica, f. subcon- stricta, 275, 279, pl. 1118; flos- aquae, var. gracilis, 275; inae- qualis, 67, 275, 279; torulosa, 256, var. cylindracea, 275 Anacardiaceae, 207 Anacystis rupestris, 67 Anagallis arvensis, 208 Anantherix connivens, 101, 119 Andromeda axillaris, 218; Cates- baei, 218; lanceolata, 218; poli- 308 Rhodora folia, 119; polyfolia, 119; spinu- losa, 218; Walteri, 218 Andropogon clandestinus, 119; El- liottii, 119; Gerardi, 92, 154, 155; Hallii, 64; Ischaemum, 154; pro- vinciale, 154; scoparius, 64, 92, 93, 293 Anemonella, 199; thalictroides, 199 Anethum faniculum, 119; Foenicu- lum, 119 Angelica lobata, 217 Angiosperms, 36 Anisonema sp., 277; ovale, 277 Ankistrodesmus Chodati, 273; con- volutus, var. minutus, 273; fla- catus, 273 Anonymos Lupino affinis, 202; ro- tundifolia, 202, 203, pl. 1107 Another aggressive Hawkweed, 15; New Hampshire Station for Sub- ularia, 72 Antennaria, 131; Parlinii, 131 Anthemis Cotula, 303 Anthoxanthum odoratum, 293 Antigramma pinnatifida, 117; rhizo- phylla, 117; rhyzophylla, 117 Antithamnion americanum, 264; cruciatum, 264; Plumula, 264, 265 Aphanothece Castagnei, 275 Apiocystis Brauniana, 67 Apium angustifolium, 111, 119 Apple, 38 Arabis dentata, 17; lyrata, 120; rstellata, var. Shortiana, 17 Arbutus, Trailing, 251 Arceuthobium abigenium, 120; oxy- cedri, var. abigenium, 120; pusil- Ium, 120 Archemora, 126 Arcyria nutans, 286 Arenaria, 119, 195; brevifolia, 196, pl. 1103; glabra, 119, 197; lanu- ginosa, 194; peploides, 289, var. robusta, 302; recurva, 196, 8., 196; stricta, 119; uniflora, 195, 196 Arethusa divaricata, 191; racemosa, 191 Armoracia lapathifolia, 296 Artemisia, 98; annua, 98; capilli- folia, 227; filifolia, 64; frigida, 107; pontica, 107 Article 58, International Rules of ш Botanical Nomenclature, The Proposed Changes in, 249 Arum, 59; sagittaefolium, 59; sagit- tifolium, 57-59; virginicum, 57, 58; Walteri, 57 Asarum arifolium, 194; canadense, [DECEMBER 194; carolinanum, 194; virgini- cum, 194 Asclepiadaceae, 303 Asclepias connivens, 119; cordata, 219; exaltata, 219, 220; incarnata, var. pulchra, 303; Nuttalliana, 118; phytolaccoides, 219; poly- stachia, 218, 219; rubra, 219; syriaca, 303, B. exaltata, 220, var. exaltata, 219; Vaseyi, 118 Ascocyclus distromaticus, 261 Ascomycetes, 287 Ascophyllum, 260, 263, 266; nodo- sum, 260-262 Ash, 186; Carolina, 186; Water 168; White, 168, 169 Asparagopsis hamifera, 264 Asparagus officinalis, 204 Aspergillus sp., 287; candidus, 287 Asperococcus echinatus, 261 Aspidium Thelypteris, 293 Asplenium, 117; ebenoides, 118; montanum, 20, in south-central Massachusetts, 20; pinnatifidum, 117, 118 Astasia Klebsii, 277 Aster, 43; angustus, 120, 178; au- gustus, 120; anomalus, 107; eri- coides, 303; kentuckiensis, 28; laurentianus, 212; multiflorus, 303; mutabilis, 107; pilosus, 28, var. Priceae, 28; Priceae, 28; Rolandii, 211; subasper, 107; un- dulatus, 303; vimineus, 303 Astereae, Notes on the Compositae of the Northeastern United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae and, 28 Asters, 289 Asyneuma, 47 Athyrium, 138; Filix-femina, var. Michauxii, 301 Atriplex arenaria, 302; hastata, 295; maritima, 212; patula, var. has- tata, 295; sabulosa, 212 Aureolaria flava, 122; grandiflora, 122; laevigata, 122; pectinata, 122; pedicularia, 122; virginica, 122 ’ava’a, 282 'ava'ava, 282 Avena sativa, 203 Azalea procumbens, 126 Bacopa egensis, 124 Balm-of-Gilead, 233-235 Bangia, 263; ciliaris, 264; fusco- purpurea, 264 Baptisia, 200, 201; cinerea, 201, 1948] Index to Volume 50 309 pl. 1106; X stricta, 202; villosa, 201, 202 Barbarea vulgaris, 296 Bases of the Name Pinus palustris, 'The Confused, 241 Basidiomycetes, 287 Bassia hirsuta, 295 Batrachospermum sp., 70; monili- forme, 67 Bean, Ralph C., John Crawford Parlin [obituary], 130 Beetle, Japanese, 66 Begonia, 153 Berula, 119; erecta, 119 Betula excelsa, 120, 229, 230; ex- celsior, 120; lutea, 120; papy- rifera, 229, 230; populifolia, 301; pubescens, 230; pumila, 230 Betulaceae, 301 Bicoeca sp., 278; lacustris, 278 Bidens connata, 291, 300; hetero- doxa, 212 Bitternut hickory, 61; in South- eastern Vermont, A Hybrid be- tween Shagbark and, 60 Black oblong fruited Walnut, 147 Blackberries, 73; А small Gathering of, 73, pls. 1093-1096 Blake, S. F., Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus, A Weed of potential Importance in Florida, 280 Blephariglottis psychodes, 125 Blephilia, 53-55; becki, 54; brevi- folia, 54; brevipes, 54; ciliata, 53, 54; ciliata (L.) Benth., 53; hetero- phylla, 54; hirsuta, 55; lanceolata, 54; nepetoides, 54; pratensis, 54 Blidingia 257; minima, 257, 259, 264 Blue-green algae, 255, 269, 270 Bluet, Mountain, 179 Bodo sp., 278; angustus, 278; cau- datus, 278; lens, 278; minimus, 278; reniformis, 278 Bolelia elegans, 124 Boltonia, 227; asteroides, var. de- currens, 120; caroliniana, 227; decurrens, 107, 120; glastifolia 8. ? decurrens, 120; latisquama, var. decurrens, 120 Booher, L. E., A Study of Elymus in Minnesota, 80 Boreal eastern America, Braya in, 1, pls. 1088-1090 Botanical Nomenclature, The Pro- posed Changes in Article 58, International Rules of, 249 Botanical Publications, Unlisted new Names in Alphonso Wood’s, 101 Botrychium, 138; matricariaefoli- um, 117; neglectum, 117; ramo- sum, 118 Botrydiopsis arhiza, 274 Botrydium granulatum, 67 Botryococcus Braunii, 274 Bouteloua curtipendula, 92, 95; hirsuta, 92, 95; rigidiseta, 92, 98 Brachystemum linifolium, 221-223; virginicum, 223 Brassica juncea, 296; Kaber, var. pinnatifida, 296; nigra, 302 Brathys denticulata, 208; linoides, 208, pl. 1109 Braya in boreal eastern America, 1, pls. 1088-1090; alpina, 1, 6, 7, B. americana, 13; americana, 13, 14; Fernaldii, 2, 12, 14, pl. 1090; glabella, 1, 6-9, pl. 1089; "gla- bella-humilis," 7; humilis, 2-4, 6, 7, pls. 1088, 1089, var. leio- carpa, 5; linearis, 2, 6, 7, 9; Longii, 2, 12-14; purpurascens, 2, 6, 7, 9, pl. 1089, 1090, f. leiocarpa, 12, f. longisiliquosa, 12, f. pilosa, 12, var. dubia, 9, 12, var. longisi- liquosa, 12; Thorild-Wulffii, 9, 11 Brazilian Species, New Names for two, 132 British Herbaria, Studies of Ameri- can Types in, 149-176, 181—208, 217-233, pls. 1097-1117 Broad-leaved Epipactis, 236 Brome-grass, 177 Bromus commutatus, 293; hordea- ceus, 301; secalinus, 301; tec- torum, 176, 177 Brown algae, 263 Bryophytes, 288, 290-292 Bryopsis plumosa, 258 Bryum argenteum, 292 Buchloe dactyloides, 94 Bulbochaete sp., 69 Bulbostylis capillaris, 129 Busycon, 260 Butomus umbellatus, 179 Butters, Frederic King, 1878-1945 (with portrait), 133 Cakile edentula, 296 Caladium, 59; bicolor, 59; glaucum, 59, 125, 126; sagittaefolium, 59; sagittifolium, 59 Calamovilfa, 64; gigantea, 64 Calla sagittifolia, 58, 59 Calladium sagittaefolium, 59; vir- ginicum, 59 Callithamnion americanum, 264; Baileyi, 264; Borreri, 264; bys- 310 Rhodora soideum, 264; corymbosum, 265; Daviesii, 265; luxurians, 265; plumula, 265; roseum, 265; seiro- spermum, 265; Turneri, 265 Callitrichaceae, 297 Callitriche heterophylla, 297 Calogyne, 124 Calothrix, 263; confervicola, 256; crustacea, 256; fuscoviolacea, 256; juliana, 67; parasitica, 256; pari- etina, 68; scopulorum, 256; vivi- para, 256 Campanula, 39-46; americana, 44; fastigiata, 40 Campanulaceae, 39—42, 44, 49, 300; subfam. Cyphioideae, 48; sub- fam. Lobelioideae, 42, 48 Campanulas, 40 Camptosorus ebenoides, 118; pin- natifidus, 118; rhizophyllus, 117 Campylium, 52; chrysophyllum, 52; Halleri, 52, in New Brunswick, 52; hispidulum, var. Sommer- feltii, 52; hispidulum, 52; poly- gamum, 52; radicale, 52; stella- tum, 52 Campylocera, 47, 48; leptocarpa, 47 Canada, Vicia sepium L. in, 144 Caprifoliaceae, 300 Capsella Bursa-pastoris, 17, 302; rubella, 17 Cardamine spathulata, 120; spatu- lata, 120 Carduus, 228; carolinianus, 228, 229, pl. 1115; flaccidus, 229; pinetorum, 228; spinosissimus, 228, pl. 1115; virginianus, 228 Carex, 103, 126; albolutescens, 294; aquatilis, var. stans, 121; argy- rantha, 120; atherodes, 120; Bigelowii, 120; cephaloidea, 120; concolor, 120, 121; Crawei, 215; dubitata, 120; flaccosperma, 121; foenea, 120; hormathodes, 301; Jamesii, 121; laxiculmis, 121; leneoglochin, 121; leucoglochin, 121; Longii, 294; lucorum, 121; michigansis, 121; mirata, 121; Muhlenbergii, 294; muricata, 294; pauciflora, 121; prairea, 121; rarisa, 121; retrocurva, 121; artwelli, 121; scoparia, 301; silicea, 294; spicata, 294; Stendelii, 121; sterilis, 212; Steudelii, 121; strictior, 121; texensis, 17; vagin- ata, 212; zanthosperma, 121 Carolina Ash, 186 Carya cordiformis, 60-62; X De- mareei, 60, 61; X Laneyi, 62, var. [DECEMBER chateaugayensis, 60, 62; ovalis, 60-62; ovata, 60-62 Caryophyllaceae, 296, 302 Cassine, 169, 170; capensis, 170; Peragua, 169-171; vera perquam, etc., 170 Castagnea virescens, 261; Zosterae, 261 Catalpa, 287 Caulophyllum thalictroides, 136 Celtis, 158, 162; crassifolia, 158, pl. 1097; georgiana, 160; integri- folia, 161, 162; laevigata, 156, 157, 159, 161, 162, var. Smallii, 156-158, 161, 162; longifolia, 162; mississippiensis, 161; occiden- talis, 155-161, pl. 1097, The Type of, 155, pls. 1097, 1098, £8., 161, var. canina, 156, var. crassi- folia, 156, 8. integrifolia, 162, var. integrifolia, 161, B, pumila, 160, var. pumila, 158, 160, 8. ? tenui- folia, 161; procera, foliis ovato- lanceolatis, ete., 155, 157, pl. 1098; pumila, 158-160, pl. 1098, var. georgiana, 160; tenuifolia, 160, var. georgiana, 160 Cenchrus pauciflorus, 16 Centaurea montana, 176, 179 Centaurium Beyrichii, f. albi- florum, 98 Centropogon, 48 Cephalosporium sp., 287 Ceramium, 263; arachnoideum, 265; diaphanum, 265; fastigiatum, 265; rubrum, 263, 265; strictum, 265, 266; tenuissimum, 265 Cerastium arvense, var. viscidulum, 214; vulgatum, 291, 296 Ceratodon purpureus, 290, 292 Chaetomorpha aerea, 258; Linum, 258; melagonium, 258; Olneyi, 258 Chaetophora elegans, 68 Chamaecistus procumbens, 126 Chamaecyparis sphaeroides, 248; thyoides, 248 Chamaesiphon polonicus, 68 Champia, 263; parvula, 265 Changes in Article 58, International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature, The Proposed, 249 Chara, 67, 270; sp., 70; Braunii, 273 Checklist (Review), The new Wash- ington-Baltimore, 15 Cheilanthes Eatonii, 93 Chelone glabra, 169 Chenopodiaceae, 295, 302 Chenopodium album, 296 1948] Index to Volume 50 311 Chinese-sumac, 37 Chinesesumac, 37 Chlamydomonas, 272; sp., 276 Chloris floridana, 121, 122; glauca, 121, 122 Chlorococcum humicola, 68, 273 Chlorogonium euchlorum, 277 Chlorophyceae, 271-273, 275, 276 Chlorophyta, 257 Chlorotylium cataractarum, 68 Chondria Baileyana, 265; sedifolia, 265; tenuissima, 265, var. Bailey- ana, 265 Chondrilla nudicaulis, 176 Chondriopsis tenuissima, 265 Chondrus, 264; crispus, 263, 265 Chorda, 261; Filum, 261 Chordaria attenuata, 262; divari- cata, 261, 263; flagelliformis, 261 Choreocolax Polysiphoniae, 265 Chromastrum virgatulum, 264—266 Chromulina ovalis, 276 Chroococcus membraninus, 68, minutus, 275; rufescens, 68, 69; turgidus, 275 Chroomonas baltica, 272, 276; setoniensis, 276 Chrysanthemum carolinianum, 227; helenii folio, etc., 172; Leucan- themum, var. pinnatifidum, 300; siense, 104; sinense, 104 Chrysococcus, 272 Chrysophyceae, 272, 276 Chrysosplenium, 199, 200; ameri- canum, 199; oppositifolium, 199, 200 Cichorieae, 30; Eupatorieae and Astereae, Notes on the Com- positae of the Northeastern United States, VI, 28 Cimicifuga americana, 199 Cirsium, 229; arvense, 300; caro- linianum, 229, pl. 1115; flac- cidum, 229, pl. 1115; horridulum, 228; lanceolatum, 300; pinetorum, 228; Smallii, 228; spinosissimum, 228; virginianum, 229; vulgare, Cistopteris, 118 Citronnier, 18 Citrus, 103 Cladonia chlorophaea, f. simplex, 291; cristatella, 292, f. abbrevi- ata, 292, f. squamosissima, 292; furcata, 292, var. palamaea, f. subulata, 292; nemoxyna, 292; piedmontensis, 292; subcariosa, f. epiphylla, 292, f. evoluta, 292 Cladophora, 257; albida, 258, var. refracta, 258; arcta, 258; crispata, 68; expansa, 258; flavescens, 258; flexuosa, 258; fracta, 258; glauce- scens, 258; glomerata, 68; gracilis, 258; lanosa, 258; refracta, 258, 260 Cladosiphon Zosterae, 261 Cladrastis, 122 Cleistes, 191 Clematis canadensis, 186; holo- sericea, 192; virginiana, 186 Clement, Ian D., Sida in Oklahoma, 99 Clintonia, 107; elegans, 107, 124 Closterium, 271; juncidum, 273, var. brevior, 273; lunula, var. coloratum, 273; parvulum, 273; Ralfsii, var. hybridum, 273; strigosum, 273; striolatum, 273; venus, var. incurvum, 273 Clover, Japanese, 22, 24 Cnicus spinosissimus, 228 Codiolum, 263; gregarium, 258 Coelastrum cambricum, 273 Coelopleurum lucidum, 303 Colacium calvum, 277 Collinsonia canadensis, var. punc- tata, 223; punctata, 223; serotina, 223 Common lespedeza, 24, 25, 27 Compositae, 35, 300, 303; of the Northeastern United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae, and As- tereae, Notes on the, 28; Elephan- topeae, 280 Confused Bases of the Name Pinus palustris, The, 241 Coniphora olivascens, 287 Conostylis americana, 125 Contributions from the Gray Her- barium of Harvard University— No. CLXVII, 149-176, 181-208, 217-233, pls. 1097-1117 Convolvulaceae, 298, 303 Convolvulus arvensis, 303; sepium, 298, var. americanus, 299, var. communis, 298; var. pubescens, 299 Copromonas subtilis, 278 Corallina, 262-264; officinalis, 263, 266 Coreopsis lanceolata, 300 Cornus canadensis, 304, in Minne- sota, Forms of, 304, f. florulenta, 306, f. infraverticillata, 305, f. medeoloides, 305, f. ramosa, 304, 306; Nuttallii, 141; suecica, 305 Correction, Rorippa: a, 100 Corticium confluens, 287 312 Rhodora. Cosmarium, 271; granatum, f. minor, 273; impressulum, 273, impressulum, forma, 273, 278, pl. 1118, f. minor, 278, f. subor- thogona, 278; polygonum, 273, 279, pl. 1118; punctulatum, var. subpunctulatum, 273; reniforme, 273; Turpinii, var. podolicum, 274 Croasdale, Hannah, Fresh and Brackish Water Algae of Penikese Island, 269 Cronquist, Arthur, Notes on the Compositae of the Northeastern United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae and Astereae, 28 Crotalaria angulata, 202; Linaria, 203; maritima, 202, 203, pl. 1107, var. Linaria, 203; ovalis, 202; rotundifolia, 202, 203, var. Lina- ria, 203 Cruciferae, 296, 302 Cryptogramma Stelleri, 212 Cryptomonas, 272; erosa, 272, 276 Cryptophyceae, 272, 276 Cucubalus polypetalus, 197, 198, pl. 1105 Cucumis, 200 Cucurbita maxima, 303 Cucurbitaceae, 179, 303 Cuscuta lepidachne, 106; polygo- norum, 290, 299 Cyathomonas truncata, 276 Cylindrospermum licheniforme, 68; majus, 68; muscicola, 68 Cynanchum, 128; scoparium, 130 Cynosurus cristatus, 176, 177 Cyperaceae, 107, 110, 111, 122, 294, 301 Cyperus, 16; alternifolius, 155; fili- culmis, var. macilentus, 294; Wolfii, 111 Cypripedium acaule, 231; album, 230, 231; Calceolus, 231; reginae, 191, 231, f. albolabium, 230; Reginae album, 230, 231; reginae, f. album, 230; spectabile, 131, в. album, 230, a. incarnatum, 230 Cyrtanthera carnea, 122; magnifica, 122 Cystoclonium purpurascens, var. cirrhosa, 266, var. stellata, 266; purpureum, 266, var. cirrhosum, 266 Cytoclonium purpurascens, 266 Cystopteris, 118 Dactylis glomerata, 293 Dangerous Weedy Polygonum in Pennsylvania, A, 64 [DECEMBER Danthonia, 46; spicata, 293 Dasistoma, 122; macrophylla, 92; quercifolia var. ? 8. [integrifolia], 122 Dasya, 263; elegans, 266; pedicel- lata, 266 Dasysistoma, 122; grandiflora, 122 Dasystoma, 122; flava, 122; grandi- flora, 122; integrifolia, 122; pec- tinata, 122; pedicularia, 122; pubescens, 122; quercifolia, 122 Datura Stramonium, 299 Daucus Carota, 298 Dayton, William A., Juglans nigra oblonga in Missouri, 147 Dearden, Elizabeth R., Penikese Island Fungi, 285 Delesseria sinuosa, 266 Dennstaedtia punctilobula, 292 Dentaria laciniata, 104; lasciniata, 104 Desmarestia aculeata, 261, var. at- tenuata, 261; viridis, 261 Desmid, 67, 271 Desmodium, 21, 122, 153, 203; acuminatum, 122, 203; bracteo- sum, 203; cuspidatum, 123, 203; glutinosum, 103, 122, 123, 203; grandiflorum, 123, 203 Desmotrichum undulatum, 261, 262 Dewberries, 75 Dianthera americana, 123; ovata, 224 Dianthus, 199; barbatus, 302; caro- linanus, 198 Diarrhena diandra, 106 Diastatea, 48 Diatoms, 67, 271, 273, 275 Dichothrix Baueriana, 68; gypso- phila, 68 Dicliptera, 224; americana, 106, 123; ovata, 225; peruviana, 224 Dictydium cancellatum, 286 Dictyosiphon foeniculaceus, 261; hippuroides, 261 Dictyostelium mucroides, 286 Digitalis purpurea, 214, 303 Digitaria sanguinalis, 301 Dinomonas vorax, 278 Dinophyceae, 272, 276 Distichlis spicata, 301; stricta, 94 Distreptus spicatus, 280 Distributional Notes and some minor Forms from Oklahoma, 91 Dodecatheon Meadia, 199 Dog’s-tail grass, 177 Dolichos luteolus, 130 Doty, Maxwell S., Penikese Island Marine Algae, 253 1948] Index to Volume 50 313 Downingia, 41, 48; elegans, 124 Draparnaldia plumosa, 68 Drouet, Francis, A List of Fresh- water Algae from New Bruns- wick, 67 Dryopteris, 16; intermedia, 16; spinulosa, 16; Thelpyteris, var. pubescens, 292 Dumontia filiformis, 266; incras- sata, 266 Dunaliella, 272; salina, 277 Dwarf Shadbush, A Nova Scotian, 49 Dysmicodon, 47, 48 Eatonia obtusata, var. purpura- scens, 93, 94 Echinacea Porteri, 111 Echinochloa Crusgalli, 301 Ectocarpus confervoides, 259, 261, var. hiemalis, 261; fasciculatus, 261; littoralis, 261; ovatus, 261; siliculosus, 261, var. hiemalis, 261; tomentosus, 261 Edraianthus, 47 Eel-grass, 286, 299 Elachistea fucicola, 261 Eleocharis acicularis, 301; halo- phila, 294; nitida, 20; obtusa, 301; palustris, 294; parvula, 294; Smallii, 294 Elephantopus, 280, 281; mollis, 282; spicatus, 280-282 Elymus, 80, in Minnesota, A Study of, 80; arkansanus, 85; brachy- stachvs, 86; canadensis, 82, 86- 90, X Hystrix patula, 82, 87-89, f. crescendus, 86, var. pendulus, 86, canadensis villosus, 86, 87; cinereus, 81, 90; condensatus, 90; diversiglumis, 88, 89; glauci- folius, 86; halophilus, 83; inter- ruptus, 88, 89; “Macounii”, 82, 90; philadelphicus, 86; robustus, 86, var. vestitus, 86; spicatus, 293; striatus, 82, 84; villosus, 81, 84, 90, f. arkansanus, 81, 85; vir- ginicus, 81—84, 90, f. jejunus, 83, var. halophilus, 81, 83, 84, var. submuticus, 81, 83; Wiegandii, 87, f. calvescens, 87 Endoderma Wittrockii, 258 Enteromorpha, 269, 270; sp., 257, 275; clathrata, 258, 259; com- pressa, 258; erecta, 258; Hop- kirkii, 258; intestinalis, 257, 258, f. tenuis, 274; linza, 257, 258, var. oblanceolata, 258; marginata, 259; minima, 257-259; plumosa, 259; prolifera, 259, var. flexuosa, 259, var. tubulosa, 259 Entocladia Wittrockii, 258, 259 Entophysalis granulosa, 256 Entosiphon sulcatus, 277 Epigaea repens, 250, f. plena, 250, 251, var. glabrifolia, 250 Epilobium, 178; angustifolium, 19, f. albiflorum, 19; hirsutum, 176, 178; Hornemanni, 214 Epipactis, 238; Broad-leaved, 236; Helleborine, 236, Notes on the Flora of Ontario, I., 236; pubera, 126 Erechtites hieracifolia, 300 Erianthus giganteus, 16 Ericaceae, 298 Erigeron, 43; canadensis, 300; com- positus, var. discoideus, 238, 239, forma trifidus, 238, f. trifidus, 238, var. glabratus, 239, var. trifidus, 238, 239; Gormani, 239; pedatus, 239; pusillus, 300; stri- gosus, 239, 300, var. discoideus, 239, 240, var. eligulatus, 240; trifidus, 238, 239 Eriogonum tomentosum, 199, 200 Erskine, David, Floerkea proser- pinacoides in Nova Scotia, 283 Erythrotrichia carnea, 266; cerami- cola, 266; rhizoidea, 266 Eudesme virescens, 261 Eudorina elegans, 277 Euglena sp., 277; agilis, 277; fusca, 277; gracilis, 277; mutabilis, 277; pisciformis, 277; spirogyra, 277; viridis, 277 Euglenophyceae, 272, 277 Euloxus spinosus, 123 Eupatorieae and Astereae, Notes on the Compositae of the North- eastern United States, VI. Ci- chorieae, 28 Eupatorium 227; altissimum, 190; capillifolium, 227; compositum, 227; cordatum, 227; cordigerum, 28; foeniculoides, 227; fusco- rubrum, 191, 227; hyssopifolium, 226, var. calcaratum, 227, var. linearifolium, 226, 227; incarna- tum, 227; lanceolatum, 29; lin- earifolium, 226, 227; Marrubium, 227; pilosum, 225, 226, pl. 1114; pubescens, 28; ramosum, 190; ro- tundifolium, 28, var. lanceolatum, 28, 29, var. Saundersii, 29; rubrum, 227; scabridum, 28; serotinum, 227; teucrifolium, 226; tortifolium, 226. 227; verbenae- 314 Rhodora folium, 28, 29, 226, var. Saundersii, 28, 29, verbenae- folium Saundersii, 29 Euphorbia, 63, from Oklahoma, A New Species of, 63; Two Forms in, 148; subgen. Chamaesyce, 63; carunculata, 63, 64; cupho- sperma, 148; dentata, f. cupho- sperma, 148, var. cuphosperma, 148; gracilis, 148; Ipecacuanhae, 148, f. linearis, 148; polygoni- folia, 297; supina, 297 Euphorbiaceae, 297 European Willow-herb, 178 Eustachys floridana, 122; glauca, 122 Euthamia galetorum, 215; tenui- folia, 300 Exuviaella lima, 276 Fagaceae, 295 Fagus ferruginea, 230; grandifolia, var. caroliniana, f. mollis, 230 False tobacco, 282 Fassett, Norman C., The Proposed Changes in Article 58, Interna- tional Rules of Botanical Nomen- clature, 249 Faux-tabac, 282; des Marquises, 282 Fernald, M. L., A Model Flora of Nova Scotia (Review), 211; A Nova Scotian Dwarf Shadbush, 49; A prostrate Rorippa, 35; A small Gathering of Blackberries, 73, pls. 1093-1096; A Virginian Peltandra, 56; Another aggressive Hawkweed, 15; The Confused Bases of the Name Pinus palus- tris, 241; Erigeron compositus, var. discoideus, forma trifidus, 238; Rorippa: a Correction, 100; Scirpus verecundus, nom. nov., 284; Some minor Forms of Rosa, 145; Studies of American Types in British Herbaria, 149-176, 181-208, 217-233, pls. 1097-1117; The Name of Taraxacum offici- nale, 216; The new Washington- Baltimore Checklist (Review), 15; Two Forms in Euphorbia, 148 Ferns, 135 Festuca elatior, 301; ovina, 293; rubra, 293 Few of Philip Miller's Species, A, 181-190; Species of Later Au- thors, A, 220—233 Ficus officinalis, 132; perforata, 132 Fischerella ambigua, 68 [DECEMBER Flagellates, 273, 275, 276 Flint, Joanne, Another New Hamp- shire Station for Subularia, 72 Floerkea proserpinacoides, 283, 284, in Nova Scotia, 283 Flora of Nova Scotia (Review), A Model, 211; of Ontario. I. Epi- pactis Helleborine, Notes on the, 236; of Penikese, Seventy-four Years after, The, I. Penikese Island Marine Algae, 253-269, II. Fresh and Brackish Water Algae of Penikese Island, 269- 279, III. Penikese Island Fungi 285-288, IV. Flora of Penikese Island, 288-304; of Quebec, Six Additions to the Adventitious, 176 Florida, Pseudo-elephantopus spi- catus, а Weed of potential Im- portance in, 280 Foeniculum vulgare, 119 Fomes sp., 287 Form of Podophyllum peltatum, Red-fruited, 18 Forms of Cornus canadensis in Minnesota, 304; from Oklahoma, Distributional Notes and some minor, 91; in Euphorbia, Two, 148; of Rosa, Some minor, 145 Fosliella Lejolisii, 266 Fragaria, 42; vesca, 302; virginiana, 297 Frasera, 198, 199 Fraxinus americana, 60, 168, 169, 186, 188, var. caroliniana, 188, var. triptera, 188; caroliniana, 168, 186-188, f. pubescens, 188, var. B. cubensis, 189, var. cuben- sis, 189, 190, f. lasiophylla, 189, 190; Caroliniana, latiore fructu, 186; caroliniana, var. oblanceo- lata, 188, f. hypomalaca, 189, var. platicarpa, 188, var. pubes- cens, 188, var. Rehderiana, 188; cubensis, 189; excelsior, 188, 214; hybrida, 188, 189; nigra, subsp. caroliniana, 188; Nuttallii, 188; pauciflora, 188, 189; pennsylvan- ica, 187; platicarpa, 187, 188, var. floridana, 188, y. oblanceolata, 188, 8. pubescens, 188; pubescens, 187; Rehderiana, 188; triptera, 188; viridis, var. Berlandierana, 189, var. Berlandieriana, 189 Fresh and Brackish Water Algae of Penikese Island, 269 Freshwater Algae from New Bruns- wick, A List of, 67 Fruit Key to Northeastern Trees 1948] Index to Volume 50 315 (Reply to a Review by M. L. Fernald), 36 Fucus, 257, 260, 263, 264; evanes- cens, 261; nodosus, 262; spiralis, 257, 260, 262; vesiculosus, 260, 262, 265, var. spiralis, 262 Fungi, 286; Penikese Island, 285 Fungi Imperfecti, 287 Furcellaria fastigiata, 266 Fusarium sp., 288 Galaxaura, 135 Galium Claytoni, 299; labradori- cum, 212; texense, 93, 98; tinc- torium, 299; trifidum, 299 Gathering of Blackberries, A small, 73, pls. 1093-1096 Gelidium corneum, 266 Generic Status of Triodanis and Specularia, 38 Georgia Pine, 182 Geraniaceae, 302; carolinianum, 302 Gerardia flava, 122; grandiflora, 122; integrifolia, 122; pectinata, 122; pedicularia, 122; quercifolia, 122; Skinneriana, 106, 123 Geum radiatum, var. Peckii, 240 Glaucocystis nostochinearum, 274 Gleason, H. A., Blephilia ciliata (L ) Benth., 53 Glecho.na hederacea, 299 Glenodinium cinctum, 276 Gloeocapsa alpicola, 68; mem- branina, 68; turgida, 69 Gloeocystis ampla, 274; confluens, Gnaphalium decurrens, 215; Ma- counii, 215; obtusifolium, 300; polycephalum, 300; uliginosum, 303 Gomontia polyrhiza, 259 Gongrosira fastigiata, 274 Gramineae, 16, 107, 110, 111, 122, 293, 301; Tribe Hordeae, 89 Grass, Dog’s-tail, 177 Grasses, 288 Gray Herbarium of Harvard Uni- versity —No. CLXVII, Contri- butions from the, 149-176, 181- 208, 217-233, pls. 1097-1117 Green algae, 257, 271 Griffithsia Bornetiana, 266; coral- lina, 266; globulifera, 266 Grinnellia americana, 266 Groh, Herbert, Vicia sepium L. in Canada, 144 Gymnadenia integra, 123 Gymnadeniopsis integra, 123 Gymnodinium palustre, 276; punc- _ tatum, 276; simplex, 276 Gymnosperms, 135 Gypsophila panieulata, 302 Habeeb, Herbert, A List of Fresh- water Algae from New Bruns- wick, 67; Campylium Halleri in New Brunswick, 52 Habenaria Hookeri, 125; integra, 123; nivea, 125; psycodes, 125; quinqueseta, 125 Haematococcus, 272; pluvialis, 277 Haloragidaceae, 298 Harbin lespedeza, 25 Harlow, Wm. M., Fruit Key to Northeastern Trees (Reply to a Review by M. L. Fernald), 36 Harvard University—No: CLXVII, Contributions from the Gray Herbarium of, 149-176, 181-208, 217—233, pls. 1097-1117 Hawkweed, Another aggressive, 15 Hedysarum acuminatum, 123; glu- tinosum, 123; grandiflorum, 203; striatum, 21 Helianthus annuus, 303; decapeta- Ius, 190; ramosissimus, 190; tra- chelifolius, 190 Heliotropium convolvulaceum, 64 Hendersonia, 287; sp., 288 Heterocodon, 43 Heteromastix angulata, 277 Heteronema acus, 277 Heterothrix quadrata, 274 Heterotoma, 48 Hexamitus inflatus, 278 Hickoria pecan, 248 Hickory, bitternut, 61; in south- eastern Vermont, А Hybrid be- tween Shagbark and Bitternut, 60 Hieracium, 213; aurantiacum, 19; Auricula, 213; Pilosella, var. niveum, 15 Hildenbrandia, 263; Prototypus, 266 Hippuris, 210; and Hottonia in New Hampshire, Podostemum, 209; vulgaria, 210 Hodgdon, A. R., Another New Hampshire Station for Subularia, 72; Podostemum, Hippuris and Hottonia in New Hampshire, 209 Holeus lanatus, 287, 293 Holly, 65 Honeysuckle, Japanese, 66 Hordeum, 90; jubatum, 90 Hormotrichum Younganum, 259 Hottonia, 210, 211; in New Hamp- 316 Rhodora shire, Podostemum, Hippuris and, 209; inflata, 210 Howellia, 48 Hybrid between Shagbark and Bit- ternut Hickory in Southeastern Vermont, A, 60 Hydranthelium crenatum, 124; egense, 124 Hydrocoleum glutinosum, 256; ho- moeotrichum, 69; lyngbyaceum, 256 Hyella caespitosa, 256 Hygrohypnum palustre, 52 Hymenocallis caroliniana, 194; coro- naria, 194; crassifolia, 194 Hypericaceae, 168, 298 Hypericum acutifolium, 206, 208, pl. 1111; angulosum, 205-208, pl. 1109; calycinum, 167; canadense, 205, 208; densiflorum, 168; den- ticulatum, 205-208, var. acuti- folium, 206-208, pl. 1111; dentic- ulatum ovalifolium, 206, var. ovalifolium, 206, 208, var. rec- ognitum, 207, 208, pl. 1110, var. typicum, 207, pl. 1109; Drum- mondii, 207; floribus semitri- gynis, etc., 167; galeoides, 112; galioides, 112; Harperi, 207, 208, pl 1111; hedyotifolium, 208; muticum, 124; mutilum, 124, 205, 298; perforatum, 298; pilosum, 205; prolifieum, 167, 168, pl. 1101; quinquenervium, 205; seto- sum, 205; spathulatum, 168, pl. 1101; virgatum, 206, 208, pl. 1111, var. acutifolium, 208; vir- gatum ovalifolium, 206; var. ovalifolium, 208 Hypnum fastigiatum, 52 Hypoxylon rubiginosum, 288 Hysterographium Mori, 287 Hystrix patula, 88-90 Ilea fascia, 262, var. caespitosa, 262 Ilysanthes inaequalis, 299 Impatiens biflora, 203, 204, f. albi- ora, 205, f. citrina, 205, f. im- maculata, 205, f. Peasei, 205, f. platymeris, 205; capensis, 203— 205, pl. 1108, f. albiflora, 206, f. citrina, 205, f. immaculata, 205, f. Peasei, 205, f. platy- meris, 205; fulva, 204, f. albi- flora, 205; Noli-tangere, 204 ена, A prostrate Rorippa in the, 13 International Rules of Botanical [DECEMBER Nomenclature, The Proposed Changes in Article 58, 249 Tridaceae, 295, 301 Iris germanica, 295; versicolor, 295 Isactis plana, 256 Isely, Duane, Lespedeza striata and L. stipulacea, 21, pls. 1091, 1092 Isnardia palustris, 298 Isoglossa, 225; ciliata, 225; ovata, 225 Isolepis, 129; leptalea, 129 Isopyrum, 199; biternatum, 199 Iva oraria, 303 Jacobinia carnea, 122; magnifica, 122 Tapana beetle, 66; Clover, 22, 24; oneysuckle, 66 Juglans nigra oblonga, 147, in Missouri, 147, nigra, f. oblonga, 147, var. stabler, 147 Juncaceae, 294, 301 Juncus acuminatus, 294; articula- tus, 301; bufonius, 291, 294; debilis, 301; dichotomus, 294; effusus, var. costulatus, 294; Gerardi, 294; Greenei, 301; nodo- sus, 155; pelocarpus, 301; scirpoi- des, 155; tenuis, 294 Juniperus Ashei, 92; mexicana, 92 Justicia, 224; americana, 123, 178; carnea, 122; humilis, 224, 225; ovata, 224, 225; pedunculosa, 123 Kalmia angustifolia, 298 Kentrosphaera facciolaae, 274 Key to Northeastern Trees (Reply to a Review by M. L. Fernald), Fruit, 36 Kobe lespedeza, 24, 27 mE capitata, 222; flexuosa, 220- 23 Korean lespedeza, 22, 25 Krochmal, Stanley B., Podoste- mum, Hippuris and Hottonia in New Hampshire, 209 Kucyniak, James, Six Additions to the Adventitious Flora of Quebec, 176 Kuhnia eupatorioides, 227 Kummerowia, 22; striata, 22 Kylinia compacta, 266 Labiatae, 54, 299, 303 Labyrinthula macrocystis, 286 Labyrinthulales, 286 Lactuca, 30-32; canadensis, 30; floridana, 30, 31, var. floridana, 32, var. villosa, 31; pulchella, 30; 1948] Index to Volume 50 Olt Serriola, 30; spicata, 30; villosa, 30, 31 Lady’s Slipper, White, 231 Lakela, Olga, A prostrate Rorippa in the Interior, 132; Forms of Cornus canadensis in Minnesota, 304; Notes on Minnesota Plant- life, 19 Laminaria, 261; Agardhii, 260, 262; ascia, 262; digitata, 261, 262, 264; longicornis, 262; longicruris, 262; platymeris, 262; saccharina, 262 Lannaea nudicaulis, 176 Larch, American, 118 Larix, 37; americana, 118; “Атпегі- cana”, 106; laricina, 118 Lasinia cinerea, 201; fulva, 201, 202 Lathesia tuberiformis, 262 Lathyrus, 138; japonicus, var. gla- ber, 297; maritimus, 297 Leathesia difformis, 262 Lecanora varia, 292 Leguminosae, 297, 302 Leitneria, 125; floridana, 125 Leitneriaceae, 125 Leontodon autumnalis, var. praten- sis, 303; Taraxacum, 216; vul- garis, 216 Leonurus Cardiaca, 299 Lepidium virginicum, 296 Lepocinclis fusiformis, 277; ovum, 277 Leptilon canadense, 300; pusillum, Leptochloa dubia, 93 Leptodictyum trichopodium, var. Kochii, 52 Lespedeza, 21-23; Common, 24, 25, 27; Harbin, 25; Kobe, 24, 27; Korean, 22, 25 Lespedeza Steuvei, 124; stipulacea, 21-27, pls. 1091, 1092, L. striata and, 21, pls. 1091, 1092; striata, 21-27, pls. 1091, 1092, and L. stipulacea, 21, pls. 1091, 1092; Stuevei, 124 Lespedezas, 21, 23 Lesquerella, 95; ovalifolia, var. alba, 95 Leucothoe axillaris, 218; Catesbaei, 218; editorum, 218 Liagora, 135 Lichens, 288, 290, 291 Ligusticum canadense, 217; scothi- cum, 298; vulgare, 298 Liliaceae, 294, 301 Lilio-Narcissus Polianthus, etc., 194 Lilium tigrinum, 301 Limosella subulata, 299 Linaria canadensis, 299; dalmatica, 214; vulgaris, 303 Lindernia anagallidea, 299 Linnaean Species, Some, 154-176 Linum floridanum, 17; intercursum, 17 Liparis Loeselii, 19 Liriodendron, 36 List of Freshwater Algae from New Brunswick, A, 67 Listera banksiana, 231, 232, pl. 1116; caurina, 232, 233, pl. 1116; convallarioides, 232, 233; Esch- scholziana, 232, pl. 1117 Lithophyllum macrocarpum, 2606; pustulatum, 266, 267 Lithospermum arvense, 124; lati- folium, 124; lutescens, 124 Lithothamnium Lenormandi, 266; polymorphum, 266 Littorina, 260 Lobelia, 48, 192; Douglassii, 107, 124; Erynus, 107; glandulosa, 192, 193 Loblolly Pine, 183, 184 Lobomonas rostrata, 277 Lomentaria Baileyana, 266; un- cinata, 266 Long-leaf Pine, 182-186 Longleaf Pine, 241—247 Lonicera japonica, 65, 300 Lophiola americana, 125; aurea, 125 Loiseleuria procumbens, 126 Lotus arbor virginiana, ete., 155 Ludwigia natans, var. rotundata, 97; palustris, var. americana, 298 Luzula luzuloides, 213 Lychnis alba, 296 Lycopodium, 17; apodum, 17 Lycopus americanus, 303; uniflorus, 299 Lygodesmia rostrata, 64 Lyngbya aestuarii, 256, 275; Allor- gel, 275; confervoides, 275; epi- phytica, 275; lutea, 256, 260; ochracea, 69 Lyonia, 128 Lysimachia asperifolia, 125; asper- ulaefolia, 125; hibrida, 112; hy- brida, 112; longifolia, 17; quadri- flora, 17 Lysipomia, 48 Magnolia, 139; glauca, 248; vir- giniana, 248 Malva neglecta, 303; rotundifolia, 303 Malvaceae, 303 318 Rhodora Manning, Wayne E., A Hybrid be- tween Shagbark and Bitternut Hickory in Southeastern Ver- mont, 60 Maple, Sugar, 248 Marine Algae, Penikese Island, 253 Marsh Pine, 184 Massachusetts, Asplenium monta- num in south-central, 20; Pota- mogeton bicupulatus in, 304 Masticocoleus testarum, 256 Mastigamoeba longifilum, 278 MeVaugh, Rogers, Generic Status of Triodanis and Specularia, 38 Melanthium, 193; hybridum, 193; latifolium, 193 Melilotus indica, 214; parviflora, 214 Meliosa, 66 Melobesia Lejolisii, 266; pustulata, 267 Menoidium gracile, 272, 277; in- curvum, 277; tortuosum, 277 Mentha arvensis, 299; gentilis, 214 Meringosphaera Henseni, var. brevi- spina, 274, 279, pl. 1118 Merismopedia tenuissima, 275 Merrill, E. D., Unlisted new Names in Alphonso Wood’s Botanical Publications, 101 Mesogloia divaricata, 262 Michauxia, 41 Microcodon, 41 Microcoleus acutissimus, 69; palu- dosus, 69; vaginatus, 69 Microcystis flos-aquae, 275; para- sitica, 275 Microseris, 33-35; § Nothocalais, 34; cuspidata, 34, 35; Forsteri, 34; nigrescens, 33, 34; troximoides, 33, 34 Microspora quadrata, 274; stagno- rum, 69; Willeana, 274; Witt- rockii, 69, 274 Microthamnion Kuetzingianum, 274 Miller's Species, А Few of Philip, 181-190 Minnesota, A Study of Elymus in, 80; Forms of Cornus canadensis in, 304; Plant-life, Notes on, 19 Minor Forms from Oklahoma, Dis- tributional Notes and some, 91; Forms of Rosa, Some, 145 Missouri, Juglans nigra oblonga in, Model Flora of Nova Scotia (Re- view), A, 211 Mollugo verticillata, 296 [DEcEMBER Monarda, 54; ciliata, 53, 54; hir- suta, 54, 55 Monas sp., 278; amoebina, 278 Monosiga ovata, 278 Montia rivularis, 212 Montgomery, F. H., Notes on the Flora of Ontario. I. Epipactis Helleborine, 236 Morus alba, 295 Mougeotia, 67 Moul, Edwin T., A Dangerous Weedy Polygonum in Pennsyl- vania, 64; Flora of Penikese Island, 288 Mountain bluet, 179 Mucor sp., 286 Muhlenbergia, 16; mexicana, 16 Mulgedium acuminatum, 31; flori- danum, 30, var. y., 30 Mycosphaerella, 288; sp., 287 Myriandra spathulata, 168 Myrica caroliniensis, 295; floridana, 125 Myricaceae, 125, 295 Myrionema balticum, 262; globo- sum, 262; Leclancheri, 262 Myriophyllum humile, 304; magda- lenense, 212; pinnatum, 290, 298; scabratum, 298 Myriotrichia clavaeformis, 262 M yxobacteriales, 286 Myxococcus, 286 Myxogastrales, 286 Myxophyceae, 272, 275 Myxothallophytes, 286 Najadaceae, 293 Name of Taraxacum officinale, The, 216; Pinus palustris, 'The Con- fused Bases of the, 241 Names for two Brazilian Species, New, 132; in Alphonso Wood's Botanical Publications, Unlisted new, 101; in Populus, Two New, 233 Narcissus Daffodil, 112, 125; Pseu- do-Narcissus, 125 Nasturtium palustre, var. micro- сагрит, 100 Nectria cinnabarina, 288 Nemalion, 256; multifidum, 267 Nepeta Cataria, 299; flexuosa, 221 New Names for two Brazilian Species, 132; Names in Alphonso Wood's Botanical Publications, Unlisted, 101; Names in Populus, Two, 233; Species of Euphorbia from Oklahoma, A, 63; Washing- 1948] Index to Volume 50 319 ton-Baltimore Checklist (Review), The, 15 New Brunswick, A List of Fresh- water Algae from, 67; Campylium Halleri in, 52 New Hampshire Station for Subu- laria, Another, 72 Nitschkia Fuckelii, 287 Nomenclature, The Proposed Changes in Article 58, Interna- tional Rules of Botanical, 249 Northeastern Trees (Reply to a Re- view by M. L. Fernald), Fruit Key to, 36; United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae, and As- tereae, Notes on the Compositae of the, 28 Nostoe commune, 69; microscopi- cum, 69; Muscorum, 69; rivulare, 275 Notes and some minor Forms from Oklahoma, Distributional, 91; on Minnesota Plant-life, 19; on the Compositae of the Northeastern United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae, and Astereae, 28; on the Flora of Ontario. I. Epi- pactis Helleborine, 236 Nothocalais, 33, 34 Notosolenus apocamptus, 277; or- bicularis, 277 Nova Scotia, Floerkea proserpina- coides in, 283; (Review), A Model Flora of, 211 Nova Scotian Dwarf Shadbush, A, 49 Nullipora polyphyllamea, 267 Nuphar *advenum", 17 Nymphaea flava, 111 Nyssa aquatica, 248; uniflora, 248 Oak, 38 Obeliseotheca integrifolia, radio aureo, etc., ?72 Ochlochaete lentiformis, 259 Ochromonas sp., 276 Odontia spathulata, 287 Oedogonium, 67, 270, 271; crassius- culum, var. idioandrosporum, 274 Oenanthe, 126 Oenothera biennis, 298; grandi- flora, 303; latifolia, 64; Spachi- ana, 97 Oicomonas socialis, 278; termo, 278 Oidium candicans, 288 Oklahoma, A New Species of Eu- phorbia from, 63; Distributional Notes and some minor Forms from, 91; Sida in, 99 Old-field Pine, 183, 185 Oleaceae, 298 Olisthodiscus luteus, 272, 276 Onagraceae, 298, 303 Onoclea sensibilis, 19 Ontario. I. Epipactis Helleborine, Notes on the Flora of, 236 Oocystis solitaria, 69 Ophiocytium cochleare, 275; majus, 275; undulatum, 275, 279, pl. 1118 Ophioglossum vulgatum, var. pseu- dopodum, 19 Ophrys banksiana, 232; pubera, 126 Oplismenus hispidus, 106 Orange, 38 Orbilia sp., 287; curvatispora, 287 Orchidaceae, 152 Orchis flava, 123; Hookeri, 125; integra, 123; Michauxii, 125; nigra, 123, 125; nivea, 123, 125; physcodes, 125; psycodes, 125 Origanum flexuosum, 220-222, pl. 1112 Osageorange, 38 Oscillatoria acutissima, 275; am- phibia, 275, 276; articulata, 276; brevis, 275; formosa, 69; gemi- nata, 276; margaritifera, 256, 276; maritima, 276; nigro-viridis, 276; ornata, 275; prolifica, 275; pseudogeminata, 275; tenuis, 69, 275, 276, var. natans, 69 Oscillatoriaceae, 272 Oxalidaceae, 297 Oxalis, 191; stricta, 290, 297; vio- lacea, 224, pl. 1113 Oxypolis rigidior, 126 Oxytria crocea, 128 Pachystima, 111 Palmella mucosa, 274 Pancratium carolinianum, 193, 194; coronarium, 193, 194; mariti- mum, 194 Panicum, 46; Hallii, 92, 93; impli- catum, 293; meridionale, 301; oricola, 293; virgatum, 92, 287, 288, 294 Papaver Rheas, 112, 125; Rhoeas, 112, 125 Parlin, John Crawford [obituary], 130 Parmelia caperata, 292; sulcata, 292 Parthenocissus quinquefolia, 298; tricuspidata, 298 Paspalum ciliatifolium, var. Muhl- enbergii, 294; fluitans, 16; repens, 16 320 Rhodora Pastinaca, 126 Pecan, 248 Pediastrum, 271; Boryanum, 274; tetras, 274 Pelargonium, 103 Pellaea, 138; atropurpurea, 154; glabella, 154; Wrightiana, 93 Pellicularia pruinata, 287, 288 Peltandra, 56, 58, 59, A Virginian, 56; alba, 58, 59, 125; glauca, 58, 59, 101, 125, 126; hastata, 57; latifolia, 57; luteospadix, 58, 59; sagittaefolia, 58, 59; sagitti- folia, 58, 59, 125; Tharpii, 56; undulata, 59; virginica, 56—59, f. hastifolia, 56; Walteri, 57 Peltidea ulorrhiza, var. praetexta, 252 Peltigera canina, var. rufescens, f. innovans, 252; rufescens, f. inno- vans, 252 Penicillium sp., 288 Penikese Island, Flora of, 288; Fresh and Brackish Water Algae of, 269; Marine Algae, 253; Fungi, 285 Penikese, Seventy-four Years After, The Flora of, I. Penikese Island Marine Algae, 253-269, П. Fresh and Brackish Water Algae of Penikese Island, 269-279, III. Penikese Island Fungi, 285-288, IV. Flora of Penikese Island, 288-304 Peniophora cinerea, 287; Sambuci, 287; tenuis, 287 Pennsylvania, A Dangerous Weedy Polygonum in, 64 Peranema trichophorum, 277 Peridinium bipes, 276 Petalomonas carinata, 277; medio- canellata, 277 Petalonia fascia, 262, var. caespi- tosa, 262 Petromarula, 40 Peucedanum rigidum, 126 Phacus brevicauda, 277; longicau- da, 277; parvula, 277; pleuronec- tes 277; pyrum, 277; triqueter, 7 Phaeophyta, 260 Phalangium croceum, 128 Pharmacosycea perforata, 132 Phleum pratense, 294 Phlox divaricata, 126, var. Laphamii, 126; Laphamii, 112, 126; pilosa, 250, f. albiflora, 250, var. fulgida, 250 Phormidium autumnale, 69; favo- [DECEMBER sum, 69; incrustatum, 70; lamino- sum, 275; papyraceum, 70, 256; Setchellianum, 70; tenue, 70, 275; uncinatum, 70 Phycodrys rubens, 266, 267 Phycomycetes, 286 Phyllophora Brodiaei, 264, 267; membranifolia, 264, 267 Phymatolithon polymorphum, 266, 267 Physcia millegrana, 292 Physostegia virginiana, 112; vir- ginianii, 112 Phyteuma, 40, 47 Phytolacca americana, 296 Phytolaccaceae, 296 Picea, 36, 37 Pignut, 60, 62; sweet, 60, 62 Pilea pumila, 212 Pilobolus sp., 287 Pinaceae, 37, 293 Pineapple, 38 Pine, Georgia, 182; Loblolly, 183, 184; Long-leaf, 182-186; Long- leaf, 241-247; Marsh, 184; Old- field, 183, 185; Pitch, 184; Pond, 183, 185; Savanna, 183; Slash, 183, 184, 247; Swamp, 182, 183, 185, 243; Three-leaved Marsh American, 181 Pines, 37, 181 Pinguicula, 191, 224; caerulea, 223, 224, pl. 1113; elatior, 224; lutea, 224, pl. 1113 Pinus, 37; Americana palustris, еїс., 181, 182, 242, 243; australis, 182, 186, 241-243, 246, 247; Banksi- ana, 248; cubensis, 183-186; di- varicata, 248; echinata, 181; El- liottii, 183, 184; heterophylla, 183, 184; lutea, 247; microcarpa, 118; montezumae, 244; occiden- talis, 244; palustris, 181—186, 241— 247, 249, The Confused Bases of the Name, 241; patula, 245; pen- dula, 118; rigida, 181, 182; sero- tina, 183, 185; sylvestris, 293; Taeda, 181—186, 242, 245, 240, var. heterophylla, 183 Pitch Pine, 184 Plant-life, Notes on Minnesota, 19 Plantaginaceae, 299, 303 Plantago halophila, 215; lanceolata, 288, 299; major, 299, var. inter- media, 303, var. scopulorum, 215 Platanthera integra, 123 Platycodon, 41 Platymonas subcordiformis, 259 1948] Index to Volume 50 321 Platypetalum dubium, 9; purpur- ascens, 9, 10 Plectonema calothricoides, 256; nor- vegicum, 256, 257; Nostocorum, 70; purpureum, 70; terebrans, 256, 257 Pleonosporium Borreri, 264, 267 Pleurococcus membraninus, 68; ru- fescens, 68 Pleuromonas jaculans, 278 Pleurostachys gracilis, 132 Plumaria elegans, 267; sericea, 267, 268 Poa annua, 301; pratensis, 294 Podalyria, 200; villosa, 200 Podanthum, 47 Podophyllum peltatum, Red-fruited Form of, 18; Emodi, 18; peltatum, 18, f. Deamii, 18 Podostemum, 209, 210; Hippuris and Hottonia in New Hampshire, 209; ceratophyllum, 209 Pogonatum pensilvanicum, 292 Poinsettia cuphosperma, 148 Polycarpon uniflorum, 194 Polygala, 166; subg. Sexilia, 166; cruciata, 163-166, pl. 1099, b. alba, 167, var. aquilonia, 163- 166, pl. 1100, f. alba, 167, var. euspidata, 164, var. ramosior, 164; cuspidata, 163, 164; mis- surica, 166; ramosior, 164; ver- ticillata, 166, var. sphenostachya, 166 Polygonaceae, 295, 302 Polygonum, 64-66, 207, 213, 290; in Pennsylvania, А Dangerous Weedy, 64; '"Echinocaulon group", 65; acadiense, 212; acre, 295; aviculare, 302; Convolvulus, 302; dumetorum, 112; dumitorum, 112; exertum, 213; exsertum, 213; glaucum, 213; maritimum, 213; oxyspermum, 212; perfoliatum, 65, 66; Persicaria, 302; puncta- tum, 290, 295, 299; Каі, 212, 213; ramosissimum, 213 Polvides rotundus, 266, 267 Polypodium virginianum, 16; vul- gare, 16 Polyporus sp., 287 Polysiphonia affinis, 267; atroru- bescens, 267; elongata, 267; fas- tigiata, 267; fibrillosa, 267; flexi- caulis, 267 ; formosa, 267; Harveyi, 267; lanosa, 260, 267; nigra, 267; nigrescens, 267, var. Durkeei, 267, var. fucoides, 267; novae- angliae, 263, 267; Olneyi, 267; subtilissima, 267; urceolata, 267, var. formosa, 267, var. patens, 267, var. roseola, 267; variegata, 267; violacea, 267, var. flexi- caulis, 267 Polytoma uvella, 277 - Polytrichum commune, 292; juni- perinum, 292; piliferum, 292 Pond Pine, 183, 185 Ponthieva, 191; glandulosa, 126 Popillia japonica, 66 Populus, 236; Two New Names in, 233; § Aegirus, 235; § Tacama- hacca, 235; alba, 295; balsami- fera, 233-235, var. candicans, 234, 236, var. Fernaldiana, 234, 235, var. Michauxii, 233, 234, X deltoides, var. missouriensis, 235; candicans, 233-235; deltoides, 295, var. missouriensis, 235, f. pilosa, 235; X gileadensis, 235, 236; Michauxi, 233, 234; ontari- ensis, 236; Tacamahacca, 236, var. candicans, 233, 234, 236, var. Michauxii, 233, 234 Poria sp., 287 Porphyra laciniata, 267; leucosticta, 208; umbilicalis, 267, 268; vul- garis, 268 Portulaca oleracea, 302 Portulacaceae, 302 Potamogeton, 304; alpinus, var. tenuifolius, 126; bicupulatus, 304, in Massachusetts, 304; filiformis, var. Macounii, 212; obrutus, 106, 126; panormitanus, var. major, 154, var. minor, 154; pusillus, 154, var. minor, 164; tenuifolius, 126 Potentilla, 42; argentea, 297; cana- densis, 302; norvegica, var. hir- suta, 302; pacifica, 297; pumila, 302 Poteriodendron petiolatum, 278 Prasiola stipitata, 257, 259 Prenanthes, 29, 32; racemosa, 29, 30, subsp. multiflora, 30, subsp. racemosa, 30 Primulaceae, 298 Proposed Changes in Article 58, International Rules of Botanical Nomenclature, The, 249 Prostrate Rorippa, А, 35; in the Interior, A, 132 Protococcus membraninus, 68; ru- fescens, 68; viridis, 70, 274 Protoderma marinum, 259; viride, 274 Protosiphon botryoides, 70 322 Rhodora Protozoa, 278 Prunella, 190; canadensis, 190; caroliniana, 190; nova-anglia, 190; vulgaris, 190, var. lanceolata, 190 Prunus serotina, 297 Prymnesium parvum, 272, 276 Psalliota arvensis, 287 Psedera quinquefolia, 298 Pseudo-Elephantopus, 280; spicatus, 280-283, а Weed of Potential Importance in Florida, 280 uc elephantopus, 280; spicatus, 80 Pteridophyta, 16, 117 Pteridophytes, 288, 291, 292, 301 Pteris atropurpurea, 154 Pterospora andromedea, 212 Ptilota elegans, 268 Publications, Unlisted new Names in Alphonso Wood’s Botanical, 101 Puccinia coronata, 287; rubigo-vera agropyri, 287 Punctaria, 256; latifolia, 262; plant- aginea, 262; tenuissima, 262 Руспапіћетит $ Brachystemum, 221, 222; $ Tullia, 220, 221; aristatum, 221, var. hyssopifoli- um, 222; flexuosum, 221-223; hyssopifolium, 220-222; lanceo- latum, 222; leptodon, 223; lini- folium, 220-223; pilosum, 8. leptodon, 223; setosum, 221; tenuifolium, 222, 223; Torrei, var. leptodon, 223 Pylaiella litoralis, 261, 262 Pyramidomonas sp., 277 Pyrenomycetes, 285 Pyrola asarifolia, 212, 213, var. incarnata, 212, 213 Quebec, Six Additions to the Ad- ventitious Flora of, 176 Quercus rubra, 295 Radiosphaera Nemiahi, 275, 279, pl. 1118; sol, 279 Ralfsia, 263; verrucosa, 260, 262 Ranunculaceae, 296, 302 Ranunculus acris, 296; Cymbalaria, 296; delphinofolius, 302; flabel- laris, 302; Flammula, var. rep- tans, 240 Raphanus Raphanistrum, 296; sati- vus, 302 Raymond, Marcel, Red-fruited Form of Podophyllum peltatum, 18; Six Additions to the Adventitious Flora of Quebec, 176 [DECEMBER Razoumofskya pusilla, 120 Red algae, 263 Red-fruited Form of Podophyllum peltatum, 18 (Reply to a Review by M. L. Fer- nald), Fruit Key to Northeastern 'Trees, 36 Reverchonia arenaria, 64 (Review), A Model Flora of Nova Scotia, 211; The new Washing- ton-Baltimore Checklist, 15 Rheum Rhaponticum, 295 Rhizoclonium Kerneri, 260 Rhizopus sp., 287 Rhododendron procumbens, 103, 126 Rhododermis Georgii, 268 Rhodomela subfusca, 268 Rhodomonas lens, 276 Rhodophyta, 263 Rhodymenia palmata, 264, 268 Rhus copallina, var. latifolia, 297; radicans, 289, 297; typhina, 297; venenata, 248; Vernix, 248 Rhynchospora gracilis, 132; Hun- newellii, 132 Rhytiglossa ciliata, 225; ovata, 225 Rivularia atra, 256, 257 Rorippa, 132; a Correction, 100; a prostrate, 35; in the Interior, A prostrate, 132; islandica, 100, f. microcarpa, 100, var. Fernaldi- ana, 100, f. reptabunda, 132, var. microcarpa, 100, f. reptabunda, 35, 100, 132; palustris, 8, micro- carpa, 100 Rosa, 145; Some minor Forms of, 145; blanda, 147, f. alba, 146, var. alba, 146; carolina, 145, 146, f. glandulosa, 145; humilis, 146; johannensis, 147; nanella, 145; palustris, 302; parviflora, var. glandulosa, 146, var. 8. glandu- losa, 145; Rousseauiorum, 146; rugosa, 297; serrulata, 146, var. rotundifolia, 146; setigera, f. in- ermis, 145, var. serena, 145, var. tomentosa, 145, f. serena, 145; virginiana, 145, f. nanella, 145; Williamsii, 147 Rosaceae, 297, 302 Rosellinia subiculata, 287 Rouleau, Ernest, Two New Names in Populus, 233 Round-leaved Sida, 99 Rubiaceae, 16, 299 Rubus, 65, 73; subg. Eubatus, 73; $ Flagellares, 75, 77-79; $ Setosi, 77; alius, 80; alter, 77; alumnus, 1948] Index to Volume 50 323 214; amicalis, 214; arenicola, 214; Baileyanus, 77, 79; canadensis, var. pergratus, 302, var. roribac- cus, 76; cordifrons, 79, f. pleni- florus, 80; depavitus, 80; eflagel- laris, 75; Enslenii, 77, 79; felix, 75; flagellaris, 74, 75, 297; frondosus, 297; glandicaulis, 214; Grimesii, 75, 79; harmonicus, 77; hispidus, 77, 214, var. obovalis, 77; imperiorum, 75, 78, 79, pls. 1095, 1096; jactus, 74; laciniatus, 297; leviculus, 77, 78; longipes, ТТ, 78, pls. 1093, 1094; manisee- sensis, 75; multiformis, 214; ob- vius, 76; particeps, 75, 80; par- ticularis, 77, 78; pergratus, 302; procumbens, 297; pudens, 76, 214; recurvicaulis, 214; redun- dans, 80; roribaccus, 76; scam- bens, 77, 78; tardatus, 214; trifrons, 76, 77, 214, var. pudens, 76, 77, 214; univocus, 214; ver- montanus, 214; vigil, 76 Rudbeckia ampla, 171; digitata, 171; digitatis, 171; flava, 174, 175; foliis lanceolato-ovatis, etc., 172; heterophylla, 172; hirta, 172-176, 303, pl. 1102, The Type of, 172, pl. 1102; hirta annulata, 176, var. annulata, 176, var. corymbifera, 175; hirta flaves- cens, 176; hirta, f. homochroma, 176, f. pleniflora, 176, var. monti- cola, 173; hirta pulcherrima, 176, var. pulcherrima, 175; hirta rub- ra, 176, var. rubra, 175, var. sericea, 175; hirta tubuliforme, 176, var. tubuliforme, 175, var. tubuliformis, 175; hirta, f. viridi- flora, 176; laciniata, 171, var. digitata, 171, var. heterophylla, 172, var. humilis, 171, 172; lance- olata, 175; monticola, 173; ramis indivisis, ete., 172; sericea, 175; serotina, 173-175, pl. 1102, f. annulata, 176, Ё. homochroma, 176, f. pleniflora, 176, f. pul- cherrima, 175, f. rubra, 175, f. tubuliformis, 175, f. viridi- flora, 176, var. corymbifera, 175, var. lanceolata, 175, var. sericea, 175 Rules of Botanical Nomenclature, The Proposed Changes in Article 58, International, 249 Rumex Acetosella, 290, 295; altissi- mus, 106, 127; crispus, 295; maritimus, 290, var. fueginus, 295; obtusifolius, 302; persi- caroides, 213 Ruppia brachypus, 212; maritima, 212, 291, 293, var. brevirostris, 212 Rynchobodo nasuta, 278 Sabatia angularis, 98; campestris, 98; f. albiflora, 98 Sabbatia brachiata, 127; campes- tris, 127; concinna, 106, 127 Sabulina, 196; brevifolia, 196; uni- flora, 195, 197 Sagina procumbens, 296 Salicaceae, 295, 301 Salicornia ambigua, 162, 163; cauli- um ramorumque, etc., 162; euro- paea, 302; herbacea, 163, В. virginica, 162, 163; virginia, 162; virginica, 162, 163 Salvia Sclarea, 127; sclary, 127 Salix, 287, 288; alba X fragilis, 295; discolor, 301; pentandra, 295 Salpingoeca minuta, 278 Salsola Kali, 296 Samarpses triptera, 188 Sambucus canadensis, 65, 290, 300 Sanicula gregaria, 92 Saponaria, 198; officinalis, 198, pl. 1105 Sargassum, 261; Filipendula, 262, var. Montagnei, 262; Montagnei, 262; vulgare, 262 Sarracenia alata, 112, 127; Drum- mondii, 127; flava, 127; Gronovii, 127, var. alata, 127, var. Drum- mondii, 127, var. flava, 127, var. rubra, 127; purpurea, 127; rubra, 127; Sledgei, 127 Satureia Thymus Virginicus, 221; virginiana, 220, 221, 223 Savanna Pine, 183 Scenedesmus, 271; abundans, 274, var. asymmetrica, 274, var. brevi- cauda, 274, var. longicauda, 274; acutiformis, 274; arcuatus, var. capitatus, 274; armatus, 70; bi- juga, 274; braziliensis, 274; di- morphus, 70, 274; longus, 274; quadricauda, 274; serratus, 274 Schaenocaulon, 128 Schizophyta, 255 Schizothrix Friesii, 70; Heufleri, 70; lacustris, 70; Stricklandii, 70 Schoenocaulon, 128 Schoenolirion croceum, 128 Schofield, Wilfred, Floerkea pro- serpinacoides in Nova Scotia, 283 Schubert, Bernice G., Studies of 324 Rhodora American Types in British Her- baria, 149-176, 181—208, 217-233, pls. 1097-1117 Scinaia furcellata, 268 Scirpus, 129; acutus, 215; ameri- canus, 294; cernuus, 129; com- pressus, 284; distichus, 284; palu- dosus, var. atlanticus, 294; plani- folius, 284; rufus, 215; Smithii, 178; validus, 215, 294; verecund- us, nom. nov., 284; verecundus, 284 Scolopendrium pinnatifidum, 117 Scrophulariaceae, 299, 303 Scutellaria, 299; epilobiifolia, 299; galericulata, 299; rugosa, 106, 128; versicolor, 128; Wrightii, f. alba, 98 Scytonema figuratum, 70; guya- nense, 70; Hofmannii, 70; Myo- chrous, 70; ocellatum, 70 Scytosiphon attenuatus, 262; lo- mentaria, 262 Seirospora Griffithsiana, 265, 268 Selaginella apoda, 17; apus, 17 Senecio anonymus, 128; tomentosus, 128 Sentera, 128 Sericea lespedeza, 27 Setaria viridis, 301 Seutera, 128 Shadbush, A Nova Scotian Dwarf, 49 Shagbark, 62; and Bitternut Hick- ory in Southeastern Vermont, A Hybrid between, 60 Shortia galacifolia, 111 Sida, 97, 99; in Oklahoma, 99; Round-leaved, 99; hastata, 99; hederacea, 99; physocalyx, 99; procumbens, 93, 97, 99; spinosa, 97, 99 Silene, 197; Baldwynii, 198, pl. n ovata, 198; polypetala, Simplocarpus, 128 Sisymbrium altissimum, 296; hu- mile, 3; officinale, 286, var. leio- carpum, 296 Sisyrinchium angustifolium, 295, 2 atlanticum, 301; montanum, 01 Sium, 119; angustifolium, 119; floridanum, 217; lineare, 8. inter- medium, 217; rigidius, 126; suave, 21 Six Additions to the Adventitious Flora of Quebec, 176 Slash Pine, 183, 184, 247 [DECEMBER Small Gathering of Blackberries, A, 73, pls. 1093-1096 Smilacina stellata, var. crassa, 213; trifolia, 128; trifoliata, 128 Smilax auriculata, 128; Beyrichii, 128; maritima, 128; ovata, 128; rotundifolia, 301 Smith, C. Earle, Jr., Potamogeton bieupulatus in Massachusetts, 304 Smith, Lyman B., New Names for two Brazilian Species, 132 Solanaceae, 299, 303 Solanum nigrum, 299; pyenanthe- mum, 128; pyenanthum, 128; rostratum, 303; verbascifolium, 111 Solidago canadensis, 303; galetor- um, 215; graminifolia, var. Nut- tallii, 300; juncea, 304; nemoralis, 304; petiolaris, 129, var. squar- rulosa, 129; rugosa, 300; semper- virens, 300; squarrosa, 129; squar- rulosa, 129; tenuifolia, 215, 300, var. pycnocephala, 215; Virga- aurea, 45 Some Linnaean Species, 154-176; minor Forms of Rosa, 145; Species of Thomas Walter, 190— 208, 217-229 Sonchus, 32; acuminatus, 31; ar- vensis, 304; asper, 300; floridanus, 31; oleraceus, 300 Sophora villosa, 200, 201, pl. 1106 Sorghastrum nutans, 92 Spartina alterniflora, var. pilosa, 204; patens, 294 Species of Euphorbia from Okla- homa, A New, 63 Specularia, 38-41, 43-48; Generic Status of 'Triodanis and, 38; sect. Dysmicodon, 47; sect. Triodallus, 48; faleata, 45; hybrida, 39; per- foliata, 300; Speculum, var. race- mosa, 45; Speculum-Veneris, 39, 45 Spergula arvensis, 302 Spergularia leiosperma, 302; mari- na, 289; rubra, 296 Spergulastrum lanuginosum, 194 Spermatophyta, 118 Spermatophytes, 288, 291, 293, 301 Spermothamnion Turneri, 265, 268 Sphacelaria, 266; cirrhosa, 263 Sphaerella, 271; lacustris, 71 Sphaerotrichia, 258, 263; divaricata, 261—263 Sphenopholis obtusata, 94, var. 1948] Index to Volume 50 325 lobata, 93, 94, f. purpurascens, 93, var. pubescens, 94 Spirogyra, 271; sp., 70; majuscula, 274; porticalis, 71; varians, 71 Spirulina maior, 276; subsalsa, 276; subtilissima, var. brevis, 275, 279, pl. 1118; tenerrima, 275 Spongomorpha, 260; arcta, 258, 260; lanosa, 258, 260, var. unci- alis, 260 Sporobolus pyramidatus, 94 Spyridia filamentosa, 268, var. refracta, 268 Station for Subularia, Another New Hampshire, 72 Status of Triodanis and Specularia, Generic, 38 Staurastrum hexacerum, 274; mu- cronatum, 274; punctulatum, var. pygmaeum, 274 Steganosporium piriforme, 288 Steironema quadriflorum, 17 Stellaria, 195; graminea, 296; me- dia, 296; paludicola, 197, pl. 1104; uniflora, 195—197, pl. 1103 Stenophyllus capillaris, 129 Stereum fasciatum, 287 Stichococcus subtilis, 71 Stigeoclonium lubricum, 71; nanum, 274 Stillingia, 95; angustifolia, 95; line- arifolia, 95; sylvatica, 96, var. linearifolia, 95, 96, var. salicifolia, 96; texana, 95, 96, var. latifolia, 95, 96, var. typica, 96 Stipa leucotricha, 94 Streptopus roseus, 251, f. simplex, 251, var. perspectus, 251 Studies of American Types in British Herbaria, 149-176, 181- 208, 217—233, pls. 1097—1117 Study of Elymus in Minnesota, A, 80 Stylidium, 124 Stylisma tenellus, 106 Suaeda Fernaldii, 211; maritima, 302 Subularia, Another New Hamp- shire Station for, 72; aquatica, 72 Sugar Maple, 248 Swamp Pine, 182, 183, 185, 243 Symphyandra, 40-42 Symploca Museorum, 71 Symplocarpus, 128 Syringa alba, 112, 120; vulgaris, | var. alba, 129 Taenidia integerrima, 92 Tanacetum vulgare, 304 Tanoak, 38 Taraxacum, 32; officinale, 216, 304, The Name of, 216; vulgare, 216 Tellamia contorta, 260 Tennessee 76, 24, 25 Tephrosia gracilis, 129; hispidula, 129 Tetraedriella acuta, 275 Tetraédron minimum, 274 Tetraspora gelatinosa, 71 Teucrium canadense, 299, var. littorale, 299 Thladiantha dubia, 176, 179, 180 Thalictrum purpurascens, var. ceri- ferum, 240 Thelephoraceae, 285 Thermopsis caroliniana, 201, pl. 1106; villosa, 201, pl. 1106 Thoracomonas phacotoides, 277 Three-leaved, Marsh, American Pine, 181 Thymus virginicus, 222, 223 Tithymalopsis Ipecacuanhae, f. line- aris, 148 Tofieldia, 193 Torularia humilis, 3, 7 Trachelomonas hispida, 278; obo- vata, 278; punctata, 278; rugosa, 278; volvocina, 278 Trailing Arbutus, 251 Trailliella intricata, 268 Trebouxia Cladoniae, 71 Trees (Reply to a Review by M. L. Fernald), Fruit Key to North- eastern, 36 Trentepohlia aurea, 71 Trepomonas agilis, 278 Tribonema bombycinum, 71; Gay- anum, 275; minus, 275 Trichelostylis capillaris, 129; lep- talea, 129 Trichoderma lignorum, 288 Trifolium agrarium, 302; arvense, 302; hvbridum, 297, var. elegans, 214; pratense, 214, 297, var. sativum, 214; repens, 207 Triodanis, 38, 39, 41—44, 46, 47, 49; and Specularia, Generic Status of, 38; coloradoensis, 44, 46; Holz- ingeri, 48; perfoliata, 300; scabra, 4 Triodia elongata, 02, ӨЗ, 95; pilosa, 92. ӨЗ, 95 Trochisia reticularis, 274 Tropidoseyphus, 272; sp., 278; octo- costatus, 278 Troximon, 88; aurantiacum, 33, var. purpureum, 32, 33; euspida- tum, 33, 34; gracilens, 31 326 Rhodora Tryon, R. M., A Study of Elymus и in Minnesota, 80 suga, 36, 37 Tuber, 135 Tubercularia sp., 288 Two Brazilian Species, New Names for, 182; Forms in Euphorbia, 148; New Names in Populus, 233 Type of Celtis occidentalis, 155, pls. 1097, 1098; of Rudbeckia hirta, The, 172, pl. 1102 Types in British Herbaria, Studies of American, 149-176, 181—208, 217-233, pls. 1097—1117 Typha latifolia, 293 Typhaceae, 293 Ulothrix flacca, 257, 260; zonata, 71 Ulva Lactuca, 257, 260, var. latis- sima, 257, 260; latissima, 260 Ulvella, 259 Umbelliferae, 298, 303 United States, VI. Cichorieae, Eupatorieae, and Astereae, Notes on the Compositae of the North- eastern, 28 Unlisted new Names in Alphonso Wood’s Botanical Publications, 101 Urococcus Hookerianus, 71; in- signis, 71 Urospora penicilliformis, 259, 260 Urticaceae, 295 Utricularia, 46, 191; gibba, 224, 304; intermedia 8 ? Hobbinsii, 130; macrorhiza, 129, 130; Robbinsii, 129; vulgaris, 129, var. americana, 130 Vaccinium atrococcum, 298 Vallaris Ipecacuanha, var. lineari- folia, 148 Vaucheria spp., 260; geminata, 71; murina, 260; sessilis, 71; terres- tris, 71 Veratrum Woodii, 106 Verbaseum 'Thapsus, 299 Vermont, A Hybrid between Shag- bark and Bitternut Hickory in Southeastern, 60 Veronica didyma, 17; polita, 17 PUER ER ШШЕ 3710 [DECEMBER Viburnum, 170, 171; cassinoides, 169, 170; laevigatum, 169; obo- vatum, 169, 170 Vicia angustifolia, 297; Cracca, 302; sepium, 144, L. in Canada, 144; tetrasperma, 207 Vigna glabra, 130; hirsuta, 130; luteola, 130; repens, 130 Vincetoxicum scoparium, 130 Viola, 46; fimbriatula, 303 Violaceae, 303 Virginian Peltandra, A, 56 Vitaceae, 298 Wahlenbergia, sect. Edraiantha, 47 Walnut, black oblong fruited, 147 Walter, Some Species of Thomas, 190-208, 217-229 Washington-Baltimore Checklist (Review), The new, 15 Water Ash, 168 Waterfall, U. T., A New Species of Euphorbia from Oklahoma, 63; Distributional Notes and some minor Forms from Oklahoma, 91 Weatherby, C. A., Asplenium mon- tanum in south-central Massa- chusetts, 20 Weed of potential Importance in Florida, Pseudo-elephantopus spicatus, a, 280 Weedy Polygonum in Pennsyl- vania, A Dangerous, 64 White Ash, 168, 169 White Lady’s Slipper, 231 Willow-herb, European, 178 Willows, 285, 290 Wood’s Botanical Publications, Un- listed new Names in Alphonso, 101 Xanthium echinatum, 304 Xanthophyceae, 271, 274 Xanthoria parietina, 292 Xanthosoma, 59; sagittaefolium, 58; sagittifolium, 59, 125 Ximeni: а americana, 110 Xylariaceae, 135 Zizia aurea, 92 Zostera, 264; 268; marina, 286, 293